Home

UR-80 Editor

1. PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1 PAN Channel 1 Pan Left CC 72 48 000 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN Channel 2 Pan Left CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN Channel 3 Pan Left CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN Channel 4 Pan Left CC 75 4B 000 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN Channel 5 Pan Left CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN Channel 6 Pan Left CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN Channel 7 Pan Left CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN Channel 8 Pan Left CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 Channel 1 Send1 Leve CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 Channel 2 Send1 Leve CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 Channel 3 Send1 Leve CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 Channel 4 Send1 Leve CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 Channel 5 Send1 Leve CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 Channel 6 Send1 Leve CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 Channel 7 Send1 Leve CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 Channel 8 Send1 Leve CC 79 4F
2. PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 Track 8 Aux2 Send CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Level TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Track 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Track 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Track 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Track 4 Mute CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Track 5 Mute CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Track 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Track 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Track 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Track 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Track 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Track 3 Solo CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Track 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Track 5 Solo CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Track 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Track 7 Solo CC 6 06 0000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Track 8 Solo CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC Track 1 Record Arm CC
3. PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO Channel 5 Write CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO Channel 6 Write CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO Channel 7 Write CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO Channel 8 Write CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 Channel 1 Volume CC 64 40 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 2 Channel 2 Volume CC 65 41 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 3 Channel 3 Volume CC 66 42 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 4 Channel 4 Volume CC 67 43 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 5 Channel 5 Volume CC 68 44 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 6 Channel 6 Volume CC 69 45 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 7 Channel 7 Volume CC 70 46 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 8 Channel 8 Volume CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F 6 2 MASTER FADER Master Gain CC 81 51 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK GROUP 1 8 Remote Bank Ch 1 CC 97 61 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH grm TRACK GROUP 9 16 Remote Bank Ch 9 CC 98 62 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH 16 TRACK GROUP 17 24 Remote Bank Ch CC 99 63 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH 17 24 TRACK GROUP 25 32 Remote Bank Ch CC 100 64 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH 25 32 JOG DIAL TIME Time CC 96 60 127 7F 1 01 6 2 CURSOR UP Navigate Up CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN Naviga
4. MCR 8 UR 80 C1 9 16 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN S1 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S2 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE C2 9 16 Atenuadores de pista 1 8 C1 MASTER S1 MASTER SHIFT Bot n de funci n 5 UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT Bot n de funci n 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER Atenuador m ster VALUE Dial TIME S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT Bot n de funci n 3 PREV INC SHIFT Bot n de funci n 4 NEXT a AN y y Fl Bot n de funci n 1 MIXER F2 Bot n de funci n 2 INST F3 Bot n de funci n 3 PREV F4 Bot n de funci n 4 NEXT F5 Bot n de funci n 5 UNDO F6 Bot n de funci n 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT Bot n de funci n 1 MIXER F8 SHIFT Bot n de funci n 2 INST lt lt m gt SHIFT Il SHIFT lt lt gt gt 320 Grabaci n de audio En este cap tulo se explican distintos modos de conectar y utilizar la unidad UR 80 Para evitar anomal as en el funcionamiento o da os a los altavoces u otros aparatos baje siempre el volumen y apague todos los aparatos antes de realizar cualquier conexi n 4 z 7 c Uso b sico u Se pueden conectar auriculares o monitores tal como se muestra en el diagrama y supervisar la reproducci n de la aplicaci n o el sonido de los instrumentos o aparatos de audio conectados a la un
5. Botones de cursor CURSOR Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Bot n Funci n lt a Desplazarse hacia arriba A Y Desplazarse hacia abajo d d Desplazarse a la izquierda u D Desplazarse a la derecha SHIFT 4h Disminuir la pantalla verticalmente SHIFT YY Ampliar la pantalla verticalmente d Disminuir la pantalla SHIFT horizontalmente ri Ampliar la pantalla horizontalmente H SHIFT gt Botones de funci n C Bot n Funci n MIXER Abrir la ventana Console NEXT Ir a la siguiente ventana INST Abrir la ventana Synth Rack Pista de sintetizador CLOSE Cerrar la ventana PREV Ir al marcador anterior lt SET Insertar un marcador NEXT Ir al siguiente marcador LIST Abrir la ventana Marker Marcador UNDO Restablecer el estado anterior a la ltima operaci n de edici n REDO Reejecutar la ltima operaci n de edici n SAVE AS Realizar la operaci n Save As Guardar como SAVE Guardar Los nombres de bot n entre corchetes indican que debe presionar el bot n manteniendo el bot n SHIFT pulsado Dial temporizador TIME E Girando el dial se mueve el cursor 6 Botones de reproduccion s Estos botones desempefian las siguientes funciones Funcion Desplazar el cursor al principio de la canci n Rebobinar Avanzar rapidamente Detener la reproducci n grabaci n Iniciar la reproducci n
6. El canal MIDI de los mensajes transmitidos se fija en el 16 ri Conjunto de memoria E Debe utilizar USR6 o USR7 USR6 corresponde al MCR 8 modo 4 A USR7 corresponde al modo 4 B u Configuracion del software Seleccione MCR 8 como controlador externo del software Especifique UR 80 2 como puerto MIDI a utilizar por el controlador externo Si desea obtener detalles sobre las configuraciones consulte el manual del usuario que se adjunta con el software Asignaciones de los controladores de MCR 8 modo 4 A y UR 80 USR6 lt C MCR 8 UR 80 C1 1 8 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN q S1 1 8 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE C S2 1 8 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE C2 1 8 TRACK FADER 1 8 C1 MASTER S1 MASTER SHIFT Bot n de funci n 5 UNDO I S2 MASTER SHIFT Bot n de funci n 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER Atenuador m ster VALUE Dial TIME 0 SS SHIFT 6 DEC SHIFT Bot n de funci n 3 PREV d INC SHIFT Bot n de funci n 4 NEXT g Ah Ah u VW VW Fl Bot n de funci n 1 MIXER F2 Bot n de funci n 2 INST F3 Bot n de funci n 3 PREV f F4 Bot n de funci n 4 NEXT 6 F5 Bot n de funci n 5 UNDO 7 F6 Bot n de funci n 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT Bot n de funci n 1 MIXER F8 SHIFT Bot n de funci n 2 INST Ha las pi SHIFT a Il SHIFT Gj lt lt lun gt gt 319 Control del software Asignaciones de los controladores del MCR 8 modo 4 B y UR 80 USR7
7. EDIROL UR 80 Audio Control section G y 6 d adios Ms HED q Gs Ka kal Ra e Abschnitt Track Control S 84 S e Abschnitt Master Control S 87 e Abschnitt Audio Control S 89 S JM Wenn f r einen Controller in den folgenden Erkl rungen angegeben HINT wird bedeutet das dass Sie diesem Controller eine MIDI Nachricht zuweisen k nnen lt D q H u 83 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen E Abschnitt Track Control Der Abschnitt Track Control erm glicht Ihnen die Steuerung der Parameter Ihrer Sequenzersoftware Neben Lautst rke und Panorama k nnen Sie auch Parameter wie z B den Spurstatus Track Status und Effekt Sende Pegel Effect Send Level steuern Durch das Umschalten von Spurgruppen k nnen Sie die Parameter von bis zu 32 Spuren steuern Der tats chlich gesteuerte Inhalt h ngt davon ab welche Software Sie verwenden Im Synth Edit Modus oder V LINK Modus funktioniert das UR 80 anders als hier erkl rt N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie unter Synth Edit Modus S 134 oder V LINK Modus S 137 TRACK BTICONTROL CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK 84 Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Sie k nnen jedem dieser acht Schaltkn pfe MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Jedem Schaltknopf k nnen drei verschiedene Nach
8. 226 Collegamenti di base nes ante hin ein Shane 226 Dati MID neun Ren En 226 Dati audio schema di flusso ss 227 Periferiche di ingresso uscita sus 228 Due porteMIDl ilaele ada lia 229 Utilizzo del software 230 Cambio di patch di memoria sus 230 SONAR inet ati nen ES vola ei man tnt lee Me aio 231 Impostazioni in SONAR 231 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli EE 232 Cubase SX uses aaae dd dais litis 234 Impostazioni in Cubase SX 234 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli EE 235 C base VST 2222 2 2 EPA ENA EEE tees ladies eines Ligier 237 Impostazioni in Cubase VST utenti Windows 237 Impostazioni in Cubase VST utenti Macintosh 238 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli ss 239 Logica ARONA i i ida oasis 241 Impostazioni in Logic ss 241 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli iii 242 11 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 nennen 245 Impostazioni in ProTools LE 245 Impostazioni in Digital Performer ii 245 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli EE 246 Reasons liana Resa 249 Impostazioni della porta MIDI 249 Impostazioni per il trasporto e MIDI IN DEVICE in Reason 249 Controllo del tempo del brano ss 250 Impostazioni MIDI Remote Mapping
9. LEFT Desplazar el cursor a la posici n del localizador izquierdo SET L Establecer la ubicaci n del cursor actual como marcador izquierdo RIGHT Desplazar el cursor a la posici n del marcador derecho O O SET R Establecer la ubicaci n del cursor actual como marcador derecho COPY Copiar el objeto seleccionado actualmente CLICK UNDO Deshacer la operaci n anterior PASTE Pegar el objeto copiado en la ubicaci n especificada SAVE Guardar el proyecto actual en un archivo Los nombres de bot n entre corchetes indican que debe presionar el bot n manteniendo el bot n SHIFT pulsado Dial temporizador TIME Girando el dial se mueve el cursor Botones de reproducci n 306 Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Bot n Funci n Desplazar el cursor al principio de la canci n Atrasar el cursor Avanzar el cursor Detener la reproducci n grabaci n Iniciar la reproducci n Iniciar la grabaci n SHIFT E Activar desactivar la funci n autom tica punch in grabar el segmento de una pista mientras se reproduce SHIFT Ww i ci 3 automatica punch out dejar de grabar el segmento de una pista SHIFT Ww Activar desactivar el metr nomo SHIFT Activar desactivar el ciclo Logic Conjunto de memoria Debe utilizar URS3 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bo
10. in 128 Aufnahme der Ausgabe des UR 80 auf einem Digitalger t ee 129 nderung der Audio psi 130 Verwendung des ASIO Direct Monitor ene 131 Erweiterte Bedienung ss 133 Synth Edit Modus 2 2 see 134 Track Fader sss ee ila o il ii ale al hl 134 Schaltfl che Assign ASSIGN sin 134 Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HO CONTROL 135 Track Group Auswahlschaltflache TRACK GROUP 135 Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HO PART 135 CHE 136 V LINK Modus an ai en a 137 Parameter AEn calas ee EE ini eebe 137 Im V LINK Modus verwendete Controller ss 138 A lidia 139 Starten des UR 80 Editor nena enaka 139 Einstellungen f r den MIDI ANSChIUSS ene 140 URGO Editor EE 141 Haupttenstet toi NE e ing 141 Controller Einstellungen ss 143 MIDI Nachrichten die Sie Controllern zuweisen kommen 143 Zuweisung einer MIDI Nachricht iii 144 Pr fung der zugewiesenen MI Nachrichten 145 Memory Set Initial Message iii 146 Festlegen der Memory Set Initial Message iii 146 Aktivierung der Memory Set Initial Message iii 146 Austausch von Daten mit dem UR 80 ss 147 bertragung an das URB nn NA AN NE ee 147 Empfang vom UR3O rs merkene eree dan 147 Sichern oder Laden im SMF Format sn 148 Sichern eines Memory Sets im SMF Format
11. 268 269 E 294 Entr e ET OE A RE AI 162 Erdungsterminal varita iii 90 F FaCevATTI TE niire ane ia eiatono rkieka 156 F ce laterale ia 158 Factory Reset siria AH mette 348 Fader delle tracce Lirica 218 232 235 239 242 246 251 266 Fader generales de 218 Fen tre Message Assign i 210 Fenster Message Assign i 144 Flujo de audio ss 293 F j MIDE een 292 E E e naar 161 Flux MIDI EE eleganten 160 EDO ran ae 289 Free Message 77 143 209 275 Free Message Mensaje libre 341 Frequenza di campionamento convertitore 260 Frequenza di campionamento interruttore di selezione ii de 222 256 261 Function buttons 21 35 38 42 50 Funktionsschaltflichen 87 101 104 108 116 Funzione pulsanti 219 233 236 240 G Grounding terminal 24 H H ACTIVITY check Dox ane 75 H ACTIVITY casella di controllo 273 Hauptbedienteld votos siii miei 83 Headphonejack coi iaa 26 HO GM2 un dns 22 88 154 220 286 HO GM2 Messages rs 82 148 280 HQ GM2 Messages Mensajes HO GM2 346 Impedenza d ingresso interruttore di selezione a arcas 224 256 259 Indicadores de pico Peak 287 Indicatori di picto cias ii 221 Ingressi rd 223 Ingressi digitali e nee 223 INTES
12. i 162 PHANTOM POWER 26 92 158 224 290 Phantom power switch i 26 59 Phantom interruttore di alimentazione 224 257 Phantomstrom Schalter 92 125 PHONE iii oi 25 91 157 Pitch Bend Change 77 143 209 275 Pitch Bend Change Variaci n de tono 341 Pitch Bend message ts 77 Pitch Bend messaggio 275 Pitch Bend Nachricht i 143 Poly Key Pressure 77 143 209 275 Poly Key Pressure Presi n de teclado polif nico 341 Polyphonic Key Pressure message 77 Polyphonic Key Pressure messaggio 275 Polyphonic Key Pressure Nachricht 143 Power switch ss 24 Presa cuffie anne irta 224 Prese d uscita Master ii 224 prise jack casque nen BR 158 Prises de sortie g n rale 158 Prises jack 1 2 2 2 2 2 a 157 prises jack d entr e num rique 157 prises jack de sortie num rique 157 Prises MIDI IN OUT iii 156 Program Change eae reniei nr 77 143 275 Program Change Cambio de programa 341 Program Change message ene 77 Program Change messaggio 275 Program Change Nachricht 143 NEE 130 Pulsanti funzione
13. T El Adjust the y input level fi EDIROL UR 80 Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the 4 volume Collegamenti L audio dello strumento collegato all ingresso 1 verr registrato sul canale L del computer L audio Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit dello strumento collegato all ingresso 2 verra registrato sul canale R interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento Impostare la stessa freguenza di campionamento del software di registrazione interruttore di selezione dell impedenza d ingresso Impostarlo su Hi Z Manopola di sensibilit dell input Utilizzare la manopola di sensibilit dell input per regolare il livello d ingresso Per una qualit audio ottimale regolare la manopola di sensibilit dell input al punto massimo consentito senza che l indicatore di picco si accenda interruttore Input Monitor Ruotare l interruttore input monitor e regolare il livello di controllo dell input per il segnale proveniente dalla chitarra o dal basso Il livello di registrazione non verr modificato Per regolare il il volume di controllo dell input tenere premuto il pulsante SHIFT e ruotare la manopola TIME Pulsante REC SOURCE Impostarlo su ANALOG non illuminato Note Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati 256 Registrazione audio Registrazione da un m
14. 101 Steuerung Ihrer Software Cubase SX Memory Set Verwenden Sie USR1 Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY des UR 80 gedr ckt und dr cken Sie die rack Statusschaltfl che USR1 Software Sie ben tigen Cubase SX und EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml befindet sich im Ordner SX innerhalb des Ordners Cubase Remote auf der beiliegenden CD ROM Bevor Sie Ihre Arbeit fortsetzen kopieren Sie EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml auf Ihren Computer E Einstellungen in Cubase SX 1 2 3 4 10 102 Wahlen Sie im Men Devices den Men punkt Device Setup Klicken Sie auf das Register Add Remove W hlen Sie in der Liste Device Classes das Element Generic Remote und klicken Sie auf Add W hlen Sie im Feld Devices das Element Generic Remote das Sie in Schritt 3 hinzugef gt haben und klicken Sie auf das Register Setup Klicken Sie auf Import W hlen Sie EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml das Sie zuvor kopiert haben und klicken Sie auf Open Geben Sie den MIDI Input und den MIDI Ourput an MIDI Input MIDI Output EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 W hlen Sie im Feld Devices des Dialogfelds Device Setup den Wert All MIDI Inputs Klicken Sie im Feld Devices des Registers Setup auf das Feld EDIROL UR 80 2 Active und setzen Sie es auf No Wenn Sie diese Einstellung nicht vornehmen werden die MIDI Nachrichten die vom UR 80 bertragen werden an die MIDI Spuren durchgereicht Klicken Sie
15. 1 ffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung und doppelklicken Sie auf EDIROL UR 80 H 2 Das Dialogfeld EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings wird anschlie end angezeigt S 0 Unter Windows XP klicken Sie auf Zur klassischen Anzeige umschalten um zur klassischen Anzeige umzuschalten EDIROL UR 80 wird erst angezeigt wenn die klassische Ansicht ausgew hlt wurde Klicken Sie unter Windows Me auf Zeigen Sie alle Optionen der Systemsteuerung an Bei Verwendung eines Macintosh Offnen Sie das ASIO Control Panel im Dialogfeld Audio Settings Ihrer mit ASIO kompatiblen Anwendung Der Name des Dialogfelds fiir die Audioeinstellungen und die Vorgehensweise beim ffnen des ASIO Control Panel h ngt von Ihrer Software ab N here Informationen hierzu H erhalten Sie im Handbuch fiir Ihre Anwendung K nija lt x H u 131 MEMO Erweiterte Bedienung Synth Edit Modus Wenn Sie die SchaltflacheHQ GM2 drticken die sich im Bereich Master Control befindet wird der Abschnitt Track Control im Synth Edit Modus ausgef hrt Der Synth Edit Modus erm glicht Ihnen das Editieren der Parameter des beliegenden Softwaresynthesizers Hyper Canvas der hohe Qualit t aufweist Da die Parameter gesteuert werden indem mit GM2 kompatible MIDI Nachrichten bertragen werden k nnen Sie diesen Modus auch einsetzen um ein beliebiges MIDI Ger t zu steuern das auf GM2 MIDI Nachrichten reagiert Wenn Sie zur St
16. 4 Inthe Logic Control area in the left side of the Setup window make the following Out Port settings Even if S the display already indicates the settings shown below u make the settings again Out Port EDIROL UR 80 for Windows or Mac OS X Out Port UR 80 1 for Mac OS 9 5 Close the Setup dialog box Once again select the Logic memory set USR3 on the UR 80 7 Ifa dialog box like the following appears click Cancel E 7 Windows Macintosh num d A newer firmware is available A newer firmware is available for one tor SEA SE or more Logic Control XT units XT units Do you want to upload it Do you want to upload it Cancel JE OC Lol u 43 Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the controllers Please affix the Logic labels to the included template sheet The explanation below will follow these settings Track Control section LOGIC QAEDA RITA SAESP O VALUE S SS EME el Els SE SES e ES O E a Ka fi KA fi D fi gt gt LA fi 2 amp KA Si o ER Du D truc la ES Du D om SELECT CUTOFF RESONANCE VIBRATE VIBDEPTH VIBDELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE _ TRACK STATUS HO PART OFF MUTE GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE SELECT Track faders These adjust the level of each channel By switching the fader bank you can adjust the level of all channels Use the FADER BANK function buttons to switch fader banks Master
17. 250 Funzioni assegnate ai controlli EE 251 Applicazioni Roland MCR 8 compatibili ss 253 Registrazione audio 255 Nozioni fondamentali ss 255 Registrazione della chitarra o del basso nee 256 Registrazione da un microfono seen 257 Registrazione di una tastiera rn rare nr narananaananass 258 Registrazione da un dispositivo audio 259 Registrazione digitale da CD MD DAT iii 260 Registrazione dell output dell UR 80 su un dispositivo digitale 261 Regolazione della latenza audio ss 262 Uso di ASIO Direct Monitor 263 Operazioni avanzate 1 11 1111 1 265 12 Modalit Synth Edit ear 200 Fader delle trac e trie musta aaah baje ddv dena 266 Pulsante di assegnazione ASSIGN ene 266 Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL 267 Pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce TRACK GROUP 267 Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART 267 Elenico det parametri cest ili iaia iano 268 Modalit V LINK een 209 Elenco dei parametri narra angina Lo 269 Controlli utilizzati in modalit V LINK EE 270 UR 80 Editor utilises ra Avvio di UR 80 Editor seen 271 Impostazioni della porta MIDI 272 Finestra UR 80 Editor 273 Finestra et TE 273 Impostazioni dei controlli ss 27
18. EDIROE 24BIT 96 kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM UR 80 Owner s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d emploi Manuale d uso Manual del usuario Thank you for purchasing the USB Recording System UR 80 Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY and IMPORTANT NOTES OWNER S MANUAL pp 2 4 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference SE EDIROL UR 80 Copyright O 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About AN WARNING and ZN CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe Z WARNING injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly A CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pe
19. Of controllers 4 7 the mouse cursor will change shape for those that can be clicked 76 UR 80 Editor Controller settings E MIDI messages that you can assign to controllers Message Explanation Assignable parameters NO ASSIGN Defeats the assignment Operating this controller will not transmit any message Channel Message Note Assigns a Note message MIDI Channel Note Number Velocity Ch Pressure Assigns a Channel Pressure message MIDI Channel Mix Value Max Value Poly Assigns a Polyphonic Key Pressure message MIDI Channel Key Pressure Note Number Min Value Max Value Control Change Assigns a Control Change message MIDI Channnel Control Number Min Value Max Value Pitch Bend Assigns a Pitch Bend message MIDI Channnel Change Min Value Max Value Program Change Assigns a Program Change message MIDI Channel Mix Value The value of the program number has a range of 1 128 Max Value Bank Program Assigns a Bank Select message and Program Change message MIDI Channnel Change Bank MSB The value of the Bank Select message is fixed Bank LSB The value of the program number has a range of 1 128 Min Value Max Value RPN Assigns a Registered Parameter Number MIDI Channnel RPN MSB The data entry LSB range is fixed at 0 127 RPN LSB MSB Min Value MSB Max Value Send LSB NRPN Assigns a Non Registered Parameter Number MIDI Channnel The data e
20. i 248 R Ranura de seguridad 290 RCA phono type nn nn 26 RCA Phono tips tasses nn ur 224 UI A EE 158 RGA Phonotyp pesca le destins 92 Rear panel 2 criari 24 REC SOURCE button ss 58 62 REC SOURCE pulsante esee 256 260 Registered Parameter Number 77 143 209 275 RPN sit eek 77 143 209 275 RPN N mero de par metro registrado 341 R ckseite u ai 90 S Salida viscosa 294 SAMPLE RATE 24 90 156 222 288 Sample rate converter tees 62 Sample rate select switch 57 Sample rate interruttore di selezione 255 Sampling frequency select switch 24 58 63 Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter 90 123 129 Sampling Freguenz Konverter 128 Schaltfl che Assign 84 134 142 391 Schaltfl che REC SOURCE 124 128 Schaltfl chen f r Systemeinstellung Modusauswahl PE NE AE AE dat darai aa EE 88 Schema nn 161 Schema di flusso ii 227 Secci n de control de audio 287 Secci n de control de pistas a 282 298 301 305 308 312 317 Secci n de control master 299 309 314 Secci n de control m ster Master Control 285 Section Audio Control ss 155 Section H ACTIVITY ss 207 Section Master Control
21. 332 Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador E Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Estos controles giratorios controlan la panor mica el env o de reverb el env o de chorus o los par metros de cada canal Utilice el bot n de asignaci n para seleccionar el par metro Si selecciona PAN SEND1 o SEND2 q Los controles giratorios controlar n la panor mica el envio de reverb o el envio de chorus de cada u canal Puede controlar los canales del 1 al 16 mediante el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas u Si selecciona HQ Los controles giratorios controlar n los par metros de canal Puede controlar los ocho par metros siguientes Controles giratorios de Track Control Par metro CUTOFF Corte de filtro 5 RESONANCE Resonancia de filtro D Col VIB RATE Velocidad de vibrato VIB DEPTH Profundidad de vibrato k VIB DELAY Retardo de vibrato ATTACK Tiempo de atague DECAY Tiempo de decaimiento RELEASE Tiempo de desvanecimiento Utilice los botones de estado de pista y el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas para seleccionar el canal que desea controlar i R E Bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas TRACK GROUP Este bot n conmuta el grupo de canales del 1 al 8 o del 9 al 16 cuyos par metros se controlar n E Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART Si selecciona HQ con el bot n de asignaci n estos botones seleccionan el canal cuyos par metros se con
22. Attiva disattiva la funzione Scrub Sposta indietro il cursore Avanza rapidamente il cursore Interrompe la riproduzione registrazione Avvia la riproduzione Avvia la registrazione 248 Utilizzo del software Reason Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria USR5 Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante USR5 della sezione Track Status Software E necessario il software Reason versione 2 0 o successive Enalieh E Impostazioni della porta MIDI 1 Nel menu Edit selezionare Preferences Sn 2 In Page selezionare Advanced MIDI 3 Impostare i seguenti parametri della porta MIDI Any one of Bus A D EDIROL UR 80 1 Remote Control EDIROL UR 80 2 MIDI Clock Sync EDIROL UR 80 1 Naritenh possibile utilizzare l applicativo UR 80 Editor per cambiare la porta MIDI utilizzata per MEMO MIDI Clock Sync Per farlo cambiare l uscita per i messaggi Sync Start e Sync Stop assegnati a SHIFT STOP e SHIFT PLAY Per informazioni su come effettuare queste modifiche consultare la sezione UR 80 Editor pag 271 E Impostazioni per il trasporto e MIDI IN DEVICE in Reason Per utilizzare l UR 80 per controllare i moduli o il trasporto in Reason necessario configurare k G 6 a u i seguenti parametri per ogni brano 1 Nel menu Options selezionare Edit MIDI Remote Mapping per attivare l opzione 2
23. Fije las etiquetas de Cubase VST a la hoja de plantilla proporcionada La explicaci n que sigue est basada en la siguiente configuraci n Secci n de control de pistas q CUBASE VST z INPUT 122 fr TRED SELECT lt 179 2 0 23 11 4 12 25 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 a lt fi g C Atenuadores de pista Los atenuadores controlan el volumen del mezclador de canales VST Utilizando los atenuadores junto con el bot n BANK puede controlar 16 canales de audio went 8 canales de instrumento VST y 8 canales de grupo Atenuador master Controla la ganancia principal del mezclador VST i Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART 4 Mediante estos botones se conmutan los estados de cada canal d Utilizando los botones junto con el bot n BANK puede controlar 16 canales de audio 8 canales N de instrumento VST y 8 canales de grupo M Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE OFF No activo Activar y desactivar el apagado mute del canal Apagado Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado De SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activar y desactivar el solo del canal Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SELECT RED Rojo Seleccionar el canal Selecci n Seleccionado iluminado No seleccionado no iluminado f ORANGE Naranja No utilizado KJ Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Mediante estos controles giratorios se controla la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 y el nivel de SEND 2 del canal Utilice el bot n ASSIGN
24. lt ach links u Nach rechts D SHIFT 4h Anzeige vertikal verkleinern SHIFT YY Anzeige vertikal erweitern Anzeige horizontal verkleinern SHIFT lt Anzeige horizontal erweitern SHIFT D Funktionsschaltflachen Schaltflache Funktion MIXER Offnet das Console Fenster NEXT Wechselt zum n chsten Fenster INST Offnet das Synth Rack Fenster CLOSE Schlie t das Fenster PREV Wechselt zur vorherigen Marke a SET F gt eine Marke ein K NEXT Wechselt zur n chsten Marke d LIST Offnet Fenster fiir Marker UNDO Setzt die zuletzt ausgefiihrte Editieroperation auf den vorigen u Status zuriick REDO F hrt die zuletzt ausgef hrte Editieroeperation erneut aus SAVE AS Fiihrt die Operation Speichern als aus u SAVE Speichern Eckige Klammern um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken m ssen w hrend Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt halten TIME W hlscheibe Wenn Sie die W hlscheibe drehen verschiebt sich der Cursor a we Transportschalter Diese Schaltfl chen haben die folgenden Funktionen Schaltflache Funktion KH Verschiebt den Cursor zum Anfang des Songs amp Spult zur ck CH Schnellvorlauf z e ua Wiedergabe Aufnahme stoppen a ua Wiedergabe starten d E Aufnahme beginnen SHIFT za Startet die Aufnahmeautomatik
25. 18 84 150 216 282 Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che 86 100 135 Track Status Schaltfl chen EE 85 100 103 107 110 114 119 135 Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe Be nes 84 100 103 107 110 114 119 135 Transport buttons 21 35 38 42 46 50 54 Transportschalter 87 101 104 108 112 116 120 Trasporto pulsanti 219 233 236 240 244 248 252 392 C UR 80 MIDI IN 30 96 162 228 294 UR 80 MIDI OUT 30 96 162 228 294 USB connector is 24 ENT EE 375 USB connettore iii 222 USB Anschluss ainia cositas 90 UE EE 228 Uscite digitali citas adobo 223 V Ventana Message Assign Asignar mensaje 342 Verrou de s curit erre 158 V LINK idas 22 88 154 220 286 V LINK button ss 71 V LINK Messages ss 82 148 280 V LINK Messages Mensajes V LINK 346 V EINK mode ri essen 71 V EINK modalit cisl rata 269 V LINK pulsante rie 270 V LINK MOdUS ss 137 V LINK Schaltfl che ss 137 Volume manopola E 221 Voyants de Crete csvset iii labiale 155 W Wechselstromadapter Anschluss 90 X Rd uk 25 91 157 223 289 Z Zone d affectation INIT MESSAGE 207 Zuweisungsbereich INIT MESSAGE 141 393 MEMO For EU Countries This product complies
26. Di o b ON 5 Iniciar la grabaci n Iniciar la grabaci n autom tica SHIFT 29 8 299 Control del software Cubase SX Conjunto de memoria Debe utilizar USR1 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bot n de Track Status USR1 Software Necesitar Cubase SX y EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml se encuentra en la carpeta SX dentro de la carpeta Cubase Remote del CD ROM que se proporciona Antes de proseguir copie EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml en el sistema E Configuraci n en Cubase SX 1 2 3 4 x 10 300 En el menu Devices seleccione Device Setup Haga clic en la ficha Add Remove En la lista Devices classes seleccione Generic Remote y haga clic en Add En el campo Devices seleccione Generic Remote que ha especificado en el paso 3 y haga clic en la ficha Setup Haga clic en Import Seleccione EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml que ha copiado antes y haga clic en Open Especifique un valor para MIDI Input y para MIDI Output MIDI Input Puerto de entrada MIDI MIDI Output Puerto de salida MIDI EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 En el campo Devices del cuadro de di logo Device Setup seleccione All MIDI Inputs En el area Devices de la ficha Setup haga clic en el campo EDIROL UR 80 2 Active y establ zcalo en No A no ser que realice esta configuraci n los mensajes MIDI transmitidos desde la unida
27. a H Cette action ne modifiera pas le niveau d enregistrement Bouton REC SOURCE Positionnez le sur ANALOG teint O Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises jack non utilis es Evitez les connexions en boucle Si vous branchez l UR 80 un appareil qui renvoie l audio entr vers la sortie le signal audio fera une boucle entre l UR 80 et l autre appareil provoquant une oscillation Cela peut produire un son anormalement fort Veillez viter cette situation car elle peut entra ner des UR 80 Stereo sets cassette deck record player Example of loop connection LINE OUT Eenannl dysfonctionnements ou endommager vos haut parleurs Enregistrement num rique a partir de CD MD DAT ooo GEB T Ena oo CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL 5 or COAXIAL IN as appropriate E for your device SAMPLE RATE sr Set the sampling frequency serec p Match the sampling frequencies of your recording software and your digital audio playback device Set REC SOURCE to DIGITAL lit Connexions Utilisez le type de c ble appropri pour effectuer les connexions avec la prise d entr e num rique OPTICAL COAXIAL O Interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage Positionnez le sur la m me fr quence d chantillonnage que celle s lectionn e dans votre logiciel
28. u W hlen Sie im Men Options die Option Edit MIDI Remote Mapping um sie zu aktivieren 2 Klicken Sie auf die Stop Schaltfl che f r den Reason Transport Daraufhin wird das Dialogfeld MIDI Remote Dialog angezeigt 3 Aktivieren Sie Learn from MIDI Input Dr cken Sie die STOP Taste des UR 80 und klicken Sie im Dialogfeld MIDI Remote auf OK Nehmen Sie die folgenden Zuweisungen auf die gleiche Weise vor UR 80 Controller Reason Transport Stop Italiana Abspielen Zurtickspulen Vorw rts spulen Aufnehmen Schleife Ein Aus Tea OR DEE DUAN 3122 21313 W hlen Sie im Men Options die Option Edit MIDI Remote Mapping um sie auszuschalten 7 Stellen Sie im Men Options sicher dass Enable MIDI Remote Mapping aktiviert ist Wenn diese Option nicht aktiviert ist sollten Sie das Men element w hlen um sie zu aktivieren u 8 Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfl che MIDI IN DEVICE module CHANNEL 16 und w hlen Sie das Mixer Ger t das Sie steuern m chten 117 Steuerung Ihrer Software E Tempo des Songs steuern Das UR 80 erm glicht Ihnen die Verwendung des Time Drehknopfs und der Cursorschaltfl chen um das Tempo des Songs zu steuern Wenn Sie das Tempo des Songs mit dem UR 80 steuern m chten m ssen Sie in Reason MIDI Clock Sync aktivieren Sie miissen als Erstes die Timing Clock Ubertragung des UR 80 aktivieren Um die Timing Clock Ubertr
29. Atenuador de volumen global Controla la ganancia principal del VST Mixer H Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART d Mediante estos botones se conmutan los estados de cada canal Utilizando los botones con el bot n BANK puede controlar 32 canales Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE OFF No activo Activa y desactiva el apagado mute del canal Apagado Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado dean SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activa y desactiva el solo del canal Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado READ RED Rojo Activa y desactiva la reproducci n autom tica del canal Lectura Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado k WRITE ORANGE Naranja Activa y desactiva la grabaci n autom tica del canal KJ Grabaci n Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado a nja Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Mediante estos controles giratorios se controla la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 y el nivel 301 Control del software Secci n de control m ster aX Botones de cursor CURSOR Estos botones desempefian las siguientes funciones C gt Bot n Funci n a Desplazarse hacia arriba S Y Desplazarse hacia abajo WINDOW Desplazarse a la izquierda MIXER INST q Desplazarse a la derecha EFFECTS INPUT MONITOR LEVEL D ze Kum SHIFT Ad Disminuir la pantalla verticalmente SHIFT Ampliar la pantall
30. L intervallo di dati LSB compreso tra 0 e 127 MIDI Channnel RPN MSB RPN LSB MSB Min Value MSB Max Value Send LSB NRPN Assegna un Non Registered Parameter Number L intervallo di dati LSB compreso tra 0 e 127 MIDI Channnel NRPN MSB NRPN LSB MSB Min Value MSB Max Value Send LSB System Common Realtime Assegna un messaggio System Common o System Realtime Utilizzare il campo Status per selezionare il messaggio desiderato Free Message Assegna un qualsiasi messaggio MIDI fino a 24 byte E possibile assegnare pit di un messaggio Messaggio MIDI fino a 24 byte Data Type Min Value Max Value Tempo Assegna Tempo Control per trasmettere messaggi MIDI Timing Clock Specificare in UR 80 Editor la destinazione dei messaggi Timing Clock Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento alla sezione Impostazioni di sistema pag 280 Min Tempo Max Tempo 275 Enalieh Na terh a G 6 a u Eenannl UR 80 Editor E Assegnazione di un messaggio MIDI Finestra Message Assign Controller name RACK STATUS 1 MUTE 2 EDIROL UR 80 Editor Assign Message Channel Message Step 2 Type Control Change MIDI Channel Step 3 Control Number Min Value Max Value Message assignment area o e p ja a s Settings Step 4 Output Port Port 2 E Step 5 Button Mode UNLATCH OLATCH
31. V LINK Lorsque le bouton V LINK est activ la section Track Control est en mode V LINK ce qui vous permet de r gler les p riph riques vid o compatibles V LINK Appuyez de nouveau sur ce bouton pour le d sactiver et revenir aux pr c dentes fonctions de r glage de pistes Pour plus de d tails sur le mode V LINK reportez vous la section Mode V LINK p 203 MIDI CLK SHIFT V LINK Ce bouton active ou d sactive la transmission MIDI Timing Clock F8 Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton SHIFT le voyant indique le statut activ d sactiv de F8 pas le statut on off activ d sactiv de V LINK REC SOURCE Commute le signal d entr e envoy via USB vers l ordinateur comme source d enregistrement Seul le signal provenant des prises jack d entr e est envoy ANALOG voyant teint l ordinateur Seul le signal provenant des prises num riques coaxiales DIGITAL voyant allume ou optiques est envoy l ordinateur INPUT MONITOR LEVEL SHIFT TIME S lectionne si le signal d entr e des prises jack 1 2 et de la prise num rique est envoy a la prise casque et aux prises de sortie g n rale Utilisez SHIFT composition TIME pour r gler le niveau de contr le Le contr le d entr e peut tre activ ou d sactiv a partir d un logiciel prenant en charge ASIO 2 0 tel que Cubase Le r glage du niveau de contr le d entr e ne modifie pas le nive
32. A CAUTION e Immediately turn the power off remove the AC e The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by AN their location or position does not interfere with AN your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or their proper ventilation an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the iii Information page when e Always grasp only the output plug or the body of the AC adaptor when plugging into or unplugging from this unit or an outlet e The AC adaptor or the power supply cord has been damaged or e If smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into ordiq id has pe i e At regular intervals you should unplug the AC spilled onto the unito adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe O The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise all dust and other accumulations away from its has become wet or prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the e The unit does not appear to operate normally or power outlet whenever the unit is to remain exhibits a marked change in performance unused for an extended period of time Any dia accumulation of dust between the power plug and e In households with small children an adult should nn outlet can result in poor insulation and provide supervision until the child is capable of AN En following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming anna Nill
33. Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ces boutons commutent l tat de chaque canal Si vous commutez la banque de commandes d att nuation vous pouvez contr ler l tat de tous les canaux Utilisez les boutons de fonction FADER BANK pour commuter les banques de commandes d att nuation Mode Etat du bouton Fonction SELECT MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d sactive la mise en solo des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint REC RDY RED Active d sactive l enregistrement des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint SELECT ORANGE S lectionne le canal auquel s appligue une op ration pour un canal individuel S lectionn allum Non s lectionn teint Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons fonctionnent comme des codeurs La valeur augmente lorsque le bouton de r glage de pistes est tourn vers la droite et diminue lorsque le bouton est tourn vers la gauche La modification augmentation diminution s interrompt lorsque vous replacez le bouton sur la position centrale Utilisez le bouton de fonction ASSIGNMENT pour commuter les param tres r gl s par ces boutons Bouton d automation AUTOMATION Il commute le mode automatique du canal actuellement s lectionn Etat du bouton AUTOMATION Canal piste disponible READ Commute le mode automat
34. Diese Schaltflache schaltet die MIDI Nachrichten um die den Track Status Schaltflachen und ihren LEDs zugewiesen sind Wenn Sie die Schaltfl che Select driicken k nnen Sie nacheinander diese Optionen aufrufen Off gt Green Red Orange k u Italiana Eenannl 85 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen Track Fader iaa adds Assignable Sie k nnen jedem dieser acht Fader Uberblendregler MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen In der Regel werden Sie die Track Fader verwenden um die Track Lautst rke in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm zu steuern Master Fader MASTER roce Sie k nnen diesem Fader eine MIDI Nachricht zuweisen Der Master Fader steuert die Master Lautst rke in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm Die endg ltige Lautst rke des UR 80 selbst wird durch den Ausgabe Lautst rke Drehknopf geregelt 7 Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che TRACK GROUP TRACK GROUP Sie konnen der Track Group Auswahlschaltflache vier MIDI Nachrichten 86 T zuweisen Jedes Mal wenn Sie die Schaltfl che dr cken wird eine der vier Nachrichten tibertragen Die Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che schaltet die Gruppe von Spuren in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm um deren Parameter von den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen und Track Fadern gesteuert werden Das bedeutet dass Sie die acht Schaltkn pfe und Fader verwenden k nnen um die Parameter von 32 Spuren zu steuern
35. Wenn Sie diese Schaltfl chen gemeinsam mit der Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 32 Spuren steuern Modus Status der Schaltfl che SELECT Funktion MUTE OFF Schaltet die Stummschaltung der Spuren ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Schaltet Solo fiir die Spur ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet REC RED Schaltet Aufnahmebereitschaft der Spur ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet AUTO ORANGE Schaltet die Aufnahmeautomatik f r die Spur ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe steuern Panorama Send 1 und Send 2 f r die Spur Verwenden Sie die Schaltfl che Assign um Panorama Send 1 oder Send 2 auszuw hlen Wenn Sie diese Schaltfl chen gemeinsam mit der Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 32 Spuren steuern Track Group Auswahlschaltflache TRACK GROUP Diese Schaltflache schaltet die Track Gruppe um die Sie steuern Status der Schaltflache TRACK GROUP Gesteuerte Tracks 1 8 Tracks 1 8 9 16 Tracks 9 16 17 24 Tracks 17 24 25 32 Tracks 25 32 100 Steuerung Ihrer Software Abschnitt Master Control Cursor Schaltfl chen S Diese Schaltfl chen f hren die folgenden Funktionen aus Schaltfl che Funktion a Nach oben NV Nach unten R Nach link
36. grabaci n Iniciar la reproducci n Di o Oy 5 Iniciar la grabaci n SHIFT Desplazar el cursor al final de la canci n SHIFT ER Activar desactivar la funci n autom tica punch in grabar el segmento de una pista mientras se reproduce SHIFT E Activar desactivar la funci n autom tica punch out dejar de grabar el segmento de una pista mientras se reproduce SHIFT 10 Activar desactivar el metr nomo SHIFT a Activar desactivar el ciclo SHIFT Activar desactivar el Start Record at Left Locator 302 Cubase VST Conjunto de memoria Debe utilizar USR2 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bot n de Track Status USR2 Ci Software Es necesario Cubase VST 5 1 o posterior Necesitar Cubase VST y EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml se encuentra en la carpeta VST dentro de la carpeta Cubase Remote u del CD ROM que se proporciona Antes de proseguir copie EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml en el sistema E Configuraci n en Cubase VST usuarios de Windows 1 En el men Options seleccione Remote Setup Setup 2 Efect e las siguientes configuraciones en el cuadro de di logo VST Remote y haga clic en OK 4 Remote Generic Remote Input EDIROL UR 80 2 a Output EDIROL UR 80 3 En la ventana Generic Remote que aparece haga clic en EDIT para
37. param tres et de sauvegarder charger les jeux de sons au format SMF Il vous permet galement d effectuer les r glages syst me pour l UR 80 lui m me Vous pouvez afficher l aide en ligne partir du menu Help de UR 80 Editor Les pages suivantes contiennent une explication de base sur les fonctionnalit s de UR 80 Editor Pour plus de d tails reportez vous l aide en ligne de l UR 80 Editor D marrage de UR 80 Editor Avant de d marrer UR 80 Editor utilisez un c ble USB pour connecter l UR 80 votre ordinateur lt 4 T C et mettez sous tension Utilisateurs Windows Dans le menu D marrer s lectionnez Programmes dans Windows XP Tous les Programmes et dans le menu affich s lectionnez UR 80 Editor gt UR 80 Editor Utilisateurs Macintosh Cliquez deux fois sur l ic ne UR 80 Editor situ e dans le dossier dans lequel le logiciel a t install Italiana Eenanal 205 UR 80 Editor Parametres du Port MIDI Pour transf rer les jeux de sons entre l UR 80 et UR 80 Editor ou pour effectuer les r glages systeme vous devez sp cifier le port MIDI que UR 80 Editor doit utiliser Voici comment effectuer les r glages lorsque vous avez connect 1 UR 80 votre ordinateur via USB Si vous utilisez les connecteurs MIDI pour r aliser les branchements sp cifiez les ports d entr e sortie du p riph rique MIDI connect Utilisateurs Windows 1
38. 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 O7H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 104 68H 9 09H 41 29H 73 49H 105 69H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH 11 OBH 43 2BH 75 4BH 107 6BH 12 OCH 44 2CH 76 4CH 108 6CH 13 ODH 45 2DH 77 4DH 109 6DH 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 110 6EH 15 OFH 47 2FH 79 4FH 111 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H 113 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 19 13H 51 33H 83 53H 115 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 116 74H 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H 117 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 55 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 5AH 122 7AH 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 28 ICH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 SDH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH 31 1FH 63 3FH 95 SFH 127 7FH The decimal expression of the MIDI channel program change etc is one greater than the decimal value shown in the table above The hexadecimal expression for each 7 bits allows a maximum of 128 steps 0 127 to be expressed by one byte of data Multiple bytes are use
39. 11 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cr Ctrl Control Cr de color keiortneck 3 CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cb Ctrl Control Cb de color K Track 4 CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 16 Brightness Ctrl Control de brillo p trol 5 CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 16 Output Fade Fundido de salida S control 6 CC21 15 0 00 127 7F 16 sin asignaci n H 7 CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 16 sin asignaci n Ti 8 CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 16 sin asignaci n 1 CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 16 Dissolve Time Ctrl Control de tiempo de encadenado 2 CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 16 Audio Level Ctrl Control de nivel de audio Atenuadores 3 CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 16 VEX 1 Cul Control de VFX 1 de pista 4 CC 27 1B 0 00 127 ZF 16 VEX 2 Ctrl Control de VEX 2 5 CC 28 IC 0 00 127 ZF 16 VEX 3 Ctrl Control de VEX 3 6 CC 29 ID 0 00 127 ZF 16 VEX 4 Ctrl Control de VEX 4 7 CC 30 1E 0 00 127 7F 16 sin asignaci n 8 CC 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 16 sin asignaci n 335 Modo V LINK Mensaje Rango HEX Cana Asignaci n por defecto CH 1 9 17 25 ProgramChange 1 9 17 25 16 Play video clip 1 9 17 25 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 1 9 17 25 programa 2 10 18 ProgramChange 2 10 18 26 16 Play video clip 2 10 18 26 26 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 2 10 18 26 programa 3 11 19 ProgramChange 3 11 19 27
40. 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CUTOFF CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 RESONANCE CC 71 5D 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 VIB RATE CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 VIB DEPTH CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 VIB DELAY CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 ATTACK CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 DECAY CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 RELEASE CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F seleccione 1 CH 1 9 VOLUME CC7 07 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Atenuador TRACK CH 4 12 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 4 12 Pista CH 5 13 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 8 16 1 El canal de transmisi n ser el mismo canal MIDI que el canal seleccionado HQ PART mediante los botones de estado de pista 334 Modo V LINK Qu es el modo V LINK lt Este modo permite controlar aparatos de v deo compatibles con V LINK D V LINK AWA es una funci n que permite hacer montajes de m sica y vid
41. 2 3 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez MIDI Devices Dans la bo te de dialogue MIDI Devices qui s affiche r glez les param tres suivants MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 v Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boite de dialogue Utilisateurs Macintosh 3 206 Avant de poursuivre r glez les param tres OMS ou FreeMIDI en fonction de votre systeme MIDI Pour plus de d tails sur le r glage de ces param tres reportez vous au Readme E HTM situ dans le dossier pilote du CD ROM inclus Dans le menu Options s lectionnez MIDI Devices Dans la boite de dialogue MIDI Devices qui s affiche r glez les param tres suivants Mac OS 9 MIDI Devices _ Select MIDI System OMS MIDI System Effectuez la s lection en fonction de votre syst me input Port ur 802 Input Port UR 80 2 cutout Port EL a OMS Studio Setup Mac OS X _ MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 EZ Input Port UR 80 2 Output Port UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 mw Cancel OK y Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la bo te de dialogue Fen tre UR 80 Editor E Fen tre principale E EDIROL UR 80 Editor Untitled mid d e lt 1 JINITMESSAGE EDIT d E a i C 1 TITRE Vous pouvez entrer ici un nom pour le jeu de s
42. 2 R si a frequency u Adjust the input level K Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Anschl sse Verwenden Sie ein Phone Buchsenkabel um Ihr Audioger t mit den Eingangsbuchsen 1 und 2 zu verbinden Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf die Sampling Frequenz ein die in Ihrer Aufnahmesoftware ausgew hlt wurde k u Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf Lo Z lnpui Sensitivity Schaltknopf Verwenden Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf um den Eingangspegel anzupassen Um die beste Soundqualit t zu erhalten drehen Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf bis der Pegel so hoch ist wie m glich ohne dass die Input Peakanzeige aufleuchtet lnput Monitor Schalter Dr cken Sie den Input Monitor Schalter und passen Sie den Input Monitor Level f r das Signal von Ihrem Keyboard an Damit wird die Aufnahmelautst rke nicht ver ndert OSchaltfl che REC SOURCE Stellen Sie diese Schaltfl che auf ANALOG ein unbeleuchtet Italiana Weitere Hinweise Verbinden Sie keine Ger te mit Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden Achten Sie auf schleifenformige Verbindungen Wenn Sie das UR 80 mit einem Ger t verbinden das den Eingangssound an den Ausgang durchreicht bildet das Audiosig
43. 2003 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 1 16 1 16 1 16 1 16 O 9n v 1 127 Ba O 9n v 0 1 Mode 3 OMNI ON OFF MONO POLY RRR RRR RRR o0 00 O O O 0 127 Hk ekke k k kkk k kk k O System Common Song Select Tune Request System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Aux Local On Off Messages All Notes Off Active Sensing System Reset Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Song Position Reset All Controller Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO OOO 4 4 OOOOOO OO 1 Received if assigned as an LED parameter O Yes X No 385 Specifications UR 80 USB Recording System Number of Assignable Controls Knob 8 Fader 9 Rotary Encoder 1 Button 25 LED 10 Number of Memory Sets Preset 1 User 7 Number of Audio Record Playback Channels Record 2 channels stereo Playback 2 channels stereo Full duplex except for 96 kHz setting OSignal Processing AD DA Conversion 24 bits linear PC interface 24 bits Sampling Frequency Digital output 44 1 48 96 kHz Digital input 32 44 1 48 96 kHz Built in realtime sample rate converter AD DA Conversion 44 1 48 96 kHz Frequency Response 96 0 kHz 20 Hz to 40 kHz 0 dB 2 dB 48 0 kHz 20 Hz to 22 kHz 0 dB 2 dB 44 1kHz 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 dB 2 dB Nominal Input Level variable Input Jack 1 2 XLR type 50 to 10 d
44. 3 11 CH 4 12 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Track control knobs CH 8 16 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CUTOFF CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F select 1 RESONANCE CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB RATE CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DEPTH CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DELAY CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F select 1 ATTACK CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F select 1 DECAY CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F select 1 RELEASE CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F select 1 CH 1 9 VOLUME CC7 07 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Track taders CH 4 12 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH
45. 5 13 Canal 6 14 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 6 14 Canal 7 15 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Canal 8 16 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CUTOFF CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F select T RESONANCE CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB RATE CC 76 AC 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DEPTH CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DELAY CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F select 1 ATTACK CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F select 1 DECAY CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F select 1 RELEASE CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F select 1 Canal 1 9 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 1 9 Canal 2 10 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 10 Canal 3 11 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Commande Canal 4 12 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 4 12 d attenuation TRACK Canal 5 13 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 13 Canal 6 14 VOLUME CC7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 14 Canal 7 15 VOLUME CC7 07 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Canal 8 16 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 8 16 1 Le canal de transmission est le m me canal MIDI que le canal HO PART s lectionn par les boutons Track Status 202 Mode V LINK Qu est ce que le mode V LINK Ce mode vous permet de contr ler les p riph riques vid o compatibles V LINK V LINK AWA est une fonction qui vous permet de jouer de la musique int gr e une video Avec les p riph riques vid o compatibles V LINK des effets visuels peuvent tre facilement a
46. 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO Channel 5 Write CC 4 04 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO Channel 6 Write CC 5 05 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO Channel 7 Write CC 6 06 0 00 64 40 5 z REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO Channel 8 Write CC 7007 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRANSPORT PLAY Start CC 22 16 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRANSPORT REC Record CC 2317 000 7 64 40 6 E REMOTE 354 USR2 MEMORY Cubase VST PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE BE 61 7F BE 62 7F PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1 PAN Channel 1 Pan Left CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 6 2 5 Right TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN Channel 2 Pan Left CC 73 49 0400 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN Channel 3 Pan Left CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 S Right TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN Channel 4 Pan Left CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 i Right TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN Channel 5 Pan Left CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E Right TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN Channel 6 Pan Left CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN Channel 7 Pan Left CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 Right TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN Channel 8 Pan Left CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6
47. AUTO 52 7 O ASSIG z 3 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO S2 8 O ASSIG E E BUTTON LED TRANSPORT PLAY gt play O ASSIG B E BUTTON LED TRANSPORT REC O rec O ASSIG S z BUTION 371 Troubleshooting Can t use the START STOP button to make Reason play stop e Is MIDI Clock Sync enabled If MIDI Clock Sync is enabled the port from which MIDI timing clock is transmitted by the UR 80 must match Reason s MIDI Clock Sync port Use UR 80 Editor to check the UR 80 s MIDI Timing Clock Output Port For details on the MIDI Timing Clock Output Port setting refer to System settings p 82 Also if MIDI Sync is enabled you need to control play stop on Reason by holding down the UR 80 s SHIFT button and pressing the START STOP button When using Logic the UR 80 s track status button LED does not light e Did you select the memory set USR3 after starting Logic Logic and the UR 80 will be able to communicate if you select the memory set after starting Logic e When using a memory set for Logic you must select the memory set each time you start Logic e Use the following procedure to check the settings for Logic 1 Open the Control Surfaces Setup window In Windows or Mac OS 9 choose Options menu Preferences Control Surfaces Setup In Mac OS X choose the Logic menu Environment Settings Control Surfaces Setup Click the Logic Control icon located in the right side of the Setup
48. EQ ein aus S Ein beleuchtet z Aus unbeleuchtet ORANGE Sie k nnen beliebige Reason Parameter als Steuerungsschaltfl chen f r allgemeine Zwecke zuweisen Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL a Verwenden Sie diese Schaltkn pfe um das Kanalpanorama Equalizer Treble EQ TREBLE und Equalizer Bass EQ BASS zu steuern Verwenden Sie die Schaltflache Assign um zwischen Panorama Equalizer Treble und Equalizer Bass umzuschalten a H u 119 Steuerung Ihrer Software Abschnitt Master Control eb TEMPO INPUT MONITOR LEVEL Cursor Schaltfl chen Wenn Sie die MIDI Clock Sync Funktion von Reason aktiviert haben und das Tempo steuern wird von diesen Schaltfl chen das Tempo festgelegt Schaltfl che Tempo BPM a a Vy 120 F3 F4 F5 F6 CET ora ES vog mm CC StToP _ START J MIDI SYNC OFF 30 STEREO id MONO 120 d 145 gt 100 SHIFT 4h 20 SHIFT W 180 250 SHIFT q 60 SHIFT gt TIME W hlscheibe Wenn Sie die Midi Clock Funktion von Reason aktiviert haben und das Tempo steuern kann mit dieser W hlscheibe das Tempo stufenlos eingestellt werden Transportschalter Diese Schaltfl chen haben die folgenden Funktionen Schaltfl che Funktion Schaltet die Schleifenwiedergabe ein aus Spult den Cursor zur ck Sc
49. Eenannl Enregistrement audio Enregistrement avec un clavier Vous pouvez enregistrer ce que vous jouez au clavier sur votre ordinateur en tant que donn es audio Keyboard digital piano stars Set the sampling PLAY srece Wa frequency Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT 2 R Adjust the input level EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM ae Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the 4 volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Connexions Utilisez un cable de casque pour brancher votre clavier ou un autre p riph rique aux prises jack 1 et 2 coInterrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage Positionnez le sur la m me fr quence d chantillonnage que celle s lectionn e dans votre logiciel d enregistrement Commutateur d imp dance Positionnez le sur Lo Z c gt Bouton de niveau SENS Utilisez le bouton de niveau SENS pour r gler le niveau d entr e Pour obtenir une qualit d enregistrement optimale r glez le niveau d entr e aussi fort que possible mais sans provoquer Yallumage du voyant Input Overload c gt Commutateur Input Monitor Allumez le commutateur Input Monitor et r glez le niveau d entr e du signal mis par votre clavier Cette action ne modifiera pas le niveau d enregistrement Pour r gler le volum
50. Eingabepegel Typ XLR 50 10 dBu Typ Phone 35 4 dBu Wenn Sie ein Ger t mit niedrigem Ausgabepegel wie z B ein Mikrofon anschlie en empfehlen wir Ihnen die Eingangsbuchse vom Typ XLR zu verwenden 14 Peak Anzeigen PEAK lt z u Diese Anzeigen informieren Sie dar ber ob der Sound der in die Eingangsbuchsen 1 und 2 D INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R eingegeben wird verzerrt wird Regeln Sie den Input Sensitivity H Schaltknopf so dass die Peak Anzeigen nicht beleuchtet sind Die Peak Anzeigen leuchten rot S nachdem Pegel 6 dB unterhalb Signalverzerrung erreicht wurde VOLUME 15 Ausgabelautst rke Schaltknopf VOLUME H Hiermit wird die Lautst rke geregelt die aus der Kopfh rerbuchse und den Master Ausgangsbuchsen H we ausgegeben wird gt Hiervon ist nicht die Lautst rke betroffen die aus den Digitalausgangsbuchsen ausgegeben wird lt x q H u 89 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen Ruckseite 90 POWER DC IN MIDI SAMPLE RATE N INPUT 2 R INPUT 1 L XLR Mic Pre AMP 50 10 dBu eee Mie Ta 3 SEH fi Ac A THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT 35 4 dBu 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL T Hi Z Lo Z ON OFF INTERFERENCE RECEIVED Fia Se 3 ANY USE UNDESIRED OPERATION 16 17 18 Netzschalter POWER Dr cken Sie diesen Schalter um den Netzstrom einzuschalten auszuschalten Der Netzstrom ist eingeschaltet wenn der Schalter
51. F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST ka aaa pi SHIFT H SHIFT E lt gt gt Enregistrement audio Ce chapitre d crit les diff rentes mani res de connecter et d utiliser l UR 80 Afin d viter un mauvais fonctionnement et ou l endommagement des haut parleurs et autres p riph riques diminuez toujours le volume et mettez toujours les p riph riques hors tension avant ri d effectuer toute connexion T u Comme indiqu sur la figure vous pouvez brancher un casque ou des haut parleurs afin de contr ler le son de votre application ou des instruments appareils audio connect s a UR 80 Computer AC adaptor Chan lt USB cable IECH D H H q USB C Monitor speakers oo Ba 9 9 Es Headphones This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers Utilisation du commutateur de s lection du taux d chantillonnage Sample Rate e Vous devez positionner le commutateur de s lection du taux d chantillonnage selon les besoins de votre application Italiana e Si le commutateur de s lection du taux d chantillonnage est r gl sur 96 kHz REC vous ne pourrez pas entendre les sons lus par votre application e Si le commutateur d
52. Forward E 8 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP transport Stop 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY transport Play 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC transport Record 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP Tempo 20 20 20 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR DOWN Tempo 180 180 180 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR LEFT Tempo 250 250 250 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT Tempo 60 60 60 H UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER OTE 0 00 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST OTE 1 01 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV E OTE 2 02 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT OTE 3 03 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO S OTE 4 04 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS OTE 5 05 0 00 127 7F 15 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ O ASSIG E 3 SHIFT TRANSPORT REW O ASSIG SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD O ASSIG SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP MIDI Sync Stop FC 1 SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY MIDI Sync Start FA 1 SHIFT TRANSPORT REC O ASSIG Si LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute O ASSIG s BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute O ASSIGN BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute O ASSIG S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute O ASSI
53. Grabaci n Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SELECT Selecci n ORANGE Naranja Seleccione el canal sobre el que se efectuar una operaci n de forma individual Seleccionado iluminado No seleccionado no iluminado Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Estos controles giratorios funcionan como codificadores Su valor aumentar a medida que gire el control a la derecha y disminuir a medida que lo gire a la izquierda La modificaci n aumento disminuci n cesar si vuelve a disponer el control giratorio en la posici n central Utilice el bot n de funci n ASSIGNMENT para conmutar los par metros que puede controlar con estos controles giratorios Bot n de automatizaci n AUTOMATION Con este bot n se conmuta el modo de automatizaci n del canal seleccionado actualmente Estado del bot n AUTOMATION Canal pista operativos READ Lectura Conmuta el modo de automatizaci n a READ WRITE Grabaci n Conmuta el modo de automatizaci n a WRITE TOUCH Contacto Conmuta el modo de automatizaci n a TOUCH LATCH Bloqueo Conmuta el modo de automatizaci n a LATCH 308 Secci n de control m ster Control del software Botones de cursor CURSOR EN JOG Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones CURSOR E
54. MIDI IN EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 2 160 E Flux audio sch ma COAXIAL IN CONVERTER Connexions et r glages de base OPTICAL IN TRS ONLY Lo Z Hi Z INPUT 1 PHANTOM P XLR ONLY SAMPLE RATE USE COAXIAL OUT OPTICAL OUT L OUTPUT lt RA H nm u PHONES INPUT MONITOR STEREO MONO SEN Si vous utilisez des connexions MIDI M me si l UR 80 n est pas connect votre ordinateur via un c ble USB vous pouvez brancher les connecteurs MIDI IN OUT de l UR 80 une interface MIDI connect e votre ordinateur MIDI IN MIDI cables MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI cable MIDI IN a E moin MIDI sound module sold separately Transmit port 2 Transmit port 2 Avec une connexion MIDI les fonctionnalit s de VUR 80 ne sont pas disponibles 161 lt D H E q C Italiana Eenannl Connexions et r glages de base P riph riques d entr e sortie Pour optimiser votre logiciel vous devez param trer convenablement les p riph riques d entr e sortie Pour plus de d tails sur ces param tres reportez vous au manuel de l utilisateur du logiciel Si vous ne pouvez pas s lectionner l UR 80 dans les param tres du p riph rique de votre logiciel il se peut que le pilote UR 80 n ait pas t correctement install Vous devez r installer le pilote P
55. PAN VALUE 1 CC 16 10 65 41 101 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN VALUE 2 CC 17 11 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN VALUE 3 CC 18 12 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN VALUE 4 CC 19 13 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN VALUE 5 CC 20 14 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN VALUE 6 CC 21 15 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN VALUE 7 CC 22 16 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN VALUE 8 CC 23 17 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 VALUE 1 CC 16 10 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 VALUE 2 CC 17 11 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 VALUE 3 CC 18 12 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 VALUE 4 CC 19 13 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 VALUE 5 CC 20 14 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 VALUE 6 CC 21 15 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 VALUE 7 CC 22 16 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 VALUE 8 CC 23 17 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 VALUE 1 CC 16 10 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 VALUE 2 CC 17 11 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 VALUE 3 CC 18 12 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 VALUE 4 CC 19 13 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 VALUE 5 CC 20 14 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 VALUE 6 CC 21 15 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND
56. REC NO ASSIGN 3 E E LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE MUTE 1 BO OC 00 B0 2C 2 02 66 42 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE MUTE2 BO 0C 01 B0 2C 2 02 66 42 S E REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE MUTE 3 BO 0C 02 B0 2C 2 02 66 42 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE MUTE 4 BO 0C 03 B0 2C 2 02 7 66 42 REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE MUTE5 BO OC 04 B0 2C 2 02 66 42 z REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE MUTE6 BO 0C 05 BO 2C 2 02 7 66 42 z REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE MUTE7 BO OC 06 BO 2C 2 02 66 42 s REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE MUTES BO 0C 07 B0 2C 2 02 66 42 z S REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO SOLO 1 Bo 0C 00 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO SOLO 2 BO 0C 01 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 E REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO SOLO 3 BO 0C 02 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO SOLO 4 B0 0C 03 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 E z REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO SOLO 5 BO 0C 04 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 z S REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO SOLO 6 BO 0C 05 B0 2C 3 03 67 43 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO SOLO 7 BO OC 06 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO SOLO 8 B0 0C 07 BO 2C 3 03 67 43 z REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC REC RDY 1 BO 0C 00 BO 2C 7 07 71 47 REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC REC RDY 2 BO 0C 01 B0 2C 7 07 71 47 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC REC RDY3 BO 0C 02 B0 2C 70
57. Repeat steps 2 5 When you have finished making settings choose Edit MIDI Remote Mapping from the Options menu to disable it 8 In the Options menu verify that Enable MIDI Remote Mapping is checked If it is not checked select the menu item to enable it 52 Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the controllers Please affix the Reason labels to the included template sheet The explanation below will follow these settings Track Control section REASON INPUT 192 PEAK 1 SSS fi PIE 060 0 o oj CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK lt C Y E fi Track faders e The faders control the mixer volume You can control tracks 1 8 You cannot use the track group button to switch tracks Master fader Control the master volume of Mixer u Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART i These buttons switch the status of the tracks D u Mode SELECT button status Function MUTE OFF Switch track mute on off On lit Off unlit eegen SOLO GREEN Switch track solo on off On lit Off unlit EQ RED Switch the equalizer EQ on off f On lit A Off unlit 7 ORANGE You can assign any desired Reason parameters as general purpose control buttons Track Control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL Use these knobs to control channel pan equalizer treble EQ TREBLE and equalizer bass EQ BASS Use the assign button to switc
58. SELECT Ce bouton commute l affectation des boutons Track Status dans l ordre MUTE gt SOLO gt REC gt AUTO Il commute galement l affichage des Messages MIDI affect s dans le menuOptions 7 Bouton SHIFT Vous pouvez affecter les messages MIDI aux contr leurs fonctionnant avec le bouton SHIFT Dans ce cas la fen tre affiche uniquement ces contr leurs pouvant fonctionner avec le bouton SHIFT Lorsque le pointeur de la souris passe sur les contr leurs 4 7 il modifie la forme de ceux sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer UR 80 Editor R glages des contr leurs E Messages MIDI que vous pouvez affecter aux contr leurs Message Explication Parametres affectables NO ASSIGN Annule l affectation Le fonctionnement de ce contr leur ne permet pas la transmission de messages Message Channel Note Affecte un message Note Canal MIDI Numero de note V locit Ch Pressure Affecte un message Channel Pressure Canal MIDI Valeur Min Valeur Max Poly Key Pressure Affecte un message Polyphonic Key Pressure Canal MIDI Num ro de note Valeur Min Valeur Max Control Change Affecte un message Control Change Canal MIDI Control Number Valeur Min Valeur Max Pitch Bend Change Affecte un message Pitch Bend Canal MIDI Valeur Min Valeur Max Program Change Affecte un message Program Change La valeur du num ro de pr
59. SOLO 522 CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO S2 3 CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO 52 4 CC 43 2B 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO S2 5 CC 44 2C 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO S2 6 CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO 52 7 CC 46 2E 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO S2 8 CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC STI CC 0 00 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC 512 CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC 513 CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC S1 4 CC 3 03 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC 515 CC 4 04 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC S1 6 CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC S1 7 CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC S1 8 CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO 52 1 CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO 52 2 CC 4129 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO 523 CC 42 2A 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO 52 4 CC 43 2B 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO 52 5 CC 44 2C 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO 52 6 CC 45 2D 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS7 AUTO 52 7 CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO 52 8 CC 47 2F 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 C21 CC 6
60. TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE MUTE 1 OTE 16 10 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE MUTE 2 OTE 17 11 0 00 127 7F REMOTE 359 360 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE MUTE 3 OTE 18 12 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE MUTE 4 OTE 19 13 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE MUTE 5 OTE 20 14 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE MUTE6 OTE 21 15 0 00 127 7F z REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE MUTE7 OTE 22 16 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE MUTE 8 OTE 23 17 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO SOLO 1 OTE 8 08 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO SOLO 2 OTE 9 09 0 00 127 7F E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO SOLO 3 OTE 10 0A 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO SOLO 4 OTE 11 0B 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO SOLO 5 OTE 12 0C 0 00 127 7F E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO SOLO 6 OTE 13 0D 0 00 127 7F S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO SOLO 7 OTE 14 0E 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO SOLO 8 OTE 15 0F 0 00 127 7F S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC REC RDY 1 OTE 0 00 0 00 127 7F 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC REC RDY 2 OTE 1 01 0 00 127
61. TRANSPORT FWD FAST FWD BO OF OE BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRANSPORT STOP STOP BO OF OE BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd TRANSPORT PLAY PLAY BO OF OE BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH dd TRANSPORT REC RECORD BO OF OE BO 2F 5 05 69 45 UNLATCH dd SHIFT CURSOR UP NO ASSIGN z z ni SHIFT CURSOR DOWN S NO ASSIGN SHIFT CURSOR LEFT NO ASSIGN z SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT NO ASSIGN z SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER MEM LOC WIN BO OF 09 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH DOW dd SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST TRANSPORT WIN BO OF 09 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH DOW dd SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV TRANSPORT PRE BO OF 10 BO 2F 1 01 65 41 3 UNLATCH dd SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT TRANSPORT POST BO OF 10 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH dd SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO EDIT MODE BO OF 08 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS EDIT TOOL BO OF 08 BO 2F 6 06 70 46 UNLATCH dd SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ NO ASSIGN S 363 364 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE SHIFT TRANSPORT REW E NO ASSIGN z SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD NO ASSIGN S a SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP NO ASSIGN S z SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY NO ASSIGN E E z E SHIFT TRANSPORT
62. This message will be transmitted when an Identity Request message is received Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 10H 06H 02H 41H 68H 01H F7H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal non realtime message 10H Device ID For the UR 80 fixed at 10H 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 02H Sub ID 2 Identity Reply 41H ID number Roland 68H 01H Device family code 00H 00H Device family number code 00H 00H Software revision level 00H 00H 3 F7H EOX End of Exclusive OV LINK message OV LINK ON Transmitted when entering V LINK mode Status Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 51H 12H F7H 10H 00H 00H 01H 0FH 0FH 51H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland 10H Device ID For the UR 80 fixed at 10H 00H 51H Model ID V LINK 12H Command ID DT1 10H 00H 00H Address 01H V LINK ON OFH Clip Control Rx MIDI Ch 16ch OFH Color Control Rx MIDI Ch 16ch 51H Checksum F7H EOX End of Exclusive OV LINK OFF Transmitted when exiting V LINK mode Status Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 51H 12H F7H 10H 00H 00H 00H 70H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland 10H Device ID For the UR 80 fixed at 10H 00H 51H Model ID V LINK 12H Command ID DT1 10H 00H 00H Address 00H V LINK OFF 51H Checksum F7H EOX End of Exclusive 382 MIDI implementation OSender Model Name Transmitted when entering V
63. Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI a ces un quatre boutons Comme vous pouvez galement EDIROI UR 80 affecter des messages lorsque le bouton SHIFT SA 2ABIT 96kHz USB BEE a est maintenu appuy un total de huit messages a MIDI peut tre affect ces quatre boutons lt a gt Utilisez les boutons curseurs pour commuter lt la piste s lectionn e dans votre logiciel E VY s quenceur ou pour d placer le point de T MIXER INST concentration K 9 Composition TIME PREV NEXT ONBO SAVEAS Vous pouvez affecter un message MIDI a cette L composition Utilisez la composition TIME pour d placer l emplacement de la chanson dans votre UNS HO MAA Els iui REC INPUT SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT MEMO Si vous maintenez appuy le bouton SHIFT et activez la composition TIME la composition regle le niveau d entr e Pour plus de d tails sur le contr le d entr e reportez vous la page p 154 c 10 Boutons de fonctl n se nee ein s Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI a ces six boutons Comme vous pouvez galement affecter des messages lorsque le bouton SHIFT est maintenu appuy un total de 12 messages MIDI peut tre affect ces quatre boutons Ces boutons de fonction sont habituellement utilis s pour ex cuter diff rentes commandes sur votre logiciel s quenceur 11 Bouton de tranSpOrtassiccscccciccicdecvesiesesisseisesectiasocsdencaseceutcevecstasesectecsea
64. Wenn Sie die Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che bet tigen werden die Nachrichten die den NOTE Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen der Track Status Schaltfl che und den Track Fadern zugewiesen sind nicht umgeschaltet Die Track Group Auswahlschaltflache bertr gt vier verschiedene MIDI Nachrichten an Ihr Sequenzerprogramm um die Basis Spurnummer in Ihrer Software zu ndern Bezeichnungen und Funktionen E Abschnitt Master Control Der Abschnitt Master Control ist der Ort an dem Sie Befehle ausf hren und den Transport in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm steuern k nnen Hier k nnen Sie auch die Einstellungen ftir die Audioschnittstelle des UR 80 vornehmen Welche Art Inhalt gesteuert wird hiingt davon ab welche Software Sie verwenden ri 7 8 Cursor Schaltfl chen Sie k nnen diesen vier Schaltfl chen MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Da Sie auch Nachrichten FDIROE UR 80 f r die gedr ckte SHIFT Schaltfl che zuweisen 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM k nnen k nnen Sie diesen vier Schaltfl chen insgesamt acht MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen um die a pi gt Spur zu wechseln die in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm ausgew hlt ist oder um INDON den Brennpunkt zu verschieben TEES HeT 5 9 TIME W hlscheibe Assignable NEXT CLOSE NEUT MONITOR LEVEL MARKER _COMMAND_ Sie k nnen dieser W hlscheibe eine PREV NEXT UNDO SAVE AS MIDI Nachricht zuweisen Verwenden Sie die
65. c H Eenannl 201 Mode Edition Synth E Liste des param tres Port de sortie EDIROL UR 80 1 r glage par d faut Message HEX Plage HEX Canal Canal 1 9 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 1 9 Canal 2 10 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 10 Canal 3 11 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Canal 4 12 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 4 12 Canal 5 13 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 13 Canal 6 14 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 14 Canal 7 15 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Canal 8 16 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 8 16 Canal 1 9 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 1 9 Canal 2 10 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 2710 Canal 3 11 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Canal 4 12 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 4 12 Canal 5 13 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 5 13 Canal 6 14 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 14 Canal 7 15 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 7 15 GE Canal 8 16 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 8 16 OS Canal 1 9 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 7F 1 9 Canal 2 10 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 2 10 Canal 3 11 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 3 11 Canal 4 12 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 4 12 Canal 5 13 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F
66. gt CHANNEL lt Durchblattert den betriebenen Kanal in 1 Kanal Schritten CHANNEL gt ASSIGNMENT Schaltet die Parameter um die von den Track Steuerschaltkn pfen gesteuert werden PAN Regelt Pan Angle fiir jeden Kanal Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltflachen Nach links Nach rechts um den Pan Angle Parameter auszuw hlen der angepasst werden soll SEND Regelt den Send Level jedes Kanals Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen Nach oben Nach unten um zwischen den Sendeschlitzen umzuschalten Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen Nach links Nach rechts um die Send Level Parameter zu wechseln die angepasst werden sollen EQ Regelt EQ Gain Verst rkung f r jeden Kanal Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen Nach oben Nach unten um zwischen den Equalizer B ndern umzuschalten Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen Nach links Nach rechts um den EQ Gain Parameter auszuw hlen der angepasst werden soll TRACK Passt die Track Parameter f r jeden Kanal an Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen Nach links Nach rechts um zwischen den Parametern umzuschalten WINDOW ARRANGE Schaltet die Arrangement Fensteranzeige ein aus MIXER Schaltet die Track Mixer Fensteranzeige ein aus UNDO Macht die vorherige Editieroperation wieder r ckg ngig SAVE Speichert den aktuellen Song in einer Datei Eckige Klammern um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken m ssen w hrend Sie die
67. iii 148 Laden eines Memory Sets von einer SMF Datei eeeenn 148 SystemelnstellUn cian aan prom lot 148 el a 149 Panneau principal iio alga 149 Section Track Control aeei a sik eins 150 Section Master COntrol ss 153 Section Audio Control A area a 155 Pace arrienda 156 Face lat rales uns muse ek sa ps A as 158 Fonctionnement de baee enn eseu 159 Connexions et r glages de base 160 Connexions de Base sch ss ae 160 Prax BIB iii aa 160 Flux audio Sch ma nennen 161 P riph riques d entr e sortie su 162 Deux ports MUER NA en dien tasses Ei 163 Contr le de votre logiciel 164 Commutation des jeux de Sons 164 SODNA Boji nala ala ee alata iii RMS ne aan 165 R glages de SONAR nenn NANA 165 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs iii 166 Cubase SX lean ona 168 R glages de Cubase SX oriin ieee nis ida iraniani 168 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs iii 169 Cubase VSTi navali livel ia 171 R glages de Cubase VST utilisateurs de Windows 171 R glages de Cubase VST utilisateurs de Macintosh 172 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs iii 173 PO LE ER OR NOS A roads tito REIN 175 R glages de Lopes stenasto nei era i e dedi aii Sedi 175 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs ss 176 Pro Tools LE Digital P
68. me fr quence d chantillonnage que celle s lectionn e dans votre logiciel d enregistrement Commutateur d imp dance Positionnez le sur Lo Z c gt Commutateur d alimentation fant me Si vous utilisez un micro condensateur appuyez sur le commutateur PHANTOM Si vous branchez un micro ne n cessitant pas d alimentation fant me vous devez teindre le commutateur d alimentation fant me Vous risqueriez de rencontrer des probl mes de dysfonctionnement Bouton de niveau SENS Utilisez le bouton de niveau SENS pour r gler le niveau d entr e Pour obtenir une qualit d enregistrement optimale r glez le niveau d entr e aussi fort que possible mais sans provoquer Yallumage du voyant Input Overload c gt Commutateur Input Monitor Allumez le commutateur Input Monitor et r glez le niveau d entr e du signal mis par votre micro Cette action ne modifiera pas le niveau d enregistrement Pour r gler le volume de contr le d entr e maintenez la touche SHIFT enfonc e et activez la composition TIME Bouton REC SOURCE Positionnez le sur ANALOG teint Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises jack non utilis es Un son strident peut se produire selon la position du microphone par rapport aux haut parleurs Pour y rem dier 1 Changez l orientation du ou des microphone s 2 Eloignez le ou les microphone s des haut parleurs 3 Diminuez le niveau sonore 191 Enalieh x D H E q C Italiana
69. mero de nota Pressure Min Value Valor minimo H Max Value Valor m ximo Control Asigna un mensaje Control Change Cambio de control MIDI Channnel Canal MIDI Control q Change Number N mero de control Min Value c Valor m nimo Max Value Valor m ximo Pitch Asigna un mensaje Pitch Bend Variaci n de tono MIDI Channnel Canal MIDI Min Value Bend Valor m nimo Pe Change Max Value Valor m ximo Program Asigna un mensaje Program Change Cambio de MIDI Channel Canal MIDI Change programa Min Value Valor m nimo El valor del n mero de programa puede ser del 1 al 128 Max Value Valor m ximo k Bank Asigna un mensaje Bank Select Selecci6n de banco y MIDI Channnel Canal MIDI Bank MSB A Program un mensaje Program Change Cambio de programa MSB de banco Change Bank LSB LSB de banco N El valor del mensaje Bank Select es fijo Min Value Valor minimo u El valor del n mero de programa puede ser del 1 al 128 Max Value Valor m ximo RPN Asigna un N mero de par metro registrado MIDI Chanmnel Canal MIDI MSB de RPN MSB de n mero de par metro El rango de LSB de entrada de datos se fija en 0 127 registrado LSB de RPN LSB de n mero de par metro registrado MSB Min Value Valor m nimo de MSB MSB Max Value Valor m ximo de MSB Send LSB Enviar LSB c NRPN Asigna un N mero de par metro no registrado MIDI Channnel Canal MIDI MSB de k El rango de LSB de entrada de
70. riph riques MIDI P riph rique MIDI OUT UR 80 MIDI OUT Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Si vous sp cifiez UR 80 MIDI OUT comme port de sortie de votre logiciel sequenceur les messages sont transmis partir du connecteur MIDI OUT de l UR 80 lui m me UR 80 Mac OS 9 8 UR 80 1 S lectionnez ce port si vous souhaitez envoyer des messages provenant de votre logiciel s quenceur l UR 80 lui m me P riph rique MIDI IN UR 80 MIDI IN Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Si vous sp cifiez UR 80 MIDI IN comme port d entr e de votre logiciel s quenceur les messages arrivent l entr e MIDI IN de l UR 80 UR 80 1 UR 80 2 S lectionnez l un de ces ports si vous souhaitez que les messages provenant des contr leurs soient re us par votre logiciel s quenceur Pour chaque contr leur vous pouvez s lectionner le port utiliser Par exemple il peut s av rer plus pratique d utiliser UR 80 1 pour les messages enregistrer sur une piste ou utilis s pour r gler un synth tiseur logiciel et UR 80 2 pour les messages utilis s pour lire ou arr ter votre s quenceur ou encore effectuer un mixage Utilisez UR 80 2 comme p riph rique d entr e MIDI pour l Editeur UR 80 P riph riques audio EDIROL UR 80 Il envoie des signaux audio de votre ordinateur l UR 80 Il est g n ralement utilis avec Media Player Vous devez galement l utiliser avec une application
71. sssesseeseseeeeee 153 167 182 section Master Control in 177 Section Track Control eege E 150 166 169 173 176 180 185 AAA seks kai 26 Seitliches Bedienfeld 92 SELECT i dns 19 85 151 217 283 Select button EE 19 76 CEA AAA 217 274 S lecteur de taux d chantillonnage 189 SHIFT b tton toda casitas 76 SHIFT lange ees alii 274 SHIFT Schaltflache csssicsistasiessssessssciesistsesstaesssaetenans 142 Sicherheits Steckplatz ss 92 Side panel ee ele aloe ord 26 Slot per la sicurezza nee 224 SONAR anne 33 99 165 231 297 UM A he ee 162 Standard Driver Mode ii 348 Synth Edit mode cea 68 Synth Edit modalit ui 266 Synth Edit Modus ss 134 System Common 77 143 209 275 System Common Com n del sistema 341 System Common Realtime 77 143 209 275 System Common Realtime Tiempo real del sistema com n del sistema 341 System exclusive messages 379 System Realtime message n 77 System Realtime messaggio 275 System Setting Mode Select buttons 22 System Setting Mode Select pulsanti 220 System Realtime Nachricht 143 T Faille des buff rs sfr
72. 0 00 127 7F 5 2 TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 Channel 1 Send2 Leve CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 Channel 2 Send2 Leve CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 Channel 3 Send2 Leve CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 Channel 4 Send2 Leve CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 Channel 5 Send2 Leve CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 Channel 6 Send2 Leve CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 Channel 7 Send2 Leve CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 Channel 8 Send2 Leve CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 4 2 TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 Solo CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATU
73. 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 6 Track 6 Volume CC 69 45 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 7 Track 7 Volume CC 70 46 0 00 127 7F 6 2 3 TRACK FADER 8 Track 8 Volume CC 71 47 000 127 7F 6 D MASTER FADER Master Volume CC 81651 0600 127 7F 6 2 TRACK GROUP 1 8 Base Track 1 CC 97 61 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 9 16 Base Track 9 CC 98 62 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 17 24 Base Track 17 CC 99 63 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 25 32 Base Track 25 CC 100 64 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH JOG DIAL TIME Time CC 96 60 127 7F 1 01 6 2 m CURSOR UP Up Arrow Key CC 26 1A 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN Down Arrow Key CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT Left Arrow Key CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT Right Arrow Key CC 29 1D 000 127 7F 6 E UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER Open Console View CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST Open Synth Rack CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV Go Previous Marker CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT Go Next Marker CC 13 0D 0000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO Undo CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Save as CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ Rewind CC 9 09 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW Go Previous Measure CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD Go Next Measure CC 20 14 000 1
74. 16 Play video clip 3 11 19 27 27 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 3 11 19 27 programa 4 12 20 ProgramChange 4 12 20 28 16 Play video clip 4 12 20 28 Boone de estado 28 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 4 12 20 28 de pista Track programa ua Status 5 13 21 ProgramChange 5 13 21 29 16 Play video clip 5 13 21 29 29 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 5 13 21 29 programa 6 14 22 ProgramChange 6 14 22 30 16 Play video clip 6 14 22 30 30 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 6 14 22 30 programa 7 15 23 ProgramChange 7 15 23 31 16 Play video clip 7 15 23 31 31 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 7 15 23 31 programa 8 16 24 ProgramChange 8 16 24 32 16 Play video clip 8 16 24 32 32 Cambio de Reproducir videoclip 8 16 24 32 programa Boton de 1 8 BF 00 00 BF 2000 Video palettel Paleta de video 1 selecci n degrupo 9 16 BF0001BF2000 Video palette 2 Paleta de v deo 2 de pistas Track 17 24 BF0002BF2000 Video palette 3 Paleta de v deo 3 Group 25 32 BF0003BF2000 Video palette 4 Paleta de video 4 En el modo V LINK no podr controlar los par metros de pista del software secuenciador o similar de la secci n de control de pistas Para poder controlar el software secuenciador presione el bot n V LINK para desactivarlo E Controles utilizados en el modo V LINK Fije las etiquetas de V LINK en la hoja de plantillas proporcionada fig VLinkTrackControl V LINK INPUT 13
75. 196 Tama o del b fer ss 328 Tempo ica 77 143 209 275 Tempo Tempo nena 341 Terminal de toma de tierra 288 Tiempo de recuperaci n de datos 328 Tiempo de recuperaci n de datos de audio 328 TIME dial sitiar 21 35 38 42 54 TIME manopola 219 233 236 240 252 TIME Wahlscheibe 87 101 104 108 120 Tipo fono REA nn eb ee Va pisi 290 ERR EU EE 141 TITLE Se ia 75 273 TITER Titulo aeneon 339 TITRE cun 207 Tracce manopole di controllo REOR 216 232 235 239 242 246 251 267 Track Control knobs 18 34 37 41 48 53 Track control knobs ii 44 69 Track Control section 18 34 37 41 44 48 53 Track Control sezione is 216 232 235 239 242 246 251 Track Fader 86 100 103 107 110 114 119 134 Track faders 20 34 37 41 44 48 53 68 TRACK GROUP 20 86 152 218 284 Track Group select button 20 34 Track group select button i 69 Track Group pulsante 218 232 267 Track Status buttons 19 34 37 41 44 48 53 Track status buttons iii 69 Track Status pulsanti EE EE 217 232 235 239 242 246 251 267 TRACK STATUS HO PART 19 85 151 217 283 TRACK HO CONTROL
76. 28 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 50 19 31 16 32 CH 17 24 CH 25 32 H H E Sezione Track Control Fader delle tracce I fader controllano il volume del mixer Questi fader utilizzati insieme al pulsante Bank permettono di controllare 32 tracce Master fader Controlla il guadagno master del VST mixer H Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART d Questi pulsanti permettono di cambiare lo stato di ogni canale Questi pulsanti utilizzati insieme al pulsante Bank permettono di controllare 32 tracce Modalit Stato del pulsante SELECT Funzione MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva l esclusione audio del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato READ RED Attiva disattiva la riproduzione automation del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato WRITE ORANGE Attiva disattiva la registrazione automation del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole controllano le funzioni Pan Send 1 level e Send 2 level del canale Utilizzare il pulsante Assign per selezionare Pan Send 1 level o Send 2 level Queste manopole utilizzate insieme al pulsante Bank permettono di controllare 32 tracce Pulsante Bank BANK Questo pulsante cambia il gruppo di canali sui quali si sta lav
77. 2F 7 07 7147 E UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 8 REC REC RDY 8 BO OF 07 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO AUTO 1 BO OF 00 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO AUTO 2 BO OF 01 BO 2F 404 7 68 44 E UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO AUTO3 BO OF 02 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 E UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO AUTO4 BO OF 03 BO 2F 404 7 68 44 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO AUTO5 BO OF 04 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 Z UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO AUTO6 BO OF 05 BO 2F 404 7 68 44 a UNLATCH ad TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO AUTO7 BO OF 06 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO AUTOS BO OF 07 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH ad TRACK FADER 1 FADER 1 B00F00B02F40 0 00 127 7F z E B000 dd BO 2000 BO OF 00 BO 2F 00 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK FADER 2 FADER 2 BO OF 01 B02F40 0 00 127 7F z z B001 dd B02100 BO OF 01 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 3 FADER 3 BO OF 02 BO 2F 40 0 00 127 7F H BO 02 dd B0 2200 BO OF 02 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 4 FADER 4 BO OF 03 BO 2F 40 0 00 127 7F B003 dd B0 23 00 BO OF 03 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 5 FADER 5 BO OF 04 BO 2F 40 0 00 127 7F BO 04 dd B0 2400 BO OF 04 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 6 FADER 6 BO OF 05 BO 2F 40 0 00 12
78. 39 Controlling your software E Settings in Cubase VST Macintosh users 40 1 2 pr A 10 11 From the Options menu choose Remote Setup Setup Make the following settings in the VST Remote dialog box and click OK Remote Generic Remote Input UR 80 2 Output UR 80 1 In the Generic Remote window that appears click EDIT to open the Generic Remote Setup dialog box Click Import Select EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml which you copied earlier and click Open Close the dialog box From the Edit menu choose Preferences Key Commands From the popup menu choose Arrange Editors and make the following settings Command Ev type Event Cursor left Controller 28 Cursor right Controller 29 Cursor up Controller 26 Cursor down Controller 27 Check the Remote Active box Check the Remote Key box and set it to C 2 Arrange Editors O Preferences Key Commands EA Remote Active A Remote Key Command Select Tool 4 Select Tool 5 Select Tool 6 Select Tool 7 Select Tool 8 Select Tool 9 Select Tool 10 Cursor left Controller Ctrl 28 Cursor right Controller Ctrl 29 Cursor up Controller Ctrl 26 Cursor down Controller Ctrl 27 Nudge Event Left Nudge Event Right Nudge Event Up Nudge Event Down Click OK to close the dialog box Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the con
79. 40 28 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC Track 2 Record Arm CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC Track 3 Record Arm CC 42 2A 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC Track 4 Record Arm CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC Track 5 Record Arm CC HOC 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC Track 6 Record Arm CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC Track 7 Record Arm CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC Track 8 Record Arm CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO Track 1 Write Arm CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO Track 2 Write Arm CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO Track 3 Write Arm CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO Track 4 Write Arm CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO Track 5 Write Arm CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO Track 6 Write Arm CC 5 05 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO Track 7 Write Arm CC 6 06 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO Track 8 Write Arm CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 Track 1 Volume CC 6440 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK FADER 2 Track 2 Volume CC 65 41 000 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 3 Track 3 Volume CC 66 42 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 4 Track 4 Volume CC 67 43 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 5 Track 5 Volume CC 68 44
80. 6 FADER 6 90 6D 7F E5 II 0 00 00 2 Z mm 90 6D 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER 7 FADER 7 90 6E 7F E6 0 00 00 2 mm 90 6E 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER 8 FADER 8 90 6F 7F E7 Il 0 00 00 x 2 mm 90 6F 00 6383 7F 7F MASTER FADER MASTER FADER 90 70 7F ES Il 0 00 00 E 2 E mm 90 70 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK GROUP 1 8 READ OTE74 4A 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 9 16 WRITE OTE 75 4B 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 17 24 TOUCH OTE 774D 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 25 32 LATCH OTE 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH JOG DIAL TIME JOG WHEEL CC 60 3C 65 41 1 01 2 CURSOR UP CURSOR UP OTE 96 60 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN CURSOR DOWN OTE 97 61 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT CURSOR LEFT OTE 98 62 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR RIGHT OTE 99 63 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER BANK LEFT OTE 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST BANK RIGHT OTE 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV ASSIGNMENT PAN 902A7F9020 z 2 UNLATCH SURROUND Angle 7F 90 20 00 90 2A 00 FUNCTION 4 NEXT ASSIGNMENT SEND 90297F9021 2 UNLATCH Level 7F 90 21 00 90 29 00 FUNCTION 5 UNDO WINDOW AR 9046 7E 9036 2 UNLATCH RANGEMENT 7F 90 36 00 90 46 00 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS WINDOW TRACK 90467F9037 2 UNLATCH MIXER 7F 90 37 00 90 46 00 TRANSPORT RIZ SCRUB OTE 101 65 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW REWIND OTE 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 1 2
81. 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC REC RDY 3 OTE 2 02 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC REC RDY 4 OTE 3 03 0 00 127 7F 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC REC RDY 5 OTE 4 04 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC REC RDY 6 OTE 5 05 0 00 7 127 7F E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC REC RDY7 OTE 6 06 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC REC RDY 8 OTE 7 07 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO SELECT 1 OTE 24 18 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO SELECT 2 OTE 25 19 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO SELECT 3 OTE 26 1A 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO SELECT 4 OTE 27 1B 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO SELECT5 OTE 28 1C 0 00 127 7F z REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO SELECT 6 OTE 29 1D 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO SELECT 7 OTE 30 1E 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO SELECT 8 OTE 31 1F 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRANSPORT PLAY PLAY OTE 94 5E 0 00 127 7F REMOTE LED TRANSPORT REC RECORD OTE 95 5F 0 00 7 127 7F REMOTE USR4 MEMORY Pro Tools LE Digital Performer PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE PORT H ACTIVITY ON PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL I PAN PANI BO OF OB BO 2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 02 BO 40 dd TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN PAN 2 BO OF 0B BO OF 0B B
82. 7F 6 2 x TRACK FADER 4 C2 12 CC 51 33 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 5 C2 13 CC 52 34 0400 127 7F 6 2 370 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK FADER 6 C2 14 CC 53 35 0000 127 7F 16 2 TRACK FADER 7 C2 15 CC 54 36 0 00 127 7F 16 2 TRACK FADER 8 C2 16 CC 5537 0400 127 7F 16 2 MASTER FADER C2 MASTER CC 8161 0 00 127 7F 16 2 TRACK GROUP 1 8 NO ASSIGN S TRACK GROUP 9 16 E NO ASSIGN z z z z TRACK GROUP 17 24 NO ASSIGN z E TRACK GROUP 25 32 NO ASSIGN z E S JOG DIAL TIME VALUE CC 96 60 127 7F 1 01 6 2 CURSOR UP CURSOR UP CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN CURSOR DOWN CC 27 1B 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT CURSOR LEFT CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR RIGHT CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER FI CC 10 0A 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST F2 CC 11 0B 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV F3 CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT F4 CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO F5 CC 14 0E 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F
83. 8 Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le bouton de groupe de pistes pour commuter les pistes Commande d att nuation MASTER Contr le le volume principal du Mixer Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ces boutons commutent l tat des pistes Mode Etat du bouton SELECT Fonction MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d sactive la mise en solo des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint EQ RED Active d sactive l galiseur EQ Activ allum D sactiv teint ORANGE Vous pouvez affecter tous les param tres Reason souhait s comme boutons de r glage usage g n ral s Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Utilisez ces boutons pour r gler le panoramique du canal les aigu s d galiseur EQ TREBLE et les basses d galiseur EQ BASS Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour basculer entre panoramique aigu s d galiseur et basses d galiseur x a H u 185 Contr le de votre logiciel Section Master Control TEMPO TEMPO gt F1 F2 INPUT MONITOR LEVEL DO aja gt MIDI en SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT a JJOO O O StToP _ START J MIDI SYNC 186 Boutons curseurs Si vous avez activ la fonction MIDI Clock Sync de Reason et contr lez le tempo ces boutons d
84. 80 pari a 10 mA a 48 V DC Non collegare contemporaneamente tipi diversi di microfono ad esempio non collegare un microfono condenser ad alimentazione phantom all ingresso 1 e uno dinamico all ingresso 2 Fornire un alimentazione k phantom a un microfono dinamico o a un dispositivo di riproduzione audio sard fonte di malfunzionamenti H H u 223 Parti e relative funzioni 25 Interruttore di selezione dell impedenza d ingresso INPUT 1 IMP possibile selezionare un impedenza alta Hi Z o bassa Lo Z per il dispositivo collegato all ingresso 1 Se si collega una chitarra all ingresso 1 impostare questo interruttore su un impedenza alta Hi Z 26 Interruttore di alimentazione phantom PHANTOM Attiva o disattiva l alimentazione phantom delle prese d ingresso XLR 1 e 2 L alimentazione phantom dovr essere disattivata a meno che non si utilizzi un microfono condenser che richiede questo tipo di alimentazione Si potrebbero verificare dei malfunzionamenti se un microfono dinamico o un dispositivo di riproduzione audio ricevono un alimentazione phantom Per informazioni sulle specifiche tecniche del microfono consultare il relativo manuale utente Il valore massimo dell alimentazione phantom dell UR 80 pari a 10 mA a 48 V DC 27 Slot per la sicurezza R http www kensington com Pannello laterale 28 29 28 Prese d uscita Master di tipo RCA phono Sono uscite audio analogic
85. 80 MIDI OUT MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN 6 MIDI IN EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 2 94 Grundlegende Anschl sse und Einstellungen E Audiodatenfluss Blockdiagramm SAMPLE RATE USB COAXIAL IN CONVERTER COAXIAL OUT OPTICAL IN O ANTON OPTICAL OUT TRS ONLY P XLR ONLY Lo Z Hi Z L lt OUTPUT INPUT 1 our G INPUT 2 lt PHONES u INPUT MONITOR STEREO MONO Wenn Sie MIDI Anschl sse nutzen Selbst wenn das UR 80 nicht via USB Kabel mit Ihrem Computer verbunden ist k nnen Sie die MIDI IN OUT Anschliisse des UR 80 mit einer MIDI Schnittstelle verbinden die an Ihren Computer angeschlossen ist USB cable MIDI interface sold separately een ro kalni RP E MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI cables MIDI cable n MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN K ams k L Cuon sold separately Transmit port 2 Transmit port 2 Wenn der Anschluss via MIDI erfolgt ist die Audiofunktionalit t des UR 80 nicht verf gbar c S D X H u 95 Grundlegende Anschl sse und Einstellungen Eingabe Ausgabegerate Um bestm gliche Leistung der Software zu erzielen m ssen Sie die entsprechenden Einstellungen f r die Eingabe Ausgabe an den Ger ten vornehmen N here Informationen zu diesen Einstellungen erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch Ihrer Software Wen
86. C Italiana Eenannl UR 80 Editor E Affectation d un message MIDI Fen tre Message Assign Controller name LED reception message assignment area EDIROL UR 80 Editor RACK STATUS 1 MUTE 2 Assign Message Channel Message Step 2 Type Control Change vi MIDI Channel 16 Step 3 Control Number Min Value Max Value Message assignment area a e p MJ Settings Step 4 Output Port Port 2 v Step 5 Button Mode UNLATOH O LATCH Step 6 LED Mode Remote v Message Channel Message O Free Message Type Control Change v MIDIChannel 16 M Step 7 Control Number OFF Value ON Value 127 v Comment Step 8 Comment input area Cancel Step 9 Dans la fen tre Main cliquez sur le contr leur auquel vous voulez affecter un message Dans la zone Assign Message de la fen tre Message Assign s lectionnez le type de message que vous souhaitez affecter En fonction du type de message s lectionn utilisez les champs de la zone Assign Message pour sp cifier chaque param tre du message La majorit des champs de param tres sont sp cifi s sous forme d un nombre d cimal Cependant pour un Free Message vous devez entrer des valeurs hexad cimales dans la zone d entr e Message Sp cifiez le port de sortie dans le champ Output Port Si le contr leur est un bouton sp cifiez le Bouton Mode Si le contr leur est un interrupteur sp cifiez le Knob Mode Mode I
87. CH 9 16 Audiokan le 9 16 INST 1 8 VST Instrumentenkan le 1 8 GRP 1 8 Gruppenkan le 1 8 Eenannl 107 Steuerung Ihrer Software Abschnitt Master Control ANALOG ep DIGITAL Cursor Schaltflachen ive Diese Schaltfl chen f hren die folgenden Funktionen aus na gt Schaltfl che Funktion a Nach oben VP Nach unten SES q Nach links MIXER wer mm nei EE gt Nach rechts LOCATOR COMMAND Se EH Funktionsschaltfl chen SETI GR i SAVE Schaltfl che Funktion Ha Ron MIXER Offnet schlie t das Fenster VST Channel Mixer AL TH EFFECTS ffnet schlie t das Fenster VST Send Effect SES INPUT INST Offnet schlie t das Fenster VST Instruments INPUTS Offnet schlie t das Fenster VST Inputs LEFT Verschiebt den Cursor zur Markenposition links SET L Legt die aktuelle Cursorposition als linke Marke fest RIGHT Verschiebt den Cursor in die Markenposition rechts SET R Legt die aktuelle Cursorposition als rechte Marke fest O O COPY Kopiert das aktuell ausgew hlte Objekt UNDO Macht die vorherige Operation wieder r ckg ngig PASTE F gt das kopierte Objekt in die angegebene Position ein SAVE Speichert das aktuelle Projekt in einer Datei Transportschalter Diese Schalter f hren fo
88. Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 As of April 1 2003 EDIROL 1 03236889 03 6 1N
89. Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the controllers Please affix the Cubase SX labels to the included template sheet The explanation below will follow these settings CUBASE SX INPUT 122 ASSIGN PEAK 1 _ __ __Q_Q_ _ me sika BIER EIER EIER O mE O PAN a a nn o Be KA S E Ka fa KA S KA a KA a ga S Ka A O SEND 2 2 a 4 x x 4 v 4 v 4 v x 4 x CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE el HO TRACK STATUS EM PART SELECT Ci ame 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9725 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 SE al OFF MUTE GREEN SOLO RED READ ORANGE WRITE CH 17 24 CH 25 32 Track Control section x 4 E C Track faders The faders control the volume of the mixer By using the faders in conjunction with the bank button you can control 32 channels Master fader Control the master gain of VST Mixer Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART These buttons switch the status of each channel Erannaie By using the buttons in conjunction with the bank button you can control 32 channels Mode SELECT button status MUTE OFF Function Switches channel mute on off On lit Off unlit Switches channel solo on off On lit Off unlit Switches channel automation playback on off On lit Off unlit Switches channel automation recording on off On lit Off unlit Track Contr
90. E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO 52 6 O ASSIG E E 3 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO 52 7 O ASSIG z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO 52 8 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRANSPORT PLAY gt play O ASSIG B B z BUTTON LED TRANSPORT REC O rec O ASSIG z S BUTTON 369 USR7 MCR 8 Mode4 B 9 16 PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE FO 41 10 64 12 00 03 7D F7 FO 41 10 64 12 01 02 7D F7 PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1 PAN CT CC 56 38 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN C1 10 CC 57689 0 00 127 7F 6 2 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN CLII CC 586A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN C1 12 CC 59 3B 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN C1 13 CC 60 3C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN CI 14 CC 61 3D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN C1 15 CC 62 3E 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN C1 16 CC 63 3F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 p TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 CI9 CC 56 38 000 127 7F 6 2 S TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 C1 10 CC 57 39 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 C1 11 CC 586A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 a TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 C1 12 CC 59 3B 0 00 127
91. Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorgheni TEL 066 164 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstras Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str
92. FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO f F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER S FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST amp Ha CJ pi SHIFT GS Il SHIFT EY lt lt CO E Cam K gt d gt gt nam d 121 Steuerung Ihrer Software MCR 8 Modus 4 B und UR 80 USR7 Controller Zuweisungen 122 MCR 8 UR 80 C19 16 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN S1 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S2 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C2 9 16 TRACK FADER 1 8 C1 MASTER z SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME W hlscheibe S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT D a Vv sy FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST a m pi SHIFT H SHIFT E lt gt gt Aufnahme von Audio Dieses Kapitel erl utert verschiedene Methoden fiir den Anschluss und die Verwendung des UR 80 Um Fehlfunktionen und oder Sch den an Lautsprechern oder anderen Ger ten zu verhindern reduzieren Sie stets die Lautst rke und schalten alle Ger te ab bevor Sie die Verbindungen einrichten Enalieh Grundlegende Verwendung S
93. Fader Bank den Pegel aller Kan le regeln Verwenden Sie die Funktionsschaltfl chen FADER BANK um die Fader B nke umzuschalten Master Fader Steuert die Gesamtlautst rke des Audio Mixers Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Diese Schaltfl chen schalten den Status der einzelnen Kan le um Wenn Sie die Fader Bank umschalten k nnen Sie den Status aller Kan le steuern Verwenden Sie die Funktionsschaltfl chen FADER BANK um die Fader B nke umzuschalten Modus Status der Funktion Schaltfl che SELECT MUTE OFF Stummschaltung an aus fiir Kanal Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Schaltet die Solo Funktion fiir den Kanal ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet REC RED Schaltet die Aufnahmebereitschaft fiir den Kanal ein aus RDY Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SELECT ORANGE W hlt den Kanal auf den eine Operation f r einen einzelnen Kanal angewendet wird Ausgew hlt beleuchtet Nicht ausgew hlt unbeleuchtet Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe dienen als Encoder Der Wert erh ht sich wenn der Track Control Schaltknopf nach rechts gedreht wird und verringert sich wenn der Schaltknopf nach links gedreht wird Diese Ver nderung Erh hung Reduzierung stoppt wenn Sie den Schaltknopf in die mittige Position zur ckstellen Verwenden Sie die Funktionsschaltfl che ASSIGNMENT um die Parameter umzuschalten die von diesen Schaltfl chen
94. If you use many softwares or start up other softwares during playback playback may be interrupted depending on your computer system Please exit unneeded softwares and try again If this does not resolve the problem try restarting your computer e Graphic accelerators may cause noise to be heard during audio playback only Windows user Use the following procedure to turn the graphic accelerator Off 1 In the Windows Control Panel double click Display to open the Display Properties dialog box and click the Settings tab Click Advanced and in the properties that appear click the Performance tab For Windows XP click Advanced and then click the Troubleshoot tab For Windows 2000 click Advanced and then click the Troubleshooting tab Set the Hardware acceleration slider to None and click OK In the Display Properties dialog box click OK to close the dialog box Then restart your computer e Try using the following procedure to change your disk drive settings only Windows user The following setting item may not exist on some computers 1 2 3 4 In the Windows Control Panel double click System Click the Device Manager tab Double click Disk Drives to see the list of devices From the list select GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE and click Properties to access the GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE Properties dialog box Inthe field of GENERIC IDE DISK TYPE there will be a number that differs dependi
95. Lancement de l enregistrement SHIFT Activation d sactivation du point d entr e d enregistrement automatique SHIFT Activation d sactivation du point de sortie d enregistrement automatique SHIFT Activation d sactivation du m tronome SHIFT Activation d sactivation du cycle Logic Jeu de sons Utilisez URS3 Maintenez le bouton MEMORY de l UR 80 enfonc et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status USR3 Logiciel Vous avez besoin de Logic 5 version 5 5 ou ult rieure u A chaque d marrage de Logic vous devez s lectionner le jeu de sons pour Logic dans V UR 80 lui m me E R glages de Logic 1 Lancez Logic 2 Apr s le d marrage de Logic s lectionnez le jeu de sons pour Logic dans l UR 80 F M me si le jeu de sons pour Logic est d j s lectionn dans l UR 80 vous devez s lectionner le jeu de sons H de Logic chaque lancement de Logic F C 3 Sila fen tre Setup s affiche cliquez sur l ic ne Logic Control situ e sur la droite de la fen tre Si la fen tre Setup ne s affiche pas passez l tape 7 4 Dans la zone Logic Control sur la partie gauche de la fen tre Setup effectuez les r glages Out Port suivants M me si l affichage indique d j les r glages signal s ci dessous effectuez nouveau les r glages Out Port EDIROL UR 80 pour Windows ou Mac OS X Out Port UR 80 1 pour Mac OS 9 5 Fermez la bo te de dia
96. MSB ll Bank number LSB mmH 1H OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 00H 7FH Program change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number pp Program number Channel pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Channel pressure Pitch bend change Status 2nd byte OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 3rd byte EnH 1H n MIDI channel number mm ll Pitch Bend value mmH OH FH Ch 1 16 00 00H 40 00H 7FH 7FH 8192 0 8191 E Channel mode messages The UR 80 lets you assign any channel voice message to LED mode and receive it Channel mode messages Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH ccH n MIDI channel number cc controller number vv control value vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 78H TEH 00H 7FH OAII sounds off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 OReset all controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 OAII notes off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 379 MIDI implementation E System common message On the UR 80 you can assign the following system common messages to LED mode and receive them MTC quarter
97. Master Control section and Audio Control section The Track Control section and Master Control section provide 43 controllers to which you can assign MIDI messages By using these controllers in conjunction with the SHIFT button and including assignments to LEDs you can assign a total of 136 different MIDI messages Use UR 80 Editor to assign MIDI messages to controllers and to edit the assignments UR 80 Editor is provided on the included CD ROM For details on UR 80 Editor refer to UR 80 Editor p 73 Track Control section Master Control section EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Audio Control section REC INPUT SOURCE MONITOR SHIET ec prej o o bal ua kal e Track Control section p 18 e Master Control section p 21 e Audio Control section p 23 An indication of SEXE for a controller in the explanations that follow means that you can assign a MIDI message to this controller 17 Italiana Erannaie Na terh Eenannl Names of Things and What They Do E Track Control section The Track Control section lets you control the track parameters of your seguencer software In addition to volume and pan you can also control parameters such as track status and effect send level By switching track groups you can control the parameters of up to 32 tracks The co
98. Open 6 Klicken Sie auf 44 oben rechts um das Dialogfeld zu schlie en 7 Wahlen Sie Edit Preferences Key Commands 8 Klicken Sie auf das Register Arrangements Editors und nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen vor Command Event Type Event Cursor left Controller Control 28 Cursor right Controller Control 29 Cursor up Controller Control 26 Cursor down Controller Control 27 9 Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollk stchen Remote Active 10 Aktivieren Sie das K stchen Remote Key und CR I Cd KN setzen Sie es auf C 2 Rata aaa ee 11 Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld zu e wes COMMAND Ki EVENT TYPE EVENT ICON schlieBen s moler Gerd ursor Control 29 Control 26 Control 27 of one off Dison one OH ott OH OH OH OH OH OH 105 z u Erannaie u Italiana Eenannl Steuerung Ihrer Software E Einstellungen in Cubase VST Macintosh Anwender 1 2 an ma St 10 11 106 Wahlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt Remote Setup Setup Nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen im Dialogfeld VST Remote vor und klicken Sie auf OK Remote Generic Remote Input UR 80 2 Output UR 801 Klicken Sie im Fenster Generic Remote das daraufhin erscheint auf EDIT um das Dialogfeld Generic Remote Setup zu ffnen Klicken Sie auf Import Wahlen Sie EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml das Sie zuvor kopiert haben und klicken Sie auf Open SchlieBen Sie d
99. STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 Solo CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH 355 356 a PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo CC 707 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 Select CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK
100. STATUS HQ PART mme Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI a chacun de ces huit boutons Vous pouvez galement affecter des messages MIDI au voyant de chaque bouton et allumer teindre les voyants partir P de votre logiciel s quenceur E A chaque bouton et voyant vous pouvez affecter quatre messages diff rents un pour chaque tat t du bouton de s lection teint vert rouge orange En d autres termes vous pouvez affecter un k total de 32 messages MIDI aux boutons Track Status et 32 messages MIDI aux voyants En r gle g n rale ces boutons servent a commuter le statut des pistes par exemple Mute muet et Solo sur votre logiciel s quenceur 4 Bouton de s lection SELECT Ce bouton commute les messages MIDI affect s aux boutons Track Status et leurs voyants Si vous appuyez sur le bouton de selection vous pouvez faire d filer ces choix teint vert gt rouge gt orange c d H Z Eenannl 151 ORANGE AUTO 2 18 5 21 7 23 8 24 16 32 5 Commandes d att nuation Track Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI chacune de ces huit commandes d att nuation En r gle g n rale les commandes d att nuation Track servent a r gler le volume des pistes sur votre logiciel s quenceur 6 Commande d att nuation principale MASTER mn Vous pouvez affecter un message MIDI a cette commande d att nuation La commande d att nuatio
101. TIME W hlscheibe um die Songposition innerhalb Ihres HQ evo NEU Sequenzerprogramms zu verschieben K SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT H dg GE lt MONO MEMO S u Wenn Sie die SHIFT Schaltfl che gedr ckt halten und die TIME W hlscheibe drehen passt der Drehknopf den Input Monitor Level an Um weitere Informationen zur berwachung der Eingabe zu erhalten lesen Sie bitte S 88 10 Funktionsschaltfl chen Sie k nnen diesen sechs Schaltflachen MIDI H Nachrichten zuweisen Da Sie auch Nachrichten e f r die gedr ckte SHIFT Schaltfl che zuweisen k nnen k nnen Sie diesen Schaltflachen insgesamt 12 MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Sie werden diese Funktionsschaltflachen normalerweise verwenden um in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm verschiedene Befehle auszuf hren 11 Transportschalter acciai Sie k nnen diesen sechs Schaltflachen MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Da Sie auch Nachrichten fiir die gedr ckte SHIFT Schaltfl che zuweisen k nnen k nnen Sie diesen Schaltfl chen insgesamt z 12 MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen K Sie k nnen auch MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen um die beiden LEDs zu steuern die sich oberhalb u der Gen und Ca Transportschaltfl chen befinden Diese Schaltflachen werden normalerweise verwendet um den Transport Ihres Sequenzerprogramms zu steuern i 87 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen 12 Schaltfl chen f r die Systemeinstellung Modusauswahl Verwenden Sie diese Schaltfl chen um die Einste
102. Track Control OE SRE NA IN 84 100 103 107 110 114 119 AC adaptor connector ee 24 ANALOG en 22 88 154 220 286 Aparato de entrada MIDI en 294 Aparato de salida MIDI 294 Aparatos de audio 4 294 Aparatos MIDI 294 rea de asignaci n NIT MESSAGE 339 ASIO Saona 30 96 162 228 294 ASIO ET 375 ASIO Direct Monitor 65 131 197 263 329 ASIO Driver ur 378 ASSEGNAZIONE ici 216 ASSIGN ici ail 18 84 150 282 Assign button iii na 18 68 76 Assign pulsante 216 266 274 Atenuador m ster MASTER 284 Atenuadores de pista 298 301 305 308 312 317 Atenuadores de pistas 284 332 Audio Control section ss 23 Audio Control sezione ii 221 Audio devices israele aaa 30 Ee VE EE 29 Audio latency sees ee ci 64 Audio be a 227 Audio periferiche ss 228 Audiodatenthuss ssis fanale id 95 Eer 96 E H EE 130 A nr pitas Eau 96 Ausgabelautst rke Schaltknopf VOLUME 89 Auswahlschaltfl che i 85 142 Automatikmodus Schaltfl che 115 Automatikschaltfl che ii 110 Automation button ss 44 Automation Mode button in 49 Automation Mode pulsante 247 Automation pulsante ii 242 B Bank butt ei a 37 41 Bank Select
103. UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT D a Vv sy FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST ka aaa pi SHIFT H SHIFT E lt gt gt Recording audio This chapter explains various ways in which you can connect and use the UR 80 To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Basic use You can connect headphones and or monitor speakers as shown in the diagram and monitor the playback of your application or the sound of instruments or audio devices connected to the UR 80 Computer i AC adaptor da USB cable ECH Monitor speakers Narstenh So 80 aa wl a op Ir Headphones This adjusts the volume that is output from Erannaie the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers Using the sampling frequency e You must set the UR 80 s sampling frequency select switch to match the sampling frequency used by your application Italiana If the sampling frequency select switch is set to 96 kHz R
104. UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD FASTFWD OTE 92 5C 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP STOP OTE 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY PLAY OTE 94 5E 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC RECORD OTE 95 5F 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP ZOOM CURSOR UP 90647F9064 5 B 2 UNLATCH 00 90 60 7F 90 60 00 90 64 7F 90 64 00 SHIFT CURSOR DOWN ZOOM CURSOR 90 64 7F 90 64 2 UNLATCH DOWN 00 90 61 7F 90 61 00 90 64 TE 90 64 00 SHIFT CURSOR LEFT ZOOM CURSOR 90 64 7F 90 64 2 UNLATCH LEFT 00 90 62 7F 90 62 00 90 64 TE 90 64 00 SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT ZOOM CURSOR 90 64 7F 90 64 E 2 UNLATCH RIGHT 00 90 63 7F 90 63 00 90 64 7F 90 64 00 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER CHANNEL LEFT OTE 48 30 0 00 7 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST CHANNEL RIGHT OTE 49 31 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV ASSIGNMENT EQ 902C7F9022 2 UNLATCH Gain ZE 90 22 00 90 2C 00 SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT ASSIGNMENT 90 28 7F 90 21 2 UNLATCH TRACK Pan 7F 90 21 00 90 28 00 SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO UTILITIES UNDO OTE 8161 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS UTILITIES SAVE OTE 80 50 0 00 127 7F 1 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ O ASSIGN a S E SHIFT TRANSPORT REW O ASSIGN x S SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD O ASSIGN E SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP O ASSIGN z SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY S O ASSIGN E S SHIFT TRANSPORT REC O ASSIGN z LED
105. VIB DEPTH O PAN GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE AUTO Track Fader Die Fader steuern die Lautst rke des Mixers Sie k nnen die acht Spuren von der ausgew hlten Track Bank steuern Verwenden Sie die Cursor Schaltfl chen um die Track Bank zu wechseln Master Fader Der Master Fader wird nicht verwendet Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Diese Schaltfl chen schalten den Status der Spur um Modus Status der Schaltflache Funktion SELECT MUTE OFF Stummschaltung fiir Spur ein ausschalten Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Solo Funktion fiir Spur ein ausschalten Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet REC RDY RED Aufnahmebereitschaft fiir Spur ein ausschalten Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet AUTO ORANGE Halten Sie diese Schaltflache gedriickt und verwenden Sie die Automatikmodus Schaltfl che AUTO MODE um die Automatikeinstellung fiir die Spur zu andern Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe steuern Panorama Send 1 und Send 2 f r die Spur Verwenden Sie die Schaltfl che Assign um Panorama Send 1 oder Send 2 auszuw hlen Dieser Wert erh ht sich w hrend der Schaltknopf nach rechts gedreht wird und verringert sich w hrend der Schaltknopf nach links gedreht wird Diese Ver nderung Erh hung Reduzierung stoppt wenn Sie den Schaltknopf in die mittige Position zur ckstellen S
106. YY Agrandit l affichage verticalement R duit l affichage horizontalement SHIFT lt q Agrandit l affichage horizontalement lt SHIFT Boutons de fonction k Bouton Fonction MIXER Ouvre la fen tre Console NEXT Passe la fen tre suivante INST Ouvre la fen tre Synth Rack CLOSE Ferme la fen tre PREV Revient a la balise pr c dente SET Ins re une balise NEXT Passe la balise suivante LIST Ouvre la fen tre Marker Balise UNDO Annule la derni re modification REDO R tablit la derni re modification SAVE AS Ex cute l op ration Enregistrer sous SAVE Enregistre Composition TIME f Tournez la molette pour d placer le curseur Boutons de transport Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction D place le curseur au d but de la chanson bal Rebobinage a Avance rapide _ c Ce Arr t de la lecture ou de l enregistrement 3 a Lancement de la lecture D u ES Lancement de l enregistrement Lancement de l enregistrement automatique SHIFT E 8 9 Contr le de votre logiciel Cubase SX Jeu de sons Utilisez USR1 Maintenez le bouton MEMORY de l UR 80 enfonc et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status USR1 Logiciel Vous devez utiliser Cubase SX et EDIROL UR 80 pour SX xml EDIROL UR 80 pour SX xml se trouve dans le dossier SX situ dans le dossier Cubase Remote du CD ROM joint Avant de continuer copiez EDIROL UR 80 pour SX xml dans vot
107. anschlie end zu editieren 1 W hlen Sie im Men Communication den Men punkt Receive Y 2 Das Dialogfeld Receive Memory Set Memory Set empfangen wird angezeigt K Legen Sie das Memory Set fest das Sie empfangen m chten 3 Es wird ein Dialogfeld f r die Confirm angezeigt Klicken Sie auf Continue 4 Es wird ein Dialogfeld reception progress Fortschrittsanzeige angezeigt a Wenn das Dialogfeld ausgeblendet wird wurde der Empfang abgeschlossen Wenn Sie ein Memory Set empfangen schaltet das UR 80 zu dem Memory Set um den Sie empfangen haben c c da 6 G a H u 147 Sichern oder Laden im SMF Format Ein Memory Set das Sie im UR 80 Editor bearbeiten kann im SMF Format gesichert geladen werden E Sichern eines Memory Sets im SMF Format Nachfolgend wird erkl rt wie das aktuell bearbeitete Memory Set im SMF Format gesichert wird Der Inhalt des Felds Comment im Fenster Message Assign wird ebenfalls in der SMF Datei gesichert 1 Wahlen Sie im Men File den Punkt Save As Wenn Sie beim Sichern die zuletzt ge ffnete Datei berschreiben m chten w hlen Sie Save 2 Geben Sie einen Dateinamen an und klicken Sie auf Save E Laden eines Memory Sets von einer SMF Datei Nachfolgend wird erkl rt wie ein Memory Set geladen wird das im SMF Format gesichert wurde Der UR 80 Editor kann auch Memory Sets f r die Edirol PCR Serie laden die im SMF Format gesichert wurde N
108. assign a message In the Assign Message area of the Message Assign window select the type of message that you want to assign According to the type of message you selected use the fields of the Assign Message area to specify each parameter of the message Most parameter fields are specified as a decimal number However for a Free Message you should input hexadecimal values in the Message input area Specify the output port in Output Port If the controller is a button specify the Button Mode If the controller is a knob specify the Knob Mode If the controller is a button with LED specify the LED Mode If you specified the LED Mode as Remote specify the LED reception message The LED reception message field lets you select either Channel Message or Free Message The parameters are the same as for a conventional assignment with the following exceptions Min Value will be the OFF value for the LED reception message The LED will turn off when this value is received Max Value will be the ON value for the LED reception message The LED will turn on when this value is received There will be no Send LSB check box for RPN or NRPN If desired input a comment in the Comment field Click OK 78 UR 80 Editor E Checking the assigned MIDI messages You can check the assigned MIDI messages in either of the following ways Method 1 e From the File menu choose View assign list All parameters of the MIDI messages as
109. audio del sistema a la unidad UR 80 Si utiliza Media Player normalmente seleccionar este aparato Tambi n debe utilizarlo si va a utilizar una aplicaci n como SONAR en modo de controlador WDM o una aplicaci n DirectSound MME EDIROL UR 80 OUT Env a se ales de audio del sistema a la unidad UR 80 Util celo si va a utilizar una aplicaci n que no dispone de modo de controlador WDM o si va a utilizar audio de 24 bits con una aplicaci n no ASIO por ejemplo Cool Edit S lo para Windows XP 2000 Aparatos de entrada de audio EDIROL UR 80 Recibe se ales de audio enviadas desde la unidad UR 80 al sistema En circunstancias normales es el que debe utilizar Tambi n debe utilizarlo si usa una aplicaci n como SONAR en modo de controlador WDM MME EDIROL UR 80 IN Recibe se ales de audio enviadas desde la unidad UR 80 al sistema Util celo si va a usar una aplicaci n que no dispone de modo de controlador WDM o si va a usar audio de 24 bits con una aplicaci n no ASIO por ejemplo Cool Edit S lo para Windows XP 2000 Aparato ASIO Seleccione EDIROL UR 80 como valor de ASIO para la aplicaci n si va a utilizar la unidad UR 80 con una aplicaci n ASIO como Cubase Para evitar que los loops de audio provoquen oscilaciones o reproducciones dobles desactive el monitoraje de la aplicaci n o utilice la configuraci n de ASIO Direct Monitor 294 Dos puertos MIDI Conexio
110. back at 96 kHz set the front panel Sampling frequency select switch to 96 kHz PLAY In order for the setting to take effect you must exit all applications switch off the UR 80 then turn it back on again The UR 80 s Sampling frequency select switch may have been set to 96 kHz REC With this setting only recording is possible Sound from the computer cannot be played back In your playback software have you specified the audio data output input destination For some software you will need to specify the UR 80 as the output destination for audio data For details on the procedure for making settings refer to the owner s manual for your software Are you running multiple applications If multiple applications are running simultaneously an error message may appear If this occurs click OK and exit the other applications 373 Troubleshooting Even if an application window is closed it is still running if it appears in the taskbar Be sure to exit unneeded applications displayed Was the driver installed correctly In order for you to play back audio data via the UR 80 the driver must be installed Is your computer in Suspend or Sleep mode If so get your computer to resume normal operation then exit all applications that are using the UR 80 Next turn the UR 80 s power off then switch it on again Did you plug in the USB cable or unplug it while an application was running Exit all applications that are us
111. bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 16 canaux audio 8 canaux d instruments VST et 8 canaux de groupe Mode Etat du bouton SELECT Fonction MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d sactive la mise en solo des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint SELECT RED S lectionne le canal C S lectionn allum Non s lectionn teint ORANGE Non utilis T Cal Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons r glent le Pan le niveau Send 1 et le niveau Send 2 des canaux Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour s lectionner Pan niveau Send 1 ou niveau Send 2 Si vous utilisez ces boutons avec le bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 16 canaux audio 8 canaux d instruments VST et 8 canaux de groupe Bouton de banque BANK Ce bouton commute la banque de canaux que vous r glez e Etat du bouton BANK Canaux r gl s H CH1 8 Canaux audio 1 8 s CH 9 16 Canaux audio 9 16 u INST 1 8 Canaux d instruments VST 1 8 GRP 1 8 Canaux de groupe 1 8 173 Contr le de votre logiciel Section Master Control Composition TIME Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Channel Mixer D finit l emplacement actuel du
112. built in resistor Use a cable without a built in resistor e g Roland PCS series Is the Input volume raised appropriately Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the volume The sound of a device connected to the input jack is distorted If you are inputting sound through the input jacks use the Input sensitivity knobs of the UR 80 to lower the input level 374 Troubleshooting Noise is heard during audio playback Is a mic or guitar still connected If a mic or guitar is connected to the UR 80 disconnect the mic or guitar and turn the input sensitivity knob all the way to the left Disconnect any audio devices you are not using Noise is sometimes heard in the line input or mic input If a USB compatible MIDI sound module and the UR 80 are connected via USB to the same computer and the outputs of the MIDI sound module are connected to the line input jacks of the UR 80 noise from your computer may be heard via the MIDI sound module from the UR 80 depending on the computer you are using If this occurs you can either connect the MIDI sound module and the UR 80 in parallel using a self powered hub or connect the MIDI sound module via its serial or MIDI interface Are two or more audio devices such as the UR 80 or a mixer connected to your computer Try connecting only a single UR 80 unit and check whether the noise disappears If numerous audio devices are connected to a computer noise may occur depending on your system In such
113. cases connect only the UR 80 to your computer Does your sequencer software support ASIO 2 0 only Macintosh user If your ASIO compatible software does not support ASIO 2 0 it will not operate correctly if you use UR 80 ASIO2 0 16bit or UR 80 ASIO2 0 24bit as the ASIO driver In this case select either UR 80 ASIO1 0 16bit or UR 80 ASIO1 0 24bit as the ASIO driver Does your sequencer software support 24 bit audio only Macintosh user If your ASIO compatible software does not support 24 bit audio input output it will not operate correctly if you select UR 80 ASIO1 0 24bit or UR 80 ASIO2 0 24bit as the ASIO driver In this case select either UR 80 ASIO1 0 16bit or UR 80 ASIO2 0 16bit as the ASIO driver Is the UR 80 connected to a USB hub only Macintosh user Try connecting the UR 80 directly to the USB connector of the Macintosh itself Are you using a USB device other than the UR 80 only Macintosh user Try turning off the power of all USB audio devices other than the UR 80 In some cases you may also be able to solve this problem by grounding the chassis of your computer or the grounding connector of the AC power supply plug of your computer In addition you can check whether any devices that produce a strong magnetic field are located nearby such as a television or microwave oven 375 Troubleshooting Sound is interrupted during audio playback e Are many softwares running on your computer
114. control de audio para ajustar el volumen del jack de auriculares y de los jacks de salida m ster No se puede ajustar el volumen de la se al de salida de los jacks de salida digital 290 Funcionamiento b sico Conexiones y configuraci n b sicas En esta secci n se describen las conexiones y las rutas de datos b sicas de la unidad UR 80 Antes de realizar las conexiones de otros aparatos debe bajar el volumen de todos los aparatos para evitar anomal as en el funcionamiento o da os en los altavoces Si conecta auriculares o monitores como se muestra en el diagrama podr supervisar la reproducci n del software o de la se al de los instrumentos o aparatos de audio conectados a la unidad UR 80 Conexiones b sicas Simplemente utilice un cable USB para conectar la unidad UR 80 al sistema La conexi n del cable USB permite la transferencia tanto de datos MIDI como de datos de audio Computer AC adaptor qd Fora USB cable Monitor speakers Bo 80 O O SE La Headphones EDIROL UR 80 248 7 96kHiz USB RECORDING SYSTEM This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers E Flujo MIDI Si conecta la unidad UR 80 al sistema mediante un cable USB El flujo de datos MIDI se mostrar de la siguiente manera PC port name UR 80 MIDI OUT device ED
115. curseur comme la balise de gauche D finit l emplacement actuel du curseur comme la balise de droite Colle l objet copi dans l emplacement sp cifi Boutons curseurs S mp Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes gd gt Bouton Fonction SEK a D place vers le haut ina V D place vers le bas MIXER Net q D place vers la gauche ee D place vers la droite GUN EA gt CJL Boutons de fonction SETI GER UNDO SAVE HEM PA Bouton Fonction KH LL LS MIXER SONCE UH EFFECTS Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Send Effect sis INST Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Instruments INPUTS Ouvre ferme 1 fen tre VST Instruments LEFT D place le curseur vers la balise de gauche SET L RIGHT D place le curseur vers la balise de droite O O SET R COPY Copie l objet actuellement s lectionn nr UNDO Annule l op ration pr c dente PASTE SAVE Enregistre le projet actuel dans un fichier Les noms de bouton mis entre crochets indiquent que vous pressez le bouton tout en maintenant appuy le bouton SHIFT Tournez la molette pour d placer le curseur Boutons de transport Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes 174 Fonction W o E o D placement du curseur au d but de la chanson Retour en arri re du curseur 4 Avance rapide du curseur Arr t de la lecture ou de l enregistrement Lancement de la lecture
116. datos se fija en 0 127 NRPN MSB de n mero de par metro no registrado NRPN LSB LSB de n emero S de par metro no registrado MSB Min Value Valor minimo de MSB MSB Max Value Valor m ximo de MSB Send LSB Enviar LSB System Asigna un mensaje System Common Com n del Utilice el campo Status Estado para Common sistema o System Realtime Tiempo real del sistema seleccionar el mensaje deseado Realtime Free Asigne el mensaje MIDI que desee de hasta 24 bytes Mensaje MIDI de hasta 24 bytes Data Message Puede asignar m s de un mensaje Type Tipo de datos Min Value Valor m nimo Max Value Valor m ximo Tempo Asigna control de tempo para la transmisi n de Min Tempo Tempo m nimo UR 80 Editor E Asignaci n de un mensaje MIDI Ventana Message Assign Asignar mensaje Controller name LED reception message assignment area 9 EDIROL UR 80 Editor RACK STATUS 1 MUTE 2 Channel Message Step 2 Control Change v MIDI Channel Step 3 Control Number Min Value Max Value Message assignment area o_o KE a Settings Step 4 Output Port Port 2 v Step 5 Button Mode 7 UNLATOH OLATOH Step 6 LED Mode Remote v Message 2 Channel Message O Free Message Type Control Change v MIDI Channel Step 7 Control Number OFF Value 40 D E v ON Value 127 Step 8 Comment input area Comment Step 9 En la ventana Main Principal haga clic
117. de control de pistas p g 282 e Secci n de control m ster p g 285 r e Secci n de control de audio p g 287 H we N La indicaci n BJ para un control en las explicaciones que se dan a JIN N continuaci n significa que puede asignar un mensaje MIDI al control en cuesti n 281 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an E Secci n de control de pistas La secci n de control de pistas permite controlar los par metros de pista del software secuenciador Adem s del volumen y la panor mica puede controlar par metros como el estado de pista o el nivel de env o de efectos Conmutando los grupos de pistas puede controlar los par metros de incluso 32 pistas El contenido que se controlar en la pr ctica depender del software que utilice En el modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador o en el modo V LINK la unidad UR 80 funcionar de forma diferente a la descrita en este manual Para obtener m s detalles consulte el apartado Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador p g 332 o el apartado Modo V LINK p g 335 TRACK LUICONTROL d N lt N CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK 1 Controles giratorios de control de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos ocho controles giratorios Pueden asignarse tres mensajes diferentes a cada control giratorio uno para cada estado del bot n
118. de memoria iii 296 SONJA RS Na ah ANA EN O dai 297 Configuraci n en SONAR ena 297 Funciones asignadas a los controladores a iii 298 Cubase ege en EEA iii 300 Configuraci n en Cubase SX 300 Funciones asignadas a los controladores aaa 301 Cubase VS E E E EEE il saith 303 Configuraci n en Cubase VST usuarios de Windows 303 Configuraci n en Cubase VST usuarios de Macintosh 304 Funciones asignadas a los controladores iii 305 ER 307 Configuraci n en Logic 307 Funciones asignadas a los controladores iii 308 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 311 Configuraci n en ProTools LE ss 311 Configuraci n en Digital Performer ss 311 Funciones asignadas a los controladores ui 312 A ARA TE IE NA 315 Configuraci n de puertos MIDI 315 Configuraci n para las opciones de reproducci n de Reason y el aparato de entrada MID iran 315 Control del tempo de la canci n ss 316 Configuraci n de MIDI Remote Mapping 316 Funciones asignadas a los controladores ea 317 Aplicaciones compatibles con el MCR 8 de Roland EE 319 13 Grabacion de audio u di 321 Us O D SICO Synneren ee e alia spe 321 Grabaci n de una guitarra o un balo ss 322 Grabaci n desde un micr6fono ss 323 Grabaci n de UUnteclado inicia dit 324 Grabaci n de un aparato de audi
119. el software secuenciador EE E MEMO D m Go Si gira el dial TIME conel boton SHIFT presionado el dial ajustara el nivel del monitoraje de entrada Para obtener m s informaci n sobre el monitoraje de entrada consulte la p g 286 Botones de funci n iii as Assignable Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos seis botones Puesto que tambi n puede asignar mensajes manteniendo el bot n SHIFT presionado puede asignar un total de 12 mensajes MIDI a estos botones En condiciones normales utilizar los botones de funci n para ejecutar varios comandos en el software secuenciador Botones de reproducciGn nana nana nanasa nana nana nana nanasa Assignable Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos seis botones Puesto que tambi n puede asignar mensajes manteniendo el bot n SHIFT presionado puede asignar un total de 12 mensajes MIDI a estos botones Tambi n puede asignar mensajes MIDI para controlar los dos LED situados encima de los botones de reproducci n a y ES En condiciones normales estos botones sirven para controlar las funciones de reproducci n del software secuenciador Enalieh Narntenh Erannaie c d 4 z 285 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an 12 Botones de selecci n de modo configuracion del sistema Utilice estos botones para alternar entre las configuraciones y modos en la propia unidad UR 80 No se pueden asignar mensajes MIDI a los botones de selecci
120. establecer el puerto UR 80 1 como puerto MIDI IN y el puerto UR 80 2 como puerto CTRL IN para el software puede realizar operaciones como utilizar las funciones de los atenuadores o botones para controlar operaciones de mezcla en el software y utilizar los controles giratorios para editar el sintetizador software El destino de salida de los mensajes MIDI transmitidos al utilizar los atenuadores controles giratorios y botones de la unidad UR 80 puede especificarse de forma independiente para cada controlador Utilice UR 80 Editor para asignar el destino de mensajes y de salida para los controladores Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el apartado UR 80 Editor p g 337 295 Enalieh Naritenh Erannaie c s D Control del software Puede asignar los mensajes MIDI que desee a los controles giratorios atenuadores y botones de la unidad UR 80 Un conjunto de este tipo de asignaciones de mensajes MIDI se denomina conjunto de memoria La unidad UR 80 contiene ocho conjuntos de memoria diferentes en su memoria interna La unidad UR 80 viene de f brica con las asignaciones del conjunto de memoria PRESET preestablecidas Conmutaci n de conjuntos de memoria Manteniendo el bot n MEMORY presione un bot n TRACK STATUS para seleccionar un conjunto de memoria EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM ES Conjuntos de mem
121. following settings If you connect to the Internet via a LAN cable Use while the LAN cable is connected If you connect to the Internet via the internal modem port or are not connected to the Internet In the TCP IP Control Panel set Connect via to PPP After you have made the settings restart your Macintosh Do not use software that accesses the network such as a Web browser at the same time that you are using sequencer software or audio editing software 377 Troubleshooting Try increasing the Buffer Size in the ASIO Driver control panel The name of the settings dialog box will differ depending on your software Tf you change the buffer size you must exit the software and then restart it Roland can make no guarantee of nor provide support regarding the operation of sequencer software and audio editing software made by another manufacturer Please contact the manufacturer of the software you are using Digitally recorded sound is distorted is at the wrong pitch or contains noise If you are using a long optical digital cable noise may be produced when the cable is connected or the sound may be distorted We recommend that you use optical digital cables that are no longer than one meter in length Does the sampling frequency setting of your application match the setting of the UR 80 s sampling frequency switch Playback or recording halts midway through and then becomes impossible W
122. for VST xml is located in the VST folder inside the Cubase Remote folder of the included CD ROM Before you continue copy EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml onto your computer E Settings in Cubase VST Windows users 1 2 AS RAB 10 11 From the Options menu choose Remote Setup Setup s Make the following settings in the VST Remote dialog box and click OK 4 q Remote Generic Remote c Input EDIROL UR 80 2 Output EDIROL UR 80 In the Generic Remote window that appears click EDIT to open the Generic Remote Setup dialog box Click Import A Select EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml which you copied earlier and click Open H Click in the upper right to close the dialog box H D Choose the Edit Preferences Key Commands u Click the Arrangements Editors tab and make the following settings Command Event type Event Cursor left Controller Control 28 Cursor right Controller Control 29 Cursor up Controller Control 26 c Cursor down Controller Control 27 f Check the Remote Active box Check the Remote Key box and set it to C 2 File Menu Edi Menu Structure Menu Functions Menu Panels Menu Options Mena Score MAR nl Click OK to close the dialog box ela Zu IEEE C2 COMMAND Ki EVENT TYPE EVENT ICON Controller Control 28 Controller Control 29 Controller Control 26 Controller Control 27 e Off i Si or trrDown gr a Off on Of qd E H
123. frame Status 2nd byte FIH mmH mm Message type value Song position pointer Status 2nd byte 3rd byte F2H mmH 1H mm ll Song position 00 00H 7F 7FH 0 16383 Song select Status 2nd byte F3H mmH mm Song number 00 00H 7F 7FH 0 16383 Tune request Status F6H E System realtime message In addition to Active Sensing messages which are always received the UR 80 can receive the following System Realtime messages that you assign in LED mode Timing clock Status F8H eStart Status FAH Continue Status FBH Siop Status FCH Active sensing Status FEH When Active Sensing is received the UR 80 will begin monitoring the interval between all subsequent messages If a gap of greater than 420 ms between messages occurs while monitoring is being performed the UR 80 will transmit All Sound Off and Reset All Controller messages to all ports System reset Status FFH mSystem exclusive messages Universal non realtime system exclusive message Oldentity request message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal non realtime system exclusive message dev Device ID 10 or 7FH Broadcast 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 01H Sub ID 2 Identity Request F7H EOX End of Exclusive OData transmission The UR 80 can use Bulk Dump p 383 to transmit the data of its internal memory sets p 349
124. gesteuert werden Automatikschaltfl che AUTOMATION Hiermit wird der Automatikmodus f r den aktuell ausgew hlten Kanal umgeschaltet Status der Schaltfl che AUTOMATION Einstellbarer Kanal Spur READ Schaltet den Automatikmodus um auf READ WRITE Schaltet den Automatikmodus um auf WRITE TOUCH Schaltet den Automatikmodus um auf TOUCH LATCH Schaltet den Automatikmodus um auf LATCH 110 Abschnitt Master Control CN ge CURSOR FADER BANK 4 BANK CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT WINDOW PAN SEND ARRANGE MIXER Rack UNDO SAVE nu a nm SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT m ANALOG 29 DIGITAL SCRUB E O O Funktionsschaltflachen Steuerung Ihrer Software Cursor Schaltflachen Diese Schaltflachen haben die folgenden Funktionen Schaltflache Funktion a Wenn der Track Mixer angezeigt wird w hlen diese Schaltfl chen Parameter aus x oder schalten den Sendeschlitz oder das lt q Equalizerband entsprechend den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen um SHIFT 4 Anzeige vertikal verkleinern SHIFT YY Anzeige vertikal erweitern Anzeige horizontal verkleinern SHIFT q Anzeige horizontal erweitern SHIFT gt Schaltflache Funktion FADER BANK BANK lt Durchblattert den betriebenen Kanal in 8 Kanal Schritten BANK
125. here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie in der Online Hilfe f r den UR 80 Editor Der Inhalt des Felds Comment im Fenster Message Assign kann nur von einer SMF Datei geladen werden die mit dem UR 80 Editor gesichert wurde 1 W hlen Sie im Men File die Option Open 2 Geben Sie die Datei an die Sie laden m chten und klicken Sie auf Open Systemeinstellungen Nachfolgend wird erkl rt wie die Systemeinstellungen des UR 80 selbst bearbeitet werden 1 W hlen Sie im Men System den Men punkt System UR 80 5ystem Setting Settings Default Tempo j n 120 5 Der UR 80 Editor l dt anschlie end die Output Port Systemeinstellungen des UR 80 MIDI Clock 61 02 O1 2 Wenn das Laden nicht erfolgreich ist sollten Sie die HQ GM2 Message 61 02 O 1 2 Anschl sse pr fen und den Vorgang ab Schritt 1 erneut V LINK Message O 02 0142 ausf hren f Cancel gt Apply A 2 Das Dialogfeld des UR 80 f r Systemeinstellungen wird angezeigt Gibt das Standardtempo fiir die Ubertragung der MIDI Timing Clock Nachrichten Default Tempo an Wenn Sie das Ger t einschalten wird das Timing Clock Tempo auf die Einstellung initialisiert die Sie hier angeben MIDI Clock Legt den Ausgabeanschluss fiir MIDI Timing Clock Nachrichten fest HQ GM2 messages Gibt den Ausgabeanschluss fiir Nachrichten im Synth Edit Modus an V LINK messages Gibt den Ausgabeanschluss fiir Nachrichten im V LINK Modus an 3 Um die Einst
126. im Dialogfeld MIDI Remote auf OK Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 5 Wenn Sie alle Einstellungen vorgenommen haben w hlen Sie Edit MIDI Remote Mapping im Men Options um diese Option zu deaktivieren 8 Pr fen Sie im Men Options ob Enable MIDI Remote Mapping aktiviert ist Wenn diese Option nicht aktiviert ist sollten Sie das Men element w hlen um sie zu aktivieren 118 Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den Reason Kennungen Bei der folgenden Erkl rung werden diese Einstellungen verwendet Abschnitt Track Control REASON A INPUT 192 ASSIGN z Des u SSS le 6 0 o oj CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK Track Fader Die Fader steuern die Lautst rke des Mixers Sie k nnen die Tracks 1 8 steuern Sie k nnen die Track Group Schaltfl che nicht verwenden um Spuren umzuschalten Master Fader Steuert die Gesamtlautst rke des Mixers H Track Status Schaltflachen TRACK STATUS HQ PART i Diese Schaltfl chen schalten den Status der Spuren um D u Modus Status der Schaltfl che Funktion SELECT MUTE OFF Stummschaltung f r Spur ein ausschalten Ein beleuchtet ee Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Solo Funktion fiir die Spur ein ausschalten Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet c EQ RED Schaltet den Equalizer Effekt
127. las etiquetas de Reason a la hoja de plantilla proporcionada La explicaci n que sigue est basada en la siguiente configuraci n Secci n de control de pistas REASON A INPUT 122 z ren DOC i HE ill 2 E H E q Atenuadores de pista C Los atenuadores controlan el volumen del mezclador Puede controlar las pistas de la 1 a la 8 Tambi n puede utilizar el bot n de grupo de pistas para conmutar las pistas Atenuador m ster Controla el volumen global del mezclador 0 Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART i Mediante estos botones se conmutan los estados de las pistas D u Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE OFF No activo Activar y desactivar el apagado mute de la pista Apagado Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activar y desactivar el solo de la pista Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado EQ RED Rojo Activar desactivar el ecualizador EQ k Ecualizador Activo iluminado H No activo no iluminado T ORANGE Naranja Puede asignar cualquiera de los par metros de Reason como botones de control de fines generales Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Utilice estos controles giratorios para controlar la panor mica los altos EQ TREBLE y los bajos EQ BASS de la ecualizaci n de los canales Utilice el bot n de asignaci n para conmutar entre la panor mica los altos del ecualizador y los bajos del ecualiza
128. le bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 32 canaux Bouton de banque BANK Ce bouton commute la banque de canaux que vous r glez Etat du bouton BANK Canaux r gl s CH1 8 Canaux 1 8 CH9 16 Canaux 9 16 CH17 24 Canaux 17 24 CH25 32 Canaux 25 32 169 c a H Eenannl Contr le de votre logiciel Section Master Control Boutons curseurs a Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes nz gt Bouton Fonction a D place vers le haut Vy D place vers le bas EVA d D place vers la gauche MIXER INST C i D D place vers la droite U i T COMMAND SHIFT a R duit verticalement Vaffichage SHIFT YY Agrandit l affichage verticalement En EE m d R duit l affichage horizontalement BEE Agrandit l affichage horizontalement rer D MIDI CLK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT Boutons de fonction O L se Bouton Fonction MIXER Ouvre ferme la fen tre Mixer G5 EFFECTS Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Send Effect INST Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Instruments INPUTS Ouvre ferme la fen tre VST Inputs O O LEFT D place le curseur vers le localisateur de gauche SET L D finit l emplacement actuel du curseur comme le localisateur de gauche ER E RIGHT D place le curseur vers le localisateur de droite SET R D finit l emplacement actuel du
129. may cause undesired operation Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name UR 80 Type of Equipment USB Recording System Responsible Party Edirol Corporation North America Address 425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114 Bellingham WA 98226 Telephone 360 594 4276 For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three
130. memoria que edite con el programa UR 80 Editor en un archivo de formato SMF E Guardar un conjunto de memoria en formato SMF A continuaci n se describe c mo guardar en formato SMF el conjunto de memoria que se est editando actualmente El contenido del campo Comment Comentario de la ventana Message Assign Asignaci n de mensaje tambi n se guardar en formato SMF 1 En el men File Archivo seleccione Save As Guardar como Para guardar regrabando el ltimo archivo abierto seleccione Save Guardar 2 Especifique un nombre de archivo y haga clic en Save E Cargar un conjunto de memoria de un archivo SMF A continuaci n se describe c mo guardar un conjunto de memoria que se ha guardado en formato SMF UR 80 Editor tambi n puede cargar conjuntos de memoria que se han guardado en formato SMF de los productos de la serie PCR de Edirol Para obtener m s informaci n consulte la ayuda en l nea de UR 80 Editor El contenido del campo Comment Comentario de la ventana Message Assign Asignaci n de mensaje s lo puede cargarse desde un archivo SMF que se ha guardado mediante el programa UR 80 Editor 1 En el men File Archivo elija Open Abrir 2 Especifique el archivo que desee cargar y haga clic en Open Configuraci n del sistema A continuaci n se describe c mo editar la configuraci n del sistema desde la propia unidad UR 80 1 Enel men System Sistema seleccione System UR B0 Sys
131. message e nena 77 Bank Select messaggio ii 275 Bank pulsante nutrias 235 239 Bank Program Change 77 143 209 275 Bank Program Change Cambio de banco programa 341 BANK Schaltfl che nennen 103 107 Bank Select Nachricht i 143 block diagrann sis men nn 29 Blockdiagrammirs science vive hein ets 95 Borne de mise la terre i 156 Bot n de asignaci n ASSIGN 340 Bot n de asignaci n Assign 282 332 Bot n de automatizaci n Automation 308 Bot n de banco Bank iii 301 305 Bot n de grabaci n de fuente 323 326 Bot n de grabaci n de fuente REC SOURCE 322 Bot n de modo de automatizaci n Automation Mode ss 313 Bot n de selecci n neona 340 Bot n de selecci n Select 283 Bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas Track Group ss 284 298 333 Bot n SHIFT SEANCE deed iik dE ve 340 Boton V EINK hee e ee 336 Botones de cursor 299 302 306 309 314 318 Botones de cursor CURSOR n 285 Botones de estado de pista Track Status ic 283 298 301 305 308 312 317 333 Botones de funci n 285 299 302 306 314 Botones de reproducci n RO aa 285 299 302 306 310 314 318 Boton
132. n de aparatos para el software es posible que el controlador de la unidad UR 80 no est instalado correctamente Vuelva a instalar el controlador Aparatos MIDI Aparato de salida MIDI UR 80 MIDI OUT Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Si especifica UR 80 MIDI OUT como puerto de salida para el software secuenciador se transferir n los mensajes desde el conector MIDI OUT de la propia unidad UR 80 UR 80 Mac OS 9 8 UR 80 1 Seleccione este puerto si desea enviar mensajes desde el software secuenciador a la propia unidad UR 80 Aparato de entrada MIDI UR 80 MIDI IN Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Si especifica UR 80 MIDI IN como puerto de entrada para el software secuenciador se entrar n los mensajes desde el conector MIDI IN de la unidad UR 80 UR 80 1 UR 80 2 Seleccione uno de estos puertos si desea que el software secuenciador reciba los mensajes de los controladores Puede seleccionar el puerto que debe utilizarse para cada controlador Puede resultar conveniente por ejemplo utilizar el puerto UR 80 1 para grabar mensajes en una pista o utilizarlos para controlar un sintetizador software y utilizar el puerto UR 80 2 para los mensajes que sirven para reproducir detener el secuenciador o realizar mezclas Utilice el puerto UR 80 2 como aparato de entrada MIDI para UR 80 Editor Aparatos de audio Aparato de salida de audio EDIROL UR 80 Este aparato env a se ales de
133. n de modo configuraci n del sistema Nombre del bot n Funcionamiento MEMORY Manteniendo el bot n MEMORY presionado y presionando a su vez un bot n de TRACK STATUS puede alternar entre los ocho conjuntos de memoria almacenados en la unidad UR 80 Al pulsar este bot n se encender uno de los LED de los botones de TRACK STATUS que indicar el conjunto de memoria seleccionado actualmente HQ GM2 Cuando el bot n HO GM2 est activado la secci n de control de pistas se encuentra en modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador lo que le permite controlar los par metros del software sintetizador utilizado Presione el bot n otra vez para desactivarlo y volver a las funciones de control de pistas anteriores Para obtener m s informaci n sobre el modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador consulte el sapartado Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador p g 332 V LINK Cuando el bot n V LINK est activado la secci n de control de pistas se encuentra en modo V LINK lo que le permite controlar los aparatos de v deo compatibles con V LINK Presione el bot n otra vez para desactivarlo y volver a las funciones de control de pistas anteriores Para obtener m s informaci n sobre el modo V LINK consulte el apartado Modo V LINK p g 335 MIDI CLK SHIFT V LINK Con este bot n se activa o desactiva la transmisi n del Reloj de sincronizaci n MIDI F8 Si presiona el bot n SHIFT el LED ind
134. sequencer o di altri programmi simili nella sezione Track Control Per tornare ad utilizzare il software sequencer premere di nuovo il pulsante V LINK per disattivare la modalita E Controlli utilizzati in modalit V LINK 270 Compilare il foglio template con i parametri V LINK V LINK INPUT 122 PLAYBACK OUTPUT PEAK 1 SPEED R CB BRIGHTNESS FADE v N vv N a MS CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK OJOIOJOJOJOJOJO 4 20 5 21 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 UR 80 Editor UR 80 Editor permette di utilizzare il computer per memorizzare dei patch di memoria per l UR 80 L UR 80 conta un totale di 43 controlli L uso combinato del pulsante SHIFT e degli indicatori LED permette di assegnare a questi controlli fino a 136 messaggi MIDI diversi I messaggi MIDI cosi assegnati costituiscono un patch di memoria Sull UR 80 e possibile memorizzare sette patch di memoria e una preimpostata gt Memory sets pag 349 UR 80 Editor permette importare e esportare i patch di memoria da e verso l UR 80 modificare le Enalieh impostazioni e salvare aprire i patch di memoria in formato SMF Consente inoltre di configurare lo stesso UR 80 Per consultare la guida in linea dell UR 80 Editor selezionare il menu Help Nelle pagine che seguono si trover una breve descrizione delle funzionalita offerte da UR 80 Editor Per maggiori informazioni fare ri
135. sons que vous avez re u c D Eenannl 213 UR 80 Editor Sauvegarde ou chargement au format SMF Un jeu de sons modifi dans UR 80 Editor peut tre sauvegard ou charg sous forme d un fichier au format SMF E Sauvegarder un jeu de sons au format SMF Voici comment sauvegarder le jeu de sons actuellement modifi au format SMF Le contenu du champ Commentaire dans la fen tre Message Assign peut galement tre enregistr dans un fichier SMF Dans le menu File s lectionnez Save as Si vous voulez sauvegarder en crasant le dernier fichier ouvert s lectionnez Save Sp cifiez un nom de fichier et cliquez sur Save E Chargement d un jeu de sons partir d un fichier SMF Voici comment charger un jeu de sons qui a t enregistr au format SMF 1 2 UR 80 Editor peut galement charger des jeux de sons pour les s ries Edirol PCR enregistr es au format SME Pour plus de d tails reportez vous a Vaide en ligne de UR 80 Editor Le contenu du champ Commentaire dans la fen tre Message Assign ne peut tre charg qu partir d un fichier SMF enregistr par UR 80 Editor Dans le menu Fichier s lectionnez Open Sp cifiez le fichier charger et cliquez sur Ouvrir Parametres systeme 3 214 Voici comment modifier les param tres syst me de l UR 80 lui m me Dans le menu System s lectionnez System Settings VR 60 System setting UR 80 Editor peut c
136. the best audio quality adjust the input sensitivity knob until the level is as high as you can get it without causing the input peak indicator to light 6 Input monitor switch Turn the input monitor switch on and adjust the input monitor level for the signal from your guitar or bass This will not change the recording level To adjust the input monitor volume hold down the SHIFT button and turn the TIME dial REC SOURCE button Set this to ANALOG unlit O Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using 58 Recording audio Recording from a mic SAVE pras Set the sampling PLAYS ETN Wan freguency Turn ON if you have connected a condenser mic Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately ri Input monitor level gt SHIFT button 4 TIME dial gt q volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Connections The sound from the mic connected to input jack 1 will be recorded on the left channel and the sound of the mic connected to input jack 2 will be recorded on the right channel K A q Sampling frequency select switch Set this to the same sampling frequency as selected in your recording software H Pi D Input impedance select switch u Set this to Lo Z Phantom power switch If you are using a condenser mic turn the phantom power switch on u Ifyou connect a device that does
137. to Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module This is referred to as MIDI Thru Make sure that your sequencer software is set to thru the incoming messages to Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module Can only control a specific Part of Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module in Synth Edit mode Check the MIDI Thru setting Depending on the settings of your sequencer software the incoming MIDI messages may be converted into a specific MIDI channel and thru ed to Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module Check to make sure that your sequencer software has not been set to specify the MIDI Thru channel Tf you are using SONAR or Cubase the messages will be thru ed on the MIDI channel of the currently selected track Operating system becomes unstable Operation becomes unstable when the computer is started up with the UR 80 already connected Please start up your computer with the UR 80 disconnected and then connect the UR 80 On a computer that uses a USB keyboard starting up the computer with the UR 80 already connected may cause operation to become unstable In this case start up the computer with the UR 80 disconnected and then connect the UR 80 Can t hear sound from the computer Is the Sampling frequency select switch set to 96 kHz REC If the sampling frequency is 96 kHz the Sampling frequency select switch must be set differently depending on whether you are recording or playing back When playing
138. to control the tempo of the song If you want to control the song tempo from the UR 80 you will need to enable MIDI Clock Sync in Reason You must first turn the UR 80 s timing clock transmission on To switch timing clock transmission on off press SHIFT V LINK Enabling MIDI Clock Sync You can enable MIDI Clock Sync in either of the following two ways In the Options menu choose MIDI Clock Sync to add a check mark to it e Turn on the reason transport MIDI SYNC ENABLE button MIDI SYNC MIDI SYNC ET umit Operating reason transport If MIDI Clock Sync is enabled Play Stop operations will be as follows You cannot use Rewind or Forward while MIDI Clock Sync is enabled UR 80 controller UR 80 controller reason transport Sto SHIFT re P Pi SHIFT a ay E MIDI Remote Mapping settings General purpose MIDI control messages will be assigned to the UR 80 s function buttons and TRACK GROUP button You can assign these controllers to the desired parameters of Reason In the Options menu choose Edit MIDI Remote Mapping to enable it When you select a Reason module a green arrow will be displayed for assignable controllers Choose a controller 3 The MIDI Remote dialog box will appear check Learn from MIDI Input Press the TRACK GROUP button or function button that you want to correspond with the selected controller 5 Click OK in the MIDI Remote dialog box
139. transmitir al seleccionar dicho conjunto de memoria El mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria es un mensaje MIDI de hasta 48 bytes En un mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria no pueden utilizarse caracteres especiales como DT utilizados en Free Message En la ventana principal presione el bot n Edit Editar situado a la derecha de la casilla de verificaci n INIT MESSAGE Mensaje inicial Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Initial Message Mensaje incial Utilice el rea de texto para especificar el mensaje inicial que desee para el conjunto de memoria Utilice el campo Output Port Puerto de salida para especificar el puerto desde el que debe transmitirse el mensaje inicial del conjunto de memoria Una vez haya finalizado la configuraci n haga clic en OK Aceptar E Habilitaci n del mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria 344 Si habilita el mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria al seleccionar el conjunto de memoria se transmitir el mensaje MIDI especificado siguiendo el procedimiento anterior Para habilitar el mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria seleccione la casilla de verificaci n INIT MESSAGE Mensaje inicial de la ventana principal Sino quiere que se transmita el mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria al seleccionar el conjunto de memoria desmarque este elemento Intercambio de datos con la unidad UR 80 E Transmisi n a la unidad UR 80 A continuaci n se descr
140. turn ON when a memory set whose H ACTIVITY check box is loaded into the UR 80 Turn this on when using specific software such as Pro Tools LE If H ACTIVITY is on a message of 90 00 7F will be transmitted from the UR 80 1 port at intervals of approximately 500 ms 3 INIT MESSAGE assignment area Here you can freely specify the MIDI message that will be transmitted when this memory set is z selected For details refer to Memory Set Initial Message p 80 Hi H u 75 UR 80 Editor 4 Controllers Click the controller to which you want to assign a MIDI message When you click a controller the Message Assign window p 78 will open 5 Assign button This switches the MIDI messages assigned to the track control knobs in the order of PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Operating the Assign button will also change the Assigned MIDI messages display that appears when you select the Options menu command Show Messages 6 Select button This switches the assignment of the Track Status buttons in the order of MUTE gt SOLO gt REC gt AUTO Operating the Assign button will also change the Assigned MIDI messages display that appears when you select the Options menu command Show Messages 7 SHIFT button You can assign MIDI messages to controllers operated in conjunction with the SHIFT button In this case the window will show only those controllers that can be operated in conjunction with the SHIFT button
141. type XLR et de type jack et vous pouvez utiliser l un de ces types en fonction de l quipement que vous souhaitez connecter Notez toutefois que la sensibilit d entr e de ces prises peut varier Le bouton interne r gle le niveau d entr e INPUT 1 L et le bouton externe cercle r gle le niveau INPUT 2 R x D H E q C Type XLR 50 10 dBu Type jack 35 4 dBu Si vous connectez un appareil faible niveau de sortie comme un micro nous vous recommandons d utiliser une prise jack de type XLR Voyants de cr te PEAK Ces voyants indiquent si le son entrant des prises jack 1 et 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R est d form R glez le bouton de niveau SENS de mani re ce que ces voyants ne s allument pas Les voyants de cr te s allument en rouge un niveau 6 dB en dessous de l cr tage VOLUME 15 3 Bouton de volume de sortie VOLUME R gle le volume qui sort de la prise jack casque et des prises jack de sortie g n rale Haliann Eenannl 155 Face arriere POWER DC IN SAMPLE RATE INPUT 2 R INPUT 1 L XLR Mic Pre AMP 50 10 dBu ee 96 PLAY 48 96 es E fi AGI OR PSEJU ADAPTOR ONLY Ee THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT 35 4 dBu 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE RECEIVED HiZ LoZ ON OFF 3 ANY USE UNDESIRED OPERATION See Owner s Manual cahier d instructions 19 2122 23 24 25 26 27 16 Interrupteur d alimentation POWE
142. und Master Ausgangsbuchsen anzupassen Es ist nicht m glich die Lautst rke anzupassen die aus den Digitalausgangsbuchsen ausgegeben wird Grundlegende Bedienung 93 Grundlegende Anschlusse und Einstellungen In diesem Abschnitt werden grundlegende Anschl sse und Datenpfade f r das UR 80 beschrieben Bevor Sie Anschl sse mit anderen Ger ten vornehmen m ssen Sie die Lautst rke aller Ger te reduzieren um Fehlfunktionen oder Sch den an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden Wenn Sie Ihre Kopfh rer oder Monitor Lautsprecher wie im Diagramm angezeigt anschlie en k nnen Sie die Wiedergabe von Ihrer Software oder den Sound von Instrumenten oder Audioger ten berwachen die mit dem UR 80 verbunden sind Grundlegende Anschl sse Verwenden Sie einfach ein USB Kabel um das UR 80 mit Ihrem Computer zu verbinden Wenn Sie ein USB Kabel anschlie en k nnen sowohl MIDI Daten als auch Audiodaten bertragen werden Computer AC adaptor qd pora USB cable Monitor speakers nn ae do odo O O SE AS Headphones This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers E MIDI Datenfluss Wenn das UR 80 und Ihr Computer via USB Kabel verbunden sind Der MIDI Datenfluss entspricht in diesem Fall der unten abgebildeten Grafik PC port name UR 80 MIDI OUT device EDIROL UR
143. unterschiedliche Eingangssensibilit t wie H unten gezeigt S XLR Typ 50 10 dBu Typ Phone 35 4 dBu Wenn Sie ein Ger t mit niedrigem Ausgabepegel wie z B ein Mikrofon anschlie en empfehlen wir Ihnen die Eingangsbuchse vom Typ XLR zu verwenden GND SLEEVE HOT TIP am c COLD RING 7 we Der UR 80 besitzt symmetrische Eingangsbuchsen XLR TRS die wie in der Abbildung gezeigt verschaltet werden Stellen Sie bitte sicher dass das Ger t das Sie anschlie en korrekt verschaltet wurde Sie m ssen den Phantomstrom deaktivieren wenn Sie kein Kondensatormikrofon angeschlossen haben das Phantomstrom ben tigt Wenn ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder ein Audiowiedergabeger t mit Phantomstrom versorgt wird k nnen Fehlfunktionen auftreten Weitere Informationen ber die Spezifikationen Ihres Mikrofons erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch Die Phantomstromversorgung des UR 80 betr gt maximal DC 48 V 10 mA x i Schlie en sie nicht verschiedene Mikrofontypen gleichzeitig an verbinden Sie z B kein mit Phantomstrom betriebenes Kondensatormikrofon mit Eingangsbuchse 1 und ein dynamisches Mikrofon mit Eingangsbuchse u 2 Wenn ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder Soundwiedergabeger t mit Phantomstrom versorgt wird sind Fehlfunktionen die Folge Bezeichnungen und Funktionen 25 27 Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter INPUT 1 IMP Sie k nnen f r das Ger t das mit Eingangsbuchse 1 verbunden ist entwed
144. votre configuration cliquez sur la touche Dans Driver Hardware pour 3 1 ou ant rieur s lectionnez HUI Dans MIDI MIDI Communication pour 3 1 ou ant rieur s lectionnez UR 80 1 c d Ci Eenannl 179 Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs Fixez les tiquettes HUI sur la feuille de mod le jointe L explication ci dessous suit ces r glages DP Indigue une operation pour Digital Performer PI cenna Indique une op ration pour ProTools LE Si aucun de ces symboles ne s affiche l op ration s applique aux deux syst mes Section Track Control Pro TOOLS INPUT 122 O PAN O SEND1 PEAK 1 i SV 2 AUTO MODE CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE AUTO Commandes d att nuation Track Les commandes d att nuation r glent le volume de la table de mixage Vous pouvez r gler les huit pistes de la banque de pistes s lectionn e Utilisez les boutons curseurs pour commuter les banques de pistes Commande d att nuation MASTER La commande d att nuation MASTER n est pas utilis e Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ces boutons commutent l tat de la piste Mode Etat du bouton SELECT Fonction MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d s
145. wenn Sie mit den beleuchtet Eingangsbuchsen 1 2 ein Stereoger t verbunden haben oder wenn Sie die Digitaleingangsbuchse verwenden Das Eingangssignal von den Eingangsbuchsen oder der Digitaleingangsbuchse wird als monaurales Signal gemischt und ausgegeben Verwenden Sie diese Einstellung wenn Sie ein monaurales Signal wie z B eine Gitarre oder ein Mikrofon mit den Eingangsbuchsen verbunden haben Das Audiosignal das via USB zu Ihrem Computer gesendet wird ist stereo MONO LED blinkt SHIFT Verwenden Sie diese Option in Verbindung mit anderen Schaltfl chen im Abschnitt Master Control 88 Eckige Klammern z B MIDI CLK um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che bet tigen m ssen w hrend Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT nach unten gedr ckt halten Bezeichnungen und Funktionen E Abschnitt Audio Control NA She gt 14 9 v 13 Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf Dieser konzentrische Doppel Schaltknopf regelt die Eingangslautst rke der Eingangsbuchsen 1 und 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R Das UR 80 bietet Eingangsbuchsen vom Typ XLR und Phone und Sie k nnen beide Typen entsprechend der Ger te verwenden die Sie anschlieBen mochten Beachten Sie jedoch bitte dass die Eingangssensibilit t dieser Buchsen unterschiedlich sein wird Der innere Schaltknopf regelt den INPUT 1 L Input Level und der u ere Schaltknopf Ring regelt den INPUT 2 R Level
146. window In the Logic Control items located in the left side of the Setup window specify the Out Port as follows Even if the settings shown below are already shown make the settings again OutPort EDIROL UR 80 for Windows or Mac OS X OutPort UR 80 1 for Mac OS 9 Close the Setup dialog box Once again select the Logic memory set USR3 on the UR 80 When using Logic can t use the track control knobs to edit param eters e Did you select the correct send slot or equalizer band When adjusting the send parameters or equalizer parameters you must use the up down cursor buttons to select the slot or band that you want to edit e Could you have switched the parameters being edited It is possible that you have switched the parameters that are being edited Use the function button assignments to once again select the parameters that you want to edit 372 Troubleshooting Can t control Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module in Synth Edit mode Is the message output port correct Make sure that the output port for the messages transmitted by Synth Edit mode matches the input port for your sequencer software Use UR 80 Editor to set the output port for the messages transmitted by Synth Edit mode For details on port settings for the messages output by Synth Edit mode refer to System settings p 82 Check the MIDI Thru settings The MIDI messages transmitted by Synth Edit mode are sent through your sequencer software
147. 0 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC REC RDY 6 OTE 5 05 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC REC RDY7 OTE 6 06 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC REC RDY 8 OTE 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO SELECT 1 OTE 24 18 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO SELECT 2 OTE 25 19 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO SELECT 3 OTE 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO SELECT 4 OTE 27 1B 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO SELECT 5 OTE 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO SELECT 6 OTE 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO SELECT 7 OTE 30 1E 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO SELECT 8 OTE 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 FADER 1 90 68 7F EO Il 0 00 00 z 2 mm 90 68 00 16383 7F 7F PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK FADER 2 FADER 2 90 69 7F E1 ll 0 00700 2 mm 90 69 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER 3 FADER 3 906A7FE2II 0 00 00 E 2 mm 90 6A 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER 4 FADER 4 90 6B 7F E3 Il 0 00 00 E 2 mm 90 6B 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER 5 FADER 5 90 6C 7F E4 Il 0 00 00 2 mm 90 6C 00 6383 7F 7F TRACK FADER
148. 0 comme Control Surface C Control Surfaces m x Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 3 Sp cifiez le Input port et le Output port 6 Control Surface Input Port Output Port e EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 MEMO Pour plus de details sur l utilisation de SONAR reportez vous au manuel d utilisation de SONAR x H H u 165 Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs Section Track Control Commandes d att nuation Track Elles r glent les volumes de pistes Si vous utilisez ces commandes d att nuation avec le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes vous pouvez r gler 32 pistes Commande d att nuation MASTER Contr le le volume d une sortie principale virtuelle Vous pouvez choisir quelle sortie principale virtuelle vous souhaitez commander dans la bo te de dialogue Setting Param tre du plug in Control Surface de l UR 80 Pour plus de d tails reportez vous l aide en ligne du plug in Control Surface de l UR 80 Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ils commutent l tat des pistes Si vous utilisez ces boutons avec le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes vous pouvez r gler 32 pistes Mode Etat du bouton SELECT Fonction MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d sactive la mise en solo des pis
149. 0 127 7F 16 nessuna assegnazione H 8 CC 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 16 nessuna assegnazione H u Modalita V LINK Messaggio Intervallo Canale Assegnazione predefinita esadecimale 1 9 T7725 Program Change 1 9 17 25 16 Play video clip 1 9 17 25 riproduci video clip 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 Program Change 2 10 18 26 16 Play video clip 2 10 18 26 riproduci video clip 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 Program Change 3 11 19 27 16 Play video clip 3 11 19 27 riproduci video clip 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 Program Change 4 12 20 28 16 Play video clip 4 12 20 28 Pulsanti Track riproduci video clip 4 12 20 28 Status 5 13 21 29 Program Change 5 13 21 29 16 Play video clip 5 13 21 29 riproduci video clip 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 Program Change 6 14 22 30 16 Play video clip 6 14 22 30 riproduci video clip 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 Program Change 7 15 23 31 16 Play video clip 7 15 23 31 riproduci video clip 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 Program Change 8 16 24 32 16 Play video clip 8 16 24 32 riproduci video clip 8 16 24 32 Pulsante di 1 8 BF 00 00 BF 2000 Video palettel palette video 1 Selezione Track 9 16 BF 00 01 BF 2000 Video palette2 palette video 2 17 24 BF 00 02 BF 2000 u Video palette3 palette video 3 TELI 25 32 BF 00 03 BF 2000 Video palette4 palette video 4 Nella modalita V LINK non possibile controllare i parametri delle tracce del software
150. 0 only ASIO device Select EDIROL UR 80 as the ASIO setting for your application if you are using the UR 80 with an ASIO application such as Cubase To prevent audio loops from causing oscillation or double monitoring turn monitoring off in your application or use the ASIO Direct Monitor setting Two MIDI ports Basic connections and settings Some sequencer software that supports MIDI controllers lets you independently specify the MIDI input port used for recording MIDI tracks the MIDI IN port and the MIDI input port used to control the software the CTRL IN port Sequencer software Record on l00000000 li THRU gt Software synthesizer Y MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port Seguencer software Track Record on tracks Ge THRU Software synthesizer Oo MIDI IN port H MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port Normally you will connect your MIDI keyboard to the MIDI IN port and use it for recording your performance on tracks or using the MIDI Thru function of your software to play sound modules or soft synthesizers The MIDI messages sent here have the meaning that is assigned to them by the MIDI specification In other words when you play the keyboard note messages will be transmitted and recorded on t
151. 1 0 00 127 7F 16 Strg Color Cr Tracie O ern en i cn trg Helligkeit SSES res CC20 14 0 00 127 7F 16 Output Fade 6 CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 16 keine Zuweisung 7 CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 16 keine Zuweisung 8 CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 16 keine Zuweisung 1 CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 16 Strg Uberblendezeit 2 CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 16 Strg Audiopegel 3 CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 1 Strg 4 CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 2 Strg E 5 CC 28 IC 0 00 127 F 16 VEX 3 Strg 6 CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 4 Strg d 7 CC 30 1E 0 00 127 7F 16 keine Zuweisung s 8 CC 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 16 keine Zuweisung 1 9 17 25 Program Change 1 9 17 25 16 Videoclip 1 9 17 25 abspielen 2 10 18 26 Program Change 2 10 18 26 16 Videoclip 2 10 18 26 abspielen 3 11 19 27 Program Change 3 11 19 27 16 Videoclip 3 11 19 27 abspielen Track Status 4 12 20 28 Program Change 4 12 20 28 16 Videoclip 4 12 20 28 abspielen Schaltfl chen 5 13 21 29 Program Change 5 13 21 29 16 Videoclip 5 13 21 29 abspielen 6 14 22 30 Program Change 6 14 22 30 16 Videoclip 6 14 22 30 abspielen 7 15 23 31 Program Change 7 15 23 31 16 Videoclip 7 15 23 31 abspielen 8 16 24 32 Program Change 8 16 24 32 16 Videoclip 8 16 24 32 abspielen 1 8 BF 00 00 BF 2000 u Videopalettel e Track Group 9 16 BF0001BF2000 Videopalette2 Td Auswahlschaltfl che 17 24 BF 00 02 BF 2000 V
152. 1 UR 80 2 als enn Ausgabeziel fiir die MIDI Nachrichten angeben die von en den Fadern Schaltkn pfen und Schaltfl chen des UR 80 uso UR 80 2 erzeugt werden Anders ausgedr ckt durch Zuweisung von UR 80 1 als MIDI IN Anschluss f r Ihr Programm und UR 80 2 als CTRL IN Anschluss k nnen Sie z B Fader und Schaltflachenoperationen nutzen um in Ihrem Programm Mixeroperationen zu steuern w hrend Sie die Schaltkn pfe verwenden um Ihren Softwaresynthesizer zu editieren Das Ausgabeziel der MIDI Nachrichten die bertragen werden wenn Sie die Fader Schaltkn pfe und Schaltfl chen des UR 80 einstellen kann f r jeden Controller separat angegeben werden Verwenden Sie den UR 80 Editor um das Nachrichten und Ausgabeziel f r die Controller zuzuweisen N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie unter UR 80 Editor S 139 97 E u Erannaie Italiana Eenannl Steuerung Ihrer Software Sie k nnen die gew nschten MIDI Nachrichten den Schaltkn pfen Fadern und Schaltfl chen des UR 80 zuordnen Eine Gruppe derartiger MIDI Nachrichtenzuweisungen wird als Memory Set bezeichnet Das UR 80 enth lt acht verschiedene Memory Sets in seinem internen Speicher Bei Auslieferung ab Werk sind die Zuweisungen des Memory Sets PRESET ausgew hlt Umschalten von Memory Sets Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY gedr ckt und dr cken Sie eine TRACK STATUS Schaltfl che um ein Memory Se
153. 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 423554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Bldg No 47 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler
154. 2 BEE CH 5 13 VOLUME CC7 7 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 8 16 1 Il canale di trasmissione sara lo stesso canale MIDI che stato selezionato con i pulsanti Track Status 268 Modalita V LINK Cosa si intende per modalita V LINK 269 Tale modalita permette di controllare i dispositivi video compatibili con la funzione V LINK 7 V LINK ASSIS permette di riprodurre dati musicali e video L uso di dispositivi video E che supportano la funzione V LINK permette di associare effetti visivi all esecuzione musicale u aumentandone quindi l espressivit Dopo aver premuto il pulsante V LINK nella sezione Master Control la sezione Track Control funzioner in modalita V LINK Dopo essere entrato in modalita V LINK l UR 80 trasmettera una serie di messaggi V LINK ON Sender Model Name e un messaggio di inizializzazione V LINK Se si preme di nuovo il pulsante V LINK l UR 80 inviera un messaggio V LINK OFF disattivando quindi la lt modalit V LINK Il messaggio di inizializzazione V LINK un messaggio MIDI che arriva fino a 255 byte Secondo t le impostazioni di fabbrica il messaggio di inizializzazione V LINK conterr i parametri elencati nell Elenco dei parametri sotto riportato
155. 2 VALUE 7 CC 22 16 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 VALUE 8 CC 23 17 65 41 1 01 2 SHUTTLE TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE MUTE 1 OTE 16 10 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE MUTE 2 OTE 17 11 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE MUTE 3 OTE 18 12 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE MUTE4 OTE 19 13 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE MUTE 5 OTE 20 14 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE MUTE 6 OTE 21 15 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE MUTE7 OTE 22 16 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE MUTE 8 OTE 23 17 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO SOLO 1 OTE 8 08 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO SOLO 2 OTE 9 09 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO SOLO 3 OTE 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO SOLO 4 OTE 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO SOLO 5 OTE 12 0C 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO SOLO 6 OTE 13 0D 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO SOLO7 OTE 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO SOLO 8 OTE 15 0F 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC REC RDY 1 OTE 0 00 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC REC RDY 2 OTE 1 01 0 00 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC REC RDY 3 OTE 2 02 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC REC RDY 4 OTE 3 03 0 00 7 127 7F 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC REC RDY 5 OTE 4 04 0 0
156. 2 E Right TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 Channel 1 FX Send CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 hannel 2 FX Send CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 5 2 i Level TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 hannel 3 FX Send CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 gt Leve TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 hannel 4 FX Send CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 hannel 5 FX Send CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 hannel 6 FX Send CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 hannel 7 FX Send CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 7 Level TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 hannel 8 FX Send CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 S Level TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 hannel 1 FX Send 2 CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 hannel 2 FX Send 2 CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 4 2 i Level TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 hannel 3 FX Send 2 CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 4 2 i Level TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 hannel 4 FX Send 2 CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 4 2 i Level TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 hannel 5 FX Send 2 CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 4 2 z Level TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 hannel 6 FX Send 2 CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 4 2 S Leve TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 Channel 7 FX Send 2 CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 Channel 8 FX Send 2 CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 4 2 E Level TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK
157. 27 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP Stop CC 21 15 0000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY Play CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC Record CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP Vertical Zoom Out CC 26 1A 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR DOWN Vertical Zoom In CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR LEFT Horizontal Zoom Out CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT Horizontal Zoom In CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER Next Window CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST Close Window CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV Insert Marker CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT Open Marker View CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO Redo CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Save CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ x CC 9 09 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE SHIFT TRANSPORT REW E CC 1913 0000 7 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD CC 20 14 000 7 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP 7 CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIF
158. 27 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO F5 CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F6 CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ T lt reset CC 9 09 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW lt lt rew CC 1913 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD gt gt ff CC 20 14 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP stop CC 21 15 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY gt play CC 22 16 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC O rec CC 2317 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP NO ASSIGN z SHIFT CURSOR DOWN z NO ASSIGN SHIFT CURSOR LEFT NO ASSIGN E E SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT NO ASSIGN E E E z SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER F7 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST FS CC 17 11 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV DEC CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT INC CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO SI MASTER CC 82 52 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS S2 MASTER CC 83 53 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ gt I skip CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REW O ASSIG 3 SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD O ASSIG E z e E SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP pause CC 8 08 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY O ASSIG SHIFT TRANSPORT REC 53 CC 30 1E 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE STI O ASSI
159. 3 275 Channel Message Mensaje de canal 341 Channel Pressure message n 77 Channel Pressure messaggio seses 275 Channel Pressure Nachricht n 143 COAXIAL Lina 25 91 157 223 289 Commande d att nuation principale 152 Commandes d att nuation Track 152 166 169 173 176 180 185 200 Commutateur d alimentation fant me 158 191 Commutateur d impedance 158 190 193 Commutateur Input Monitor 190 193 197 Composition JOG eegen GE n 178 182 Composition TIME 153 167 170 174 186 Conector de adaptador de CA 288 Conector USB ipsa Ari 288 Conectores MIDI de entrada salida MIDI IN OUT A A REJE 288 Conjunto de memoria ene 296 Connecteur d adaptateur secteur 156 Connecteur USB ss 156 Connettore per adattatore AC 222 Contatto di messa a terra ii 222 Control Change 77 143 209 275 Control Change Cambio de control 341 Control Change message 77 Control Change messaggio 275 Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada 322 325 Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Input ARI EI O IRE dial Mle RNA 287 Control giratorio de volumen de salida VOLUME nilo ana 287 Controlador
160. 3 2B 0 00 64 40 6 x REMOTE PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute CC 4420 0 00 7 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 64 40 6 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 64 40 6 A REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 Solo CC 2 02 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 64 40 6 2 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo CC 404 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 64 40 6 A REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo CC 6 06 0 00 64 40 6 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo CC 7 07 0 00 64 40 6 m REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 Select CC 40 28 0 00 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 Select CC 41 29 0 00 64 40 5 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 Select CC 42 2A 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 Select CC 43 2B 0 00 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK
161. 3 BO OF 02 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE MUTE 4 BO OF 03 BO 2F 2 02 7 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE MUTE 5 BO OF 04 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 z UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE MUTE6 BO OF 05 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 S UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE MUTE7 BO OF 06 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE MUTE 8 BO OF 07 BO 2F 2 02 7 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO SOLO 1 BO OF 00 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO SOLO 2 BO OF 01 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 S UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO SOLO3 BO OF 02 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 z UNLATCH ad TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO SOLO 4 BO OF 03 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 E UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO SOLO 5 BO OF 04 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 Z UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO SOLO 6 BO OF 05 BO 2F 3 03 7 67 43 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO SOLO 7 BO OF 06 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 E UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO SOLO 8 BO OF 07 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 1 REC REC RDY 1 BO OF 00 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 2 REC REC RDY2 BO OF 01 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 E UNLATCH ad TRACK STATUS 3 REC REC RDY 3 BO OF 02 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 4 REC REC RDY 4 BO OF 03 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 5 REC REC RDY5 BO OF 04 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 6 REC REC RDY 6 BO OF 05 BO 2F 7 07 71 47 z UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 7 REC REC RDY 7 BO OF 06 BO
162. 4 40 000 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 2 C2 2 CC 6541 0 00 127 7F 6 2 S TRACK FADER 3 C23 CC 66 42 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 4 C24 CC 67 43 0400 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK FADER 5 C25 CC 68 44 0 00 127 7F 6 2 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK FADER 6 C2 6 CC 69 45 0 00 127 7F 16 2 TRACK FADER 7 C2 7 CC 70 46 0 00 127 7F 16 2 TRACK FADER 8 C2 8 CC71 47 0 00 127 7F 16 2 z MASTER FADER C2 MASTER CC 8161 0400 127 7F 16 2 E TRACK GROUP 1 8 NO ASSIGN S 5 TRACK GROUP 9 16 z NO ASSIGN z z z z TRACK GROUP 17 24 NO ASSIGN z E TRACK GROUP 25 32 NO ASSIGN E z z JOG DIAL TIME VALUE CC 96 60 127 7F 1 01 6 2 CURSOR UP CURSOR UP CC26 1A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN CURSOR DOWN CC 27 1B 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT CURSOR LEFT CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT CURSOR RIGHT CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER FI CC 10 0A 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST F2 CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV F3 CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT F4 CC 13 0D 0 00 1
163. 5 Messaggi MIDI che possono essere assegnati ai controlli 275 Assegnazione di un messaggio MIDI 276 Controllo dei messaggi MIDI assegnati EE 277 Messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria ss 278 Indicazione di un messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria 278 Attivazione del messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria 278 Scambio di dati con l UR 80 ui 279 Invio di dati all UR 80 in 279 Ricezione di dati dall UR 279 Salvare o aprire in formato SMF 280 Salvare un patch di memoria in formato SMF EE 280 Aprire un patch di memoria da un file SMF nenn 280 Impostazioni di sistema Sa AEA ea iaai Eee 280 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que AA A 281 Banel prineip l msi ste ages nest it aida 281 Secci n de control de pistas ss 282 Secci n de control m ster Master Control ss 285 Secci n de control de audio ss 287 Panel posterioridad ias 288 Panellateral iaiin iron aia 290 Funcionamiento b sico 291 Conexiones y configuraci n basicas 292 COMEXIONES DASICAS Tai a ia tia 292 Elo TE an sta vaca eu ti een 292 Flujo de audio diagrama de blogues 293 Aparatos de entrada salida sus 294 Dos puertos MIDI ses 295 Control del software iii 296 Conmutaci n de conjuntos
164. 6 CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ T lt reset CC 9 09 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW lt lt rew CC 1913 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD gt gt ff CC 20 14 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP stop CC 21 15 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY gt play CC 22 16 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC O rec CC 2317 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP NO ASSIGN SHIFT CURSOR DOWN NO ASSIGN E SHIFT CURSOR LEFT NO ASSIGN E E E SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT NO ASSIGN E z SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER F7 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST FS CC 17 11 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV DEC CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT INC CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO SI MASTER CC 82 52 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS S2 MASTER CC 83 53 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ gt I skip CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REW O ASSIG 3 SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD O ASSIG E z SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP 1 pause CC 8 08 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY O ASSIG SHIFT TRANSPORT REC 53 CC 30 1E 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE S1 9 O ASSIG z S z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE S1 10 O ASSIG E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE ST
165. 7 77147 S REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC REC RDY 4 BO 0C 03 B0 2C 7 07 71 47 z REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC REC RDY5 BO OC 04 B0 2C 7 07 77147 z REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC REC RDY 6 BO 0C 05 BO 2C 7 07 71 47 REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC REC RDY7 BO OC 06 BO 2C 7 07 71 47 E z REMOTE dd LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC REC RDY 8 BO 0C 07 B0 2C 7 07 71 47 z REMOTE ad LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO AUTO NO ASSIGN BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO AUTO 2 NO ASSIGN z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO AUTO 3 NO ASSIGN E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO AUTO 4 NO ASSIGN z S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO AUTO 5 NO ASSIGN z E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO AUTO 6 NO ASSIGN E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO AUTO7 NO ASSIGN BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO AUTOS NO ASSIGN z BUTTON LED TRANSPORT PLAY PLAY BO OC OE BO 2C 404 7 68 44 E REMOTE dd LED TRANSPORT REC RECORD BO OC OE BO 2C 5 05 69 45 REMOTE dd USR5 MEMORY Reason PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE PORT H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL1 PAN Channel 1 Pan CC 23 17 000 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTRO
166. 7 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Controllo delle tracce CH 8 16 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 8 16 Track Control CH 1 9 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CUTOFF CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F select 1 RESONANCE CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB RATE CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DEPTH CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F select 1 VIB DELAY CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F select 1 ATTACK CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F select 1 DECAY CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F select 1 RELEASE CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F select 1 CH 1 9 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 4 1
167. 7 7F B005 dd B02500 BO OF 05 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 7 FADER 7 BO OF 06 BO 2F 40 0 00 127 7F E BO 06 dd BO 2600 BO OF 06 BO 2F 00 TRACK FADER 8 FADER 8 BO OF 07 BO 2F 40 0 00 127 7F BO 07 dd B0 27 00 BO OF 07 BO 2F 00 MASTER FADER NO ASSIGN i S TRACK GROUP 1 8 AUTO MODE READ BO OF 18 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK GROUP 9 16 AUTO MODE BO OF 18 BO 2F 4 04 68 44 UNLATCH WRITE dd TRACK GROUP 17 24 AUTO MODE BO OF 18 BO 2F 5 05 69 45 UNLATCH TOUCH dd TRACK GROUP 25 32 AUTO MODE BO OF 18 BO 2F 1 01 65 41 UNLATCH LATCH dd JOG DIAL TIME OG CC 13 0D 1 01 65 41 1 CURSOR UP CHANNEL LEFT BO OF 0A BO 2F 0 00 64 40 UNLATCH dd CURSOR DOWN CHANNEL RIGHT BO OF OA BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd CURSOR LEFT BANK LEFT BO OF 0A BO 2F 1 01 65 41 UNLATCH dd CURSOR RIGHT BANK RIGHT BO OF OA BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 1 MIXER EDIT WINDOW BO OF 09 BO 2F 1 01 65 41 UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 2 INST MIX WINDOW BO OF 09 BO 2F 0 00 64 40 UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 3 PREV TRANSPORT IN BO OF 10 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 E UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 4 NEXT TRANSPORT OUT BO OF 10 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 5 UNDO UNDO BO OF 08 BO 2F 3 03 67 43 UNLATCH dd FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS SAVE BO OF 08 BO 2F 7 07 7147 UNLATCH dd TRANSPORT RTZ SCRUB BO OF OD BO 2F 5 05 69 45 UNLATCH dd TRANSPORT REW REWIND BO OF OE BO 2F 1 01 65 41 UNLATCH dd
168. 7 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 Channel 6 Bass CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 Channel 7 Bass CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 Channel 8 Bass CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute OTE 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute OTE 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute OTE 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute OTE 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute OTE 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute OTE 9 09 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute OTE 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute OTE 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo OTE 24 18 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo OTE 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 Solo OTE 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo OTE 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo OTE 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo OTE 33 21 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo OTE 35 23 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo OTE 36 24 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 EQ On Off OTE 48 30 0 00 12
169. 7 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 EQ On Off OTE 50 32 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 EQ On Off OTE 52 34 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 EQ On Off OTE 53 35 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 EQ On Off OTE 55 37 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH 365 366 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 EQ On Off OTE 57 39 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 EQ On Off OTE 59 3B 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 EQ On Off OTE 60 3C 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO OTE 72 48 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO OTE 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO z OTE 76 4C 000 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO OTE 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO OTE 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO OTE 81 51 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO E OTE 83 53 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO OTE 84 54 0 00 127 7F 6 LATCH TRACK FADER 1 Channel 1 Level CC 8 08 0 00 127 7F 6 z TRACK FAD
170. 7F 6 2 s TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 C1 13 CC 60 3C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 C1 14 CC 616D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 C1 15 CC 62 3E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 C1 16 CC 63 3F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 S TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 C1 9 CC 56 38 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 CI 10 CC 57 39 0400 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 C1 11 CC 586A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 C1 12 CC 59 3B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 C1 13 CC 60 3C 000 127 7F 6 2 S TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 C1 14 CC 616D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 C1 15 CC 62 3E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 s TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 CI 16 CC 63 3F 0400 127 7F 6 2 s TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE 51 9 CC 32 20 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE S1 10 CC 33 21 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE STIL CC 34 22 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE S1 12 CC 35 23 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE 51 13 CC 36 24 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE S1 14 CC 37 25 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE 51 15 CC 38 26 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE 51 16 CC 39 27 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO 52 9 CC 88 58 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO S2 10 CC 89 59 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO 52 11 CC 90 5A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH T
171. 8 16 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 8 16 70 1 The transmit channel will be the same MIDI channel as the channel HO PART selected by the track status buttons V LINK mode What is V LINK mode This mode lets you control V LINK compatible video devices V LINK A is a function that lets you perform music integrated with video By using V LINK compatible video devices visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance When you turn on the V LINK button located in the Master Control section the Track Control section will be in V LINK mode When the UR 80 enters V LINK mode it will transmit a V LINK ON message Sender Model Name message and V LINK Initialization message When you press the V LINK button once again the UR 80 will transmit a V LINK OFF message and will then exit V LINK lt mode The V LINK initialization message is a MIDI message of up to 255 bytes With the factory S settings the contents of the Parameter list below will be transmitted as the V LINK initialization t message You can use the UR 80 Editor to change this message For details on the settings refer to the k on line help for UR 80 Editor E Parameter list Es In V LINK mode the following messages are assigned You can set the output port in UR
172. 80 1 Enalieh Na terh Erannaie c D amp 311 Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores Fije las etiquetas de HUI a la hoja de plantilla proporcionada La explicaci n que sigue est basada en la siguiente configuraci n DR Indica una operaci n para Digital Performer PT Indica una operaci n para ProTools LE Si no aparece ninguno de estos s mbolos la operaci n se aplica a ambos sistemas Secci n de control de pistas Pro TOOLS INPUT 122 PEAK 1 aN nN DS aN nN CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE AUTO Atenuadores de pista Los atenuadores controlan el volumen del mezclador Puede controlar las ocho pistas del banco de pistas seleccionado Utilice los botones de cursor para activar los bancos de pistas Atenuador master El atenuador m ster no se utiliza Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART Mediante estos botones se conmutan los estados de las pistas Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE OFF No activo Activar y desactivar el apagado mute de la pista Apagado Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activar y desactivar el solo de la pista Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado REC RDY RED Rojo Activar y desactivar el estado de grabaci n para la pista Grabaci n Activo iluminado N
173. 80 Editor Output port EDIROL UR 80 1 default setting Message Range HEX Ch Default assignment lt 1 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 16 Playback Speed Ctrl H 2 CC 17 11 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cr Ctrl 3 CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cb Ctrl H 4 CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 16 Brightness Ctrl u EE 5 CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 16 Output Fade 6 CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 16 no assignment 7 CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 16 no assignment 8 CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 16 no assignment 1 CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 16 Dissolve Time Ctrl 2 CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 16 Audio Level Cul 3 CC 26 IA 0 00 127 7F 16 VFXI Ctrl 4 CC 27 IB 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX2Cel Ich ee 5 CC 28 IC 0 00 127 7F 16 VEX3CHI S 6 CC 29 ID 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX4Ctrl K 7 CC 30 1E 0 00 127 7F 16 no assignment 7 8 CC 31 IF 0 00 127 7F 16 no assignment 1 9 17 25 Program Change 1 9 17 25 16 Play video clip 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 Program Change 2 10 18 26 16 Play video clip 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 Program Change 3 11 19 27 16 Play video clip 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 Program Change 4 12 20 28 16 Play video clip 4 12 20 28 rack Status butions 5 13 21 29 Program Change 5 13 21 29 16 Play video clip 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 Program Change 6 14 22 30 16 Play video clip 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 Program Change 7 15 23 31 16 Play video clip 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 Program Change 8 16 24 32 16 Play video cli
174. 92 PLAYBACK COLOR OUTPUT ASSIGN SEN SPEED R cB BRIGHTNESS FADE all 2 ER ER UTA EN ER ER NA au O 2 EN call i Calle ali ES RO ca ES al poss Alea o 8 gt s S o 5 S m S E S 5 s K O di oh 4 TS CASS x TAN AS A CS om CUTOFF PALETTE RESONANCE VIB RATE AO VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE O O CH O 1 17 9 25 2 18 10 26 3 19 11 27 4 20 5 21 12 28 13 29 6 22 14 30 7 23 15 31 336 UR 80 Editor El programa UR 80 Editor permite utilizar el sistema para crear conjuntos de memoria para la unidad UR 80 La unidad UR 80 dispone de un total de 43 controladores Utilizando estos controladores junto con el bot n SHIFT y los indicadores LED puede asignar 136 mensajes m MIDI diferentes a estos controladores Un conjunto de 136 mensajes MIDI de este tipo se denomina D conjunto de memoria La unidad UR 80 puede almacenar siete conjuntos de memoria z y una memoria predefinida Memory sets p g 349 fr El programa UR 80 Editor permite transferir conjuntos de memoria a la unidad UR 80 y desde la misma editar los valores y guardar cargar conjuntos de memoria en formato SMF Tambien permite modificar la configuraci n del sistema para la propia unidad UR 80 Se Puede ver la ayuda en l nea desde el men Help Ayuda de UR 80 Editor En las p ginas siguientes se describen las funciones de UR 80 Editor Para obtener m s inform
175. 96 PLAY 21 Connecteur USB Utilisez un c ble USB pour connecter l appareil votre ordinateur 156 22 Prises jack de sortie num rique Utilisez ces prises pour sortir l audio num rique vers un appareil audio num rique comme par exemple un lecteur CD un MiniDisc ou un DAT 23 Prises jack d entr e num rique Utilisez ces prises pour entrer l audio num rique d un appareil audio num rique lecteur CD MiniDisc DAT ou d un module de sons MIDI quip d une prise de sortie num rique Enalieh Si vous avez reli un appareil num rique au connecteur optique OPTICAL le connecteur optique aura la priorit sur les prises coaxiales qui ne peuvent pas recevoir de signaux Vous devez utiliser le type de cable correspondant a la prise jack de sortie num rique ou la prise jack d entr e num rique utilis e COAXIAL Cable coaxial OPTICAL Cable optique Le format d entr e sortie num rique de VUR 80 est conforme a la norme S P DIF x D H E q C 24 Prises jack d entr e 1 2 INPUT 1 L 2 R Il s agit de prises jack d entr e audio analogiques Vous pouvez connecter des fiches de type XLR ou de type jack Ces deux types prennent en charge les connexions sym triques et asym triques Une alimentation fant me 48V peut tre fournie pour les connexions XLR vous permettant d utiliser des micros condensateur alimentation fant me Dans ce cas placez le commutateur fant me sur ON Les pri
176. ATTACK 1 Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL E possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI a ciascuna di queste otto manopole Ogni manopola pud accettare fino a tre messaggi diversi corrispondenti ai diversi stati del pulsante Assign PAN SEND 1 SEND 2 Si potranno quindi assegnare complessivamente 24 messaggi diversi alle manopole Track Control Generalmente queste manopole vengono utilizzate per controllare il panning o il livello dell effetto nel software sequencer 2 Pulsante di assegnazione ASSIGN Questo pulsante permette di cambiare i messaggi che sono assegnati alle manopole di controllo delle tracce Premere il pulsante Assign per selezionare una delle seguenti opzioni PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 216 Parti e relative funzioni TRACK STATUS EN PART 0000010 s az GER Ep ED ED ED mon iza DATA men H u 3 Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART E possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI a ciascuno di questi otto pulsanti E inoltre possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI ai LED di ogni pulsante e attivarli disattivarli a partire dal P software sequencer E Ad ogni pulsante e LED possibile assegnare quattro messaggi diversi uno per ogni stato t del pulsante Select disattivato verde rosso arancione Si potranno quindi assegnare fino k a 32 messaggi MIDI ai pulsanti Track Status e 32 messaggi MIDI ai LED Generalmente guesti pu
177. Active d sactive le pre roll OUT D finit la position actuelle comme le point de sortie d enregistrement automatique POST DP D finit la position actuelle comme le point de sortie de lecture en boucle PT Active d sactive le post roll UNDO Annule l op ration pr c demment ex cut e EDIT MODE DP Ouvre la fen tre Nudge PT Commute le mode d dition SAVE Enregistre le projet actuel dans un fichier EDIT TOOL DP Ouvre la fen tre Track PT Commute l outil Edition Les noms de bouton mis entre crochets indiquent que vous pressez le bouton tout en maintenant appuye le bouton SHIFT Si la fonction Scrub est activ e tournez la molette pour d placer le curseur Boutons de transport Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction Activation ou d sactivation de la fonction Scrub Retour en arri re du curseur Avance rapide du curseur Arr t de la lecture ou de l enregistrement Lancement de la lecture Lancement de l enregistrement 182 Contr le de votre logiciel Reason Jeu de sons Utilisez USR5 Maintenez le bouton MEMORY de l UR 80 enfonc et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status USR5 Logiciel Vous avez besoin de Reason version 2 0 ou ult rieure E Param tres du port MIDI 1 Dans le menu Edit s lectionnez Preferences 2 Dans Page s lectionnez Advanced MIDI 3 Effectuez les r
178. Anzeige horizontal verkleinern SETL SETR UNDO SAVE SHIFT 4 Mn ante Anzeige horizontal erweitern CH en D REC pur MES SOURCE MONITOR Funktionsschaltflachen ANALOG STEREO Schaltflache Funktion 20 DIGITAL MONO MIXER ffnet schlie t das Mixer Fenster oJ EFFECTS Offnet schliefst das Fenster VST Send Effect INST Offnet schliefst das Fenster VST Instruments INPUTS Offnet schliefst das Fenster VST Input 8 O LEFT Verschiebt den Cursor zum Positionsanzeiger links SET L Legt die aktuelle Cursorposition als Positionsanzeiger links fest RIGHT Verschiebt den Cursor zum Positionsanzeiger rechts SET R Legt die aktuelle Cursorposition als Positionsanzeiger rechts fest COPY Kopiert das aktuell ausgew hlte Objekt UNDO Macht die vorherige Operation wieder riickgangig PASTE Fiigt das kopierte Objekt in die angegebene Position ein SAVE Speichert das aktuelle Projekt in einer Datei Eckige Klammern um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken m ssen w hrend Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt halten TIME W hlscheibe Wenn Sie die W hlscheibe drehen verschiebt sich der Cursor Transportschalter Diese Schalter f hren folgende Funktionen aus Schaltfl che Funktion Verschiebt den Cursor zum Anfang des Songs Spult den Cursor zur ck Schnellvorlauf f r den Cursor Wiedergabe Aufnahme stoppen Wiedergabe starten A
179. Bot n Funci n G a Cuando aparece Track Mixer en pantalla z ma estos botones seleccionan par metros y o conmutan la ranura de env o o la banda u BEI lt q de ecualizaci n seg n la funci n asignada E E a los controles giratorios de pista CHANNEL INPUT MONITOR LEVEL gt ana OS SHIFT 4 Disminuir la pantalla verticalmente SHIFT YY Ampliar la pantalla verticalmente LES CRACK UNDG SAVE Disminuir la pantalla horizontalmente lt Poj a SHIFT q lt H gt Ampliar la pantalla horizontalmente MIDI CLK SHIFT q SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT C OFF SCRUB k c c ly s u Botones de funci n Bot n Funci n FADER BANK BANK lt Seleccionar el canal controlado a intervalos de 8 canales Banco BANK gt Banco c CHANNEL lt Seleccionar el canal controlado a intervalos de 1 canal H Canal a we CHANNEL gt Canal 309 Control del software Bot n Funci n ASSIGNMENT Conmutar los par metros controlados por los controles giratorios de control de pistas Asignaci n PAN Ajustar la Pan Angle de cada canal Utilice los botones de cursor hacia Panor mica la derecha izquierda para conmutar el par metro de Pan Angle que desee ajustar SEND Env o Ajustar el nivel de env o de cada canal Utilice los botones de cursor hacia arriba y hacia abajo para conmutar las diferentes ranuras de env o Utilice los botones de cursor hacia la dere
180. Bu Input Jack 1 2 1 4 inch TRS phone type 35 to 4 dBu input Impedance Input Jack 1 2 XLR type 5 k ohms Input Jack 1 2 1 4 inch TRS phone type Lo Z 32 k ohms Input Jack 2 Hi Z 1 M ohms Nominal Output Level Output Jack 0 dBu O Output Impedance Output Jack 1k ohms Headphones 160 ohms Residual Noise Level input terminated with 1 k ohms OUTPUT VOLUME max INPUT SENS min INPUT MONITOR min IHF A typ Output Jack 90 dBu or less lnterface USB Digital input output Coaxial type Optical type conforms to S P DIF Connectors Input Jack 1 2 XLR type phantom power 1 4 inch TRS phone type Digital In Connectors Coaxial type Optical type Digital Out Connectors Coaxial type Optical type Headphones Jack Stereo 1 4 inch phone type Output Jack L R RCA phone type Power Supply AC adaptor Current Draw 1000 mA ODimensions 378 5 W x 238 5 D x 83 8 H mm 14 15 16 W x 9 7 16 D x 3 5 16 H inches Weight 1 65 kg 3 lbs 11 oz Accessories Installation Guide Owner s Manual USB cable AC adaptor CD ROM Overlay Sheets with Application Labels 0 dBu 0 775 V rms In the interest of product improvement the specifi cations and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 386 Numerics DIDIt siciliana alcalina 375 A Abschnitt Audio Control in 89 Abschnitt Master Control 87 101 111 116 Abschnitt
181. C12 CC 73 49 0600 127 7F 6 2 S TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 C13 CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 CI4 CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 CS CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 CI 6 CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 CI7 CC 78 4E 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 C1 8 CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 CII CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 c12 CC 73 49 0400 127 7F 6 2 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 C13 CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 C1 4 CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 CI5 CC 76 4C 000 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 Ce CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 C17 CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 C1 8 CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE STI CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE 512 CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE 513 CC 202 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE STA CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE S15 CC 4 04 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE 51 6 CC 5 05 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE S1 7 CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE S1 8 CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO 52 1 CC 40 28 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2
182. CC 22 16 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC Record CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR DOWN CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR LEFT CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT CC 29 1D 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER VST Effects CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST VST Inputs CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV Set Left Locator CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT Set Right Locator CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO Undo CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Save CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ CC 9 09 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REW Punch In CC 19713 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD Punch Out CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP Click CC 21 15 000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY Cycle CC 22 16 000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REC CC 23 17 0000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 7 64 40 6 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute CC 4
183. Con el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas no se pueden conmutar los mensajes asignados a los NOTE controles giratorios de pistas el bot n de estado de pista y los atenuadores de pistas El bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas transfiere cuatro mensajes MIDI diferentes al software secuenciador para modificar el n mero de pista base del software 284 10 11 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an E Secci n de control m ster Master Control La secci n de control m ster es donde pueden ejecutar comandos y controlar las funciones de ejecuci n en el software secuenciador Adem s le permite configurar la interfaz de audio de la unidad UR 80 El contenido controlado depender del software que utilice 8 Botones de cursor CURSOR io Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos cuatro a botones Puesto gue tambi n puede asignar EDIROL UR 80 mensajes manteniendo el bot n SHIFT presionado puede asignar un total de ocho mensajes MIDI E a estos cuatro botones 4 CURSOR gt Utilice los botones de cursor para conmutar la pista que se selecciona en el software secuenciador Y o para desplazar el punto de enfoque WINDOW__ a wien INST 9 Dial de tiempo TIME m ee Puede asignar un mensaje MIDI a este dial MARKER COMMAND_ PREV NEE SEA Utilice el dial TIME para desplazar la ubicaci n INPUT MONITOR LEVEL de canciones en
184. DI Clock Sync EDIROL UR 80 1 x 4 E C You can use UR 80 Editor to change the MIDI port used for MIDI Clock Sync To do this change MEMO the output port for the Sync Start and Sync Stop messages assigned to SHIFT STOP and SHIFT PLAY For details on how to make this change refer to UR 80 Editor p 73 E Settings for reason transport and MIDI IN DEVICE If you want to use the UR 80 to control Reason s modules or transport you must make the following settings for each song Erannaie 1 In the Options menu choose Edit MIDI Remote Mapping to enable it 2 Click the Stop button of reason transport The MIDI Remote dialog box will appear Check Learn from MIDI Input Press the UR 80 s STOP button and click OK in the MIDI Remote dialog box Make the following assignments in the same way UR 80 controller reason transport Stop 5 Play DI Rewind Italiana Forward gt Record a Gem 6 In the Options menu choose Edit MIDI Remote Mapping to disable it In the Options menu make sure that Enable MIDI Remote Mapping is checked If it is not checked select the menu item to enable it 8 Click the MIDI IN DEVICE module CHANNEL 16 button and select the Mixer device that you want to control Eenannl 51 Controlling your software E Controlling the tempo of the song The UR 80 lets you use the time dial and cursor buttons
185. E nm CLK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OFF ANALOG i STEREO 0 DIGITAL 2 MONO O O SHIFT gedriickt halten JOG Drehknopf Funktionsschaltflachen Schaltflache Funktion EDIT DP Offnet das Editor Fenster PT Offnet das Track Fenster MEM LOCT DP Offnet das Marker Fenster PT Offnet das Memory Location Fenster MIXER Offnet das Mixer Fenster TRANSPORT Offnet das Transport Fenster IN Legt die aktuelle Position als Auto Record Start fest Einsteigen PRE DP Legt die aktuelle Position als Punkt fiir Loop Play Start Schleifenwiedergabe Start fest PT Schaltet Vorlauf ein aus OUT Legt die aktuelle Position als Auto Record End Aussteigen fest POST DP Legt die aktuelle Position als Punkt fiir Loop Play End Schleifenwiedergabe Ende fest PT Schaltet Nachlauf ein aus UNDO Macht die vorherige Operation wieder riickgangig EDIT DP Offnet das Nudge Fenster MODE PT Schaltet den Edit Modus um SAVE Speichert das aktuelle Projekt in einer Datei EDIT TOOL DP Offnet das Track Fenster PT Schaltet das Edit Werkzeug um Eckige Klammern um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken m ssen w hrend Sie die Schaltfl che Wenn die Scrub Funktion aktiviert ist verschiebt sich der Cursor wenn Sie den Drehknopf drehen Transportschalter Dies
186. EC you will not hear the PEA sound that is played back by your application If the sampling frequency select switch is set to 96 kHz PLAY the sound of instruments or audio devices connected to the UR 80 cannot be recorded by your application In order for the sampling frequency select switch setting to take effect you switch off the UR 80 then turn it on again Eenannl 57 Recording audio Recording guitar or bass When you use your sequencer software to record your guitar playing while listening to the playback of audio data already on your computer only the guitar performance will be newly recorded on the computer Guitar Bass Connect to INPUT 1 L en Set the sampling srece Wan frequency Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the volume Connections The sound of the instrument connected to input jack 1 will be recorded to channel L on your computer The sound of the instrument connected to input jack 2 will be recorded to channel R Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Sampling frequency select switch Set this to the same sampling frequency as selected in your recording software Input impedance select switch Set this to Hi Z lnput sensitivity knob Use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the input level To obtain
187. ER 2 Channel 2 Level CC 909 0600 127 7F 6 TRACK FADER 3 Channel 3 Level CC 10 0A 000 127 7F 6 E TRACK FADER 4 Channel 4 Level CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 z TRACK FADER 5 Channel 5 Level CC 13 0D 0600 127 7F 6 TRACK FADER 6 Channel 6 Level CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 a TRACK FADER 7 Channel 7 Level CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 n TRACK FADER 8 Channel 8 Level CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 6 MASTER FADER Master Level CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 E TRACK GROUP 1 8 NOTE 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 9 16 NOTE 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 17 24 NOTE 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK GROUP 25 32 s NOTE 15 0F 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH JOG DIAL TIME Tempo TEMPO 20 250 z CURSOR UP Tempo 80 TEMPO 80 80 z UNLATCH CURSOR DOWN Tempo 120 TEMPO 120 120 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT Tempo 145 TEMPO 145 145 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT Tempo 100 TEMPO 100 100 UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER OTE 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST OTE 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV OTE 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT OTE 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO E OTE 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS OTE 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ transport Loop On OTE 6 06 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH Off TRANSPORT REW transport Rewind OTE 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD transport
188. FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 3rd byte BnH ccH n MIDI channel number cc controller number vv control value vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 77H 00H 7FH OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number mm Bank number MSB 11 Bank number LSB OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 00H 7FH Program change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number pp Program number Channel pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Channel pressure Pitch bend change Status 2nd byte MIDI implementation OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 3rd byte EnH 1H n MIDI channel number mm ll Pitch Bend value mmH OH FH Ch 1 16 00 00H 40 00H 7FH 7FH 8192 0 8191 E Channel mode messages The UR 80 lets you assign any channel voice message to any controller and transmit it Channel mode messages Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH ccH n MIDI channel number cc controller number vv control value vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 78H TEH 00H 7FH OAII sounds off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 OReset all controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H
189. FT FUNCTION 4 NEXT Set Right Locator CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO Undo CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Save CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT RTZ Go to End CC 9 09 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REW Punch In CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT FWD Punch Out CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT STOP Metronome CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT PLAY Cycle CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REC Record From Left Loca CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH tor LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Channel 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Channel 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Channel 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Channel 4 Mute CC 43 2B 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Channel 5 Mute CC 44 2C 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Channel 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 S
190. Fare clic sul pulsante Stop del trasporto Reason Appare la finestra di dialogo MIDI Remote dialog Selezionare Learn from MIDI Input 4 Premere il pulsante STOP dell UR 80 e fare clic su OK nella finestra di dialogo MIDI Remote Seguire la stessa procedura per le assegnazioni sotto elencate Controllo UR 80 Trasporto Reason Stop interrompi a Play riproduci D g Rewind riavvolgi E ca Forward avanza gt U Record registra a Loop ON Off attiva disattiva Loop z 6 Nel menu Options selezionare Edit MIDI Remote Mapping per disattivare l opzione A H Nel menu Options accertarsi che l opzione Enable MIDI Remote Mapping sia selezionata u Se non lo fosse selezionare l opzione nel menu per attivarla 8 Fare clic sul pulsante MIDI IN DEVICE module CHANNEL 16 e selezionare il dispositivo Mixer da controllare 249 Utilizzo del software E Controllo del tempo del brano L UR 80 permette di controllare il tempo del brano mediante la manopola Time e i pulsanti Cursor Per controllare il tempo del brano a partire dall UR 80 sara necessario attivare la funzione MIDI Clock Sync in Reason Si dovr prima attivare l invio del timing clock dell UR 80 Per attivare disattivare l invio del timing clock premere SHIFT V LINK Attivazione della funzione MIDI Clock Sync Utilizzare uno dei metodi proposti per attivare la funzione MIDI Clock Sync e Nel menu O
191. G BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Channel 7 Mute O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Channel 8 Mute O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Channel 1 Solo O ASSIG z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Channel 2 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Channel 3 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 EO On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 EQ On Off O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO Si O ASSIG z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STAT
192. G z z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE 512 O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE 513 O ASSIG E S B BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE S1 4 O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE 515 O ASSIGN E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE 51 6 O ASSIG E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE 51 7 O ASSIG z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE S1 8 O ASSIG 2 E 2 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO 52 1 O ASSIG E B z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO 52 2 O ASSIG S z BUTION LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO 52 3 O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO 52 4 O ASSIG 5 E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO 52 5 O ASSIG z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO 52 6 O ASSIG z E S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO 52 7 O ASSIG E z 5 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO 52 8 O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC STI O ASSIGN E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC 512 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC 513 O ASSIG z S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC S1 4 O ASSIG 2 E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC 515 O ASSIG E E S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC S1 6 O ASSIG z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS7 REC S1 7 O ASSIG E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC S1 8 O ASSIG E x BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO 52 1 O ASSIG E z z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO 52 2 O ASSIG z E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO 523 O ASSIG E z E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO 52 4 O ASSIG S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO 52 5 O ASSIG
193. I OUT MIDI cables MIDI cable MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN 4 8 Receive port Ja a ATT eceive port MIDI sound module sold separately sb as S Transmit port 2 Transmit port 2 When connected via MIDI the audio functionality of the UR 80 will be unavailable K E H lt e H u 29 Basic connections and settings Input output devices In order to obtain the best performance from your software you must make the appropriate input output device settings For details on these settings refer to the owner s manual for your software If you are unable to select the UR 80 in the device settings for your software it is possible that the UR 80 driver was not installed correctly Please reinstall the driver MIDI devices MIDI OUT device UR 80 MIDI OUT Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT If you specify UR 80 MIDI OUT as the output port for your sequencer software messages will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector of the UR 80 itself UR 80 Mac OS 9 8 UR 80 1 Select this port if you want to send messages from your sequencer software to the UR 80 itself MIDI IN device UR 80 MIDI IN Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT If you specify UR 80 MIDI IN as the input port for your sequencer software messages will be input from the UR 80 s MIDI IN connector UR 80 1 UR 80 2 Select one of these ports if you want messages from the controllers to be rec
194. IDI Pour cette raison les messages entr s depuis le port CTRL IN ne sont pas normalement renvoy s vers votre module de sons ou synth tiseur faible Par exemple m me si vous jouez sur votre clavier pour envoyer un message de note le logiciel qui recoit ce message ne produit aucune note au lieu de cela il peut interpr ter ce message comme signifiant que vous avez appuyez sur le bouton PLAY STOP L op ration reelle qui a lieu d pend du logiciel utilis Sequencer software Puisque le m me message MIDI peut tre interpr t de mani re Track Record on tracks 00000000 x ER Alte Ie compl tement diff rente comme d crit plus haut le logiciel I vous permet de sp cifier s par ment le port MIDI IN et le port E CTRL IN pour que ces deux types puissent tre distingu s synthesizer Y Si UR 80 est connect via USB vous pouvez s lectionner l un reg pon H ior our por ER pipe des deux ports MIDI UR 80 1 UR 80 2 comme destination Y de sortie des messages MIDI produits par les commandes 0 5 a MIDI sound module d att nuation les molettes et les boutons de l UR 80 ur 20 1 unsoz En d autres termes en affectant UR 80 1 comme port MIDI IN de votre logiciel et UR 80 2 comme port CTRL IN vous pouvez par exemple utiliser les fonctions des commandes d att nuation et des boutons p
195. IL O ASSIG 5 z x BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE 51 12 O ASSIG a BUTION LED TRACK STATUS5 MUTE 51 13 O ASSIGN E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE S1 14 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE 51 15 O ASSIG z x a BUTION LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE S1 16 O ASSIG 2 E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO 52 9 O ASSIG z B BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO 52 10 O ASSIG S z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO 52 11 O ASSIG E E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO 52 12 O ASSIG 5 E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO 52 13 O ASSIG 5 S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO 52 14 O ASSIG z E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS7 SOLO 52 15 O ASSIG E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO 52 16 O ASSIG 2 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC STI O ASSIGN E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC 512 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC 513 O ASSIG z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC S1 4 O ASSIG 2 E 2 BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC 515 O ASSIG E E S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC S1 6 O ASSIG z z BUTION LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC S1 7 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC S1 8 O ASSIG E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO 52 1 O ASSIG E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO 52 2 O ASSIG z E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO 523 O ASSIG E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO 52 4 O ASSIG z BUTION LED TRACK STATUS5 AUTO S2 5 O ASSIG E z BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO 52 6 O ASSIG E E BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7
196. IROL UR 80 MIDI OUT MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN 6 MIDI IN EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 2 292 Conexiones y configuraci n b sicas E Flujo de audio diagrama de bloques COAXIAL IN CONVERTER OPTICAL IN TRS ONLY Lo Z Hi Z INPUT 1 PHANTOM XLR ONLY as SAMPLE RATE USE COAXIAL OUT OPTICAL OUT L OUTPUT lt RA H nm u PHONES INPUT MONITOR STEREO MONO SEN Si va a utilizar conexiones MIDI Aunque la unidad UR 80 no est conectada al sistema mediante un cable USB puede conectar los lt conectores MIDI IN OUT de la unidad UR 80 con una interfaz MIDI que est conectada al sistema E we q C MIDI N MIDI OUT MIDI cables MIDI cable MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN 0 en ERA eceive port MIDI sound module sold separately sb as S Transmit port 2 Transmit port 2 Si realiza las conexiones a trav s de MIDI no podrd utilizar las funciones de audio de la unidad UR 80 c 7 293 Conexiones y configuraci n b sicas Aparatos de entrada salida Para conseguir el m ximo rendimiento del software debe realizar las configuraciones de aparatos de entrada salida pertinentes Si desea obtener detalles sobre estas configuraciones consulte el manual del usuario que se adjunta con el software Si no puede seleccionar la unidad UR 80 en la configuraci
197. L 2 PAN Channel 2 Pan CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN Channel 3 Pan CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN Channel 4 Pan CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN Channel 5 Pan CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN Channel 6 Pan CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN Channel 7 Pan CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN Channel 8 Pan CC 30 1E 0 00 127 7F 6 TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 Channel 1 Treble CC 82 52 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 Channel 2 Treble CC 83 53 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 Channel 3 Treble CC 84 54 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 Channel 4 Treble CC 85 55 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 Channel 5 Treble CC 86 56 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 Channel 6 Treble CC 87 57 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 Channel 7 Treble CC 88 58 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 Channel 8 Treble CC 89 59 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 Channel 1 Bass CC 68 44 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 Channel 2 Bass CC 69 45 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 Channel 3 Bass CC 70 46 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 Channel 4 Bass CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F 6 Amount TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 Channel 5 Bass CC 72 48 0 00 12
198. L UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 H 6 4 c 4 D u 3 Specify the in port and out port C Control Surface In port Out port k EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 7 qe MEMO For details on using SONAR refer to the SONAR owner s manual lt D H u 33 Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the controllers Track Control section Track faders Control the track volumes By using these faders in conjunction with the track group select button you can control 32 tracks Master fader Control the volume of virtual main You can choose which virtual main you want to control in the Setting dialog of UR 80 Control Surface Plag in For details refer to the online help for UR 80 Control Surface Plug in Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART Switch the status of the tracks By using these buttons in conjunction with the track group select button you can control 32 tracks Mode SELECT button status Function MUTE OFF Switches track mute on off On lit Off unlit SOLO GREEN Switches track solo on off On lit Off unlit REC RED Switches track record ready on off On lit Off unlit AUTO ORANGE Switches track automation recording on off On lit Off unlit Track Control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs control track Pan Send 1 level and Send 2 level Use the Assign button to select Pan Send 1 level or Send 2 level By using these knobs in conjunction with the track group selec
199. LINK mode JStatus Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 51H 12H F7H 10H 71H 00H 45H 44H 49H 52H 4FH 4CH 20H 55H 52H 2DH 38H 30H 00H 64H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland 10H Device ID For the UR 80 fixed at 10H 00H 51H Model ID V LINK 12H Command ID DT1 Address 10H 71H 00H 45H 44H 49H Model name EDIROL UR 80 52H 4FH 4CH 20H 55H 52H 2DH 38HH 30H 00H 64H Checksum F7H EOX End of Exclusive OData Set 1 DT1 12H Transmitted when you execute Bulk TX in the Bulk mode Status Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 68H 12H aaH ddH eeH sum F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland 10H Device ID 00H Model ID 1 UR 80 68H Model ID 2 UR 80 12H Command ID RQ1 aaH Address ddH Data eeH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End of Exclusive The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be received Refer to the explanation in 3 Bulk Dump There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that is sent 3 Bulk dump Bulk dump allows a large amount of data to be transferred in a single operation For example this can be used to store all settings of a device into a computer or sequencer Parameter Dump OParameter Dump Request This command requests a device to transmit all of the memory set data fro
200. LK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT nim DEL OFF JO STEREO 9 MONO Pulsanti funzione Utilizzo del software Pulsanti Cursor Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione a Quando viene visualizzato Track Mixer questi pulsanti selezionano i parametri o cambiano lo slot Send o la banda dell equalizzatore in base lt q alla funzione assegnata alle manopole di controllo delle tracce SHIFT 4 Riduce la schermata verticalmente SHIFT YY Espande la schermata verticalmente Riduce la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT q Espande la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT gt Pulsante Funzione FADER BANK BANK lt Percorre i canali attivi a gruppi di 8 BANK gt CHANNEL lt Percorre i canali attivi 1 canale alla volta CHANNEL gt ASSIGNMENT Cambia i parametri controllati dalle manopole Track Control PAN Regola il Pan Angle di ogni canale Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore sinistro destro per cambiare il Pan Angle da regolare SEND Regola il Send Level di ogni canale Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore su gi per passare da uno slot Send all altro Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore sinistro destro per cambiare il Send Level da regolare EQ Regola l EQ Gain di ogni canale Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore su gi per cambiare la banda dell equalizzatore Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore sinistro destro pe
201. NCE vie RATE vig DEPTH vie DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE AUTO MODE TRACK STATUS Ho PART KEE EE GREEN SOLO RED RECRDY ORANGE AUTO Track faders The faders control the mixer volume You can control the eight tracks of the selected track bank Use the cursor buttons to switch track banks Master fader The master fader is not used Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART These buttons switch the status of the track Mode SELECT button status Function MUTE OFF Switch track mute on off On lit Off unlit SOLO GREEN Switch track solo on off On lit Off unlit REC RDY RED Switch track record ready on off On lit Off unlit AUTO ORANGE Hold down this button and use the Automation Mode button AUTO MODE to change the automation setting of the track Track Control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs control track Pan Send 1 level and Send 2 level Use the Assign button to select Pan Send 1 level or Send 2 level The value will increase while the knob is turned toward the right and will decrease while the knob is turned toward the left The change increase decrease will stop when you return the knob to the center position Shuttle mode 48 Controlling your software Automation Mode button AUTO MODE This selects the track automation setting In SELECT mode hold down the Track Status button and press the Automation Mode button to
202. NE IN Registrazione digitale da CD MD DAT jo z CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL 5 or COAXIAL IN as appropriate E for your device SAMPLE RATE 96 PLAY 48 Ges j Set the sampling frequency Match the sampling frequencies of your recording software and your digital audio playback device Set REC SOURCE to DIGITAL lit Collegamenti Collegare alla presa d ingresso digitale OPTICAL COAXIAL il cavo adatto interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento Impostare la stessa frequenza di campionamento del software di registrazione Pulsante REC SOURCE Impostare questo pulsante su DIGITAL illuminato ONote Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati L UR 80 non supporta i formati audio digitali professionali Convertitore integratodella frequenza di campionamento Con l UR 80 e possibile convertire in tempo reale la frequenza di campionamento del segnale che arriva all ingresso digitale lt Esempi gt 48 kHz gt 44 1 kHz 32 kHz gt 48 kHz Il segnale digitale verr convertito nella frequenza impostata con interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento prima di essere registrato 260 Registrazione dell output dell UR 80 su un dispositivo digitale El Bo m SAMPLE RATE Bort ee
203. O SAVE Dou IAE Pulsante Funzione 4 LS MIXER Apre chiude la finestra VST Channel Mixer SOURCE MONITOR EFFECTS Apre chiude la finestra VST Send Effect Sai INST Apre chiude la finestra VST Instruments INPUTS Apre chiude la finestra VST Inputs LEFT Sposta il cursore nel punto del marker sinistro SET L Imposta la posizione corrente del cursore come marker sinistro RIGHT Sposta il cursore nella posizione del marker destro O O SET R Imposta la posizione corrente del cursore come marker destro COPY Copia l oggetto correntemente selezionato CLICK UNDO Annulla l operazione precedente PASTE Incolla l oggetto copiato nel punto indicato SAVE Salva il progetto corrente in un file I pulsanti tra parentesi quadre dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT Manopola TIME Ruotare la manopola per spostare il cursore Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione Sposta il cursore all inizio del brano Sposta indietro il cursore Avanza rapidamente il cursore Interrompe la riproduzione registrazione Avvia la riproduzione Avvia la registrazione Attiva disattiva l auto punch in SHIFT SHIFT Cu Caa SHIFT Attiva o disattiva il metronomo nm Attiva disattiva l auto punch out Attiva disattiva il cycle SHIFT 240 Logic Patch di memoria Utilizz
204. O 41 dd TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN PAN 3 BOOFOB BO OF OB BO 42 dd TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN PAN 4 BO OF 0B BO OF 0B BO 43 dd TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN PAN 5 BO OF OB BO OF 0B BO 44 dd TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN PAN 6 BO OF OB BO OF OB BO 45 dd TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN PAN 7 BO OF 0B BO OF 0B BO 46 dd TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN PAN 8 BO OF OB BO OF 0B BO 47 dd TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 SEND A 1 BO OF OB BO OF 0B BO 40 dd TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 SEND A 2 BO OF OB BO OF OB BO 41 dd TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 SEND A3 BO OF OB BO 2F 47 01 65 41 S SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 07 d B B d B B d B B d B B d B B d B B d B B d B B d B B d BO 2F 42 01 65 41 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO 2F 42 01 65 41 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO 2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO 2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO 2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 02 BO 2F 42 01 65 41 SHUTTLE B02F 02 BO 2F 47 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO2F 47 01 65 41 SHUTILE BO 2F 07 BO 42 d TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 SEND A 4 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 43 d TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 SEND A5 BO OPO BO 0F 0 BO 44 d TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 SEND A 6 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 45 d TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 SEND A7 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 46 d TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 SEND A 8 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 47 d TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 SEND B1 BO OPO DO 0F 0 BO 40 d TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2
205. O EE 228 INIT MESSAGE assignment area 75 INIT MESSAGE sezione i 273 A iii as 30 Input impedance select switch 25 58 61 Inputjacksl Deir 2a 25 INPUT MONITOR LEVEL 22 88 154 220 286 Input Monitor select switch 65 Input monitor switch ii 58 61 Input Monitor interruttore 256 259 263 Input sensitivity knob 23 58 61 Input manopola di sensibilit 221 256 259 Input Monitor Auswahlschalter 131 Input Monitor Schalter 124 127 Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf 89 124 127 Interrupteur d alimentation 156 Interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d echantillonnage e 156 190 195 Interruptor de alimentaci n POWER 288 Interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma 323 Interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma Phantom power inde baia ne te MNE A TERA NI 290 Interruptor de monitoraje de entrada 322 325 Interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling iia 288 322 327 Interruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada een TI A NORO OR VN 322 324 325 Interruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada input LIMP rta 290 Interruptor de selecci n de monitoraje de entrada Input Motto sin din 329 Interruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sam
206. OData Set 1DT1 12H This message transmits the actual data and is used to load the data into the device Status Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 68H 12H aaH ddH eeH sum F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland 10H Device ID For the UR 80 fixed at 10H 00H Model ID 1 UR 80 68H Model ID 2 UR 80 12H Command ID RQ1 aaH Address ddH Data eeH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End of Exclusive The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be received Refer to the explanation in 3 Bulk Dump p 383 There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that is sent 380 2 Transmit data E Channel voice messages The UR 80 can transmit any type of channel voice message assigned to its controllers ONote off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH Ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 vv note off velocity 00H 7FH 1 127 ONote on Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number kk note number vv note on velocity OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 1 127 Polyphonic key pressure Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH n MIDI channel number kk note number vv key pressure Control change Status 2nd byte vvH OH
207. OUP de l UR 80 Vous pouvez affecter ces contr leurs aux param tres de Reason souhait s Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Edit MIDI Remote Mapping pour l activer Si vous s lectionnez un module Reason une fl che verte s affiche pour les contr leurs affectables S lectionnez un contr leur La bo te de dialogue MIDI Remote s affiche cochez Learn from MIDI Input Appuyez sur le bouton TRACK GROUP ou sur le bouton de fonction que vous souhaitez faire correspondre avec le contr leur s lectionn 5 Cliquez sur OK dans la bo te de dialogue MIDI Remote R p tez les tapes 2 5 Une fois les r glages effectu s s lectionnez Edit MIDI Remote Mapping dans le menu Options pour le d sactiver 8 Dans le menu Options assurez vous que la case Enable MIDI Remote Mapping est coch e Sinon s lectionnez l option du menu pour l activer e 184 Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs Fixez les tiquettes Reason sur la feuille de mod le jointe L explication ci dessous suit ces r glages Section Track Control REASON lt INPUT 122 D PER z O N u i m CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY DECAY RELEASE _ O GREEN SOLO RED EQ ORANGE 1 3 4 5 6 Z Commandes d att nuation Track Les commandes d att nuation r glent le volume de la table de mixage x 4 E C Vous pouvez r gler les pistes 1
208. Out 30 96 162 228 Mode Edition Synth 200 Mode V LINK arestas nranti cht gesteet 203 Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador 332 Modo V LINK 2 ran 335 N Netzschalter u a 90 NO ASSIGN rr 77 143 209 275 NO ASSIGN Sin asignaci n 341 Non Registered Parameter Number 77 143 209 275 Note saved aan 77 143 209 275 N te Nota nes evo iii dallo nenne 341 Note Message anne 77 Note messaggio tiara linea 275 N tennachricht street liane 143 NRPN users 77 143 209 275 NRPN N mero de par metro no registrado 341 N mero de par metro no registrado 341 O OPTICAL unta nh 25 91 157 223 289 Original Driver Mode E 348 Outputs un een 30 Output volume VOLUME knob 23 P Panel lateral sien intentions 290 P nel p steri r AAA ES a iinit 288 Panel principal ic 281 Pan eau principal vincia sila 149 Pannello laterale i 224 Pannello posteriore ue 222 Pannello principale ui 215 Parameter list iii 70 71 Parameterliste casa nia tania sail 136 137 Patch di memoria ene 230 PC Program Change 209 Peak indicators ss 23 Peak Anzeigen ss 89 P riph rique MIDI IN EEN 162 P riph rique MIDI OUT eessen 162 P riph riques audio 162 P riph riques MIDI
209. PUTS Open close the VST Input window O O LEFT Move the cursor to the left locator position SET L Set the current cursor location as the left locator RIGHT Move the cursor to the right locator position SETR Set the current cursor location as the right locator COPY Copy the currently selected object UNDO Undo the preceding operation PASTE Paste the copied object into the specified location SAVE Save the current project to a file Button names in square brackets indicate that you press the button while holding down the SHIFT button TIME dial Turning the dial will move the cursor Transport buttons These perform the following functions Button Function Move the cursor to the beginning of the song Rewind the cursor Fast forward the cursor Stop playback recording Start playback Start recording SHIFT Move the cursor to the end of the song SHIFT Switch auto punch in on off SHIFT Switch auto punch out on off SHIFT Switch the metronome on off SHIFT Switch cycle on off SHIFT Switch Start Record at Left Locator on off 38 Controlling your software Cubase VST Software Memory set Use USR2 Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press the track status button USR2 Cubase VST 5 1 or later is required You will need Cubase VST and EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml EDIROL UR 80
210. Pan CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN Track 8 Pan CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 Track 1 Aux Send CC 72 48 0400 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1 Track 2 Aux Send CC 73 49 000 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 1 Track 3 Aux Send CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 1 Track 4 Aux Send CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 1 Track 5 Aux Send CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 1 Track 6 Aux Send CC77 4D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 1 Track 7 Aux Send CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 1 Track 8 Aux Send CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 2 Track 1 Aux2 Send CC 72 48 000 127 7F 4 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 2 Track 2 Aux2 Send CC 73 49 000 127 7F E 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 Track 3 Aux2 Send CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 Track 4 Aux2 Send CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 Track 5 Aux2 Send CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Leve TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 Track 6 Aux2 Send CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F E 2 Level TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 Track 7 Aux2 Send CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 4 2 Level 349 350
211. Pitch Bend Weist eine Pitch Bend Nachricht zu MIDI Channel Min Value Change Max Value Program Weist eine Program Change Nachricht zu MIDI Channel Change Mix Value Der Wert der Programmnummer bewegt sich im Max Value Bereich 1 128 Bank Weist eine Bank Select Nachricht und Program Change MIDI Channel Bank MSB Program Nachricht zu Bank LSB Change Min Value Der Wert fiir die Bank Select Nachricht ist unver nderlich Max Value Der Wert der Programmnummer bewegt sich im Bereich 1 128 RPN Weist eine Registered Parameter Number zu MIDI Channel RPN MSB RPN LSB Der LSB Bereich fiir die Dateneingabe wurde MSB Min Value MSB Max auf 0 127 festgelegt Value Send LSB NRPN Weist eine Non Registered Parameter Number zu MIDI Channel NRPN MSB Der LSB Bereich fiir die Dateneingabe wurde auf 0 127 NRPN LSB festgelegt MSB Min Value MSB Max Value Send LSB System Common Realtime Weist eine System Common oder System Realtime Nachricht zu Verwenden Sie das Feld Status fiir die Auswahl der gew nschten Nachricht Free Message Sie k nnen jede beliebige MIDI Nachricht mit bis zu 24 Byte zuweisen Sie k nnen mehrere Nachrichten zuweisen MIDI Nachricht von bis zu 24 Byte Datentyp Min Verwenden Sie den UR 80 Editor um das Ausgabeziel fiir die Timing Clock Nachrichten festzulegen N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie unter Systemeinstellungen S 148 Value Max Value T
212. R Cet interrupteur permet de mettre l appareil sous hors tension L alimentation est activ e lorsque l interrupteur est enfonc 17 Connecteur d adaptateur secteur DC IN Connectez ici l adaptateur secteur inclus 18 Borne de mise la terre Selon les conditions d utilisation de l UR 80 le signal audio peut g n rer du bruit Si c est le cas vous pouvez r soudre le probl me en reliant la borne de mise la terre une borne externe Contactez le centre de maintenance Roland si vous n tes pas s r de la proc dure Ne connectez pas la borne de mise la terre aux emplacements suivants e Conduite d eau risque d lectrocution e Conduite de gaz risque d explosion ou d incendie Bornier t l phonique ou paratonnerre dangereux en cas d orages 19 Prises MIDI IN OUT Reliez ces connecteurs aux connecteurs MIDI d autres p riph riques MIDI pour transmettre et recevoir les messages MIDI 20 Interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage SAMPLE RATE Cet interrupteur s lectionne la fr quence d chantillonnage laquelle le signal audio est enregistr et lu Si vous modifiez le r glage de cet interrupteur vous devez alors fermer toutes les applications et mettre l UR 80 hors tension puis le remettre sous tension Si vous utilisez le taux d chantillonnage 96 kHz vous ne pouvez pas simultan ment enregistrer et lire Vous devez s lectionner soit enregistrement 96 REC soit lecture
213. RACK STATUS 4 SOLO 52 12 CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO 52 13 CC 92 5C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO 52 14 CC 936D 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO 52 15 CC 94 5E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO 52 16 CC 95 5E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC STI CC 32 20 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC 512 CC 33 21 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC 513 CC 342 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC S1 4 CC 35 23 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC 515 CC 36 24 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC S1 6 CC 37 25 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC S1 7 CC 38 26 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC S1 8 CC 39 27 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO 52 1 CC 88 58 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO 52 2 CC 89 59 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS3 AUTO 523 CC 90GA 000 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO 52 4 CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO 52 5 CC 92 5C 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO 52 6 CC 93 5D 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO 52 7 CC 94 5E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO 52 8 CC 95 5E 0 00 7 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 C2 9 CC 48 30 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK FADER 2 C2 10 CC 4931 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 3 C2 11 CC 50 32 0 00 127
214. Regola il volume dell audio emesso dalla presa delle cuffie e dalle uscite master Questa manopola non altera il volume dell audio proveniente dalle uscite digitali i D u 221 Parti e relative funzioni Pannello posteriore POWER DC IN SAMPLE RATE INPUT 2 R INPUT 1 L XLR Mic Pre AMP 50 10 dBu ee 96 PLAY 48 96 REC SEH fi Ac A THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT 35 4 dBu 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL gt 5 ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED HiZ LoZ ON OFF USE UNDESIRED OPERATION Ge Sr 16 17 18 Pulsante di alimentazione POWER Attiva o disattiva l alimentazione L apparecchio e alimentato quando l interruttore risulta premuto Connettore per adattatore AC DC IN Presa per collegare l adattatore AC in dotazione Contatto di messa a terra A seconda di come viene utilizzato l UR 80 il segnale audio potrebbe risultare disturbato Il problema pu essere risolto collegando questo contatto a un collegamento esterno di messa a terra Contattare un rivenditore Roland in caso di dubbi Non collegare il contatto di messa a terra nei seguenti punti 19 20 21 222 e vicino a una conduttura dell acqua per evitare eventuali scosse elettriche e vicino a tubazioni del gas per evitare eventuali esplosioni o incendi e vicino alla messa a terra della linea telefonica o parafulmine potrebbe risultare pericoloso in caso di fulmini Connetto
215. S 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 Read CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 Read CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 Read CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 Read CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 Read CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 Read CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 Read CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 Read CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO Channel 1 Write CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO Channel 2 Write CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO Channel 3 Write CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO Channel 4 Write CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH 352
216. SEND B 2 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 41d TRACK CONTROL 3 SEND 2 SEND B 3 BO OPO BOOF 0 BO 42 d TRACK CONTROL 4 SEND 2 SENDB4 BO OPO DO 0F 0 BO 43 d BO 2F 47 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO2F 47 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO 2F 47 01 6541 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO 2F 47 01 65 41 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO 2F 47 01 65 41 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 07 BO 2F 46 01 6541 SHUTTLE BO 2F 06 BO 2F 46 01 6541 SHUTTLE BO 2F 06 BO 2F 4 BO 2F 06 a 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO 2F 46 01 65 41 z SHUTTLE BO 2F 06 361 362 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 5 SEND 2 SENDB5 B00F0BB02F46 101 65 41 SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 06 BO 44 dd TRACK CONTROL 6 SEND 2 SEND B 6 BOOFOBBO2F46 1 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 06 BO 45 dd TRACK CONTROL 7 SEND 2 SEND B 7 BOOFOBBO2F46 1 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 06 BO 46 dd TRACK CONTROL 8 SEND 2 SEND B 8 BOOFOBBO2F46 1 01 65 41 SHUTTLE BO OF OB BO 2F 06 BO 47 dd TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE MUTE 1 BO OF 00 BO 2F 2 02 66 42 UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE MUTE2 BO OF 01 BO 2F 2 02 7 66 42 s UNLATCH dd TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE MUTE
217. SHIFT TIME dial to adjust the monitor level Input monitoring can be switched on off from ASIO 2 0 compliant software such as Cubase Adjusting the input monitor level will not change the recording level The input signal will not be output Use this setting if you are thru ing the audio data within your computer or if you have connected a mixer and are using the mixer to directly output the input signal for monitoring OFF LED unlit The input signal will be output in stereo Use this setting if you have connected a stereo device to input jacks 1 2 or if you are using the digital input jack STEREO LED lit The input signal from the input jacks or digital input jack will be mixed to monaural and output Use this setting if you have connected a monaural signal such as guitar or mic to the input jacks The audio signal sent via USB to your computer is stereo MONO LED blinking SHIFT Use this in conjunction with other buttons in the Master Control section 22 Buttons enclosed in square brackets e g MIDI CLK indicate that you are to operate the button while holding down the SHIFT button Names of Things and What They Do E Audio Control section NA She 14 9 v 13 Input sensitivity knob This dual concentric knob adjusts the input level to input jacks 1 and 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT2 R The UR 80 provides XLR type and phone type input jacks and
218. SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Anschl sse Verwenden Sie ein Phone Buchsenkabel um Ihr Keyboard oder anderes Ger t mit den Eingangsbuchsen 1 und 2 zu verbinden Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf die Sampling Frequenz ein die in Ihrer Aufnahmesoftware ausgew hlt wurde Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf Lo Z input Sensitivity Schaltknopf Verwenden Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf um den Eingangspegel anzupassen Um die beste Soundqualit t zu erhalten drehen Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf bis der Pegel so hoch ist wie m glich ohne dass die Input Peakanzeige aufleuchtet Input Monitor Schalter Dr cken Sie den Input Monitor Schalter und passen Sie den Input Monitor Level f r das Signal von Ihrem Keyboard an Damit wird die Aufnahmelautst rke nicht ver ndert Um die Input Monitor Lautst rke zu regeln halten Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt und drehen die TIME W hlscheibe Schaltflache REC SOURCE Stellen Sie diese Schaltflache auf ANALOG ein unbeleuchtet Weitere Hinweise Verbinden Sie mit den Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden keine Gerate 126 Aufnahme von Audio Aufnahme von einem Audiogerat sees Stereo set cassette deck MIDI sound module Connect to INPUT 1 L gt and INPUT Serres RETE Set the sampling z
219. STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 Select CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 Select CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 Select CC 43 2B 000 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 Select CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 Select CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 Select CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 Select CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO 5 CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH TRACK FADER 1 Channel 1 Volume CC 64 40 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 2 Channel 2 Volume CC 65 41 000 127 7F 6 7 TRACK FADER 3 Channel 3 Volume CC 66 42 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 4 Channel 4 Volume CC 67 43 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 5 Channel 5 Volume CC 68 44 000 127 7F 6 2 E TRACK FADER 6 Channel 6 Volume CC 69 45 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 7 Channel 7 Volume CC 70 46 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK FADER 8 Channel 8 Vo
220. STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 Select CC OC 0 00 64 40 5 a REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 Select CC 45 2D 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 Select CC 46 2E 0 00 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 Select CC 47 2F 0 00 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO CC 0 00 0 00 64 40 5 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO CC 1 01 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO CC 2 02 0 00 64 40 5 a REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO CC 3 03 0 00 64 40 5 m REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS5 AUTO CC 4 04 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO CC 5 05 0 00 7 64 40 5 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO CC 6 06 0 00 64 40 5 x REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO CC 7 07 0 00 64 40 5 z REMOTE LED TRANSPORT PLAY Start CC 2216 0 00 7 64 40 6 E REMOTE LED TRANSPORT REC Record CC 23 17 0 00 64 40 6 m REMOTE 357 Memory sets USR3 MEMORY Logic PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE FO 00 00 66 10 01 48 41 31 30 36 35 39 58 6B 60 5C F7 358 FO 00 00 66 10 03 48 41 31 30 36 35 39 F7 PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1
221. Sampling Frequenz des Signals das ber die Digitaleingangsbuchse eingegeben wird kann vom UR 80 in Echtzeit konvertiert werden lt Beispiele gt 48 kHz gt 44 1 kHz 32 kHz gt 48 kHz Das Digitalsignal wird vor der Aufzeichnung in die Frequenz konvertiert die durch den Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter vorgegeben wird 128 Aufnahme von Audio Aufnahme der Ausgabe des UR 80 auf einem Digitalgerat SAMPLE RATE raras Set the sampling 96 REC CR 441 Match the sampling frequencies of your playback software and your digital audio recording device m El Em ske Eco op CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL or COAXIAL OUT as appropriate for your device lt z u Anschl sse k Verwenden Sie einen geeigneten Kabeltyp um Anschliisse mit der Digitalausgangsbuchse i OPTICAL COAXIAL herzustellen d Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Wahlen Sie fiir Ihr Audiodaten Ausgabeprogramm fiir das UR 80 und fiir Ihr Digitalaudio Aufnahmeger t z B MD oder DAT jeweils die gleiche Sampling Frequenz OWeitere Hinweise Verbinden Sie keine Gerate mit Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden Das UR 80 unterst tzt keine professionellen Digitalaudioformate Das UR 80 kann das Eingangssignal von seinen Eingangsbuchsen nicht direkt an seinen k Digitalausgangsbuchsen ausgeben Die Digitalausgangsbuchsen geb
222. Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt halten 111 E u Erannaie Italiana Eenannl Steuerung Ihrer Software 112 JOG Drehknopf Wenn Sie diesen Drehknopf drehen verschiebt sich die Song Position Line SPL Wenn der Scrub Modus aktiviert ist k nnen Sie den Drehknopf fiir Scrub Wiedergabe nutzen Transportschalter Diese Schalter f hren folgende Funktionen aus Schaltflache Funktion Schaltet den Scrub Modus ein aus Spult den Song zur ck Wenn Sie w hrend des Zur ckspulens diese Taste wiederholt dr cken wird dieser Vorgang beschleunigt Umgekehrt wird das Zur ckspulen verlangsamt und angehalten wenn Sie w hrend dieses Vorgangs Karicken Spult den Song im Schnellvorlauf nach vorn Wenn Sie diese Schaltfl che w hrend des Schnellvorlaufs wiederholt dr cken wird dieser Vorgang beschleunigt Umgekehrt wird der Schnellvorlauf durch Dr cken von Ri wahrend des Schnellvorlaufs verlangsamt und gestoppt Stoppt alle Transportfunktionen Driicken Sie die Taste erneut um zum Anfang des Songs zur ckzukehren Song ab der aktuellen Position abspielen Aufnahme beginnen Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 Memory Set Verwenden Sie USR4 Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY des UR 80 gedr ckt und dr cken Sie die Track Statusschaltflache USR4 E Einstellungen in Pro Tools LE 1 W hlen Sie im Men Setups den Men punkt Peripherals 2 Klicken Sie au
223. Sie auf UR80CSP EXE um das Installationsprogramm zu starten Folgen Sie den Hinweisen auf dem Bildschirm um die Software zu installieren lt E u E Einstellungen in SONAR 1 W hlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt Control Surfaces 2 Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld Control Surfaces auf die Schaltfl che und wahlen Sie EDIROL UR 80 als Control Surface Control Surfaces il Connected Surfaces Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 lt 4 c q D u 3 Geben Sie den In port und den Out port an Control Surface In port Out port e EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 MEMO N here Informationen zur Verwendung von SONAR erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch zu SONAR lt D H u 99 Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen Abschnitt Track Control Track Fader Steuern die Lautst rke der Spuren Wenn Sie diese Fader gemeinsam mit der Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 32 Spuren steuern Master Fader Steuert die Lautst rke des virtuellen Hauptreglers Sie k nnen im Einstellungsdialog des UR 80 Control Surface Plugins w hlen welchen virtuellen Hauptregler Sie steuern m chten Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie in der Online Hilfe fiir das UR 80 Control Surface Plugin Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Schalten den Status der Spuren um
224. Step 6 LED Mode Remote v Message Channel Message O Free Message Type Control Change v MIDIChamel 16 Step 7 LED racoption message Control Number OFF Value ON Value i jo p ja le de Comment Step 8 Comment input area Step 9 Nella finestra principale fare clic sul controllo cui si desidera assegnare un messaggio Nella sezione Assign Message della finestra Message Assign selezionare il tipo di messaggio da assegnare A seconda del tipo di messaggio selezionato utilizzare le caselle di controllo della sezione Assign Message per specificare parametri del messaggio La maggior parte dei parametri sono espressi sotto forma di numeri decimali salvo per un Free Message che invece deve essere specificato in forma esadecimale nella sezione Message Indicare l uscita in Output Port Se il controllo un pulsante specificare la modalita in Button Mode Se il controllo una manopola specificare la modalit in Knob Mode Se il controllo un pulsante provvisto di LED specificare la modalita in LED Mode Se la modalit LED Mode amp stata impostata su Remote indicare il tipo di messaggio in LED reception message La casella di controllo LED reception message permette di selezionare tra Channel Message o Free Message parametri sono gli stessi di quelli utilizzati in una normale assegnazione fatte salve le seguenti eccezioni Per il LED reception message il valore OFF value sar Min Value La
225. T TRANSPORT PLAY CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT TRANSPORT REC Write Automation CC 23 17 0 00 7 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH LED TRACK STATUS 1 MUTE Track 1 Mute CC 40 28 0 00 7 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 MUTE Track 2 Mute CC 41 29 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 MUTE Track 3 Mute CC 42 2A 0 00 7 127 7F 6 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 MUTE Track 4 Mute CC 43 2B 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 MUTE Track 5 Mute CC 44 2C 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 MUTE Track 6 Mute CC 45 2D 0 00 7 127 7F 6 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 MUTE Track 7 Mute CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 6 m REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 MUTE Track 8 Mute CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 SOLO Track 1 Solo CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 6 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 SOLO Track 2 Solo CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 6 z REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 SOLO Track 3 Solo CC 2 02 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Track 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 6 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Track 5 Solo CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 6 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Track 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS7 SOLO Track 7 Solo CC 6 06 0 00 7 127 7F 6 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Track 8 Solo CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC Track 1 Record Arm CC 40 28 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC Track 2 Rec
226. Track Control in den V LINK Modus Wenn das UR 80 in den V LINK Modus versetzt wird bertr gt es eine V LINK ON Nachricht Sender Model Name Nachricht und V LINK Initialisierungs nachricht Wenn Sie die Schaltfl che V LINK erneut dr cken bertr gt das UR 80 eine V LINK OFF Nachricht und beendet dann den V LINK Modus Die V LINK Initialisierungsnachricht ist eine MIDI Nachricht mit bis zu 255 Byte Bei den werkseitigen Einstellungen wird der Inhalt der Parameterliste unten als V LINK Initialisierungsnachricht bertragen Sie k nnen den UR 80 Editor verwenden um diese Nachricht zu ndern N here Informationen zu den Einstellungen erhalten Sie in der Online Hilfe f r den UR 80 Editor E Parameterliste Im V LINK Modus werden die folgenden Nachrichten zugewiesen Sie k nnen den Ausgabeanschluss im UR 80 Editor festlegen Ausgabeanschluss EDIROL UR 80 1 Standardeinstellung Im V LINK Modus k nnen Sie die Spur Parameter Ihres Sequenzerprogramms oder hnliches ber den Abschnitt Track Control nicht steuern Wenn Sie die Steuerung Ihres Sequenzer programms zur ckerhalten m chten dr cken Sie die Schaltfl che V LINK erneut um sie auszuschalten 137 Nachricht Bereich HEX Kanal Standardzuweisung 7 1 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 16 Strg K Wiedergabegeschwindigkeit 2 CC 17 1
227. US 3 AUTO 2 O ASSIGN BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO 5 O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO s O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO S O ASSIG Si BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO E O ASSIG S BUTTON LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO O ASSIG BUTTON LED TRANSPORT PLAY transport Play O ASSIGN z BUTTON LED TRANSPORT REC transport Record O ASSIG BUTTON 367 Memory sets USR6 MCR 8 Mode4 A 1 8 PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE FO 41 10 64 12 00 03 7D F7 FO 41 10 64 12 01 01 7E F7 368 PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1 PAN CTI CC 7248 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN c12 CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN CI3 CC 74 4A 0600 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN c1 4 CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN C15 CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN CI 6 CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN C17 CC 78 4E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 z TRACK CONTROL 8 PAN C1 8 CC 79 4F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 1 SEND 1 CII CC 72 48 000 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 SEND 1
228. Utilizzare il programma UR 80 Editor per cambiare eventualmente questo messaggio Per maggiori informazioni sulle impostazioni fare riferimento alla guida in linea dell UR 80 Editor Ses E Elenco dei parametri In modalit V LINK vengono assegnati i seguenti messaggi L uscita pu essere impostata nel lt programma UR 80 Editor c Uscita EDIROL UR 80 1 impostazione predefinita A Messaggio Intervallo Canale Assegnazione predefinita u esadecimale 1 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 16 Playback Speed Ctrl controllo velocit di riproduzione 2 CC 17 11 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cr Ctrl controllo colore cr 3 CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cb Ctrl controllo E lore Cb Manopole di co sontrollo delle 4 CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 16 Brightness Ctrl controllo ae luminosit 5 CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 16 Output Fade dissolvenza dell output 6 CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 16 nessuna assegnazione 7 CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 16 nessuna assegnazione 8 CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 16 nessuna assegnazione 1 CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 16 Dissolve Time Ctrl controllo tempo di dissolvenza 2 CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 16 Audio Level Ctrl controllo livello audio Fader delle 3 CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 16 VEX 1 Ctrl tracce 4 CC 27 IB 0 00 127 7F 16 VEX 2 Cul controllo VFX 2 5 CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 3 Ctrl controllo VFX 3 6 CC 29 ID 0 00 127 7F 16 VEX 4 Cul controllo VEX 4 7 CC 30 1E 0 0
229. XT Va alla finestra successiva INST Apre la finestra Synth Rack CLOSE Chiude la finestra PREV Va al marker precedente SET Inserisce un marker NEXT Va al marker successivo LIST Apre la finestra Marker UNDO Riporta l ultima operazione di editing allo stato precedente REDO Ripete l ultima operazione di editing SAVE AS Esegue l operazione Save As SAVE Salva I pulsanti tra parentesi quadre dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT Manopola TIME Ruotare la manopola per spostare il cursore Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione Sposta il cursore all inizio del brano Riavvolge Avanza veloce Interrompe la riproduzione registrazione Avvia la riproduzione Avviare la registrazione SHIFT E Avvia la registrazione automatica 233 Enalieh Naritenh k G 6 a u Eenannl Utilizzo del software Cubase SX Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria USR1 Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante USR1 della sezione Track Status Software Sono necessari i programmi Cubase SX e EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml si trova nella sottocartella SX della cartella Cubase Remote sul CD ROM fornito in dotazione Prima di continuare copiare EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml sul computer E Impostazioni in Cuba
230. a TRACK STATUS IMI PART SELECT SSL ET ETF m GREEN SOLO RED READ ORANGE WRITE 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 CH 17 24 lt CH 25 32 ra H E Section Track Control Commandes d att nuation Track Les commandes d att nuation r glent le volume de la table de mixage Si vous utilisez ces commandes d att nuation avec le bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 32 canaux Commande d att nuation MASTER Contr le le gain principal du VST Mixer Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ces boutons commutent l tat de chaque canal Si vous utilisez ces boutons avec le bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 32 canaux Mode Etat du bouton SELECT Fonction MUTE OFF Active d sactive la mise en sourdine des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint SOLO GREEN Active d sactive la mise en solo des canaux Activ allum D sactiv teint READ RED Activ allum D sactiv teint Active d sactive la lecture automatique des canaux WRITE ORANGE Activ allum D sactiv teint Active d sactive l enregistrement automatique des canaux Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons reglent le Pan le niveau Send 1 et le niveau Send 2 des canaux Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour s lectionner Pan niveau Send 1 ou niveau Send 2 Si vous utilisez ces boutons avec
231. a alii dI entangled Also all cords and cables should be A Protect the unit from strong impact placed so they are out of the reach of children Do not drop it e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on ida the unit e Do not force the units power supply cord to share a ei an outlet with an unreasonable number of other Never handle the AC adaptor body or its output Y devices Be especially careful when using extension plugs with wet hands when plugging into or RS cords the total power used by all devices you unplugging from an outlet or this unit have connected to the extension cord s outlet must sn ee e the power ranne ee a e Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the a i and all cords coming from external devices insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually Meltthiroaghe a ui e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet e Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning listed on the Information page in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the See EE outlet e DONOT playa CD ROM disc on a conventional KON minemment audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a e Should you remove the optical connector caps O level that could cause
232. a verticalmente SETL SETR UNDO SAVE Y ETI GM2 Disminuir la pantalla horizontalmente OLI sa p Ampliar la pantalla horizontalmente SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT nos sso Botones de funci n MONO 39 DIGITAL _ Dial temporizador TIME Bot n Funci n MIXER Abrir cerrar la ventana Mixer Mezclador EFFECTS Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Send Effect Efecto de envio VST INST Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Instruments Entrada VST INPUTS Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Input Entrada VST LEFT Desplazar el cursor a la posici n del localizador izquierdo SET L Establecer la ubicaci n del cursor actual como localizador izquierdo RIGHT Desplazar el cursor a la posici n del localizador derecho SET R Establecer la ubicaci n del cursor actual como localizador derecho COPY Copiar el objeto seleccionado actualmente UNDO Deshacer la operaci n anterior PASTE Pegar el objeto copiado en la ubicaci n especificada SAVE Guardar el proyecto actual en un archivo Los nombres de bot n entre corchetes indican que debe presionar el bot n manteniendo el bot n SHIFT pulsado Girando el dial se mueve el cursor Botones de reproducci n Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Funci n Desplazar el cursor al principio de la canci n Atrasar el cursor Avanzar el cursor Detener la reproducci n
233. abrir el cuadro de di logo Generic Remote Setup _ 4 Haga clic en Import 5 Seleccione EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml que ha copiado anteriormente y haga clic en Open 0 6 Haga clic en el bot n de la parte superior derecha del cuadro de di logo para cerrarlo H 7 Seleccione el comando Edit Initial Settings Keys S D 8 Haga clic en la ficha Arrangements Editors y efect e la siguiente configuraci n u Si utiliza un sistema Macintosh seleccione Arrangements Editors en la lista desplegable y efect e la configuraci n Command Event type Event Cursor hacia la izquierda Controlador Control 28 Cursor hacia la derecha Controlador Control 29 Cursor hacia arriba Controlador Control 26 Cursor hacia abajo Controlador Control 27 H 9 Marque la casilla Remote Active H Key Command Preferences 10 Marque la casilla Remote Key y establezcala en C ee a 2 ent e oz Remote active 11 Haga clic en OK para cerrar el cuadro de di logo 2 Remote Key COMMAND Ki EVENT TYPE EVENT ICON Controller Control 28 Controller Control 29 Controller Control 26 Controller Control 27 None Off None Off None Off Ctrl Down None Off None Off None Off None Of None Of None Of None Of None Off None Off 303 Control del software E Configuraci n en Cubase VST usuarios de Macintosh 1 2 aa A 9 10 11 304 En el men Options seleccione Remote Setup Setup Efect e las siguientes configuraciones en e
234. aci n consulte la ayuda en l nea de la unidad UR 80 Editor lt a Inicio de UR 80 Editor F Antes de iniciar UR 80 Editor conecte la unidad UR 80 al sistema mediante un cable USB y active la alimentaci n Usuarios de Windows En el men Inicio seleccione Programas en Windows XP Todos los programas y en el men que aparece seleccione UR 80 Editor gt UR 80 Editor D y C Usuarios de Macintosh A Haga doble clic en el icono UR 80 Editor de la carpeta de instalaci n del software d c E ri 337 UR 80 Editor Configuraci n de puertos MIDI Para transferir conjuntos de memoria entre la unidad UR 80 y el programa UR 80 Editor o para configurar el sistema debe especificar el puerto MIDI que UR 80 Editor debe utilizar A continuaci n se describe c mo realizar las configuraciones pertinentes una vez conectado la unidad UR 80 al sistema a trav s de USB Si pretende utilizar los conectores MIDI para establecer las conexiones especifique los puertos de entrada salida del aparato MIDI conectado Usuarios de Windows 1 2 3 En el men Options seleccione MIDI Devices En el cuadro de di logo MIDI Devices que aparece efect e las siguientes configuraciones MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 v Haga clic en Aceptar para cerrar el cuadro de di logo Usuarios de Macin
235. active la mise en solo des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint REC RDY RED Active d sactive l enregistrement des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint AUTO ORANGE Maintenir ce bouton enfonc et utiliser le bouton Automation Mode AUTO MODE pour modifier le r glage automatique de la piste Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons r glent le Pan le niveau Send 1 et le niveau Send 2 des pistes Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour s lectionner Pan niveau Send 1 ou niveau Send 2 La valeur augmente lorsque le bouton est tourn vers la droite et diminue lorsque le bouton est tourn vers la gauche La modification augmentation diminution s interrompt lorsque vous replacez le bouton sur la position centrale mode Shuttle 180 Contr le de votre logiciel Bouton du mode automatique AUTO MODE Ce bouton s lectionne le r glage automatique des pistes En mode SELECT maintenez le bouton Track Status enfonce et appuyez sur lebouton Automation Mode pour modifier le r glage automatique de la piste correspondante Etat du bouton AUTO MODE Fonction s READ Automation de la lecture WRITE Automation de l enregistrement Toutes les automations sont S remplac es u TOUCH Automation de l enregistrement en mode Touch Sense Les donn es ne sont remplac es que lorsque vous utilisez les commandes d att nuation de l UR 80 LATCH Aut
236. addock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland
237. again from step 1 HQ GM2 Message 61 020142 V LINK Message 61 02 O 1 2 2 The UR 80 System Settings dialog box will appear cancel Apply Specifies the default tempo for transmitting MIDI Timing Clock messages Default Tempo When you turn on the power Timing Clock tempo will be initialized to the setting you specify here MIDI Clock Specify the output port for MIDI Timing Clock messages HQ GM2 messages Specifies the output port for messages in Synth Edit mode V LINK messages Specifies the output port for messages in V LINK mode 3 To apply the settings click Apply Bezeichnungen und Funktionen Hauptbedienfeld Das Hauptbedienfeld des UR 80 ist in die Bereiche Track Control Master Control und Audio Control unterteilt Der Abschnitt Track Control und der Abschnitt Master Control stellen ihnen 43 Controller zur Verfiigung denen Sie MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen k nnen Indem Sie diese Controller gemeinsam Enalieh mit der SHIFT Schaltfl che verwenden und au erdem Zuweisungen zu LEDs vornehmen k nnen Sie insgesamt 136 unterschiedliche MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Verwenden Sie den UR 80 Editor um MIDI Nachrichten den Controllern zuzuweisen und die Zuweisungen zu editieren Der UR 80 Editor ist auf der beiliegenden CD ROM enthalten Um weitere Informationen zum UR 80 Editor zu erhalten lesen Sie bitte UR 80 Editor S 139 Track Control section Master Control section
238. agung ein auszuschalten driicken Sie SHIFT V LINK Aktivierung von MIDI Clock Sync Sie k nnen MIDI Clock Sync mit einer der beiden folgenden Methoden priifen e Klicken Sie im Men Options auf MIDI Clock Sync um diese Option mit einem H kchen zu versehen e Dr cken Sie die Schaltfl che MIDI SYNC ENABLE f r den Reason Transport MIDI SYNC MIDI SYNC ENABLE Menace Reason Transport einstellen Wenn MIDI Clock Sync aktiviert ist werden folgende Wiedergabe Stop Operationen ausgef hrt Sie k nnen Zuriickspulen oder Vorspulen nicht nutzen w hrend MIDI Clock Sync aktiviert ist UR 80 Controller UR 80 Controller Reason Transport Sto sart EB Abspiel SHIFT a spreen E Einstellungen fur MIDI Remote Mapping Den Funktionsschaltfl chen und der Schaltfl che TRACK GROUP des UR 80 werden MIDI Steuerungsnachrichten f r allgemeine Zwecke zugewiesen Sie k nnen diese Controller den gew nschten Parametern von Reason zuweisen W hlen Sie im Men Options die Option Edit MIDI Remote Mapping um sie zu aktivieren Wenn Sie ein Reason Modul ausw hlen wird f r zuweisbare Controller ein GREENer Pfeil angezeigt W hlen Sie einen Controller 3 Anschlie end wird das Dialogfeld MIDI Remote angezeigt Aktivieren Sie Learn from MIDI Input Dr cken Sie die Schaltfl che TRACK GROUP oder Funktionsschaltfl che die dem ausgew hlten Controller entsprechen soll 5 Klicken Sie
239. ained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiol ogist Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft S drinks etc to penetrate the unit
240. all inizio del brano Riproduce a partire dalla posizione corrente nel brano Avvia la registrazione Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria USR4 Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante USR4 della sezione Track Status E Impostazioni in ProTools LE 1 Nel menu Setups selezionare Peripherals 2 Fare clic su MIDI Controllers 3 Impostare i MIDI Controllers come segue Windows Macintosh Type Receive From Send to Type Receive From Send to HUI EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 HUI UR 80 1 UR 80 1 E Impostazioni in Digital Performer 1 Nel menu Basics selezionare Control Surface Setup 2 Se sullo schermo compare Press to add a Driver to your Configuration fare clic sul tasto 3 In Driver Hardware per la versione 3 1 o precedenti selezionare HUI 4 In MIDI MIDI Communication per la versione 3 1 o precedenti selezionare UR 80 1 245 Enalieh Naitenh a G 6 a u Eenannl Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Compilare il foglio template coni parametri HUI Le spiegazioni fornite nelle pagine che seguono illustrano tali impostazioni IDR Indica che l operazione valida per Digital Performer PT Indica che l operazione valida per ProTools LE L assenza di entrambi i simboli indica che l o
241. aparato lo que provocar oscilaciones Podr a producirse un ruido SS inesperado muy fuerte Aseg rese de que no se forme el loop oem ourrur ya que podr a conllevar anomal as en el funcionamiento o da ar los altavoces Stereo sets cassette deck Example of loop connection record player INPUT 325 Grabaci n digital desde un CD MD DAT oo porta oot CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL 5 or COAXIAL IN as appropriate E for your device SAMPLE RATE 96 PLAY 48 Ges j Set the sampling frequency Match the sampling frequencies of your recording software and your digital audio playback device Set REC SOURCE to DIGITAL lit OConexiones Utilice el tipo de cable pertinente para establecer las conexiones con el jack de entrada digital OPTICAL COAXIAL iInterruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling Disp ngalo en la misma frecuencia de sampling que la seleccionada para el software de grabaci n Bot n de grabaci n de fuente Disp ngalo en DIGITAL posici n iluminada Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de entrada La unidad UR 80 no es compatible con los formatos de audio digitales profesionales Conversor de velocidad de sampling integrado La unidad UR 80 puede convertir en tiempo real la frecuencia de sampling de la se al de entrada del jack de en
242. ardeinstellung Nachricht HEX Bereich HEX Kanal CH 1 9 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 179 CH 2 10 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 75 3 11 CH 4 12 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 75 3 11 CH 4 12 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 REVERB SEND CC 91 GB 0 00 127 7F 7 15 REN CH 8 16 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 8 16 9 CH 1 9 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 179 CH 2 10 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 75 2 10 CH 3 11 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 75 4 12 CH 5 13 CHORUS SEND CC93 5D 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 CHORUS SEND CC 93 GD 0 00 127 75 7 15 CH 8 16 CHORUS SEND CC D 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CUTOFF CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F w
243. are il patch di memoria URS3 Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante USR3 della sezione Track Status Software richiesto il programma Logic 5 versione 5 5 o successive Enalieh Ogni volta che viene avviato Logic e necessario selezionare il patch di memoria impostato per il programma Logic direttamente sull UR 80 E Impostazioni in Logic 1 Avviare Logic 2 Dopo che Logic stato awviato selezionare il patch di memoria per Logic sull UR 80 x Nartenh Anche se sull UR 80 gi stato impostato il patch di memoria Logic necessario selezionarne il patch di memoria ad ogni avvio del programma 3 Se compare la finestra Setup fare clic sull icona Logic Control a destra della finestra x Se la finestra Setup non appare andare al passo 7 k c i u 4 Nella zona Logic Control nel lato sinistro della finestra Setup configurare i parametri Out Port come sotto indicato Anche se i parametri sotto indicati sono visualizzati riconfermarli Out Port EDIROL UR 80 per Windows o Mac OS X Out Port UR 80 1 per Mac OS 9 5 Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Setup Selezionare di nuovo il patch di memoria Logic USR3 sull UR 80 7 Se viene visualizzata una finestra di dialogo come quella sotto riportata fare clic su Cancel Windows Macintosh Logic Platinum A newer firmware is available k 7 A for one or more Logic Control A newer firmwar
244. are l interruttore Input Monitor e regolare il livello di controllo dell input per il segnale proveniente dal microfono Il livello di registrazione non verr modificato Per regolare il volume di controllo dell input tenere premuto il pulsante SHIFT e ruotare la manopola TIME Pulsante REC SOURCE Impostarlo su ANALOG non illuminato Note Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati A seconda della posizione dei microfoni i D u rispetto ai diffusori si potrebbe udire un rumore forte Vi si pu rimediare in uno dei seguenti modi 1 Cambiando la posizione dei microfoni 2 Allontanando i microfoni dai diffusori 3 Abbassando il livello del volume pl 257 Registrazione audio Registrazione di una tastiera E possibile registrare sul computer sotto forma di dati audio l esecuzione musicale Keyboard digital piano stars Set the sampling PLAYS srece Wa frequency Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT 2 R Adjust the input level EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM ae Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the 4 volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Collegamenti Utilizzare un cavo con presa mini jack per collegare la tastiera o un altro dispositivo alle prese d ingresso 1 e 2 interruttore di selezione
245. arther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid th
246. as Dialogfeld W hlen Sie im Men Edit Preferences Key Commands W hlen Sie im Popup Men Arrange Editors und nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen vor Command Ev Type Event Cursor left Controller 28 Cursor right Controller 29 Cursor up Controller 26 Cursor down Controller 27 Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkastchen Remote Active Aktivieren Sie das K stchen Remote Key und setzen Sie es auf C 2 O Preferences Key Commands SB Arrange Editors F4 Remote Active A Remote Key Command Select Tool 4 Select Tool 5 Select Tool 6 Select Tool 7 Select Tool 8 Select Tool 9 Select Tool 10 Cursor left Controller Ctrl 28 Cursor right Controller Ctrl 29 Cursor up Controller Ctrl 26 Cursor down Controller Ctrl 27 Nudge Event Left Nudge Event Right Nudge Event Up Nudge Event Down Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld zu schlieBen Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den Cubase VST Kennungen Bei der folgenden Erkl rung werden diese Einstellungen verwendet Abschnitt Track Control H CUBASE VST 7 INPUT 122 d _ dut th KA CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED SELECT ORANGE 178 7 22 10 23 11 4 12 25 13 6 14 27 15 8 16 MASTER Track Fader Die Fader steuern die Lautst rke des VST Channe
247. as a heavy processing load experienced while using the UR 80 such as accessing the CD ROM drive or a network If an operation involving a heavy processing load is performed while the UR 80 is in use it may not operate correctly If this occurs stop playback recording and then try resuming playback recording If you are still unable to play back record exit all applications that use the UR 80 switch off the UR 80 then turn it on again Recording produces a silent blank file Try setting the bit rate to 16 bit or higher If you are using Windows 98 Second Edition and your recording software is set to a bit rate setting of 8 bits a silent file may be created effectively making recording impossible If this occurs set the bit rate to 16 bit or higher and you will be able to record normally In your operating system is the audio data input destination set correctly On your recording software is the audio data input destination set correctly The UR 80 s Sampling frequency select switch may have been set to 96 kHz PLAY When set to 96 kHz PLAY only playback is possible If you want to record the sound from your computer choose a setting other than 96 kHz PLAY A loud buzz is present in the guitar signal Does the buzz decrease when you lower the volume of your guitar If the buzz decreases when you lower the volume of your guitar it is possible that the pickup of your guitar is receiving nois
248. ato non illuminato REC RED Attiva disattiva la registrazione della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato AUTO ORANGE Attiva disattiva la registrazione automatica della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole controllano le funzioni Pan Send 1 level e Send 2 level della traccia Utilizzare il pulsante Assign per selezionare Pan Send 1 level o Send 2 level Queste manopole utilizzate insieme al pulsante di selezione Track Group permettono di controllare 32 tracce Pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce TRACK GROUP Questo pulsante cambia il gruppo di tracce sulle quali si sta lavorando Stato del pulsante TRACK GROUP Tracce controllate 1 8 Tracce 1 8 9 16 Tracce 9 16 17 24 Tracce 17 24 25 32 Tracce 25 32 232 Utilizzo del software Sezione Master Control Pulsanti Cursor Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione a Sposta su Y Sposta gi 4 Sposta a sinistra gt Sposta a destra SHIFT 4h Riduce la schermata verticalmente SHIFT YY Espande la schermata verticalmente Riduce la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT lt q Espande la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT gt Pulsanti funzione Pulsante Funzione MIXER Apre la finestra Console NE
249. attivare l opzione 8 Nel menu Options accertarsi che l opzione Edit MIDI Remote Mapping sia selezionata Se non lo fosse selezionare l opzione nel menu per attivarla 250 Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Compilare il foglio template con i parametri Reason Le spiegazioni fornite nelle pagine che seguono illustrano tali impostazioni Sezione Track Control REASON A 0 gi F PEAK 1 vii u fi IE SE SE 0 0 EM CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY 107 LHO JE o N SOLO C H E fi Fader delle tracce C I fader controllano il volume del mixer possibile controllare le tracce 1 8 Non possibile utilizzare il pulsante di gruppo delle tracce per cambiare tracce Master fader Controlla il volume master del mixer a Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Questi pulsanti permettono di cambiare lo stato delle tracce D u Modalita Stato del pulsante SELECT Funzione MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva l esclusione audio della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato EQ RED Attiva o disattiva l effetto equalizer EQ Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato ORANGE E possibile assegnare eventuali parametri Reason come pulsanti di controllo generali Man
250. au d enregistrement Le signal d entr e ne sera pas dirig en sortie Utilisez ce param tre si vous renvoyez les donn es audio dans votre ordinateur ou si vous avez connect une table de mixage et que le son sort directement de cette table en vue d un contr le OFF voyant teint Le signal d entr e sort en st r o Utilisez ce param tre si vous avez connect un appareil st r o des prises jack 1 2 ou si vous utilisez la prise d entr e num rique STEREO voyant allum Le signal d entr e provenant des prises jack ou de la prise num rique est mix en monophonique et en sortie Utilisez ce param tre si vous avez connect un signal mono du type guitare ou micro aux prises jack Le signal audio envoy via USB vers votre ordinateur est st r o MONO voyant clignotant SHIFT Utilisez ce bouton avec d autres boutons dans la section Master Control Les boutons mis entre crochets comme MIDI CLK indiquent que vous devez actionner le bouton tout en maintenant appuy e la touche SHIFT 154 E Section Audio Control 13 Niveaux d entr e 14 15 Ce bouton ne concerne pas le volume sortant des prises de sortie num rique NA She 14 9 h v Enalieh Bouton de niveau SENS Ce double bouton concentrique r gle le niveau d entr e des prises jack 1 et 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R L UR 80 fournit des prises d entr e jack de
251. auf OK um das Dialogfeld zu schlie en Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen WEE Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den Cubase SX Kennungen Bei der folgenden Erkl rung werden diese Einstellungen verwendet CUBASE SX INPUT 152 d PEAK 1 SE BEE el az gege Sege ger wr NE wg O PAN z z Y dij we we ae Be we we Y O SENDA AS OSO _0G O SEND2 u e ON 4 x 4 v 4 MI 4 v 4 v 4 v 4 v 4 x O a CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE TRACK STATUS IMI PART SELECT s O O si O Os Os Shure GREEN SOLO RED READ ORANGE WRITE 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 16 32 CH 17 24 CH 25 32 Abschnitt Track Control Track Fader Die Fader steuern die Lautst rke des Mixers Wenn Sie die Fader gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 32 Kan le steuern Master Fader Steuert Master Gain Verst rkung des VST Mixers Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Diese Schaltfl chen schalten den Status der einzelnen Kan le um Wenn Sie die Schaltfl chen gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 32 Kan le steuern Modus Status der Schaltfl che Funktion SELECT MUTE OFF Schaltet die Stummschaltung des Kanals ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Schaltet Solo fiir den Kanal ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuch
252. be rewritten Use this memory set if you will leave PRESET the messages of the UR 80 fixed and make assignments on your software You will also use this memory set for SONAR USR1 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for Cubase SX USR 2 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for Cubase VST USR 3 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set to Logic USR 4 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for Pro Tools LE and Digital Performer 3 USR5 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for Reason USR 6 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for compatibility with MCR 8 Mode4 A 1 8 USR 7 Rewritable With the factory settings this is set for compatibility with MCR 8 Mode4 B 9 16 32 SONAR Memory set Use PRESET Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press Track Status button PRESET Software You will need SONAR 2 0 or later and the UR 80 Control Surface Plug in The UR 80 Control Surface Plug in is found in the SONAR Plugin folder of the included CD ROM Double click UR80CSP EXE to start up the installer Follow the on screen directions to install the software E Settings in SONAR 1 From the Options menu choose Control Surfaces s 2 Inthe Control Surfaces dialog box click the Al button and select EDIROL UR 80 as the Control 4 Surface i C Control Surfaces Connected Surfaces ge Control Surface In Port Dut Port EDIRO
253. between send slots Use the left right cursor buttons to switch the Send Level parameter to be adjusted nu EQ Adjust the EQ Gain of each channel Use the up down cursor buttons to switch between equalizer bands Use the left right cursor buttons to switch the EQ Gain parameter to be adjusted TRACK Adjust the track parameters of each channel Use the left right cursor E buttons to switch between parameters k WINDOW ARRANGE Switch the Arrangement window display on off e MIXER Switch the Track Mixer window display on off D UNDO Undo the preceding edit operation u SAVE Save the current song to a file Button names in square brackets indicate that you press the button while holding down the SHIFT button Bee 45 Controlling your software JOG dial Turning the dial will move the song position line SPL If Scrub mode is on you can use the dial for scrub playback Transport buttons These perform the following functions Function Switch Scrub mode on off Di o 5 Rewind the song Repeatedly pressing this button during rewind will speed up the rewind Conversely pressing ring rewind will slow down and stop the re wind Fast forwards the song Repeatedly pressing this button during fast forward will speed up the fast forward Conversely pressing during fast forward will slow down and stop the fast forward Stop all transport functions Press once again to return to the beginning
254. c Key Pressure Presi n de teclado PolifONICO iii its 341 Mensaje Program Change Cambio de programa 341 Mensaje System Realtime Tiempo real del sistema Message Assign window 78 Message Assign finestra 276 Message Bank Select ii 209 message Channel a simana iii 209 Message Channel Pressure 209 Message Control Change 209 Message Note suini 209 Message Pitch Bend ue 209 Message Polyphonic Key Pressure 209 Message Program Change i 209 Message System Realtime 209 Messages HO GM2 ENEE 214 Messages V LINK ss 214 MIDI EER 22 2 22 88 154 220 286 MIDI Clock ene 82 148 214 280 MIDI Clock Reloj MIDI een 346 MIDI devices isa 30 MIDIHOW viandante ae 28 MIDEIN device iii vsi een aire tee 30 MIDI IN periferica sisi 228 MIDI IN OUT connectors 24 MIDI IN OUT connettori 222 MIDI IN OUT Anschl sse 90 MID OUT device 1 2 sense 30 MIDI OUT periferica ss 228 MD at oculo ila lai alan RE AN 226 MIDI periferiche rien 228 MIDEDatentluss Vaina 94 IR 96 MIDI IN Ger t ener 96 MIDL OUT Ger t iii io 96 Mint jack serrer nn entres 223 MME EDIROL UR 80 IN ss 294 MME EDIROL UR 80 In 30 96 162 228 MME EDIROL UR 80 OUT us 294 MME EDIROL UR 80
255. cctsasbeasssvcetedes z Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI ces six boutons Comme vous pouvez galement 3 affecter des messages lorsque le bouton SHIFT est maintenu appuy un total de 12 messages MIDI peut tre affect ces quatre boutons Vous pouvez aussi affecter des messages MIDI pour r gler u les deux voyants situ s sous les boutons de transport Ka et za Ces boutons sont habituellement utilis s pour r gler le transport de votre logiciel s quenceur 153 12 Boutons System Setting et Mode Select Utilisez ces boutons pour commuter des param tres et des modes sur l UR 80 lui m me Vous ne pouvez pas affecter des messages MIDI aux boutons System Setting Mode Select Nom du bouton Fonctionnement MEMORY Si vous maintenez le bouton MEMORY enfonc tout en appuyant sur un bouton TRACK STATUS vous pouvez alterner les huit jeux de sons stock s dans l UR 80 Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton l un des voyants du bouton TRACK STATUS s allume pour indiquer le jeu de sons actuellement s lectionn HQ GM2 Lorsque le bouton HO GM2 est activ la section Track Control est en mode Edition Synth ce qui vous permet de r gler les param tres du synth tiseur logiciel inclus Appuyez de nouveau sur ce bouton pour le d sactiver et revenir aux pr c dentes fonctions de r glage de pistes Pour plus de d tails sur le mode Edition Synth reportez vous la section Enregistrement audio p 189
256. cha izquierda para conmutar el par metro de nivel de env o que desee ajustar EQ Ajustar la ganancia de ecualizaci n de cada canal Utilice los botones de Ecualizador cursor hacia arriba y hacia abajo para conmutar las diferentes bandas de ecualizaci n Utilice los botones de cursor hacia la derecha izquierda para conmutar el par metro de ganancia de ecualizaci n que desee ajustar TRACK Ajustar los par metros de pista para cada canal Utilice los botones de Pista cursor hacia la izquierda derecha para conmutar los diferentes par metros WINDOW ARRANGE Activa y desactiva la ventana Arrangement Ventana Arreglar MIXER Activa desactiva la ventana Track Mixer Mezclador UNDO Deshacer Deshacer la operaci n de edici n anterior SAVE Guardar la canci n actual en un archivo Los nombres de bot n entre corchetes indican que debe presionar el bot n manteniendo el bot n SHIFT pulsado Dial de avance r pido JOG Girando este dial se mueve la l nea de posici n de la canci n SPL Si el modo Scrub Preescucha est activado puede utilizar el dial para la reproducci n de preescucha Botones de reproducci n Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Funci n Bot n KEN Activar desactivar el modo Scrub Preescucha 310 Rebobinar la canci n Si presiona repetidas veces este bot n el rebobinado ir cada vez m s r pido Por el contrario si presiona re
257. change the automation setting of the corresponding track AUTO MODE button status Function READ Play back automation WRITE Record automation All automation will be overwritten TOUCH Record automation in Touch Sense mode Data will be overwritten only while you are operating the UR 80 s faders LATCH Record automation in Touch Sense mode Data will be overwritten from the point you begin operating the UR 80 s faders lt G E C Italiana Erannaie Eenannl 49 Controlling your software Master Control section Cursor buttons JOG These buttons switch the track bank that is controlled by the UR 80 s track controls CHANNEL BANK BI Button Function a Return the track bank by 1 track Y Advance the track bank by 1 track SA Move to the next track bank EDIT MIXER q ma LI D Move to the preceding track bank MEM MEM Loc INPUT MONITOR LEVEL MES om Function buttons Button Function PRE POST EDITMODE EDITTOOL EDIT DP Open the Editor window gt mn GM2 5 PT Open the Track window MEM LOCT DP Open the Marker window nm CLK PT Open the Memory Location window SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT MIXER Open the Mixer window ANALOG 30 STEREO z pome Lj sh MONO TRANS Open the Transport window PORT SCRUB IN Set the current position as the Auto Record Sta
258. ci n del mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria 344 Intercambio de datos con la unidad UR 345 Transmisi n a la unidad UR 80 ene 345 Recepci n desde la unidad UR 80 345 Gaurdar o cargar en formato SMF 346 Guardar un conjunto de memoria en formato SMF 346 Cargar un conjunto de memoria de un archivo SMF 346 Configuraci n del sistema ss 346 Appendices san 347 System related settings e ananasa 348 Restoring the factory settings Factory Reset iii 348 Switching the Driver Mode ui 348 Memory Sets u use 349 PRESET MEMORY SONAR PARAMETER LIST tintin 349 USR1 MEMORY Cubase SX PARAMETER LIST tsesrterssesssstssneesneee 352 USR2 MEMORY Cubase VST PARAMETER LIST n 359 USR3 MEMORY Logic PARAMETER LIST use doben ado ea laika 358 USR4 MEMORY Pro Tools LE Digital Performer PARAMETER LIST 361 USR5 MEMORY Reason PARAMETER LIST u corran dismi 365 USR6 MCR 8 Mode4 A 1 8 PARAMETER LIST 368 USR7 MCR 8 Mode4 B 9 16 PARAMETER LIST sisi 370 MPOUBICSNOOUING iii pcia 372 Can t use the START STOP button to make Reason play stop 372 When using Logic can t use the track control knobs to edit parameters 372 Can t control Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module in Synth Edit MO senken De bereuen 373 Can only control a specific Par
259. ciones en las que utilice la unidad UR 80 puede que oiga ruido en la se al de audio Si ste es el caso es posible mejorar la situaci n si conecta el terminal de toma de tierra a una toma de tierra externa P ngase en contacto con el servicio al cliente de Roland si tiene dudas sobre c mo hacerlo No conecte el terminal de toma de tierra en las siguientes ubicaciones 19 20 21 288 e Una tuber a de agua podr an producirse cortocircuitos e Un conducto de gas podr an producirse una explosi n o un incendio e Una toma de tel fono o un pararrayos podr an ser peligrosos durante tormentas el ctricas Conectores MIDI de entrada salida MIDI IN OUT Conecte estos conectores a los conectores MIDI de los dem s aparatos MIDI para transmitir y recibir mensajes MIDI Interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling SAMPLE RATE Con este interruptor se selecciona la frecuencia de sampling a la que se grabar o reproducir la se al de audio Si modifica la posici n de este interruptor deber cerrar todas las aplicaciones apagar la unidad UR 80 y a continuaci n volver a encenderla Si utiliza la velocidad de sampling de 96 KHz no podr grabar y reproducir al mismo tiempo Deber decidirse entre grabar 96 REC o reproducir 96 PLAY Conector USB Conecte la unidad al sistema mediante un cable USB 22 23 24 x Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones gue desempefian Jacks d
260. come periferica d ingresso MIDI per l applicativo UR 80 Editor Periferiche audi o Periferica di uscita audio EDIROL UR 80 Invia i segnali audio dal computer all UR 80 Selezionare questa opzione se generalmente si utilizza Media Player Questa opzione va selezionata anche nel caso si utilizzi un applicazione come SONAR in modo driver WDM o un applicazione DirectSound MME EDIROL UR 80 Out Invia segnali audio dal computer all UR 80 Selezionare questa opzione se l applicazione utilizzata esprovvista di un modo driver WDM o se si intende utilizzare un audio a 24 bit con un applicazione non ASIO come ad esempio Cool Edit Solo Windows XP 2000 Ingresso audio periferiche EDIROL UR 80 Riceve i segnali audio che sono inviati dall UR 80 al computer Solitamente si dovrebbe utilizzare questa opzione anche quando si utilizza un applicazione come SONAR in modo driver WDM MME EDIROL UR 80 In Riceve i segnali audio che sono inviati dall UR 80 al computer Selezionare questa opzione se l applicazione utilizzata sprovvista di un modo driver WDM o se si intende utilizzare un audio a 24 bit con un applicazione non ASIO come ad esempio Cool Edit Solo Windows XP 2000 ASIO device Selezionare EDIROL UR 80 come impostazione ASIO dell applicazione se si utilizza l UR 80 con un applicazione ASIO come Cubase Per evitare che un loop audio provochi oscillazioni o un doppio contr
261. comme SONAR en mode WDM ou une application Directsound MME EDIROL UR 80 Out Il envoie des signaux audio de votre ordinateur 1 UR 80 Optez pour MME EDIROL UR 80 Out si vous utilisez une application qui ne dispose pas d un mode WDM ou si vous voulez utiliser Vaudio 24 bits avec une application non ASIO telle que Cool Edit Windows XP 2000 uniquement P riph riques d entr e audio EDIROL UR 80 Il re oit les signaux audio envoy s par l UR 80 vers votre ordinateur Vous devriez normalement l utiliser Vous pouvez galement l utiliser avec une application comme SONAR en mode WDM MME EDIROL UR 80 In Il re oit les signaux audio envoy s par 1 UR 80 vers votre ordinateur Utilisez le avec une application qui ne dispose pas d un mode WDM ou si vous voulez utiliser l audio 24 bits avec une application non ASIO comme Cool Edit Windows XP 2000 uniquement P riph rique ASIO S lectionnez EDIROL UR 80 comme param tre ASIO de votre application si vous utilisez HUR 80 avec une application ASIO telle que Cubase Pour viter que des boucles audio provoquent une oscillation ou un double monitoring d sactivez le monitoring dans votre application ou utilisez le param tre ASIO Direct Monitor 162 Deux ports MIDI Certains logiciels s quenceurs supportant des contr leurs MIDI vous permettent de sp cifier ind pendamment le port d entr e MIDI utilis pour l en
262. con SONAR USR 1 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo e il patch per Cubase SX USR 2 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo il patch per Cubase VST USR 3 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo e il patch per Logic USR 4 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo il patch per Pro Tools LE e Digital Performer 3 USR5 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo il patch per Reason Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo il patch per la compatibilita con MCR 8 USR 6 Mode4 A 1 8 Modificabile Oltre alle impostazioni di fabbrica questo il patch per la compatibilita con MCR 8 USR 7 Mode4 B 9 16 230 SONAR Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria PRESET Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante PRESET della sezione Track Status Software necessario il programma SONAR 2 0 o versioni successive e il plug in UR 80 Control Surface Il plug in UR 80 Control Surface si trova nella cartella SONAR Plugin sul CD ROM fornito in dotazione Fare doppio clic su UR80CSP EXE per lanciare il programma d installazione Enalieh Seguire le istruzioni visualizzate per installare il programma E Impostazioni in SONAR 1 Nel menu Options selezionare Control Surfaces 2 Nella finestra di dialogo Control Surfaces fare clic sul pulsante Al e seleziona
263. ctual como punto de inicio de reproducci n de loop Loop Play Start PT Activar y desactivar el pre roll OUT Establecer la posici n actual como punto para el fin de la grabaci n autom tica Auto Record End punch in POST DP Establecer la posici n actual como punto de fin de reproducci n de loop Loop Play End PT Activar y desactivar el post roll UNDO Deshacer la ltima operaci n ejecutada EDIT MODE DP Abrir la ventana Nudge PT Conmutar el modo de edici n SAVE Guardar el proyecto actual en un archivo EDIT TOOL DP Abrir la ventana Track PT Conmutar la herramienta de edici n Los nombres de bot n entre corchetes indican que debe presionar el bot n manteniendo el bot n SHIFT pulsado Si la funci n Scrub Preescucha est activa girando el dial se mueve el cursor Botones de reproducci n Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Bot n Funci n Activar y desactivar la funci n Scrub Atrasar el cursor Avanzar el cursor Detener la reproducci n grabaci n Iniciar la reproducci n OBE CEE Iniciar la grabaci n 314 Control del software Reason Conjunto de memoria Debe utilizar USR5 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bot n de Track Status USR5 Software Es necesaria la versi n 2 0 o posterior E Configuraci n de puertos MIDI 1 En el men Edit sel
264. curseur comme le localisateur de droite COPY Copie l objet actuellement s lectionn UNDO Annule l operation pr c dente PASTE Colle l objet copi dans l emplacement sp cifi SAVE Enregistre le projet actuel dans un fichier Composition TIME Les noms de bouton mis entre crochets indiquent que vous pressez le bouton tout en maintenant appuy le bouton SHIFT Tournez la molette pour d placer le curseur Boutons de transport Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Fonction Di o E o 5 D placement du curseur au d but de la chanson Retour en arri re du curseur Avance rapide du curseur Arr t de la lecture ou de l enregistrement Lancement de la lecture DO Lancement de l enregistrement SHIFT Z D placement du curseur a la fin de la chanson SHIFT a Activation d sactivation du point d entr e d enregistrement automatique SHIFT E Activation d sactivation du point de sortie d enregistrement automatique SHIFT Ba Activation d sactivation du m tronome SHIFT a Activation d sactivation du cycle SHIFT ED Activation d sactivation du Start Record at Left Locator 170 Cubase VST Jeu de sons Utilisez USR2 Maintenez le bouton MEMORY de l UR 80 enfonc et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status USR2 Logiciel Vous avez besoin de Cubas
265. d UR 80 se retransmitir n a las pistas MIDI Haga clic en OK para cerrar el cuadro de di logo Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores de SEND 2 del canal Utilice el bot n ASSIGN para seleccionar la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 o el nivel de SEND 2 Utilizando los controles giratorios con el bot n BANK puede controlar 32 canales Bot n de banco BANK Este bot n sirve para seleccionar el banco de canales que se quiere controlar Estado del bot n BANK Canales controlados CH1 8 Canales del 1 al 8 CH9 16 Canales del 9 al 16 CH17 24 Canales del 17 al 24 CH25 32 Canales del 25 al 32 Fije las etiquetas de Cubase SX a la hoja de plantilla proporcionada La explicaci n que sigue est basada en la siguiente configuraci n CUBASE SX a _ Q ii mae a 4 whe wile athe athe sali sali valu DAD O AN A d oN a oN a oN a oN a AN a oN a O SEND2 u 4 x CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE el HO TRACK STATUS EM PART SELECT O OM O O OJ OO OX O GREEN SOLO RED READ ORANGE WRITE 9 28 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 18 31 18 32 CH 17 24 CH 25 32 Y E Secci n de control de pistas Atenuadores de pista Los atenuadores controlan el volumen del mezclador Utilizando los atenuadores con el bot n BANK puede controlar 32 canales
266. d enregistrement Bouton REC SOURCE Positionnez le sur DIGITAL allum Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises jack non utilis es L UR 80 ne supporte pas les formats audio num riques professionnels Convertisseur de taux d chantillonnage int gr La fr quence d chantillonnage du signal entrant par la prise jack num rique peut tre convertie en temps r el par UR 80 lt Exemples gt 48 kHz gt 44 1 kHz 32 kHz 48 kHz Le signal num rique sera converti la fr quence sp cifi e par l interrupteur de selection de fr quences d chantillonnage avant l enregistrement 194 Enregistrement audio Enregistrement de l UR 80 vers un appareil num rique _ SAMPLE RATE eras Set the sampling 96REC TR 441 Connect to either the OPTICAL or H en ee ee of nn y COAXIAL OUT as appropriate for n Software and your digital audio recording device 7 your device S u EDIROE UR 80 lt 4 qd E 4 C Connexions Utilisez le type de c ble appropri pour effectuer les connexions avec la prise de sortie num rique OPTICAL COAXIAL interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage S lectionnez la m me fr quence d chantillonnage pour votre logiciel de lecture de donn es audio l UR 80 et votre appareil d enregistrement audio num rique MiniDisc ou DAT Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises
267. d if the data requires greater resolution than this For example a value expressed by two 7 bit bytes aa and bbH would be aa x 128 bb Im the case of signed data 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 i e a value 64 less than the decimal value shown in the above table is used In the case of a two byte value 00 00H 8192 40 00 0 and 7F 7F 8191 For example a value of aa and bbH would have a decimal expression of aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x 128 In the case of data indicated as use nibble data hexadecimal expression in 4 bit units is used A nibble expressed value of the two bytes 0a and ObH would have a value of a x 16 b lt Example1 gt What is the decimal expression of 5AH From the preceding table 5AH 90 lt Example2 gt What is the decimal expression of the 7 bit hexadecimal value 12 34H From the preceding table 12H 18 and 34H 52 Thus this is 18 x 128 52 2356 lt Example3 gt What is the decimal expression of the nibble expressed value 0A 03 09 0D From the preceding table OAH 10 03H 3 09H 9 and ODH 13 10 x 16 3 x 16 9 x 16 13 41885 Thus this is lt Example4 gt What is the nibble expressed value of decimal 1258 1258 16 78 quotient 10 remainder 78 16 4 quotient 14 remainder 4 16 0 quotient 4 remainder From the preceding table 0 00H 4 04H 14 0EH 10 OHA Th
268. da para establecer el nivel f de entrada en el m ximo valor posible sin que se ilumine el indicador de pico de entrada a we interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Gire el interruptor de monitoraje de entrada y ajuste el nivel de monitoraje de entrada para la sefial del micr fono El nivel de grabaci n no se ver afectado Para ajustar el volumen de monitoraje de entrada pulse el bot n SHIFT y manteni ndolo presionado gire el dial TIME Bot n de grabaci n de fuente Disp ngalo en ANALOG posici n no iluminada Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de entrada Puede ser que el sonido se acople seg n la posici n de los micr fonos respecto a los altavoces Esto se puede evitar 1 Cambiando la orientaci n del micr fono o micr fonos 2 Colocando el o los micr fonos a mayor distancia de los altavoces 3 Bajando el volumen 323 Grabaci n de audio Grabaci n de un teclado Puede grabar un teclado en el sistema como datos de audio Keyboard digital piano stars Set the sampling PLAY srece Wa frequency Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT 2 R Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately TIME dial Adjust the 4 volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit 6 Conexiones Conecte el teclado u otro aparato a los jacks de entrada 1 y 2 mediante un cable con jack de ti
269. de asignaci n PAN SEND 1 SEND 2 Esto significa que puede asignar un total de 24 mensajes diferentes a los controles giratorios de Track Control En condiciones normales utilizar estos controles giratorios para controlar la panor mica de la pista o el env o de efectos en el software secuenciador 2 Bot n de asignaci n ASSIGN Este bot n conmuta los mensajes que se asignan a los controles giratorios de pistas Presionando el bot n de asignaci n puede escoger entre las siguientes opciones PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 282 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an TRACK STATUS EN PART 0000010 s gt cp cap ED ED ED mon iza DATA men H u Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos ocho botones Tambien puede asignar mensajes MIDI al LED de cada bot n y activar desactivar los LED desde el software secuenciador P Puede asignar cuatro mensajes diferentes a cada bot n y LED uno para cada estado del bot n E Select apagado verde rojo y naranja Esto significa que puede asignar un total de 32 mensajes t MIDI a los botones de Track Status y 32 mensajes MIDI a los LED k En condiciones normales utilizard estos botones para conmutar el estado de pista por ejemplo apagado solo en el software secuenciador Bot n de selecci n SELECT a Este bot n conmuta los mensajes MIDI que se asignan a los botones de Track Status y sus LED Presionan
270. della frequenza di campionamento Impostare la stessa frequenza di campionamento del software di registrazione lnterruttore di selezione dell impedenza d ingresso Impostarlo su Lo Z Manopola di sensibilit dell input Utilizzare la manopola di sensibilit dell input per regolare il livello d ingresso Per una qualit audio ottimale regolare la manopola di sensibilit dell input al punto massimo consentito senza che l indicatore di picco si illumini einterruttore Input Monitor Ruotare l interruttore Input Monitor e regolare il livello di controllo dell input per il segnale proveniente dalla tastiera Il livello di registrazione non verra modificato Per regolare il il volume di controllo dell input tenere premuto il pulsante SHIFT e ruotare la manopola TIME Pulsante REC SOURCE Impostarlo su ANALOG non illuminato ONote Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati 258 Registrazione audio Registrazione da un dispositivo audio Stereo set cassette deck lt Connect to H INPUT 1 L and INPUT ane Set the sampling 2 R sec 4 frequency u Adjust the EDIROL UR 80 input level 24BIT 26kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM lt C Turn input monitor on and adjust H the input volume appropriately q i C Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit OCollegamenti K Utilizzare un cavo con presa mini jack per col
271. destra e diminuisce quando la manopola viene ruotata verso sinistra L operazione aumento diminuzione si interrompe quando la manopola si ritrova in posizione centrale modalita Shuttle 246 Utilizzo del software Pulsante Automation Mode AUTO MODE Seleziona l impostazione automation della traccia In modalit SELECT tenere premuto il pulsante Track Status e premere il pulsante Automation Mode per cambiare il tipo di automation della traccia corrispondente Stato del pulsante AUTO Funzione MODE READ Riproduce l automation WRITE Registra l automation Tutti i tipi di automation sono sovrascritti TOUCH Registra l automation in modalit Touch Sense I dati verranno sovrascritti solo se si utilizzano contemporaneamente i fader dell UR 80 LATCH Registra l automation in modalita Touch Sense I dati verranno sovrascritti a partire dal momento in cui si utilizzano i fader dell UR 80 247 Enalieh Naitenh a a u Eenannl Utilizzo del software Sezione Master Control BANK MB a EDIT MIXER Lara a JOG INPUT MONITOR LEVEL MEM LOC TRANSPORT IN OUT UNDO SAVE PRE POST EDIT MODE EDITTOOL pO E nm CLK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OFF ANALOG 0 STEREO ZE DIGITAL 29 MONO SCRUB Manopola JOG Pulsanti Cursor Ouesti pulsanti cambiano
272. ditor u a riendo miis 73 MIDI Port settings 74 UR 80 Editor window nn ai tdi 75 Main With O Wei aio 75 Controller Settings nine 77 MIDI messages that you can assign to controllers in 77 Assigning a MIDI message 78 Checking the assigned MIDI messages 79 Memory Set Initial Message nannnnateneennanenenennaa 80 Specifying the Memory Set Initial Message 80 Enabling the Memory Set Initial Message 80 Exchanging data with the UR 80 natan 81 Transmitting to the URS unse ats apa na 81 Receiving from the UR 80 sus 81 Saving or loading in SMF format 82 Saving a memory set in SMF format 82 Loading a memory set from a SMF file i 82 System SETI E 82 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen 83 Hauptb dienteld n egene ee EE Ee ER Abschnitt Track Control sn 84 Abschnitt Master Control 87 Abschnitt Audio Control 89 R ckseite saisie e JE a Devi pov LE serrer etes 90 Seitliches Bedeelegte 92 Grundlegende Bedienung 93 Grundlegende Anschl sse und Einstellungen 94 Grundlegende Anschl sse ss 94 MIDEDatentluss cornisa atada diana 94 Audiodatenfluss Blockdiagramm ss 95 Eingabe Ausgabeger te en r el 96 Zwei MIDI Anschl sse nn 97 Steuerung Ihrer Software DG Umschalten von Memory Sets ss 98 KEE 99 Einstellu
273. do el bot n de selecci n puede desplazarse entre las siguientes opciones desactivado gt verde gt rojo gt y naranja a H E H u s H 283 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an ORANGE AUTO 2 18 5 21 7 23 8 24 16 32 5 Atenuadores de pista nuusuesnsesnsnnnunnsnnnunnnunnunnnunnunnnunnnunnunnnunnnannunnnannunnnannnnnnnnnnnnn Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a estos ocho atenuadores En condiciones normales utilizar estos atenuadores de pistas para controlar el volumen de las pistas en el software secuenciador 6 Atenuador m ster MASTER rs Puede asignar un mensaje MIDI a este atenuador El atenuador m ster controla el volumen global en el software secuenciador El volumen final de la unidad UR 80 se ajusta mediante su control giratorio de volumen de salida 7 Bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas TRACK GROUP TRACK GROUP Puede asignar cuatro mensajes MIDI al bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas Cada vez que presione el bot n se transmitir uno de los cuatro mensajes El bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas conmuta los grupos de pistas en el software secuenciador cuyos par metros se controlar n mediante los controles giratorios de pistas y los atenuadores de pistas Esto significa que puede utilizar los ocho controles giratorios y atenuadores para controlar los par metros de 32 pistas
274. dor 317 Control del software Secci n de control m ster Botones de cursor CURSOR TEMPO Si ha habilitado la funci n MIDI Clock Sync de Reason y controla E SP gt el tempo con estos botones puede establecer el tempo Boton Tempo BPM a 80 F1 F2 Y 120 d 145 INPUT MONITOR LEVEL gt 100 F3 F4 F5 F6 LOL LILI O e a MEMORY Seen SHIFT YY 180 SHIFT SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT D 60 COC Sie Lis 39 DIGITAL gt MONO Dial temporizador TIME u B l n L Si ha habilitado la funci n MIDI Clock Sync de Reason y controla el tempo este dial ajusta el tempo de forma continua StToP _ START J MIDI SYNC Botones de reproducci n Estos botones desempe an las siguientes funciones Bot n Funci n rar Activar desactivar la reproducci n de loop E Atrasar el cursor Avanzar el cursor Detener la reproducci n grabaci n a Iniciar la reproducci n ES Iniciar la grabaci n SHIFT Detener la reproducci n durante MIDI Clock Sync SHIFT 8 Iniciar la reproducci n durante MIDI Clock Sync 318 Control del software Aplicaciones compatibles con el MCR 8 de Roland Puede utilizar la unidad UR 80 con software compatible con el MCR 8 modo 4 de Roland
275. dotazione Per maggiori informazioni sull applicativo UR 80 Editor fare riferimento alla sezione UR 80 Editor pag 271 Track Control section Master Control section EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Audio Control section e Sezione Track Control pag 216 e Sezione Master Control pag 219 e Sezione Audio Control pag 221 L indicazione SR in queste pagine accanto a un controllo segnala la possibilit di assegnare un messaggio MIDI al controllo in questione 215 Enalieh Darntenh d c i u Eenannl Parti e relative funzioni E Sezione Track Control Nella sezione Track Control e possibile controllare il parametri delle tracce del software sequencer Oltre al volume e alla funzione pan possibile controllare parametri come lo stato della traccia e il livello degli effetti La suddivisione delle tracce in gruppi Track Group permette di controllare i parametri di fino a 32 tracce Il software utilizzato determina su quali parametri si potra intervenire In modalit Synth Edit o V LINK l UR 80 si comporter diversamente rispetto a quanto spiegato in queste pagine Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento alla sezione Modalita Synth Edit pag 266 o Modalit V LINK pag 269 TRACK LUICONTROL CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY
276. e volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Connections Use a phone jack cable to connect your keyboard or other device to input jacks 1 and 2 Sampling frequency select switch Set this to the same sampling frequency as selected in your recording software 6 Input impedance select switch Set this to Lo Z lnput sensitivity knob Use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the input level To obtain the best audio quality adjust the input sensitivity knob until the level is as high as you can get it without causing the input peak indicator to light input monitor switch Turn the input monitor switch on and adjust the input monitor level for the signal from your keyboard This will not change the recording level To adjust the input monitor volume hold down the SHIFT button and turn the TIME dial REC SOURCE button Set this to ANALOG unlit Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using 60 Recording audio Recording from an audio device Stereo set cassette deck E MIDI sound module Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT ss Set the sampling 2 R sec 4 frequency Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Connections Use a phone jack cable to connect your audio device to inp
277. e appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the volume OConexiones El sonido del instrumento conectado al jack de entrada 1 se grabar en el canal izquierdo L del Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit sistema El sonido del instrumento conectado al jack de entrada 2 se grabar en el canal derecho R O interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling Disp ngalo en la misma frecuencia de sampling que la seleccionada para el software de grabaci n lnterruptor de selecci n de impendancia de entrada Disp ngalo en Hi Z Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para ajustar el nivel de entrada utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para conseguir la m xima calidad de sonido utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada para establecer el nivel de entrada en el m ximo valor posible sin que se ilumine el indicador de pico de entrada interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Gire el interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Input Monitor y ajuste el nivel de monitoraje de entrada para la se al de la guitarra o el bajo El nivel de grabaci n no se ver afectado Para ajustar el volumen de monitoraje de entrada pulse el bot n SHIFT y manteni ndolo presionado gire el dial TIME Boton de grabaci n de fuente REC SOURCE Disp ngalo en ANALOG posici n no iluminada Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de ent
278. e configurare opportunamente OMS o FreeMIDI per il sistema MIDI Per maggiori informazioni al riguardo leggere il file Readme E HTM nella cartella del driver sul CD ROM fornito in dotazione Nel menu Options selezionare MIDI Devices Nella finestra di dialogo MIDI Devices effettuare le seguenti impostazioni Mac OS 9 MIDI Devices Select MIDI System oms zl o Output Port UR BO1 OMS Studio Setup Mac OS X _ MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Ra Output Port EDIROL UR 80 mw Cancel OK MIDI System Selezionare i parametri adeguati al sistema utilizzato Input Port UR 80 2 Output Port UR 801 Input Port UR 80 2 Output Port UR 80 3 Fare clic sul pulsante OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo 272 Finestra UR 80 Editor E Finestra principale EDIROL UR 80 Editor Untitled mid 1 LE Tar Enalieh Naritenh k a u 1 TITLE Digitare gui il nome per il patch di memoria creato NOTE Il programma accetta solo i caratteri a un byte Inglese I caratteri a doppio byte come il Giapponese non sono supportati Il nome digitato in questa casella sar anche quello del file HTML che verr creato dopo aver Export assign list dal menu File 2 Casella di controllo H ACTIVITY Questa casella di controllo diventa accessibile dopo aver caricato nell UR 80 un patch di memoria il c
279. e I E 253 Enalieh Naritenh k G 6 a u Eenannl Utilizzo del software Assegnazioni di controllo MCR 8 modo 4 B e UR 80 USR7 254 MCR 8 UR 80 C19 16 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN S1 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S2 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C2 9 16 TRACK FADER 1 8 C1 MASTER z SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 PREV D a Vv sy FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST ka aaa pi SHIFT H SHIFT E lt gt gt Registrazione audio Questo capitolo illustra i vari collegamenti e usi possibili dell UR 80 Per evitare malfunzionamenti e o danni ai diffusori o ad altri dispositivi abbassare sempre il volume e accertarsi che tutti gli apparecchi non siano alimentati prima di effettuare i collegamenti lt H z Nozioni fondamentali i u E possibile collegare una cuffia e o gli altoparlanti come illustrato nello schema e controllare la riproduzio
280. e Schaltfl chen haben die folgenden Funktionen Schaltfl che Funktion Schaltet die Scrub Funktion ein aus Spult den Cursor zur ck Schnellvorlauf f r den Cursor Wiedergabe Aufnahme stoppen Wiedergabe starten Aufnahme beginnen 116 Steuerung Ihrer Software Reason a Memory Set Verwenden Sie USR5 Halten Sie die Schaltflache MEMORY des UR 80 gedriickt und driicken Sie die Track Statusschaltfl che USR5 H Software S u Reason Version 2 0 oder sp ter ist erforderlich E Einstellungen f r den MIDI Anschluss 1 W hlen Sie im Men Edit Preferences 2 Wahlen Sie unter Page Advanced MIDI 3 Nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen fiir den MIDI Anschluss vor Any one of Bus A D EDIROL UR 801 Remote Control EDIROL UR 80 2 MIDI Clock Sync EDIROL UR 801 Sie konnen den UR 80 Editor verwenden um einen anderen MIDI Anschluss fiir MIDI Clock MEMO Sync auszuw hlen Hierzu ndern Sie den Ausgabeanschluss fiir die Sync Start und Sync Stop Nachrichten die SHIFT STOP und SHIFT PLAY zugewiesen wurden Nihere Informationen zur Vorgehensweise bei dieser Anderung erhalten Sie unter UR 80 Editor S 139 E Einstellungen f r Reason Transport und MIDI IN Gerat Wenn Sie das UR 80 verwenden m chten um Reason Module oder Reason Transport zu steuern m ssen Sie fiir jeden Song folgende Einstellungen vornehmen k G A
281. e VST 5 1 ou ult rieur Vous allez avoir besoin de Cubase VST et d EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml est situ dans le dossier VST l int rieur du dossier Cubase Remote du CD ROM fourni Avant de poursuivre veuillez copier EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml sur votre ordinateur Enalieh E R glages de Cubase VST utilisateurs de Windows 1 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Remote Setup Setup 2 Effectuez les r glages suivants dans la boite de dialogue VST Remote puis cliquez sur OK x D H E q C Remote Generic Remote Input EDIROL UR 80 2 Output EDIROL UR 80 3 Dans la fen tre Generic Remote qui s affiche cliquez sur EDIT pour ouvrir la bo te de dialogue Generic Remote Setup 4 Cliquez sur Import 5 S lectionnez EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml que vous avez copi pr c demment et cliquez sur Open 6 Cliquez sur Bi en haut droite pour fermer la bo te de dialogue 7 S lectionnez la commande Edit Preferences Key Commands 8 Cliquez sur l onglet Arrangements Editors et effectuez les r glages suivants Command Event type Event commande Cursor left Controller Control 28 Cursor right Controller Control 29 Cursor up Controller Control 26 k Cursor down Controller Control 27 H 9 Cochez la case Remote Active s z Key Command Preferences 10 Cochez la case Remote Key puis r glez la sur C seems nice nee ae 2 eta ime
282. e chorus ou du canal pour chaque canal Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour s lectionner le param tre lt Lorsque PAN SEND1 ou SEND2 est s lectionn d Les boutons reglent le panoramique la transmission de r verb ration ou la transmission de chorus S de chaque canal Vous pouvez r gler les canaux 1 16 en actionnant le bouton de s lection u du groupe de pistes Lorsque HQ est s lectionn Les boutons reglent les param tres de canal Vous pouvez r gler les huit param tres suivants Bouton de r glage de pistes Param tre CUTOFF Coupure du filtre 4 RESONANCE R sonance du filtre S VIB RATE Vibrato rate taux de vibrato C VIB DEPTH Vibrato depth profondeur de vibrato VIB DELAY Vibrato delay d calage de vibrato ATTACK Attack time temps d attaque DECAY Decay time temps d affaiblissement RELEASE Release time temps de rel chement Utilisez les boutons Track Status et le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes pour s lectionner le canal que vous voulez r gler E Bouton de selection du groupe de pistes TRACK GROUP Ce bouton commute le groupe de canaux 1 8 9 16 dont les parametres doivent tre r gl s E Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Lorsque HQ est s lectionn par le bouton d affectation ces boutons s lectionnent le canal dont les param tres doivent tre r gl s par les boutons de r glage de pistes Utilisez ces boutons avec le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes
283. e de contr le d entr e maintenez la touche SHIFT enfonc e et activez la composition TIME Bouton REC SOURCE Positionnez le sur ANALOG teint Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises jack non utilis es 192 Enregistrement audio Enregistrement d un appareil audio BRD Stereo set cassette deck lt Connect to d INPUT 1 L and INPUT ss Set the sampling c 2 R ske 4 frequency u Adjust the EDIROL UR 80 input level 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM H Turn input monitor on and adjust H the input volume appropriately q C Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial unlit Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG Connexions Utilisez un c ble de casque pour brancher votre appareil audio aux prises jack 1 et 2 interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage Positionnez le sur la m me fr quence d chantillonnage que celle s lectionn e dans votre logiciel d enregistrement Commutateur d imp dance Positionnez le sur Lo Z Bouton de niveau SENS Utilisez le bouton de niveau SENS pour r gler le niveau d entr e Pour obtenir une qualit d enregistrement optimale r glez le niveau d entr e aussi fort que possible mais sans provoquer Yallumage du voyant Input Overload c gt Commutateur Input Monitor Allumez le commutateur Input Monitor et r glez le niveau d entr e du signal mis par votre clavier c
284. e from a computer or a display screen Move as far away from the computer as possible Sometimes this problem can be solved by grounding the chassis of your computer or the grounding connector of your computer s AC power supply You should also check whether there is a device nearby that produces a strong magnetic field such as a television or a microwave oven 378 MIDI implementation Model UR 80 Version 1 00 2003 5 1 1 Receive data E Channel voice messages The UR 80 can receive any channel voice message you assign in LED mode 3rd byte ONote off Status 2nd byte 8nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH Ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 vv note off velocity 00H 7FH 1 127 3rd byte ONote on Status 2nd byte 9nH kkH n MIDI channel number kk note number vv note on velocity vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 1 127 Polyphonic key pressure Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH n MIDI channel number kk note number vv key pressure Control change Status 2nd byte vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 3rd byte BnH ccH n MIDI channel number cc controller number vv control value vvH OH FH Ch 1 16 00H 77H 00H 7FH OBank Select Controller number 0 32 3rd byte Status 2nd byte BnH 00H BnH 20H n MIDI channel number mm Bank number
285. e is available for one XT unit A or more Logic Control XT units units d Do you want to upload it Do you want to upload it 7 7 4 conce EST E c H u 241 Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Compilare il foglio template con i parametri Logic Le spiegazioni fornite nelle pagine che seguono illustrano tali impostazioni Sezione Track Control LOGIC INPUT 192 ASSIGN PEAK 1 Qu 2 veli sala ER wily OR ER ND suli O VALUE IR e cali E e WS SW EES ES O D RB ZME db dik ME db ME ME Ss o gt oh N ay KN vv CS TE JE aN om CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE AUTOMATION SELECT y TRACK STATUS HO PART GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY CUO OC A A 616 Fader delle tracce Regolano il volume di ogni canale Cambiando il fader bank e possibile regolare il livello di tutti i canali Utilizzare i pulsanti funzione FADER BANK per cambiare fader bank Master fader Controlla il volume master del mixer audio Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Questi pulsanti permettono di cambiare lo stato di ogni canale Cambiando il fader bank possibile controllare lo stato di tutti i canali Utilizzare i pulsanti funzione FADER BANK per cambiare fader bank Modalita Stato del pulsante SELECT Funzione MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva l esclusione audio del canale Att
286. e o None an Ctrl Down None Off x None off a None att None Of None Of qd None Of None Of u None Of Nom ot 237 Utilizzo del software E Impostazioni in Cubase VST utenti Macintosh a E a 9 10 11 238 Nel menu Options selezionare Remote Setup Setup Impostare seguenti parametri della finestra di dialogo VST Remote come sotto indicato e fare clic su OK Remote Generic Remote Input UR 80 2 Output UR 80 1 Nella finestra Generic Remote visualizzata fare clic su EDIT per aprire la finestra di dialogo Generic Remote Setup Fare clic su Import Selezionare EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml copiato al passo precedente e fare clic su Open Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Nel menu Edit selezionare Preferences Key Commands Nel menu a comparsa selezionare Arrange Editors e configurare i parametri come segue Command Ev Type Event Cursor left Controller 28 Cursor right Controller 29 Cursor up Controller 26 Cursor down Controller 27 Selezionare la casella di controllo Remote Active Selezionare la casella di controllo Remote Key e impostarla su C 2 DO Preferences Key Commands SB Arrange Editors MRemote Active A Remote Key Select Tool 4 Select Tool 5 Select Tool 6 Select Tool 7 Select Tool 8 Select Tool 9 Select Tool 10 Cursor left Controller Ctrl 28 Con
287. e pistes 5 CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 16 Output Fade 6 CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 16 aucune affectation 7 CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 16 aucune affectation 8 CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 16 aucune affectation 1 CC 24 18 0 00 127 7F 16 Dissolve Time Ctrl 2 CC 25 19 0 00 127 7F 16 Audio Level Ctrl 3 CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 1 Ctrl Commandes 4 CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 2 Ctrl d att nuation Track 5 CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 3 Ctrl 6 CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 16 VFX 4 Ctrl 7 CC 30 1E 0 00 127 7F 16 aucune affectation 8 CC 31 1F 0 00 127 7F 16 aucune affectation 1 9 17 25 Program Change 1 9 17 25 16 Play video clip 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 Program Change 2 10 18 26 16 Play video clip 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 Program Change 3 11 19 27 16 Play video clip 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 Program Change 4 12 20 28 16 Play video clip 4 12 20 28 Boutons Track Status ELE en Change 5 13 21 29 16 Play video dip 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 Program Change 6 14 22 30 16 Play video clip 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 Program Change 7 15 23 31 16 Play video clip 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 Program Change 8 16 24 32 16 Play video clip 8 16 24 32 1 8 BF 00 00 BF 20 00 Palette vid o 1 Bouton de selection 9 16 BF 00 01 BF 2000 Palette video 2 du groupe de pistes 17 24 BF 00 02 BF 2000 Palette video 3 25 32 BF 00 03 BF 2000 Palette vid o 4 En mode V LINK vous ne pouvez pas r gler l
288. e possibility of discoloration and or defor mation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up in another MIDI device e g a sequencer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a Sequencer Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable Th
289. e salida bajo como un micr fono conviene que utilice el jack de entrada de tipo XLR GND SLEEVE 2 HOT 3 COLD HOT TIP COLD RING La unidad UR 80 proporciona jacks de entrada balanceados XLR TRS que deben cablearse como se indica en el diagrama Aseg rese de cablear correctamente el aparato que conecte La alimentaci n fantasma debe estar apagada a no ser que conecte un micr fono electroest tico que la exija Pueden producirse anomal as en el funcionamiento si se suministra alimentaci n fantasma a un micr fono din mico o a un aparato de reproducci n de audio Para obtener informaci n detallada sobre las caracter sticas de su micr fono consulte el manual del usuario del micr fono La alimentaci n fantasma de la unidad UR 80 proporciona un m ximo de 10 mA a 48 V de CC No debe conectar diferentes tipos de micr fonos simult neamente Por ejemplo no conecte un micr fono electroest tico de alimentaci n fantasma al jack de entrada 1 y un micr fono din mico al jack de entrada 2 Si suministra alimentaci n fantasma a un micr fono din mico o a un aparato de reproducci n de audio se producir n anomal as en el funcionamiento Enalieh Narnitenh Erannaie c s H 289 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an 25 27 Interruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada INPUT 1 IMP Puede seleccionar una impedancia alta Hi Z o una impedancia baja Lo Z pa
290. e salida digital Utilice estos jacks para transferir la se al de audio digital a un aparato de audio digital como un CD MD DAT Jacks de entrada digital Utilice estos jacks para poder recibir se al de audio digital desde un aparato de audio digital como un CD MD DAT o un m dulo de sonido MIDI que disponga de un jack de salida digital Si conecta un aparato digital al conector ptico OPTICAL el conector ptico tendr prioridad y no se entrar n las se ales de los jacks coaxiales Debe utilizar el tipo de cable adecuado para el jack de salida digital o el jack de entrada digital utilizados COAXIAL Cable coaxial OPTICAL Cable ptico El formato de entrada salida digital de la unidad UR 80 cumple el est ndar S P DIF Jacks de entrada 1 2 INPUT 1 L 2 R Son jacks de entrada de audio anal gico Puede conectar tanto clavijas de tipo XLR como clavijas de tipo fono Ambos tipos son compatibles con las conexiones balanceadas y no balanceadas Se puede suministrar alimentaci n fantasma de 48 V a las conexiones de tipo XLR lo cual permite utilizar micr fonos electrost ticos que precisan este tipo de alimentaci n En este caso disponga el interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma en la posici n ON activada Los jacks de tipo XLR y los de tipo fono tienen una sensibilidad de entrada diferentes como se muestra a continuaci n Tipo XLR 50 10 dBu Tipo fono 35 4 dBu Si conecta un aparato con un nivel d
291. e selection du taux d chantillonnage est r gl sur 96 kHz PLAY les sons des instruments ou des appareils audio connect s l UR 80 ne peuvent pas tre enregistr s par votre application Eenannl e Pour que le r glage du commutateur de s lection du taux d chantillonnage prenne effet vous devez teindre l UR 80 puis le rallumer 189 Enregistrement audio Enregistrement d une guitare ou d une basse Si vous utilisez votre logiciel s quenceur pour enregistrer votre partie de guitare tout en coutant des donn es audio d ja install es sur votre ordinateur seule la nouvelle partie de guitare sera enregistr e sur l ordinateur Guitar Bass Connect to INPUT 1 L en Set the sampling srece Wan frequency Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the volume OConnexions Le son du micro branch sur la prise INPUT 1 L est enregistr sur le canal L gauche de votre ordinateur Le son du micro branch sur la prise INPUT 2 R est enregistr sur le canal R droit Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Interrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage Positionnez le sur la fr quence d chantillonnage s lectionn e dans votre logiciel d enregistrement Commutateur d imp dance Positionnez le sur Hi Z Bouton de n
292. eccione Preferences 2 En Page seleccione Advanced MIDI 3 Configure los valores de puerto MIDI de la siguiente manera Any one of Bus A D EDIROL UR 80 1 Remote Control EDIROL UR 80 2 MIDI Clock Sync EDIROL UR 80 1 Puede utilizar el software Editor de la unidad UR 80 para modificar el puerto MIDI utilizado MEMO para MIDI Clock Sync Para ello modifique el puerto de salida para los mensajes Sync Start y Sync Stop asignados a SHIFT STOP y SHIFT PLAY Para obtener m s informaci n sobre c mo aplicar este cambio consulte el apartado UR 80 Editor p g 337 E Configuraci n para las opciones de reproducci n de Reason y el aparato de entrada MIDI Si desea utilizar la unidad UR 80 para controlar los m dulos o la reproducci n de Reason debe configurar los siguientes valores para cada canci n 1 En el men Options seleccione Edit MIDI Remote Mapping para habilitarlo Enalieh Naritenh Erannaie 2 Haga clic en el bmot n Stop de las opciones de reproducci n de Reason ee Aparecer el cuadro de di logo MIDI Remote 3 Haga clic en Learn from MIDI Input Presione el bot n STOP de la unidad UR 80 y haga clic en OK del cuadro de di logo MIDI Remote 5 Efect e las siguientes asignaciones de esta manera Controlador de la unidad UR 80 Opciones de reproducci n de Reason Stop Detener Play Reproducir Rewind Rebobinar lt lt Forward Avan
293. eene 41 Eeer 43 Settings EE 43 Functions assigned to the controllers ui 44 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 47 Settings in ProTools LE 47 Settings in Digital Performer ss 47 Functions assigned to the Controllers ue 48 Reason eri ail Legea a 51 MIDI port settings sinus 51 Settings for reason transport and MIDI IN DEVICE 51 Controlling the tempo of the song EE 52 MIDI Remote Mapping settings En 52 Functions assigned to the Controllers ue 53 Roland MCR 8 compatible applications ss 55 Recording audio 3 2 ee id 57 Basic USE ii ala 57 Recording Suitar Or bass siennes ira alain ila 58 Recording from a Mies oe Se aa SA aka dnih 59 Recording a keyboard namen A Ee anat kai 60 Recording from an audio device 61 Digitally recording from a CD MD DAT 000000 62 Recording the output of the UR 80 on a digital device iii 63 Adjusting the audio latency sus 64 Using ASIO Direct Monitor insti apli iaia ai 65 Advanced operation 07 Synth Edit le TE 68 Lrack fad rs s ss ne a a e ee EEN 68 Assign button ASSIGN rennen 68 Track control knobs TRACK HO CONTROL ss 69 Track group select button TRACK GROUP 69 Track status buttons TRACK STATUS HO PART 69 Parameter lis innato a nee ara 70 V LINK mode saanane daane aeai taena aanas 71 Parameter licita ina ENA AR E A RE 71 Controllers used in V LINK mode 72 RE 73 Starting up UR 80 E
294. eived by your se quencer software For each controller you can select the port that will be used You may find it convenient for example to use UR 80 1 for messages to be recorded on a track or used to control a software synthesizer and UR 80 2 for messages used to play back stop your sequencer or perform mixing Use UR 80 2 as the MIDI input device for UR 80 Editor Audio devices Audio output device EDIROL UR 80 This sends audio signals from your computer to the UR 80 If you are using Media Player you will normally choose this You should also use this if you are using an application such as SO NAR in WDM driver mode or a DirectSound application MME EDIROL UR 80 Out This sends audio signals from your computer to the UR 80 Use this if you are using an applica tion that does not have a WDM driver mode or if you want to use 24 bit audio with a non ASIO application such as Cool Edit Windows XP 2000 only Audio input devices EDIROL UR 80 This receives audio signals sent from the UR 80 to your computer Normally you should use this You should also use this when using an application such as SONAR in WDM driver mode MME EDIROL UR 80 In This receives audio signals sent from the UR 80 to your computer Use this if you are using an application that does not have a WDM driver mode or if you want to use 24 bit audio with a non ASIO application such as Cool Edit Windows XP 200
295. el jack de entrada de tipo XLR Indicadores de pico PEAK Estos indicadores indican si se est distorsionando el sonido de entrada de los jacks de entrada 1 y 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R Ajuste el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Input de manera que los indicadores de pico no se enciendan Los indicadores de pico se encender n en rojo a un nivel de 6 dB por debajo del nivel de recorte VOLUME 15 5 Control giratorio de volumen de salida VOLUME Ajusta el volumen de salida del jack de auriculares y de los jacks de salida m ster Este control no afecta al volumen de salida de los jacks de salida digital Enalieh Narntenh Erannaie c s D 287 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an Panel posterior 50 10 dBu POWER DC IN SAMPLE RATE A INPUT 2 R INPUT 1 L XLR 96 PLAY 748 Mic Pre AMP eco H re veren ci y fi ACI OR PSB 1U ADAPTOR ONLY PHONE THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT 35 4 dBu 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL T Hi Z Lo Z ON OFF INTERFERENCE RECEIVED Fia Se 3 ANY USE UNDESIRED OPERATION 16 17 18 Interruptor de alimentaci n POWER Presione este interruptor para encender y apagar la unidad La alimentaci n est conectada cuando el interruptor est presionado Conector de adaptador de CA DC IN Conecte el adaptador de CA que se proporciona aqu Terminal de toma de tierra Seg n las condi
296. ellungen anzuwenden klicken Sie auf Apply 148 Definitions Panneau principal Le panneau principal de 1 UR 80 est divis en trois sections Track Control Master Control et Audio Control La section Track Control et la section Master Control incluent 43 contr leurs auxquels vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI Si vous utilisez ces contr leurs avec le bouton SHIFT et incluez des affectations aux voyants vous pouvez affecter un total de 136 messages MIDI diff rents Utilisez UR 80 Editor pour affecter des messages MIDI aux contr leurs et modifier les affectations UR 80 Editor est inclus dans le CD ROM fourni Pour plus de details sur UR 80 Editor reportez vous la section UR 80 Editor p 205 Track Control section Master Control section EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Audio Control section REC INPUT SOURCE MONITOR SHIET ec Be Lun Ll kend o o a ae ae e Section Master Control x e Section Audio Control p 155 k Ni Une indication de SEXES pour un contr leur dans les explications suivantes F I p LI signifie que vous pouvez affecter un message MIDI ce contr leur 149 Enalieh x D H E q C Italiana Eenannl E Section Track Control La section Track Control vous permet de r gler les param tres de pistes de votre logiciel s quenceur Outre le volume et le panoramiq
297. ely so that the two types can be distinguished When the UR 80 is connected via USB you can select either of the two MIDI ports UR 80 1 UR 80 2 as the output destination for MIDI messages produced by the faders knobs and buttons of the UR 80 In other words by assigning UR 80 1 as your software s MIDI IN port and UR 80 2 as its CTRL IN port you can do things like using the fader and button operations to The output destination of the MIDI messages transmitted when you operate the UR 80 s faders knobs and buttons can be specified separately for each controller Use UR 80 Editor to assign the message and output destination for the controllers For details refer to UR 80 Editor p 73 31 x 4 E C Erannaie Italiana Eenannl Controlling your software You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the UR 80 s knobs faders and buttons A set of such MIDI message assignments is called a memory set The UR 80 contains eight different memory sets in its internal memory When shipped from the factory the assignments of the PRESET memory set are selected Switching memory sets Hold down the MEMORY button and press a TRACK STATUS button to select a memory set EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Memory sets Memory Contents This is the UR 80 s basic memory set It cannot
298. empo Weist Tempo Control fiir die Ubertragung von MIDI Timing Min Tempo Clock Nachrichten zu Max Tempo 143 En E u Italiana Erannaie Eenannl UR 80 Editor E Zuweisung einer MIDI Nachricht Fenster Message Assign Controller name RACK STATUS 1 MUTE 2 EDIROL UR 80 Editor Channel Message Step 2 Type Control Change v MIDI Channel Step 3 Control Number Min Value Max Value Message assignment area 40 a 0 Bac 8 Settines Step 4 Output Port Port 2 v Step 5 Button Mode UNLATOH O LATCH Step 6 LED Mode Remote v Message 2 Channel Message O Free Message Type Control Change v Mil Channel Step 7 LED recoptonmes age Control Number OFF Value ON Value assig ent area 40 a 0 4 i 27 4 Comment Step 8 Comment input area Cancel Step 9 Klicken Sie im Hauptfenster auf den Controller dem Sie eine Nachricht zuweisen m chten Wahlen Sie im Bereich Assign Message des Fensters Message Assign den Typ Nachricht aus den Sie zuweisen m chten 3 Verwenden Sie die Felder des Bereichs Assign Message entsprechend dem ausgew hlten Nachrichtentyp um die einzelnen Parameter fur die Nachricht anzugeben Die meisten Parameter werden als Dezimalzahl in die Felder eingegeben F r eine Free Message sollten Sie jedoch hexadezimale Werte in den Eingabebereich f r Nachrichten eingeben 4 Geben Sie unter Output Port den Ausgabeanschluss an 5 Wen
299. en el controlador al gue desea asignar un mensaje En el rea Assign Message Asignar mensaje de la ventana Message Assign Asignar mensaje seleccione el tipo de mensaje que desea asignar Seg n el tipo de mensaje que seleccione utilice los campos del rea Assign Message para especificar los par metros del mensaje La mayor a de los campos de par metros se especifican mediante un n mero decimal Sin embargo para especificar un Free Message Mensaje libre debe entrar valores hexadecimales en el rea de entrada Message Mensaje Especifique el puerto de salida en Output Port Puerto de salida Si el controlador es un bot n especifique el Button Mode Modo de bot n Si el controlador es un control giratorio especifique el Knob Mode Modo de control giratorio Si el controlador es un bot n con LED especifique el LED Mode Modo de LED Si ha especificado el LED Mode como Remote Remoto especifique el LED reception message Mensaje de recepci n de LED El campo LED reception message permite seleccionar Channel Message Mensaje de canal o Free Message Mensaje libre Los par metros son los mismos que para una asignaci n convencional a excepci n de lo siguiente El Min Value Valor m nimo ser el OFF Value para LED reception message El LED se apagar al recibir este valor El Max Value Valor m ximo ser el ON Value para LED reception message El LED se encender al recibir este valor No habr nin
300. en immer nur das Audiosignal aus das von Ihrem Computer gesendet wird N i H u 129 Aufnahme von Audio Anderung der Audiolatenz Sie k nnen die Treibereinstellungen ndern um die Latenz des Sounds zu ndern Um die Latenz zu ndern ver ndern Sie die Buffer Size im Dialogfeld fiir die Driver Settings Latenz ist die zeitliche Verz gerung zwischen der Wiedergabe von Audiodaten durch eine Anwendung bis zur tats chlichen Ausgabe aus einem Audioger t wie z B dem UR 80 1 Wie in Offnen des Dialogfelds fur die Einstellungen des Treibers S 131 beschrieben ffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Treibereinstellungen 2 Ver ndern Sie die Puffergr e des Treibers Folgende Einstellung erzeugt die k rzeste Latenz Windows Verstellen Sie die Audio Buffer Size Audiopuffergr e ganz nach links Min Macintosh Verstellen Sie die Buffer Size Puffergr e ganz nach links Min 3 Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld f r die Treibereinstellungen zu schlie en 4 Starten Sie die Anwendung von der das UR 80 verwendet wird erneut Wenn Sie ein Programm benutzen das eine Funktion zum Testen von Audioger ten enth lt sollten Sie diese Funktion einsetzen 5 Spielen Sie die Audiodaten in ihrer Anwendung ab Wenn der Sound unterbrochen wird wiederholen Sie diese Schritte und erh hen dabei allm hlich die Puffergr e die in Schritt 2 angegeben wird bis keine Unterbrechungen mehr a
301. encer software Ha EYE n e mu MEMO REC INPUT A SOURCE MONITOR Ae If you hold down the SHIFT button and turn the H D uy Step TIME dial the dial will adjust the input monitor level For details on input monitoring refer to H p 22 c E Ci 10 F nction buftons u unn a ia You can assign MIDI messages to these six buttons Since you can also assign messages for when the SHIFT button is being held down a total of 12 MIDI messages can be assigned to these buttons You will typically use the function buttons to execute various commands on your sequencer software 11 Transport DUttons aranci You can assign MIDI messages to these six buttons Since you can also assign messages for when the SHIFT button is being held down a total of 12 MIDI messages can be assigned to these buttons H You can also assign MIDI messages to control the two LEDs located above the uy and ga u transport buttons These buttons are typically used to control the transport of your seguencer software 21 Names of Things and What They Do 12 System Setting Mode Select buttons Use these buttons to switch settings and modes on the UR 80 itself You cannot assign MIDI messages to the System Setting Mode Select buttons Button name Operation MEMORY By holding down the MEMORY button and pressing a TRACK STATUS button you can switch among the eight memory sets stored within the UR 80 When y
302. eo E Mediante aparatos de video compatibles con V LINK pueden enlazarse e introducirse f cilmente u efectos visuales en los elementos expresivos de una actuaci n Al activar el bot n V LINK situado en la secci n de control m ster sta se establecer en modo Su V LINK Cuando la unidad UR 80 inicia elmodo V LINK transmite un mensaje V LINK ON Activaci n de V LINK un mensaje Sender Model Name Nombre de modelo de emisor y un mensaje V LINK Initialization Inicializaci n de V LINK Si presiona el bot n V LINK otra vez la unidad UR 80 lt transmitir un mensaje V LINK OFF Desactivaci n de V LINK y a continuaci n saldr del modo V LINK H El mensaje de inicializaci n de V LINK es un mensaje MIDI de un m ximo de 255 bytes k En la configuraci n de f brica se transmitir el contenido de la Lista de par metros que aparece a continuaci n como mensaje de inicializaci n de V LINK Puede utilizar UR 80 Editor para modificar este mensaje Para obtener m s informaci n sobre la configuraci n consulte la ayuda en l nea de UR 80 Editor E Lista de par metros s A En el modo V LINK se asignan los siguientes mensajes Puede establecer el puerto de salida S de UR 80 Editor g Puerto de salida EDIROL UR 80 1 configuraci n por defecto a Mensaje Rango HEX Cana Asignaci n por defecto I CH 1 CC 16 10 0 00 127 7F 16 Playback Speed Ctrl Control de la velocidad de reproducci n Controles 2 CC 17
303. eo Grabar la automatizaci n en modo Touch Sense Sentido de contacto Los datos se regrabar n desde el punto en el que empiece a utilizar los atenuadores de la unidad UR 80 lt D E q C za y c c u c H D 313 Control del software Secci n de control m ster JOG BANK MB a EDIT MIXER MEM LOC TRANSPORT TRANSPORT INPUT MONITOR LEVEL PRE POST EDIT MODE EDITTOOL pO E nm CLK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OFF ANALOG 0 STEREO ZE DIGITAL 29 MONO SCRUB Dial de avance rapido JOG Botones de cursor CURSOR Con estos botones se conmuta el banco de pistas controlado por los controles de pistas de la unidad UR 80 Boton Funci n a Retroceder una pista el banco de pistas Vy Avanzar una pista el banco de pistas d Ir al siguiente banco de pistas gt Ir al banco de pistas anterior Botones de funcion Boton Funcion EDIT DP Abrir la ventana Editor PT Abrir la ventana Track MEM LOCT DP Abrir la ventana Marker PT Abrir la ventana Memory Location MIXER Abrir cerrar la ventana Mixer TRANSPORT Abrir la ventana Transport IN Establecer la posici n actual como punto para el inicio de la grabaci n autom tica Auto Record Start punch in PRE DP Establecer la posici n a
304. er hohe Impedanz Hi Z oder niedrige Impedanz Lo Z w hlen Wenn Sie eine Gitarre mit Eingangsbuchse 1 verbinden sollten Sie hohe Impedanz w hlen Hi Z Phantomstrom Schalter PHANTOM POWER Dieser Schalter ist ein Ein Aus Schalter fiir den Phantomstrom mit dem die Eingangsbuchsen 1 und 2 vom Typ XLR versorgt werden Sie miissen den Phantomstrom deaktivieren wenn Sie kein Kondensatormikrofon angeschlossen haben das Phantomstrom ben tigt Wenn ein dynamisches Mikrofon oder ein Audiowiedergabeger t mit Phantomstrom versorgt wird k nnen Fehlfunktionen auftreten Weitere Informationen ber die Spezifikationen Ihres Mikrofons erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch Die Phantomstromversorgung des UR 80 betr gt maximal DC 48 V 10 mA Sicherheits Steckplatz Ri http www kensington com Seitliches Bedienfeld 28 29 Master Ausgangsbuchsen RCA Phonotyp Dies sind die Analog Audioausgangsbuchsen Sie k nnen diese Buchsen mit Ihrem externen Monitor Lautsprechersystem verbinden Kopfh rer Buchse An diese Buchse k nnen Kopfh rer angeschlossen werden Aus den Kopfh rerbuchsen wird das gleiche Signal ausgegeben wie aus den Master Ausgangsbuchsen und aus den Digitalausgangsbuchsen Der Sound wird aus den Master Ausgangsbuchsen ausgegeben auch wenn Kopfh rer angeschlossen sind Verwenden Sie den Schaltknopf f r die Ausgabelautst rke im Abschnitt Audio Control um die Lautst rke der Kopfh rerbuchse
305. erformer 3 179 R glages de ProTools LE ss 179 R glages de Digital Performer ss 179 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs ss 180 E TNA 183 Param tres du port MIDI natan 183 R glages du transport Reason et de MIDI IN DEVICE 183 Contr le du tempo de la chanson ss 184 R glages de MIDI Remote Mapping 184 Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs ss 185 Applications compatibles avec Roland MER 187 Enregistrement audio 189 Utilisation depase tonada trente 189 Enregistrement d une guitare ou d une basse 190 Enregistrement avec un MICTO i 191 Enregistrement avec un clavier 192 Enregistrement d un appareil audio 193 Enregistrement num rique partir de CD MD DAT ss 194 Enregistrement de l UR 80 vers un appareil num rique in 195 R glage de la latence audio estere o rerba iE raen EEE ViTa 196 Utilisation d ASIO Direct Monitor i 197 Fonctionnement aVanc sssssssssuns 199 Mode Edition Synthe 200 Commandes d att nuation Track ss 200 Bouton d affectation ASSIGN ss 200 Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL 201 Bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes TRACK GROUP 201 Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HO PART 201 Liste des param tres 202 Mode V LINK ina jasna as 209 Pistedes AA nn AA kjut
306. es de selecci n de modo configuraci n del sistema 286 Bouton d automation nena 176 Bouton d affectation ii 150 200 Bouton d affectation ASSIGN 208 Bouton de banque 169 173 Bouton de niveau SENS 155 190 193 Bouton de s lection ss 151 Bouton de s lection SELECT 208 Bouton de selection du groupe de pistes 152 166 201 Bouton de transport 153 167 170 174 182 bouton de transport ene 178 Bouton de volume de sortie VOLUME 155 Bouton du mode automatique 181 Bouton REC SOURCE in 190 194 bouton SHIFT 2 sense as 208 Bouton VEEINK rasi iatale 203 Boutons de fonction 153 167 170 174 182 Boutons de r glage de pistes Dania 150 166 169 173 176 180 185 201 Boutons de transport s ssesssesseeisesesesresesesesessesesese 186 Boutons System Setting et Mode Select 154 Boutons Track Status sigla gianni 151 166 169 173 176 180 185 201 Boutons curseurs 153 167 170 174 177 182 186 B ffer Size aan arsch 64 378 C Casilla de verificaci n H ACTIVITY 339 Ch Pressure u ka rapa nia 77 143 209 275 Ch Pressure Presi n de canal 341 Channel Message i 77 14
307. es ni neakene oiaren in nisani nE 340 Control Change Nachricht ee 143 Controles giratorios de control de pistas Track Control A A ENEE I 282 Controles giratorios de pistas Track Control diri ra area 298 301 305 312 317 333 Controles giratorios de pistas Track control 308 Contr leurs aiuole ll alia 208 Controller rer en 142 Controller iii is 76 E EE 274 Conversor de velocidad de sampling 326 Convertisseur de taux d chantillonnage 194 Cursor buttons 21 35 38 42 45 50 54 Cursor pulsanti 219 233 236 240 243 248 252 Cursor Schaltflachen 87 101 104 108 111 116 120 D DataSet sisi einen mie 380 382 383 Default TEMPO ene 82 148 214 280 Default Tempo Tempo predeterminado 346 Diagrama de bloques i 293 Dial de avance r pido JOG 310 314 Dial temporizador TIME 285 299 302 306 318 DIGMA Econ ea ets 22 88 154 220 286 Digital input jacks ss 25 Digital output jacks ee 25 Digitalausgangsbuchsen 91 Digitaleingangsbuchsen 91 Dimensioni del buffer in 262 Driver Mode 2 Ra m sine 348 388 E EDIROLUAZ700 ninfee labii 65 EDIROL UR 80 131 197 263 329 AAA ai 96 Eingangsbuchsen 1 2 91 Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter 92 124 127 Elenco dei parametri
308. es param tres de pistes de votre logiciel sequenceur ou guivalent a partir de la section Track Control Pour reprendre le r glage de votre logiciel s quenceur appuyez sur le bouton V LINK afin de le d sactiver 203 Enalieh lt 4 T C Italiana Eenanal Mode V LINK E Contr leurs utilis s en mode V LINK 204 Fixez les tiquettes V LINK sur la feuille de modele jointe V LINK INPUT 192 PLAYBACK OUTPUT PEAK 1 SPEED CR CB BRIGHTNESS FADE wa s H 2 sali abr abr abr sali sali sali O s D D s D v D n y n y n CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY O Ou OF OL Cu O O Os 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 PALETTE SELECT OFF 1 8 GREEN 9 16 RED 17 24 ORANGE 25 32 8 24 16 32 UR 80 Editor UR 80 Editor vous permet d utiliser votre ordinateur pour cr er des jeux de sons pour l UR 80 Au total UR 80 inclut 43 contr leurs Si vous les utilisez avec le bouton SHIFT et les indicateurs LED vous pouvez affecter 136 messages MIDI diff rents ces contr leurs Cet ensemble de 136 messages MIDI est appel jeu de sons L UR 80 peut lui m me stocker sept jeux de sons et une m moire pr d finie gt Memory sets p 349 UR 80 Editor vous permet de transf rer les jeux de sons depuis et vers l UR 80 de modifier les Enalieh
309. et UR 80 USR6 MCR 8 UR 80 CITE TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN SI 1 8 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE 521 8 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C218 TRACK FADER 1 8 Ci MASTER ST MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO 52 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT a D Y ho d FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST Ha nm pi SHIFT GS H SHIFT 9 lt lt Laa gt gt gt Gaa 187 Enalieh x 4 E C Italiana Eenannl Contr le de votre logiciel Affectations des contr leurs MCR 8 mode 4 B et UR 80 USR7 188 MCR 8 UR 80 C19 16 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN S1 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S2 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C2 9 16 TRACK FADER 1 8 C1 MASTER z SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT D a Vv sy FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV
310. eted When you receive a memory set the UR 80 will switch to the memory set that you received C k D x a H u 8l Saving or loading in SMF format A memory set you edit in UR 80 Editor can be saved loaded as a SMF format file E Saving a memory set in SMF format Here s how to save the memory set currently being edited in SMF format The contents of the Comment field in the Message Assign window will also be saved in the SMF file 1 From the File menu choose Save As If you want to save by overwriting the most recently opened file choose Save 2 Specify a file name and click Save E Loading a memory set from a SMF file Here s how to load a memory set that was saved in SMF format UR 80 Editor can also load memory sets for the Edirol PCR series that were saved in SMF format For details refer to the online help for UR 80 Editor The contents of the Comment field in the Message Assign window can be loaded only from an SMF file that was saved by UR 80 Editor 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 Specify the file that you want to load and click Open System settings Here s how to edit the system settings of the UR 80 itself 1 From the System menu choose System Settings UR 80 System Setting UR 80 Editor will load the system settings from the Default Tempo 120 VE UR 80 Output Port If loading is not successful check the connections and MIDI Clock 61 O2 0142 try
311. ettings Select MCR 8 as the external controller for your software Specify UR 80 2 as the MIDI port used by your external controller For details on settings refer to the owner s manual for your software MCR 8 mode 4 A and UR 80 USR6 controller assignments MCR 8 UR 80 lt CT TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN 6 5118 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE 5218 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO H C218 TRACK FADER 18 c Ci MASTER SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO 52 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS CZ MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV P INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT g A A w FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3 FUNCTION 3 PREV F4 FUNCTION 4 NEXT F5 FUNCTION 5 UNDO E F6 FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS K F7 SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER S FS SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST amp Ha CJ pi SHIFT GS Il SHIFT EY lt lt CO E Cam E gt d gt gt nam d 55 Controlling your software MCR 8 mode 4 B and UR 80 USR7 controller assignments 56 MCR 8 UR 80 C1 9 16 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN S1 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S2 9 16 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C2 9 16 TRACK FADER 1 8 C1 MASTER z SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5
312. euerung Ihres Sequenzerprogramms zur ckwechseln m chten dr cken Sie erneut die Schaltfl che HQ GM2 um sie auszuschalten Damit der Master Fader die Gesamtlautst rke immer steuern kann wird die Nachricht bertragen die vom ausgew hlten Memory Set S 349 zugewiesen wird Der ausgew hlte Modus spielt dabei keine Rolle Der MASTER Fader steuert auch im Synth Edit Modus nicht das Master Volume des Softwaresynthesizers Im Synth Edit Modus wird standardm ig der Anschluss EDIROL UR 80 1 verwendet um MIDI Nachrichten zu bertragen Sie k nnen jedoch mit dem UR 80 Editor einen anderen Ausgabeanschluss w hlen N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie unter UR 80 Editor S 139 E Track Fader Passen die Lautst rke der einzelnen Kan le an Sie k nnen die Kan le 1 16 steuern indem Sie die Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che dr cken E Schaltfl che Assign ASSIGN Diese Schaltfl che w hlt die Parameter aus die von den Track Steuerschaltkn pfen gesteuert werden Dr cken Sie mehrmals die Schaltfl che Assign um nacheinander die verf gbaren Optionen aufzurufen PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 gt HQ Schaltfl che Assign Parameter PAN Pan SEND1 Reverb Send SEND2 Chorus Send HQ Channel Parameter 134 Synth Edit Modus E Track Steuerungsschaltknopfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe steuern die Parameter f r Panorama Reverb Send Chorus Send oder Channel jede
313. ey Commands Z Arrange Editors Select Tool 4 Select Tool 5 Select Tool 6 Select Tool 7 Select Tool 8 Select Tool 9 Select Tool 10 Cursor left Controller Ctrl 28 Cursor right Controller Ctrl 29 Cursor up Controller Ctrl 26 Cursor down Controller Ctrl 27 Nudge Event Left Nudge Event Right Nudge Event Up Nudge Event Down Cliguez sur OK pour fermer la boite de dialogue Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs T Fixez les tiquettes Cubase VST sur la feuille de mod le jointe L explication ci dessous suit ces r glages Section Track Control d CUBASE VST d INPUT 122 ASSIGN u O PAN JE JE JE JE JE JE JE HO lt CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE TRACK STATUS IMPART GREEN SOLO RED SELECT lt ORANGE 178 7 2710 3 11 4 12 25 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 MASTER H C Commandes d att nuation Track Les commandes d att nuation r glent le volume de la table de mixage du canal VST Si vous utilisez les commandes d att nuation avec le bouton de banque vous pouvez r gler 16 canaux audio 8 canaux d instruments VST et 8 canaux de groupe Commande d att nuation MASTER Contr le le gain principal du Mixer VST Boutons Track Status TRACK STATUS HQ PART Ces boutons commutent l tat de chaque canal Si vous utilisez les boutons avec le
314. f MIDI Controllers 3 Setzen Sie die MIDI Controller wie folgt Windows Macintosh Type Receive From Send To Type Receive From Send To HUI EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 HUI UR 80 1 UR 80 1 E Einstellungen in Digital Performer 1 _ W hlen Sie im Men Basics Control Surface Setup 2 Wenn im Bildschirm die Meldung Press to add a Driver to your Configuration klicken Sie auf die Taste W hlen Sie unter Driver Version 3 1 oder fr her Hardware die Option HUI W hlen Sie in MIDI Version 3 1 oder fr her MIDI Communication UR 80 1 113 7 u Italiana Erannaie Eenannl Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den HUI Kennungen Bei der folgenden Erkl rung werden diese Einstellungen verwendet DP PT Kennzeichnet eine Operation f r ProTools LE Wenn keines dieser Symbole gezeigt wird gilt diese Operation f r beide Systeme Kennzeichnet eine Operation f r Digital Performer Abschnitt Track Control Pro TOOLS INPUT 122 PEAK 1 2 D v AUTO MODE UA silo SITZ alike un mr RES rm S QI di d AP dd ME AR Y OZ Ka amp Eo d E fi E F po fi KA fi Ka S Ka fa o SEND2 4 k 4 VK A N 5 va DELAY ATTACK DEGAY RELEASE pa 9 HQ TRACK STATUS HO PART CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE
315. fader Control the master volume of Audio Mixer Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART These buttons switch the status of each channel By switching the fader bank you can control the status of all channels Use the FADER BANK function buttons to switch fader banks Mode SELECT button status Function MUTE OFF Switch channel mute on off On lit Off unlit SOLO GREEN Switch channel solo on off On lit Off unlit REC RDY RED Switch channel record ready on off On lit Off unlit SELECT ORANGE Select the channel to which an operation for an individual channel will apply Selected lit Not selected unlit Track control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs function as encoders The value will increase while the track control knob is turned toward the right and will decrease while the knob is turned toward the left The change increase decrease will stop when you return the knob to the center position Use the ASSIGNMENT function button to switch the parameters that are controlled by these knobs Automation button AUTOMATION This switches the automation mode of the currently selected channel AUTOMATION button status Operable channel track READ Switch the automation mode to READ WRITE Switch the automation mode to WRITE TOUCH Switch the automation mode to TOUCH LATCH Switch the automation mode to LATCH 44 Controlling your software Master Control sec
316. ferimento alla guida in linea dell UR 80 Editor Avvio di UR 80 Editor Prima di avviare UR 80 Editor collegare l UR 80 al computer via un collegamento USB e accendere Na terh il computer Utenti Windows Nel menu Start selezionare Programmi in Windows XP Tutti i programmi e nel menu visualizzato scegliere UR 80 Editor gt UR 80 Editor Utenti Macintosh Fare doppio clic sull icona UR 80 Editor nella cartella dove stato installato il programma S G a u Eenanal 271 Impostazioni della porta MIDI Per poter trasferire i patch di memoria tra l UR 80 e il computer in UR 80 Editor o per configurare il sistema necessario specificare la porta MIDI che verra utilizzata dal programma UR 80 Editor Nelle pagine che seguono verr spiegata la procedura di configurazione da seguire dopo aver collegato l UR 80 al computer mediante un collegamento USB Se si utilizzano i connettori MIDI specificare le porte di ingresso uscita del dispositivo MIDI collegato Utenti Windows 1 Nel menu Options selezionare MIDI Devices 2 Nella finestra di dialogo MIDI Devices effettuare le seguenti impostazioni MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 v Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 3 Fare clic sul pulsante OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo Utenti Macintosh Prima di continuar
317. finissent le tempo Bouton Tempo BPM a so Vy 120 q 145 gt 100 SHIFT 20 SHIFT W 180 250 SHIFT q 60 SHIFT gt Composition TIME Si vous avez activ la fonction MIDI Clock Sync de Reason et contr lez le tempo cette composition r gle le tempo en continu Boutons de transport Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction Activation d sactivation de la lecture en boucle Retour en arri re du curseur Avance rapide du curseur Arr t de la lecture ou de l enregistrement Lancement de la lecture DOB DOD Lancement de l enregistrement SHIFT Arr t de la lecture pendant MIDI Clock Sync SHIFT Lancement de la lecture pendant MIDI Clock Sync Contr le de votre logiciel Applications compatibles avec Roland MCR 8 Vous pouvez utiliser UR 80 avec un logiciel compatible avec Roland MCR 8 mode 4 Le canal MIDI des messages transmis est d fini sur 16 Jeu de sons Utilisez USR6 ou USR7 USR6 correspond a MCR 8 mode 4 A USR7 correspond au mode 4 B R glages du logiciel S lectionnez MCR 8 en tant que contr leur externe de votre logiciel Sp cifiez UR 80 2 comme le port MIDI utilis par votre contr leur externe Pour plus de d tails sur les param tres reportez vous au manuel de l utilisateur du logiciel Affectations des contr leurs MCR 8 mode 4 A
318. from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers E Dati MIDI Se l UR 80 e il computer sono collegati mediante il cavo USB I dati MIDI verranno trasmessi secondo il seguente schema PC port name UR 80 MIDI OUT device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN EDIROL UR 80 1 Transmit port 1 MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 2 Transmit port 2 226 Nozioni di base e impostazioni E Dati audio schema di flusso SAMPLE RATE Use COAXIALIN CONVERTER COAXIAL OUT OPTICAL IN O nou OPTICAL OUT TRS ONLY P XLR ONLY Z Hi ES Lo Z Hi Z eur lt INPUT 1 our G INPUT 2 lt PHONES INPUT MONITOR STEREO MONO Se si utilizzano collegamenti MIDI Anche se l UR 80 non e collegato al computer tramite un cavo USB e possibile collegare i connettori lt MIDI IN OUT dell UR 80 a un interfaccia MIDI collegata al computer E e USB cable C MIDI interface sold separately i MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI cables MIDI cable MIDI IN a Se mni Receive port Ja por MIDI sound module sold separately sb as S Transmit port 2 Transmit port 2 Se si utilizza questo tipo di collegamento la funzionalit audio dell UR 80 non sar accessibile i D u 227 Nozioni di base e impostazioni Periferiche di ingresso uscita 228 Per sfruttare tutte le p
319. gerat EDIROL UR 80 Hiermit werden Audiosignale von Ihrem Computer zum UR 80 gesendet Wenn Sie den Windows Media Player verwenden wahlen Sie normalerweise diese Option Sie sollten sie auch verwenden wenn Sie eine Anwendung wie z B SONAR im WDM Treiber Modus oder eine DirectSound Anwendung einsetzen MME EDIROL UR 80 Out Hiermit werden Audiosignale von Ihrem Computer zum UR 80 gesendet Wahlen Sie diese Option wenn Sie eine Anwendung verwenden die tiber keinen WDM Treibermodus verfiigt oder wenn Sie 24 Bit Audio mit einer Nicht ASIO Anwendung wie z B Cool Edit einsetzen nur Windows XP 2000 Audio Eingabeger te EDIROL UR 80 Hiermit werden Audiosignale empfangen die vom UR 80 zu Ihrem Computer gesendet werden Normalerweise sollten Sie diese Option w hlen Sie sollten sie auch dann verwenden wenn Sie eine Anwendung wie z B SONAR im WDM Treiber Modus einsetzen MME EDIROL UR 80 In Hiermit werden Audiosignale empfangen die vom UR 80 zu Ihrem Computer gesendet werden Wahlen Sie diese Option wenn Sie eine Anwendung verwenden die ber keinen WDM Treibermodus verfiigt oder wenn Sie 24 Bit Audio mit einer Nicht ASIO Anwendung wie z B Cool Edit einsetzen nur Windows XP 2000 ASIO Ger t Wahlen Sie EDIROL UR 80 als ASIO Einstellung fiir Ihre Anwendung wenn Sie das UR 80 mit einer ASIO Anwendung wie z B Cubase einsetzen Um zu verhindern dass Audiodatensch
320. glages suivants pour le port MIDI Any one of Bus A D EDIROL UR 80 1 Remote Control EDIROL UR 80 2 MIDI Clock Sync EDIROL UR 80 1 Vous pouvez utiliser UR 80 Editor pour modifier le port MIDI utilis pour MIDI Clock Sync MEMO Pour cela modifier le port de sortie des messages Sync Start et Sync Stop affect s SHIFT STOP et SHIFT PLAY Pour plus de d tails sur l ex cution de cette modification reportez vous la section UR 80 Editor p 205 E R glages du transport Reason et de MIDI IN DEVICE Si vous souhaitez utiliser UR 80 pour contr ler les modules ou le transport de Reason vous devez effectuer les r glages suivants pour chaque chanson 1 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Edit MIDI Remote Mapping pour l activer 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Stop du transport Reason La bo te de dialogue MIDI Remote s affiche S lectionnez Learn from MIDI Input 4 Appuyez sur le bouton STOPde l UR 80 puis cliquez sur OK dans la bo te de dialogue MIDI Remote Effectuez les affectations suivantes de la m me mani re Contr leur UR 80 Transport Reason Ka Arr t D a Marche gt E Rebobinage Ca Avance rapide gt CH Enregistrement a Boucle ON Off 6 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Edit MIDI Remote Mapping pour le d sactiver Dans le menu Options assurez vous que la case Enable MIDI Remote Mapping est coch e Sinon s lectionnez l opti
321. guna casilla de verificaci n Send LSB Enviar LSB para RPN o NRPN Si lo desea puede entrar un comentario en el campo Comment Comentario Haga clic en OK 342 UR 80 Editor E Comprobaci n del mensaje MIDI asignado Puede comprobar los mensajes MIDI asignados de una de las siguientes formas M todo 1 e En el men File Archivo elija View assign list Listar asignaciones Se mostrar n todos los par metros de los mensajes MIDI asignados a los controladores en formato ri HTML Este m todo es til si desea ver datos detallados o para la comprobaci n final E Si selecciona la orden Export assign list del men File obtendr la misma lista de par metros en d formato de archivo HTML M todo 2 En el men Options seleccione Show Messages Ver asignaciones Aparecer un resumen de los mensajes MIDI asignados a cada controlador en la ventana principal como el siguiente Conviene que utilice este m todo para efectuar asignaciones o para comprobar las asignaciones generales lt H s H O EDIROL UR 80 Editor preset mid TITLE l mactivirY V INIT MESSAGE EDIT k k H E H i u c s H 343 UR 80 Editor Mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria E Especificaci n del mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria Para cada conjunto de memoria de la unidad UR 80 puede especificar un Memory Set Initial Message Mensaje inicial de conjunto de memoria que se
322. h i 203 Contr leurs utilis s en mode V LINK ss 204 10 UR 50 Ed MO osito D marrage de UR S0 Editoti ariana iria aiii lec 205 Parametres du Port MIDI t tanie sa hr trente 206 Fen tre UR 80 Editor sn sn ennemie einen 207 Fenetre principales iis ian nina Ben 207 R glages des Contr leurs ie aaa tai ie 209 Messages MIDI que vous pouvez affecter aux contr leurs 209 Affectation d un message MIDI 210 V rification des messages MIDI affect s 211 Memory Set Initial Message iii 212 Sp cification du Memory Set Initial Message iii 212 Activation du Memory Set Initial Message iii 212 Echange de donn es avec l UR 80 ss 213 Transmission vers PUR 80 cnica mia iaa 213 R ception partir de l UR 80 ss 213 Sauvegarde ou chargement au format SMF 214 Sauvegarder un jeu de sons au format SMF 214 Chargement d un jeu de sons partir d un fichier SMF 214 Param tres syst me i 214 Parti e relative funzioni 215 Pannello principale mirror sn een an nnd 215 Sezione Track Control 216 Sezione Master Control urtare 219 Sezione Audio Controla pai ali 221 Parmello posterior oriol ers Rn IA 222 Pannello Laterales dci 224 Nozioni di baee senn NNN KK KKK NN KK anne 225 Nozioni di base e impostazioni
323. h between pan equalizer treble and equalizer bass D a H u 53 Controlling your software Master Control section eb TEMPO INPUT MONITOR LEVEL F3 F4 F5 F6 MEMORY GM2 SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT sie fa JO O StToP _ START J MIDI SYNC 54 Cursor buttons If you have enabled Reason s MIDI Clock Sync function and are controlling the tempo these buttons set the tempo Button Tempo BPM a s Vy 120 d 145 gt 100 SHIFT 4h 20 SHIFT YY 180 SHIFT lt q SHIFT gt i TIME dial If you have enabled Reason s MIDI Clock Sync function and are controlling the tempo this dial continuously adjusts the tempo Transport buttons These buttons perform the following functions Button Function a Switch loop playback on off ga Rewind the cursor Fast forward the cursor Stop playback recording mm a Start playback Ma Start recording ER Stop playback during MIDI Clock Sync SHIFT SHIFT 8 Start playback during MIDI Clock Sync Roland MCR 8 compatible applications You can use the UR 80 with software that is compatible with Roland MCR 8 mode 4 The MIDI channel of the transmitted messages is fixed at 16 Memory set Use USR6 or USR7 USR6 corresponds to MCR 8 mode 4 A USR7 corresponds to mode 4 B Software s
324. harger les param tres syst me Default Tempo uo 0 5 partir de UR 80 Output Port Si le chargement choue v rifiez les connexions et MIDI Clock ei C O 142 recommencez la proc dure partir de l tape 1 HQ GM2 Message Mi O 1 2 V LINK Message 1 C O 142 x Cancel La bo te de dialogue System Settings de l UR 80 s affiche Default Tempo Sp cifie le tempo par d faut pour la transmission des messages MIDI Timing Clock Lors de la mise sous tension le tempo Timing Clock est initialis avec le param tre que vous sp cifiez ici MIDI Clock Sp cifiez le port de sortie des messages MIDI Timing Clock Messages HQ GM2 Sp cifie le port de sortie des messages en mode Edition Synth Messages V LINK Sp cifie le port de sortie des messages en mode V LINK Pour appliquer les param tres cliquez sur Apply Appliquer Parti e relative funzioni Pannello principale Il pannello principale dell UR 80 e diviso in tre sezioni Track Control Master Control e Audio Control Le sezioni Track Control e Master Control contengono 43 controlli ai quali amp possibile assegnare dei messaggi MIDI Se utilizzati insieme al pulsante SHIFT e alle assegnazioni dei LED questi controlli permettono di arrivare a un totale di 136 messaggi MIDI diversi Utilizzare UR 80 Editor per assegnare i messaggi MIDI ai controlli e per modificare le assegnazioni UR 80 Editor e fornito nel CD ROM in
325. he Vi si possono collegare le casse monitor esterne 29 Presa cuffie Utilizzare questa presa per collegare una cuffia Il segnale emesso dalla prese delle cuffie uguale a quello proveniente dalle uscite master e digitali I suoni verranno emessi dalle uscite master anche se le cuffie sono collegate Regolare il volume delle cuffie e delle uscite master tramite la manopola VOLUME Non possibile regolare il volume emesso dalle uscite digitali 224 base IONI Noz uve IVU SIGVWULA vucusg Nozioni di base e impostazioni Questa sezione illustra i collegamenti principali e le vie seguite dai dati quando si utilizza l UR 80 Prima di effettuare i collegamenti ridurre al minimo il volume su tutti gli apparecchi per evitare malfunzionamenti o danni ai diffusori Collegare le cuffie o le casse monitor come illustrato per poter controllare la riproduzione proveniente dal software o i suoni degli strumenti o dei dispositivi audio collegati all UR 80 Collegament di base E sufficiente utilizzare un cavo USB per collegare l UR 80 al computer Il cavo USB permette di trasferire sia dati MIDI che audio Computer AC adaptor qd pora USB cable OO EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 26kH USB RECORDING SYSTEM oo Bo OO es Eecoso LI Headphones This adjusts the volume that is output
326. he track and the sound module that receives these messages will produce sound In contrast the data received from the CTRL IN port is used to operate your software in the same way as data from your computer s mouse or keyboard it will not be recorded on the tracks or thru ed to your sound module or soft synthesizer The MIDI messages sent here are interpreted in a completely different way than defined in the MIDI specification For this reason messages that are input from the CTRL IN port are not normally thru ed to your sound module or soft synthesizer For example even if you play your keyboard to send a note on message the software that receives this message will not produce a note instead it might interpret this message as meaning that the PLAY STOP button had been pressed Sequencer software Track Record on tracks 00000000 ll BE A THRU k Software synthesizer MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port MIDI sound module UR 80 1 UR 80 2 control mixer operations in your software while using the knobs to edit your software synthesizer The actual operation that will occur will depend on the software you are using Since the same MIDI message can be interpreted in completely different ways as described above the software lets you specify the MIDI IN port and CTRL IN port separat
327. hlen FI RESONANCE CC 71 47 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 VIB RATE CC 76 40 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 VIB DEPTH CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 VIB DELAY CC 78 UE 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 ATTACK CC 73 49 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 DECAY CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F wahlen 1 RELEASE CC 72 48 0 00 127 7F w hlen 1 CH 1 9 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 4 12 TRACK Fader CH 5 13 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 VOLUME CC 7 07 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 VOLUME CC7 07 0 00 127 7F 8 16 1 Der bertragungskanal entspricht dem MIDI Kanal des Kanals HQ PART der mit den Track Status Schaltfl chen ausgew hlt wird 136 V LINK Modus Was ist der V LINK Modus Dieser Modus erm glicht Ihnen die Steuerung von V LINK kompatiblen Videoger ten V LINK VAINA ist eine Funktion die es Ihnen erm glicht Musikdarbietungen in Video einzubetten Wenn Sie Videoger te einsetzen die mit V LINK kompatibel sind k nnen Sie visuelle Effekt ganz einfach mit den ausdrucksvollen Elementen einer Performance verkniipfen und in sie integrieren A 7 u Wenn Sie die Schaltfl che V LINK dr cken die sich im Abschnitt Master Control befindet wechselt der Abschnitt
328. hme 96 REC oder die Wiedergabe 96 PLAY ausw hlen USB Anschluss Verwenden Sie ein USB Kabel f r die Verbindung mit Ihrem Computer Bezeichnungen und Funktionen 22 Digitalausgangsbuchsen Verwenden Sie diese Buchsen f r die Ausgabe von Digitalaudio auf einem Digitalaudioger t wie z B CD MD DAT 23 Digitaleingangsbuchsen Verwenden Sie diese Buchsen um Digitalaudio von einem Digitalaudioger t einzugeben wie z B einem ri CD MD DAT oder von einem MIDI Soundmodul das tiber eine Digitalausgangsbuchse verfiigt T Wenn ein digitales Ger t mit dem optischen Anschluss OPTICAL verbunden wird erh lt der optische fr Anschluss Vorrang und die Signale aus den koaxialen Buchsen werden nicht eingespeist Verwenden Sie einen geeigneten Kabeltyp f r die Digitalausgangsbuchse oder Digitaleingangsbuchse die Sie verwenden COAXIAL Koaxialkabel OPTICAL Optisches Kabel Das Eingabe Ausgabeformat des UR 80 entspricht dem S P DIF Standard 24 Eingangsbuchsen 1 2 INPUT 1 L 2 R Dies sind die Analog Audioeingangsbuchsen Sie k nnen entweder Anschl sse vom Typ XLR oder vom Typ Phone ausw hlen Symmetrische und unsymmetrische Anschl sse werden f r jeden Typ unterst tzt Der XLR Anschluss kann mit 48V Phantomstrom versorgt werden Damit wird es m glich phantomstromgespeiste Kondensatormikrofone zu verwenden In diesem Fall schalten Sie den Phantomstromschalter ein K Die Buchsen vom Typ XLR und Phone verfiigen ber
329. hnellvorlauf f r den Cursor Wiedergabe Aufnahme stoppen Wiedergabe starten Aufnahme beginnen HHHHDHE Stoppt die Wiedergabe w hrend MIDI Clock Sync Startet die Wiedergabe w hrend MIDI Clock Sync SHIFT EB SHIFT Mit Roland MCR 8 kompatible Anwendungen Sie k nnen das UR 80 mit Software verwenden die mit Roland MCR 8 Modus 4 kompatibel ist Als MIDI Kanal fiir die tibertragenen Nachrichten wurde 16 festgelegt Memory Set Verwenden Sie USR6 oder USR7 USR6 entspricht MCR 8 Modus 4 A USR7 entspricht Modus 4 B z u Softwareeinstellungen Wahlen Sie MCR 8 als externen Controller f r Ihre Software Geben Sie UR 80 2 als MIDI Anschluss an der von Ihrem externen Controller verwendet werden wird N here Informationen zu den Einstellungen erhalten Sie im Benutzerhandbuch Ihrer Software MCR 8 Modus 4 A und UR 80 USR6 Controller Zuweisungen MCR 8 UR 80 CT TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN 5118 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE 5218 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C218 TRACK FADER 18 Ci MASTER SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO 52 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS CZ MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME Wahlscheibe S3 SHIFT EY DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV P INC SHIFT FUNCTION 4 NEXT g A A w FI FUNCTION 1 MIXER F2 FUNCTION 2 INST F3
330. hr Programm auf die gleiche Weise wie die Daten von der Maus oder Tastatur Ihres Computers zu verarbeiten diese werden nicht in den Spuren aufgenommen oder an Ihr Soundmodul mi N por vioi our port CTRL IN port bzw Ihren Softsynthesizer durchgereicht Die MIDI Nachrichten die hier gesendet werden werden v llig anders interpretiert als in der MIDI Spezifikation definiert Aus diesem Grund werden Nachrichten die ber den CTRL IN Anschluss eingegeben werden normalerweise nicht an Ihr Soundmodul oder an Ihren Softsynthesizer durchgereicht Wenn Sie z B Ihr Keyboard spielen um eine Note On Nachricht zu senden erzeugt das Programm das diese Nachricht empf ngt keine Note stattdessen wird diese Nachricht m glicherweise so interpretiert werden als h tte jemand PLAY STOP gedr ckt Die tats chlich ausgef hrte Operation h ngt von dem Programm ab das Sie verwenden A Da die gleiche MIDI Nachricht mehrfach und unterschiedlich Re ij mE interpretiert werden kann wie beschrieben erm glicht Ihnen n das Programm die separate Angabe des MIDI IN Anschlusses sofware und des CTRL IN Anschlusses sodass die beiden Typen voneinander unterschieden werden k nnen MIDI IN port 1 OUT part STRICIN port Wenn das UR 80 via USB angeschlossen ist k nnen Sie A A einen der beiden MIDI Anschliisse UR 80
331. hrem Computer befinden wird nur die Gitarren Performance neu auf dem Computer aufgenommen Guitar Bass Connect to INPUT 1 L ee Set the sampling ske Wan freguency Ss F Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Anschl sse Der Sound des Instruments das mit Eingangsbuchse 1 verbunden ist wird auf Kanal L Ihres Computers aufgenommen Der Sound des Instruments das mit Eingangsbuchse 2 verbunden ist wird auf Kanal R aufgenommen Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf die Sampling Frequenz ein die Sie in Ihrer Aufnahmesoftware gewahlt haben Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf Hi Z input Sensitivity Schaltknopf Verwenden Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf um die Eingangslautst rke anzupassen Um die bestm gliche Soundqualit t zu erhalten drehen Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf bis der Pegel so hoch wie m glich ohne dass die Input Peakanzeige aufleuchtet iInput Monitor Schalter Driicken Sie den Input Monitor Schalter und regeln Sie den Input Monitor Level fiir das Signal Ihrer Gitarre oder Ihres Bass Damit wird die Aufnahmelautst rke nicht ver ndert Um die Input Monitor Lautst rke anzupassen halten Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt und drehen Sie die TIME W hlscheibe OSchal
332. huttle Modus 114 Steuerung Ihrer Software Automatikmodus Schaltflache AUTO MODE Hiermit wird die Einstellung fiir die Spur Automatik ausgew hlt Halten Sie im Modus SELECT die Track Status Schaltfl che gedr ckt und dr cken Sie die Automatikmodus Schaltfl che um die Automatikeinstellung der entsprechenden Spur zu ver ndern 4 Status der Schaltfl che Funktion AUTO MODE g READ Wiedergabeautomatik u WRITE Aufnahmeautomatik S mtliche Automatik wird berschrieben TOUCH Aufnahmeautomatik im Touch Sense Modus Die Daten werden nur berschrieben w hrend Sie die Fader des UR 80 einstellen LATCH Aufnahmeautomatik im Touch Sense Modus Die Daten werden ab dem Punkt berschrieben an dem Sie beginnen die UR 80 Fader zu einstellen a G x Italiana Eenannl 115 Steuerung Ihrer Software Abschnitt Master Control channel BANK Pi a EDIT MIXER QDO JOG Cursor Schaltfl chen Diese Schaltfl chen schalten die Track Bank um die von den Track Reglern des UR 80 gesteuert werden Schaltflache Funktion a Setzt die Track Bank um 1 Spur zurtick Y Bef rdert die Track Bank um 1 Spur nach vorn q Wechselt zur nachsten Track Bank D Wechselt zur vorherigen Track Bank INPUT MONITOR LEVEL MEMLOC TRANSPORT UNDO SAVE OO e PRE POST EDIT MODE EDIT TOOL pO
333. ia SIN Per ogni patch di memoria dell UR 80 possibile specificare un messaggio iniziale che verr trasmesso quando viene selezionato il patch in questione Il messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria un messaggio MIDI fino a 48 byte I caratteri speciali come DT utilizzati in Free Message non possono essere utilizzati in questo tipo di messaggio Nella finestra principale fare clic sul pulsante Edit a destra della casella di controllo INIT MESSAGE Appare la finestra di dialogo Initial Message Digitare nell area di testo il messaggio desiderato per il patch di memoria Specificare nel campo Output Port la porta dalla quale verr inviato il messaggio Alla fine della configurazione fare clic su OK E Attivazione del messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria 278 Se la funzionalit del messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria attivata il messaggio MIDI specificato secondo la procedura summenzionata verr trasmesso ogni volta che il patch di memoria viene selezionato Per attivare il messaggio iniziale selezionare la casella di controllo INIT MESSAGE nella finestra principale Per evitare di trasmettere il messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria quando si seleziona il patch deselezionare questa casella Scambio di dati con l UR 80 E Invio di dati all UR 80 Di seguito viene spiegato come inviare all UR 80 il patch di memoria correntemente selezionato lt 1 Nel menu Communication sele
334. ialogo delle impostazioni del driver pag 263 aprire la finestra di dialogo relativa alle impostazioni del driver 2 Regolare le dimensioni del buffer del driver La seguente impostazione specifica la latenza pit corta Windows Impostare Audio Buffer Size completamente a sinistra Min Macintosh Impostare Buffer Size completamente a sinistra Min 3 Fare clic su OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni del driver 4 Riavviare l applicazione che utilizza l UR 80 Se si utilizza un applicazione provvista di una funzione per provare i dispositivi audio utilizzarla per effettuare le prove 5 Riprodurre i dati audio sull applicazione Se l audio viene interrotto ripetere la procedura e aumentare gradatamente le dimensioni del buffer specificate al passo 2 fino a quando non si verificano pi interruzioni A seconda dell applicazione utilizzata potrebbe essere disponibile una funzionalit di regolazione relativa alle dimensioni del buffer o alla latenza tra le impostazioni audio Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento al manuale utente del software 262 Uso di ASIO Direct Monitor Se si utilizza l UR 80 a partire da un applicazione ASIO 2 0 compatibile possibile gestirne l interruttore Input Monitor con tale applicazione 1 Comedescritto nella sezione Apertura della finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni del driver aprire la finestra di dialogo relativa alle Drive
335. ibe c mo transmitir a la unidad UR 80 el conjunto de memoria que se est lt editando actualmente s 1 En el menu Communication Comunicaci n seleccione Transmit Enviar e 2 Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Transmit memory set Enviar conjunto de memoria s Especifigue el destino en el gue debe grabarse el conjunto de memoria 3 Aparecer un cuadro de di logo de Confirm Haga clic en Continue Continuar 4 Aparecer un cuadro de di logo de progreso de la transmisi n Cuando finalice la transmisi n desaparecer el cuadro de di logo f Una vez finalizada la transmisi n la unidad UR 80 activard el conjunto de memoria transmitido E E Recepci n desde la unidad UR 80 A continuaci n se describe c mo recibir un conjunto de memoria desde la unidad UR 80 para que pueda editarlo 1 En el men Communication Comunicaci n seleccione Receive Recibir 2 Aparecer el cuadro de di logo Receive memory set Recibir conjunto de memoria lt Especifique el conjunto de memoria que desee recibir 3 Aparecer un cuadro de di logo de Confirm Haga clic en Continue Continuar 4 Aparecer un cuadro de di logo de progreso de la recepci n aa Cuando finalice la recepci n desaparecer el cuadro de di logo Al recibir un conjunto de memoria la unidad UR 80 activar el conjunto de memoria recibido C 6 E 345 UR 80 Editor Gaurdar o cargar en formato SMF Puede guardar o cargar un conjunto de
336. ibrato delay ATTACK Attack Time DECAY Decay Time RELEASE Release time Utilizzare i pulsanti Track Status stato delle tracce e il pulsante Track Group per selezionare il canale da controllare H E Pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce TRACK GROUP 6 Questo pulsante imposta il gruppo di canali 1 8 9 16 di cui verranno controllati i parametri D u E Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Dopo aver selezionato HQ con il pulsante Assign questi pulsanti permettono di selezionare il canale i cui parametri verranno controllati dalle manopole di controllo delle tracce Track Control Utilizzare questi pulsanti insieme al pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce Track Group H a D D u 267 Modalita Synth Edit E Elenco dei parametri Uscita EDIROL UR 80 1 impostazione predefinita Messaggio Intervallo Canale esadecimale esadecimale CH 1 9 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 12
337. icar el estado de F8 activo o inactivo y no el estado de V LINK activo o inactivo REC SOURCE Alterna la se al de entrada que se enviar a trav s del USB al sistema como fuente de grabaci n ANALOG LED no iluminado S lo se enviar al sistema la se al de los jacks de entrada S lo se enviar al sistema la se al de los jacks de entrada GEES digital coaxiales u pticos INPUT MONITOR LEVEL SHIFT TIME Determina si debe enviarse la se al de entrada de los jacks de entrada 1 2 y del jack de entrada digital al jack de auriculares y a los jacks de salida m ster Utilice SHIFT dial TIME para ajustar el nivel de monitoraje El monitoraje de entrada puede activarse o desactivarse desde un software compatible con ASIO 2 0 por ejemplo Cubase La modificaci n del nivel de monitoraje de entrada no afectar al nivel de grabaci n La se al de entrada no se emitir como salida Utilice esta configuraci n si pretende transferir los datos de audio al sistema o si ha conectado un mezclador y lo utiliza para emitir directamente la se al de entrada para el monitoraje OFF LED no iluminado La se al de entrada se emitir en est reo Utilice esta configuraci n si ha conectado un aparato est reo a los jacks de entrada 1 2 o si utiliza el jack de entrada digital STEREO LED iluminado La se al de entrada de los jacks de entrada o del jack de entrada digita
338. icrofono san pres Set the sampling ETN Wan freguency lt Turn ON if z you have connected a u condenser mic Adjust the input level Ag en en a Turn input monitor on and adjust lt the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button i TIME dial H Adjust the Si C volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Collegamenti L audio del microfono collegato alla presa d ingresso 1 verr registrato sul canale sinistro e audio del microfono collegato alla presa d ingresso 2 verr registrato sul canale destro D z e k D interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento Impostare la stessa frequenza di campionamento del software di registrazione S H H ve i x interruttore di selezione dell impedenza d ingresso u Impostarlo su Lo Z Phantom interruttore di alimentazione Quando si utilizza un microfono condenser attivare l interruttore Phantom Se viene collegato un dispositivo che non richiede l alimentazione phantom necessario disattivare l interruttore corrispondente per evitare malfunzionamenti Manopola di sensibilit dell input Utilizzare la manopola di sensibilit dell input per regolare il livello d ingresso Per una qualit audio ottimale regolare la manopola di sensibilit dell input al punto massimo consentito senza che l indicatore di picco si illumini einterruttore Input Monitor Ruot
339. idad UR 80 Computer AC adaptor des lt USB cable w D H 4 use C Monitor speakers u pe _ fo fo 4 Headphones LW H H u This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers c 6 Uso del interruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sampling z we SAMPLE RATE e Debe establecer el interruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sampling de la unidad UR 80 de manera que coincida con la frecuencia de sampling utilizada por su aplicaci n e Si el interruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sampling se establece en 96 KHz REC no oir el sonido reproducido por su aplicaci n e Si el interruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sampling se dispone en 96 KHz PLAY su aplicaci n no podr grabar el sonido de los instrumentos o aparatos de audio conectados a la unidad UR 80 e Para que la configuraci n delinterruptor de selecci n de velocidad de sampling surta efecto debe apagar la unidad UR 80 y a continuaci n volverla a encender 321 Grabaci n de audio Grabaci n de una guitarra o un bajo Si utiliza el software secuenciador para grabar una guitarra mientras escucha una reproducci n de datos de audio ya almacenados en su sistema s lo se grabar la guitarra en el sistema Connect to INPUT 1 L en Set the sampling scher Wan frequency Adjust the Ka input level i me Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volum
340. ideopalette3 Vd 25 32 BF 0003 BF 2000 Videopaletted A u V LINK Modus E im V LINK Modus verwendete Controller 138 Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den V LINK Kennungen V LINK INPUT 192 PLAYBACK OUTPUT PEAK 1 SPEED CR CB BRIGHTNESS FADE wa s H 2 sali abr abr abr sali sali sali O s D D s D v D n y n y n CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY O Ou OF OL Cu O O Os 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31 PALETTE SELECT OFF 1 8 GREEN 9 16 RED 17 24 ORANGE 25 32 8 24 16 32 UR 80 Editor Der UR 80 Editor erm glicht es Ihnen Ihren Computer zu nutzen um Memory Sets f r das UR 80 zu erstellen Das UR 80 verfiigt tiber insgesamt 43 Controller Wenn Sie diese gemeinsam mit der Schaltfl che SHIFT und den LED Anzeigen verwenden k nnen Sie diesen Controllern 136 unterschiedliche MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Eine derartige Sammlung von 136 MIDI Nachrichten wird als Memory Set bezeichnet Das UR 80 selbst kann sieben Memory Sets und einen vorkonfigurierten Speicher sichern Memory sets S 349 E u Der UR 80 Editor erm glicht es Ihnen Memory Sets zu und vom UR 80 zu bertragen die Einstellungen zu editieren und Memory Sets im SMF Format zu sichern laden Er erm glicht es Ihnen auch Systemeinstellungen f r das UR 80 selbs
341. ie auf das Symbol Logic Control das sich rechts im Fenster befindet Wenn das Fenster Setup nicht erscheint arbeiten Sie mit Schritt 7 weiter Erannaie 4 Nehmen Sie im Bereich Logic Control auf der linken Seite des Fensters Setup folgende Einstellungen f r Out Port vor Auch wenn die Anzeige die unten gt stehenden Einstellungen anzeigt sollten Sie die Einstellungen erneut vornehmen Out Port EDIROL UR 80 f r Windows oder Mac OS X K Out Port UR 80 1 fiir Mac OS 9 H 5 Schlie en Sie das Dialogfeld Setup s Wahlen Sie erneut das Logic Memory Set USR3 auf dem UR 80 7 Wenn ein Dialogfeld hnlich dem Folgenden erscheint klicken Sie auf Cancel Abbrechen Windows Macintosh Ludo PEU d A newer firmware is available _ 4 newer firmware is available for one ton One or More is IS E or more Logic Control XT units XT units Ki Do you want to upload it Do you want to upload it H Cancel OK d 109 Steuerung Ihrer Software E Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen Bitte versehen Sie die beiliegende Schablone mit den Logic Kennungen Bei der folgenden Erklarung werden diese Einstellungen verwendet Abschnitt Track Control LOGIC INPUT 132 PEAK AUTOMATION TRACK STATUS HO PART Os Og Og O Os Ol Cea Os GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE SELECT Track Fader Passen die Pegel der einzelnen Kan le an Sie k nnen durch Umschalten der
342. ie k nnen Kopfh rer und oder Monitor Lautsprecher anschlie en wie im Diagramm angezeigt und die Wiedergabe Ihrer Anwendung bzw den Sound der Instrumente oder Audioger te die mit dem UR 80 verbunden sind berwachen _ Computer AC adaptor des USB cable ECH Monitor speakers ei ei a Headphones H D 4 D u This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers c s Verwenden des Sampling Freguenz Auswahlschalters z e Sie m ssen den Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter des UR 80 so einstellen dass es der Sampling Freguenz Ihrer Anwendung entspricht e Sie werden den Sound der von Ihrer Anwendung wiedergegeben wird nicht h ren wenn em der Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter auf 96 kHz REC eingestellt wird e Wenn der Sampling Freguenz Auswahlschalter auf 96 kHz PLAY eingestellt wird kann der Sound der Instrumente oder Audioger te die mit dem UR 80 verbunden sind nicht e von Ihrer Anwendung aufgenommen werden KH e Damit die Einstellung des Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalters wirksam werden r kann schalten Sie den UR 80 aus und danach wieder an u 123 Aufnahme von Audio Aufnahme von Gitarre oder Bass Wenn Sie Ihr Sequenzerprogramm verwenden um Ihr Gitarrenspiel aufzuzeichnen w hrend Sie der Wiedergabe von Audiodaten zuh ren die sich bereits auf I
343. il bank delle tracce sul guale operano i controlli di traccia dell UR 80 Pulsante Funzione a Torna indietro nel bank di I traccia Y Avanza nel bank di 1 traccia d Va al bank successivo gt Va al bank precedente Pulsanti funzione Pulsante Funzione EDIT DP Apre la finestra Editor PT Apre la finestra Track MEM LOCT DP Apre la finestra Marker PT Apre la finestra Memory Location MIXER Apre la finestra Mixer TRANSPORT Apre la finestra Transport IN Imposta la posizione corrente come il punto Auto Record Start punch in PRE DP Imposta la posizione corrente come il punto Loop Play Start PT Attiva disattiva il pre roll OUT Imposta la posizione corrente come il punto Auto Record End punch in POST DP Imposta la posizione corrente come il punto Loop Play End PT Attiva disattiva il post roll UNDO Annulla l operazione precedente EDIT MODE DP Apre la finestra Nudge PT Cambia la modalita di editing SAVE Salva il progetto corrente in un file EDIT TOOL DP Apre la finestra Track PT Cambia lo strumento Edit I pulsanti tra parentesi guadre dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT Se e attiva la funzione Scrub ruotare la manopola per spostare il cursore Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione
344. iming Clock Default Tem x Sere All accensione verra impostato il valore selezionato in questa casella di controllo MIDI Clock Indica la porta dalla quale verranno trasmessi i messaggi MIDI Timing Clock HQ GM2 messages Indica la porta dalla quale verranno trasmessi i messaggi in modalita Synth Edit V LINK messages Indica la porta dalla quale verranno trasmessi i messaggi in modalita V LINK 3 Per applicare le impostazioni fare clic su Apply 280 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an Panel principal El panel principal de la unidad UR 80 se componen de tres secciones control de pistas control ri m ster y control de audio La secci n de control de pistas y la secci n de control m ster proporcionan 43 controles a los que c puede asignar mensajes MIDI Utilizando estos controles junto con el bot n SHIFT y u proporcionando asignaciones a los LED puede asignar un total de 136 mensajes MIDI diferentes Utilice UR 80 Editor para asignar mensajes MIDI a los controles y editar las asignaciones El programa UR 80 Editor est disponible en el CD ROM suministrado Para obtener m s informaci n sobre UR 80 Editor consulte el apartado UR 80 Editor p g 337 lt H Track Control section Master Control section q C EDIROL UR 80 Audio Control section k H SOURCE MONITO H u e Secci n
345. indows c 1 Nel menu Options selezionare Remote Setup Setup F 2 Impostare i seguenti parametri della finestra di dialogo VST Remote come sotto indicato e fare a clic su OK Remote Generic Remote Input EDIROL UR 80 2 Output EDIROL UR 80 3 Nella finestra Generic Remote visualizzata fare clic su EDIT per aprire la finestra di dialogo Generic Remote Setup lt 4 Fare clic su Import k 5 Selezionare EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml copiato al passo precedente e fare clic su Open S 6 Fare clic su nell angolo superiore destro della finestra di dialogo 7 Scegliere l opzione Edit Preferences Key Commands 8 Fare clic sulla scheda Arrangements Editors e impostare i parametri come sotto indicato Command Event Type Event Cursor left Controller Control 28 Cursor right Controller Control 29 Cursor up Controller Control 26 Cursor down Controller Control 27 9 Selezionare la casella di controllo Remote Active Key Command Preferences File Menu Edit Menu Structure Menu Functions Menu Panels Menu Options Menu Score 10 Selezionare la casella di controllo Remote Key e impostarl a su C 2 Modules Men Windows Menu Help Menu Arrangements Editore Transport and Locators Remote active 11 Fare clic sul pulsante OK per chiudere la finestra sj emote Key a de COMMAND k EVENT TYPE EVENT di dialogo Zeche Control 28 Controler Contol23 Controler Cortrol26 Controller Control 27 None OH gt Non
346. ing functions Button Function CH Move the cursor to the beginning of the song a Rewind a Fast forward ua Stop playback recording a BS Start playback f u ga Start recording Start recording automation SHIFT E 8 35 Controlling your software Cubase SX Memory set Use USR1 Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press the track status button USR1 Software You will need Cubase SX and EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml is located in the SX folder inside the Cubase Remote folder of the included CD ROM Before you continue copy EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml onto your computer E Settings in Cubase SX 1 AA D 10 From the Devices menu select Device Setup Click the Add Remove tab In the Device Classes list select Generic Remote and click Add In the device field select Generic Remote which you added in step 3 and click the Setup tab Click Import Select EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml which you copied earlier and click Open Specify the MIDI Input and MIDI Output MIDI Input MIDI Output EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 In the Devices field of the Device Setup dialog box select AII MIDI Inputs In the Device field of the Setup tab click the EDIROL UR 80 2 Active field and set it to No Unless you make this setting the MIDI messages transmitted from the UR 80 will be thru ed to the MIDI tracks Click OK to close the dialog box
347. ing settings click OK E Enabling the Memory Set Initial Message If the Memory Set Initial Message is enabled the MIDI message you specified as described above will be transmitted when you select that memory set To enable the Memory Set Initial Message check the INIT MESSAGE check box in the main window Ifyou don t want the Memory Set Initial Message to be transmitted when you select the memory set uncheck this item Exchanging data with the UR 80 E Transmitting to the UR 80 Here s how to transmit the memory set currently being edited to the UR 80 1 From the Communication menu choose Transmit 2 The Transmit memory set dialog box will appear Specify the destination into which the memory set is to be written 3 A Confirm dialog box will appear Click Continue 4 A transmission progress dialog box will appear When the dialog box disappears the transmission has been completed When the transmission is completed the UR 80 will switch to the memory set that you transmitted E Receiving from the UR 80 Here s how to receive a memory set from the UR 80 so that you can edit it 1 From the Communication menu choose Receive 2 The Receive memory set dialog box will appear Specify the memory set that you want to receive D F q 3 A Confirm dialog box will appear Click Continue N u 4 A reception progress dialog box will appear When the dialog box disappears the reception has been compl
348. ing the UR 80 and exit all applications that are using the UR 80 and re connect the UR 80 Have you selected Game compatible device or Voice modem as the output for the audio track If game compatible device or voice modem the actual name will depend on the computer you are using is selected for the audio track of your software the audio track may not play back Do not select these devices as the port Can t record play MIDI Have you correctly specified the MIDI device you are using Make the correct settings for input output devices gt Input output devices p 30 Make sure that the UR 80 is specified as the MIDI input output device port in the software you want to control If the UR 80 is connected via USB you can use two ports to control your software Make sure that the appropriate port is specified correctly gt Basic connections p 28 Are the track outputs set correctly MIDI tracks to which no MIDI playback device is assigned will not be heard If you want to play back a MIDI track you must make sure that the MIDI device you want to use is displayed in your software as the MIDI output port For details refer to the owner s manual for your software Sound from devices connected to the input jack is not heard in the headphones Is the Input monitor level set appropriately To adjust the volume Volume from a device connected to the input jacks is too low Are you using a cable that has a
349. instrument channels and 8 group channels Bank button BANK This button switches the bank of channels you are controlling BANK button status Channels controlled CH 1 8 Audio channels 1 8 CH 9 16 Audio channels 9 16 INST 1 8 VST instrument channels 1 8 GRP 1 8 Group channels 1 8 Eenannl 41 Controlling your software Master Control section Cursor buttons SETL SETR UNDO SAVE Seel een Kess SHIFT ANALOG 36 DIGITAL x DOC OO CLICK SOURCE MONITOR TIME dial TIME These buttons perform the following functions gt gt Button Function a Move up WV Move do SZ Eee MIXER INST d Move left EFFECTS INPUTS INPUT MONITOR LEVEL Move right LOCATOR COMMAND gt LEFT RIGHT COPY PASTE JL Function buttons Button Function MIXER Open close the VST Channel Mixer window EFFECTS Open close the VST Send Effect window INST Open close the VST Instruments window INPUTS Open close the VST Inputs window LEFT Move the cursor to the left marker position SET L Set the current cursor location as the left marker RIGHT Move the cursor to the right marker position SET R Set the current cursor location as the right marker COPY Copy the currently selected object UNDO Undo
350. ique vers READ WRITE Commute le mode automatique sur WRITE TOUCH Commute le mode automatique sur TOUCH LATCH Commute le mode automatique sur LATCH 176 Section Master Control go Jos CURSOR FADER BANK 4 BANK gt lt CHANNED gt INPUT MONITOR LEVEL ASSIGNMENT WINDOW PAN SEND ARRANGE MIXER EG TRACK UNDO SAVE See V LINK MIDI CLK SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OFF ep DIGITAL 3 MONO SCRUB Contr le de votre logiciel Boutons curseurs Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction 4 Lorsque la table de mixage de pistes Track Mixer est affich e ces boutons y s lectionnent les param tres ou commutent lt q l emplacement d envoi ou la bande d galiseur selon la fonction affect e aux gt boutons de r glage de pistes SHIFT 4h Reduit l affichage verticalement SHIFT YY Agrandit l affichage verticalement R duit l affichage horizontalement SHIFT lt q Agrandit l affichage horizontalement SHIFT gt Boutons de fonction Bouton Fonction FADER BANK BANK lt Fait d filer le canal utilis par incr ments de 8 canaux BANK gt CHANNEL lt Fait d filer le canal utilis par incr ments de 1 canal CHANNEL gt ASSIGNMENT Commute les param tres r gl s par les boutons Track C
351. ir respective owners OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems Inc FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn Inc VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Contents IMPORTANT NOTES i ira 4 Be il EE 6 Main Features of the UR 80 ee nana 16 Names of Things and What They Do 17 Main panels nn ern ee EE de 17 Track Control section nana 18 Master Control secunda iaia 21 Audio Control section 23 Rear panel a aa nn nn M remet EN SN netten 24 Side panel nn EE 26 Basic operation ek KREE NEE EE Kennen 27 Basic connections and settings 28 Basic connections e aaa a nana 28 MID DFO Wis asian dada lea 28 Audio flow block diagram ss 29 Input output devices s sipe eno A nee a PE ni Mn nenne 30 wech ports ee ed A A ia a lih 31 Controlling your software e a nun nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 32 Switching MEMOLY Sets autista todita 32 SE 33 Settings in EE 33 Functions assigned to the controllers ui 34 Cubase irascible iodo paraiso 36 Settings in Cubase Nissan ein ALA alone tenti 36 Functions assigned to the controllers ui 37 Cubase VSI ran AN A Aa TE SI Re 39 Settings in Cubase VST Windows users 39 Settings in Cubase VST Macintosh users 40 Functions assigned to the controllers
352. is way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials e Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precautions e Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable e Before you open the included CD ROM you must read the license agreement Opening the CD ROM will be taken to mean your acceptance of the license agreement Handling CD ROMs e Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public performance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical compo
353. istrazione ANALOG LED non Al computer verr inviato solo il segnale proveniente illuminato dagli ingressi DIGITAL LED illuminato Il computer ricever solo il segnale proveniente dagli ingressi digitali coassiale o ottico INPUT MONITOR LEVEL SHIFT TIME Imposta l invio del segnale trasmesso dagli ingressi 1 2 e dall ingresso digitale all ingresso per le cuffie e alle uscite master Utilizzare SHIFT e la manopola TIME per regolare il livello di controllo possibile attivare disattivare il controllo dell input a partire da un software ASIO 2 0 compatibile come Cubase La regolazione del livello di controllo dell input non modifica il volume di registrazione Il segnale in entrata non verr trasmesso Utilizzare questa impostazione se si stanno trasferendo i dati audio nel computer o se stato collegato un mixer per emettere direttamente il segnale in entrata e controllarlo OFF LED non illuminato Il segnale in entrata verr emesso in stereo Utilizzare questa impostazione se stato collegato un dispositivo stereo agli ingressi 1 2 o se si utilizza un ingresso digitale STEREO LED illuminato Il segnale proveniente dalle prese d ingresso o dall ingresso digitale verr mixato in monofonico e emesso Utilizzare questa impostazione se stata collegata una sorgente di segnali monofonici come una chitarra o un microfono Il segnale audio inviato via USB al computer
354. ivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato REC RDY RED Attiva disattiva la registrazione del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SELECT ORANGE Selezionare il canale oggetto dell operazione Selezionato illuminato Non selezionato non illuminato Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole funzionano come codificatori Il valore aumenta quando la manopola di controllo della traccia viene ruotata verso destra e diminuisce quando la manopola viene ruotata verso sinistra L operazione aumento diminuzione si interrompe quando la manopola in posizione centrale Utilizzare il pulsante funzione ASSIGNMENT per modificare i parametri controllati da queste manopole Pulsante AUTOMATION Cambia la modalit Automation del canale correntemente selezionato Stato del pulsante SELECT Canale traccia READ Cambia la modalit automation su READ WRITE Cambia la modalit automation su WRITE TOUCH Cambia la modalit automation su TOUCH LATCH Cambia la modalit automation su LATCH 242 Sezione Master Control ZS gt VA a JOG FADER BANK 4 BANK b LIT INPUT MONITOR LEVEL ASSIGNMENT WINDOW PAN SEND ARRANGE MIXER Eq TRACK UNDO SAVE es GM2 EV LINK MIDI C
355. iveau SENS Utilisez le bouton de niveau SENS pour r gler le niveau d entr e Pour obtenir une qualit d enregistrement optimale r glez le niveau d entr e aussi fort que possible mais sans provoquer Yallumage du voyant Input Overload Commutateur Input Monitor Allumez le commutateur Input Monitor et r glez le niveau d entr e du signal mis par votre guitare ou basse Cette action ne modifiera pas le niveau d enregistrement Pour r gler le volume de contr le d entr e maintenez la touche SHIFT enfonc e et activez la composition TIME Bouton REC SOURCE Positionnez le sur ANALOG teint Autres notes Ne branchez rien aux prises jack non utilis es 190 Enregistrement audio Enregistrement avec un micro SAVE pras Set the sampling ee O frequency Turn ON if you have connected a condenser mic Adjust the input level EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the KD volume Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Connexions Le son du micro branch sur la prise INPUT 1 L est enregistr sur le canal de gauche le son du micro branch sur la prise INPUT 2 R est enregistr sur le canal de droite coInterrupteur de s lection de fr quences d chantillonnage Positionnez le sur la m
356. jack non utilis es L UR 80 ne supporte pas les formats audio num riques professionnels L UR 80 ne peut pas sortir directement le signal entrant par les prises d entr e vers les prises de sortie num rique Les prises de sortie num rique ne peuvent transmettre que le signal audio mis par votre ordinateur c a H Eenannl 195 Enregistrement audio R glage de la latence audio Vous pouvez modifier la configuration du pilote pour r gler la latence de l audio Pour agir sur cette latence modifiez la valeur de Buffer Size dans la bo te de dialogue de configuration du pilote Latence intervalle de temps entre le moment o une application lit des donn es audio et le moment o ces donn es audio sont jou es par un appareil audio comme l UR 80 1 Comme expliqu a la section Ouverture de la boite de dialogue des parametres du pilote sp cial p 207 ouvrez la bo te de dialogue Driver Settings 2 Modifiez la taille des buffers du pilote buffer size Les r glages suivants permettent de r duire la latence au minimum Windows R glez Audio Buffer Size au maximum vers la gauche Min Macintosh R glez Buffer Size au maximum vers la gauche Min 3 Cliquez sur OK dans la bo te de dialogue 4 Red marrez l application qui utilise UR 80 Si votre application dispose d une fonction de test utilisez la 5 Lisez des donn es audio depuis votre application Si le s
357. l Vous pouvez galement l utiliser avec SONAR USR1 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour Cubase SX USR 2 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour Cubase VST USR 3 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour Logic USR 4 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour Pro Tools LE et Digital Performer 3 USR5 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour Reason R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour tre compatible avec MCR 8 USR 6 Mode4 A 1 8 USR 7 R enregistrable Avec les param tres d usine il est r gl pour tre compatible avec MCR 8 Mode4 B 9 16 164 Contr le de votre logiciel SONAR Jeu de sons Utilisez PRESET Maintenez enfonc le bouton MEMORY de l UR 80 et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status PRESET H Logiciel K Vous devez utiliser l application SONAR 2 0 ou ult rieure et du Plug in UR 80 Control Surface u Le Plug in UR 80 Control Surface se trouve dans le dossier SONAR Plugin du CD ROM joint Cliquez deux fois sur UR80CSP EXE pour lancer l installeur Suivez les instructions qui s affichent l cran E R glages de SONAR F 1 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Control Surfaces b 2 Dans la boite de dialogue Control Surfaces cliquez sur le bouton E et s lectionnez EDIROL UR 8
358. l Mixers Wenn Sie die Fader gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 16 Kan le 8 VST Instrumentenkan le und 8 Gruppenkan le steuern Master Fader Steuert Master Gain Verst rkung des VST Mixers Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Diese Schaltfl chen schalten den Status der einzelnen Kan le um k G A u Wenn Sie die Schaltfl chen gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 16 Kan le 8 VST Instrumentenkan le und 8 Gruppenkan le steuern Modus Status der Schaltfl che SELECT Funktion MUTE OFF Stummschaltung an aus f r Kanal Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SOLO GREEN Schaltet die Solo Funktion f r den Kanal ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet SELECT RED W hlen Sie den Kanal aus Ausgew hlt beleuchtet Nicht ausgew hlt unbeleuchtet ORANGE Wird nicht verwendet Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe steuern Panorama Send 1 und Send 2 f r den Kanal Verwenden Sie die Italiana Schaltflache Assign um Panorama Send 1 oder Send 2 auszuw hlen Wenn Sie diese Schaltflache gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltfl che verwenden k nnen Sie 16 Kan le 8 VST Instrumentenkan le und 8 Gruppenkan le steuern Bank Schaltfl che BANK Diese Schaltfl che schaltet die Bank der Kan le um die gesteuert werden BANK Schaltfl chenstatus Gesteuerte Kan le CH 1 8 Audiokan le 1 8
359. l cuadro de di logo VST Remote y haga clic en OK Remote Generic Remote Input UR 80 2 Output UR 80 1 En la ventana Generic Remote que aparece haga clic en EDIT para abrir el cuadro de di logo Generic Remote Setup Haga clic en Import Seleccione EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml que ha copiado anteriormente y haga clic en Open Cierre el cuadro de di logo En el men Edit seleccione Preferences Key Commands En el men emergente seleccione Arrange Editors y efect e la siguiente configuraci n Command Ev Type Event Cursor hacia la izquierda Controlador 28 Cursor hacia la derecha Controlador 29 Cursor hacia arriba Controlador 26 Cursor hacia abajo Controlador 27 Marque la casilla Remote Active Marque la casilla Remote Key y establ zcala en C 2 O Preferences Key Commands SB Arrange Editors F4 Remote Active A Remote Key Select Tool 4 Select Tool 5 Select Tool 6 Select Tool 7 Select Tool 8 Select Tool 9 Select Tool 10 Cursor left Controller Ctrl 28 Cursor right Controller Ctrl 29 Cursor up Controller Ctrl 26 Cursor down Controller Ctrl 27 Nudge Event Left Nudge Event Right Nudge Event Up Nudge Event Down Haga clic en OK para cerrar el cuadro de di logo Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores
360. l esclusione audio del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo del canale Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SELECT RED Seleziona il canale Selezionato illuminato Non selezionato non illuminato ORANGE Non utilizzato Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole controllano le funzioni Pan Send 1 level e Send 2 level del canale Utilizzare il pulsante Assign per selezionare Pan Send 1 level o Send 2 level Se utilizzate insieme al pulsante Bank queste manopole permettono di controllare 16 canali audio 8 canali strumentali VST e 8 canali di gruppo Pulsante Bank BANK Questo pulsante cambia il gruppo di canali sui quali si sta lavorando z Stato del pulsante BANK Canali controllati E CH 1 8 Canali audio 1 8 CH 9 16 Canali audio 9 16 d INST 1 8 Canali strumento VST 1 8 GRP 1 8 Canali gruppo 1 8 239 Utilizzo del software Sezione Master Control Pulsanti Cursor ZN MIME Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni gd gt Pulsante Funzione SEK A Sposta su FEN Vp Sposta gi RARE N d Sposta a sinistra GER Sposta a destra GUN EA gt Pulsanti funzione SETI SETA UND
361. l se mezclar en monaural y se emitir como salida Utilice esta configuraci n si ha conectado una se al MONO LED SE monoaural como una guitarra o un micr fono a los jacks de parpadeando entrada La se al de audio que se env a a trav s de USB al sistema es est reo SHIFT Utilice este bot n conjuntamente con los dem s botones de la secci n de control m ster Los botones entre corchetes por ejemplo MIDI CLK indican que debe utilizar el bot n al mismo tiempo que se presiona el bot n SHIFT 286 Denominaciones de los elementos y las funciones que desempe an E Secci n de control de audio NA Sha gt 14 9 D v 13 14 15 Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Input Este control giratorio concentrico dual ajusta el nivel de entrada de los jacks de entrada 1 y 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R La unidad UR 80 proporciona jacks de entrada de tipo XLR y de tipo fono y puede utilizar ambos tipos segun las exigencias de los eguipos gue desee conectar No obstante tenga en cuenta que la sensibilidad de entrada de estos jacks variar El control giratorio interno sirve para ajustar el nivel de entrada de INPUT 1 L y el control giratorio externo anillo sirve para ajustar el nivel de INPUT 2 R Niveles de entrada Tipo XLR 50 10 dBu Tipo fono 35 4 dBu Si pretende conectar un aparato de nivel de salida bajo como un micr fono conviene que utilice
362. la de verificaci n del paso 2 para desactivar ASIO Direct Monitor Apertura del cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del controlador Si utiliza Windows 1 2 Abra el Panel de control y haga doble clic en EDIROL UR 80 Aparecer el cuadro de di logo EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings Configuraci n de controlador de EDIROL UR 80 En Windows XP haga clic en Cambiar a Vista cl sica para establecer la pantalla en modo de vista cl sica EDIROL UR 80 no aparecer si no selecciona la vista cl sica x En Windows Me haga clic en la opci n Vea todas las opciones del Panel de Control Si utiliza Macintosh Abra ASIO Control Panel del cuadro de di logo Audio Settings de la aplicaci n compatible con ASIO El nombre del cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del audio y el procedimiento para abrir el ASIO Control Panel variar n en funci n de la aplicaci n Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el manual de la aplicaci n Enalieh Na terh Erannaie c S H amp 329 MEMO Funcionamiento avanzado m Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador Si activa el bot n HQ GM2 situado en la secci n de control m ster la secci n de control de pistas funcionar en modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador El modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador permite editar los par metros del sintetizador software de alta calidad Hyper Canvas que se proporciona Puesto que los par me
363. le to monitor the playback from your software or the sound from instruments or audio devices connected to the UR 80 Basic connections Simply use a USB cable to connect the UR 80 to your computer Connecting the USB cable allows both MIDI data and audio data to be transferred Computer AC adaptor qd pora USB cable Monitor speakers do do O O SE La Headphones This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers E MIDI flow If the UR 80 and your computer are connected via USB cable The MIDI data flow will be as shown below PC port name UR 80 MIDI OUT device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 MIDI OUT MIDI IN device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN 2 MIDI IN EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 2 28 Basic connections and settings E Audio flow block diagram SAMPLE RATE USB COAXIALIN CONVERTER COAXIAL OUT OPTICAL IN O nou OPTICAL OUT TRS ONLY P XLR ONLY Lo Z Hi Z eur INPUT 1 RI PHONES INPUT MONITOR STEREO MONO If you are using MIDI connections Even if the UR 80 is not connected to your computer via a USB cable you can connect the UR 80 s lt MIDI IN OUT connectors to a MIDI interface that is connected to your computer we q C MIDI N 8 MID
364. legare il dispositivo audio alle prese H d ingresso 1 e 2 D interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento u Impostare la stessa frequenza di campionamento del software di registrazione Ointerruttore di selezione dell impedenza d ingresso Impostarlo su Lo Z Manopola di sensibilit dell input Utilizzare la manopola di sensibilit dell input per regolare il livello d ingresso Per una qualit audio ottimale regolare la manopola di sensibilit dell input al punto massimo consentito senza che l indicatore di picco si illumini lnterruttore Input Monitor Ruotare l interruttore Input Monitor e regolare il livello di controllo dell input per il segnale proveniente dalla tastiera Il livello di registrazione non verr modificato Pulsante REC SOURCE Impostarlo su ANALOG non illuminato Note Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati Attenzione ai collegamenti in ciclo loop Se l UR 80 viene collegato a un dispositivo che trasmette i segnali audio ricevuti alla propria uscita tali segnali entreranno in un loop tra l UR 80 e il dispositivo in questione provocando l oscillazione e l emissione di un suono molto forte y Cercare di evitare di trovarsi in questa situazione perch ne Sem nur potrebbero conseguire malfunzionamenti o danni ai diffusori Stereo sets cassette deck record player Example of loop connection LINE OUT gt i D u D LI
365. leifen Oszillation oder doppelte berwachung verursachen deaktivieren Sie die berwachung in Ihrer Anwendung oder verwenden die ASIO Direct Monitor Einstellung Grundlegende Anschl sse und Einstellungen Zwei MIDI Anschlusse Einige Sequenzerprogramme die MIDI Controller unterst tzen erm glichen die unabh ngige Angabe des MIDI Eingabeanschlusses f r die Aufnahme von MIDI Spuren MIDI IN Anschluss sowie des MIDI Eingabeanschlusses f r die Steuerung des Programms CTRL IN Anschluss Sequencer software Normalerweise verbinden Sie Ihr MIDI Keyboard mit dem Tak o IH one MIDI IN Anschluss und verwenden es fiir die Aufnahme Ihrer Performance auf Spuren bzw verwenden die MIDI Thru Funktion Ihres Programms um Soundmodule oder SE Softsynthesizer wiederzugeben Die MIDI Nachrichten die MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port hier gesendet werden haben die Funktion die Innen durch die MIDI Spezifikation zugewiesen wurde Anders ausgedriickt wenn Sie Keyboard spielen werden Notennachrichten EI TE bertragen und auf der Spur aufgezeichnet und das MIDI sound module Soundmodul das diese Nachrichten empf ngt gibt Sound aus UR 80 Sequencer software Im Gegensatz dazu werden die Daten die vom CTRL IN ros Record on Dr ame Anschluss emplangen werden verwendet um I
366. less of the selected mode Even in Synth Edit mode the MASTER fader will not control the master volume of the software synthesizer In Synth Edit mode the port from which MIDI messages are transmitted will be EDIROL UR 80 1 by default You can use UR 80 Editor to change the output port For details refer to UR 80 Editor p 73 E Track faders These adjust the volume of each channel You can control channels 1 16 by operating the track group select button E Assign button ASSIGN This button selects the parameters that will be controlled by the track control knobs Press the assign button successively to cycle through the available choices PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 gt HQ Assign button Parameter PAN Pan SEND1 Reverb send SEND2 Chorus send HQ Channel parameter 68 Synth Edit mode E Track control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs control the pan reverb send chorus send or channel parameters of each channel Use the assign button to select the parameter When PAN SEND1 or SEND2 is selected The knobs will control the pan reverb send or chorus send of each channel You can control channels 1 16 by operating the track group select button When HQ is selected The knobs will control channel parameters You can control the following eight parameters Track control knob Parameter CUTOFF Filter cutoff RESONANCE Filter
367. lgende Funktionen aus Eckige Klammern um Schaltfl chennamen informieren dar ber dass Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken m ssen w hrend Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt halten TIME W hlscheibe Wenn Sie die W hlscheibe drehen verschiebt sich der Cursor Schaltfl che Funktion Verschiebt den Cursor zum Anfang des Songs Spult den Cursor zur ck Schnellvorlauf f r den Cursor Wiedergabe Aufnahme stoppen Wiedergabe starten Au fnahme beginnen Schaltet automatisches Einsteigen ein aus SHIFT E SHIFT Ww Schaltet automatisches Aussteigen ein aus SHIFT E Schaltet das Metronom ein aus SHIFT BW Schaltet Schleife ein aus 108 Logic Memory Set Verwenden Sie URS3 Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY des UR 80 gedr ckt und dr cken Sie dieTrack Statusschaltfl che USR3 H Software E u Logic 5 Version 5 5 oder spater ist erforderlich Jedes Mal wenn Sie Logic starten miissen Sie das Memory Set fiir Logic auf dem UR 80 selbst auswahlen E Einstellungen in Logic 1 Starten Sie Logic 2 Nachdem Logic gestartet wurde w hlen Sie das Memory Set f r Logic auf dem UR 80 aus Auch wenn das Memory Set f r Logic auf dem UR 80 selbst bereits ausgew hlt wurde m ssen Sie das Logic Memory Set bei jedem Start von Logic trotzdem ausw hlen 3 Wenn das Fenster Setup erscheint klicken S
368. llungen und Modi auf dem UR 80 selbst umzuschalten Sie k nnen den Schaltfl chen f r die Systemeinstellung Modusauswahl keine MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Schaltfl chenname Bedienung MEMORY Wenn Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY gedr ckt halten und eine Track Status Schaltfl che dr cken k nnen Sie zwischen den acht Memory Sets umschalten die innerhalb des UR 80 gespeichert sind Wenn Sie diese Schaltfl che dr cken leuchtet eine der Track Status Schaltfl chen LEDs auf um das aktuell ausgew hlte Memory Set anzuzeigen HQ GM2 Wenn die Schaltfl che HQ GM2 gedr ckt wurde befindet sich der Abschnitt Track Control im Modus Synth Edit und erm glicht Ihnen die Steuerung der Parameter des beiliegenden Softwaresynthesizers Driicken Sie die Schaltflache erneut um sie auszuschalten und zu den vorherigen Track Steuerungsfunktionen zur ckzukehren Um weitere Informationen zum Synth Edit Modus zu erhalten lesen Sie bitte Synth Edit Modus S 134 V LINK Wenn die V LINK Schaltfl che gedr ckt wurde befindet sich der Abschnitt Track Control im V LINK Modus und erm glicht Ihnen die Steuerung von Videoger ten die mit V LINK kompatibel sind Dr cken Sie die Schaltfl che erneut um sie auszuschalten und zu den vorherigen Track Steuerungsfunktionen zur ckzukehren Um weitere Informationen zum V LINK Modus zu erhalten lesen Sie bitte V LINK Modus S 137 MIDI CLK SHIFT V LINK Hiermit wi
369. logue Setup S lectionnez de nouveau le jeu de sons de Logic USR3 dans l UR 80 c 4 e h Pare 7 Si une bo te de dialogue identique a la suivante s affiche cliquez sur Cancel H Windows Macintosh Logic Platinum A 4 A newer firmware is available E S A for one or more Logic Control 4 newer firmware is available for one A or more Logic Control XT units XT units Do you want to upload it Do you want to upload it ome EST Cu c C c H u 175 Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs Fixez les tiquettes Logic sur la feuille de mod le jointe L explication ci dessous suit ces r glages Section Track Control LOGIC INPUT 192 ASSIGN un wm gong oss um am O VALUE I PA EE EM E EM ES EM Ko EE je o y A SA ISA MB die MB BS O Ct Du N du a ta N RESONANCE VIBRATE VIBDEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE _ OEM SELECT OFF MUTE TRACK STATUS HO PART GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY Ce 101 8100418 2 CNA MASTER Commandes d att nuation Track Ces commandes r glent le niveau de chaque canal Si vous commutez la banque de commandes d att nuation vous pouvez r gler le niveau de tous les canaux Utilisez les boutons de fonction FADER BANK pour commuter les banques de commandes d att nuation Commande d att nuation MASTER Contr le le volume principal du Mixer audio
370. lsanti vengono utilizzati per cambiare lo stato della traccia nel software seguencer ad esempio disattivazione dell audio o funzione Solo 4 Pulsante di selezione SELECT Ouesto pulsante permette di cambiare i messaggi MIDI che sono assegnati ai pulsanti Track Status e ai relativi LED Premere il pulsante Select per selezionare una delle seguenti opzioni off disattivato green verde gt red rosso gt orange arancione H E H a u i D u 217 Parti e relative funzioni ORANGE AUTO 2 18 5 21 7 23 8 24 5 Fader delle traCCe rire eee ieri rire iii Assignable possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI a ciascuno di questi otto fader Generalmente questi controlli sono utilizzati per controllare il volume della traccia nel software sequencer 6 Fader generale MASTER cs possibile assegnare un messaggio MIDI a questo fader Il fader generale controlla il volume generale nel software sequencer Il volume dell output finale dell UR 80 viene regolato utilizzando la manopola corrispondente 7 Pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce TRACK GROUP possibile assegnare quattro messaggi MIDI al pulsante Track Group Ad ogni pressione del tasto verr trasmesso uno dei quattro messaggi Questo pulsante permette di selezionare nel software sequencer il gruppo di tracce di cui verranno controllati i parametri con le manopole Track C
371. lume CC 7147 0 00 127 7F 6 2 E MASTER FADER Master Volume CC 81 51 0600 127 7F 6 2 TRACK GROUP 1 8 Remote Bank VST CC 97 61 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH Ch 1 8 TRACK GROUP 9 16 Remote Bank VST CC 98 62 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH Ch 9 16 TRACK GROUP 17 24 Remote Bank VST CC 99 63 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH Inst 1 8 TRACK GROUP 25 32 Remote Bank VST CC 100 64 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH Grp 1 8 JOG DIAL TIME Time CC 96 60 127 7F 1 01 6 2 z CURSOR UP Arrange Cursor Up 9F007FBF1A 1 UNLATCH 7E 9F 00 00 CURSOR DOWN Arrange Cursor 9F 00 7F BF 1B E s 1 UNLATCH Down 7F 9F 00 00 CURSOR LEFT Arrange Cursor Left 9F 00 7F BF 1C 3 1 UNLATCH 7F 9F 00 00 CURSOR RIGHT Arrange Cursor Right 9F 00 7F BF 1D 1 UNLATCH 7F 9F 00 00 FUNCTION 1 MIXER VST Mixer CC 10 0A 0000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST VST Instruments CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV To Left Locator CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT To Right Locator CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO Copy CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Paste CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ Return to Zero CC 909 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW Rewind CC 19 13 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD Forward CC 20 14 000 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP Stop CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY Start
372. m its internal memory The Data Request 1 RQ1 format is used Status Data byte Status FOH 41H 10H 00H 68H 11H 00H 00H 00H aaH Sum F7H aa Memory set number 0 PRESET 17 USR1 7 This is transmitted when a Parameter Dump Request is received The bulk dump is divided into two or more exclusive messages for transmission Address Explanation Number of packets 01 00 00 00 Current memory 1 Common parameters 01 10 00 00 01 11 07 00 Current memory 136 Common parameters You must leave an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message Please be aware that if you modify the data dumped from the UR 80 by changing the order in which the exclusive messages are transmitted by inserting other messages between the system exclusive messages or by speeding up the timing of the transmission the data may not be set correctly when the UR 80 receives it 383 MIDI implementation 4 Supplementary material Decimal and Hexadecimal table An H is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of Exclusive messages etc are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex 0 00H 32 20H 64 40H 96 60H 1 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4
373. mazioni fare riferimento alla sezione UR 80 Editor pag 271 E Fader delle tracce Regola il volume di ogni canale possibile controllare i canali 1 16 tramite il pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce Track Group E Pulsante di assegnazione ASSIGN Questo pulsante permette di selezionare i parametri che verranno controllati dalle manopole di controllo delle tracce Track Control Premere il pulsante Assign per consultare tutte le scelte disponibili PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 HQ Assign pulsante Parametro PAN Pan SENDI Reverb send SEND2 Chorus send HQ Parametro canale 266 Modalita Synth Edit E Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole permettono di controllare le funzioni pan reverb send chorus send oi parametri di ogni canale Utilizzare il pulsante Assignper selezionare il parametro Se si seleziona PAN SEND1 o SEND2 lt q Le manopole controllano le funzioni pan reverb send o chorus send di ogni canale E possibile Lai controllare i canali 1 16 tramite il pulsante di selezione del gruppo di tracce Track Group u Se si seleziona HQ Le manopole controllano i parametri del canale Si possono controllare i seguenti otto parametri Manopola Track Control Parametro CUTOFF Filter cutoff RESONANCE Filter Resonance lt VIB RATE Vibrato rate lt VIB DEPTH Vibrato depth t VIB DELAY V
374. men Sie im Dialogfeld MIDI Devices die folgenden Einstellungen vor MIDI Devices Input Pot EDIROL UR 80 2 Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 v 3 Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld zu schlie en Macintosh Anwender Bevor Sie die Konfiguration fortsetzen m ssen Sie die OMS oder FreeMIDI Einstellungen entsprechend Ihrem MIDI System vornehmen Um weitere Informationen zu diesen Einstellungen zu erhalten lesen Sie bitte die Datei Readme E htm die sich im Treiberordner der beiliegenden CD ROM befindet W hlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt MIDI Devices MIDI Ger te Nehmen Sie im Dialogfeld MIDI Devices die folgenden Einstellungen vor Mac 9 SSS MIDI Devices Select MIDI System OMS MIDI System Wahlen Sie die Ihrem System entsprechenden Optionen Input Port UR 80 2 Input Port UR 80 2 Output Port UR 80 1 z Output Port UR 801 MIDI Device Setup Mac OS X MIDI Devices 1 Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 B Input Port UR 80 2 Output Port UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 15 Cancel OK 3 Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld zu schlie en 140 UR 80 Editor Fenster E Hauptfenster E EDIROL UR 80 Editor Untitled mid d e E 1 JT MESSAGE EDIT d k 4 c q D u 1 TITEL Hier k nnen Sie einen Namen fiir das von Ihnen er
375. monitor on and adjust H the input volume appropriately q C Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit Conexiones K Conecte el aparato de audio a los jacks de entrada 1 y 2 mediante un cable con jack de tipo fono H si e e c interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling S Disp ngalo en la misma frecuencia de sampling que la seleccionada para el software de grabaci n u lnterruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada Disp ngalo en Lo Z Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para ajustar el nivel de entrada utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para conseguir la m xima calidad de sonido utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada para establecer el nivel de entrada en el m ximo valor posible sin que se ilumine el indicador de pico c de entrada H interruptor de monitoraje de entrada S Gire el interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Input Monitor y ajuste el nivel de monitoraje de entrada para la se al del teclado El nivel de grabaci n no se ver afectado Bot n de grabaci n de fuente Disp ngalo en ANALOG posici n no iluminada Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de entrada Aseg rese de que no se produzcan conexiones loop Si conecta la unidad UR 80 a un aparato que emite WE directamente el audio de entrada por su salida se formar un oe loop de la sefial de audio entre la unidad UR 80 y el
376. n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 OAII notes off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH n MIDI channel number 00H OH FH Ch 1 16 381 MIDI implementation E System common message On the UR 80 you can assign the following system common messages to any controller and transmit them MTC quarter frame Status 2nd byte FIH mmH mm Message type value Song position pointer Status 2nd byte 3rd byte F2H mmH 1H mm ll Song position 00 00H 7F 7FH 0 16383 Song select Status 2nd byte F3H mmH mm Song number 00 00H 7F 7FH 0 16383 Tune request Status F6H E System realtime message In addition to the Active Sensing messages that are transmitted constantly the UR 80 allows you to assign the following system realtime messages other than Active Sensing to any controller and transmit them OStart Status F8H Transmitted if the System setting F8 CLOCK is ON OStart Status FAH OContinue Status FBH OStop Status FCH Active sensing Status FEH Transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 ms Cannot be assigned to a controller System reset Status FFH E System exclusive message The UR 80 is able to transmit the following exclusive messages exclusive messages assigned to the controllers Identity Reply V LINK messages and Bulk Dump Universal non realtime system exclusive Oldentity reply
377. n Master r gle le volume g n ral sur votre logiciel s quenceur Le volume de sortie de l UR 80 lui m me est r gl par son bouton de volume de sortie 7 Bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes TRACK GROUP Vous pouvez affecter quatre messages MIDI au bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes A chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton l un des quatre messages est transmis Le bouton de s lection Track Group commute le groupe de pistes sur votre logiciel sequenceur dont les param tres sont r gl s par les boutons de r glage de pistes et les commandes d att nuation de pistes En d autres termes vous pouvez utiliser les huit boutons et commandes d att nuation pour r gler les param tres de 32 pistes L utilisation du bouton de s lection Track Group ne commute pas les messages affect s aux NOTE boutons de r glage de pistes au bouton Track Status et aux commandes d att nuation de pistes Le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes transmet quatre messages MIDI diff rents votre logiciel s quenceur pour modifier le num ro de piste de base sur votre logiciel 152 E Section Master Control La section Master Control est celle dans laquelle vous pouvez ex cuter des commandes et r gler le transport de votre logiciel s quenceur Vous pouvez aussi effectuer des r glages pour l interface audio de l UR 80 Le contenu r gl d pend du logiciel utilis ri z z 8 Boutons curseurS d
378. n Sie das UR 80 nicht in den Ger teeinstellungen f r Ihre Software ausw hlen k nnen ist es m glich dass der Treiber des UR 80 nicht korrekt installiert wurde Bitte installieren Sie den Treiber erneut MIDI Ger te MIDI OUT Ger t UR 80 MIDI OUT Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Wenn Sie UR 80 MIDI OUT als Ausgabeanschluss f r Ihr Sequenzerprogramm angeben werden vom MIDI OUT Anschluss des UR 80 selbst Nachrichten bertragen UR 80 Mac OS 9 8 UR 80 1 W hlen Sie diesen Anschluss aus wenn Sie Nachrichten von Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm zum UR 80 selbst senden m chten MIDI IN Ger t UR 80 MIDI IN Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Wenn Sie UR 80 MIDI IN als Eingabeanschluss f r Ihr Sequenzerprogramm festlegen werden die Nachrichten ber den MIDI IN Anschluss des UR 80 eingegeben UR 80 1 UR 80 2 Wahlen Sie einen dieser Anschl sse aus wenn Sie m chten dass Controller Nachrichten von Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm empfangen werden Fiir jeden Controller k nnen Sie den Anschluss ausw hlen der verwendet werden wird Es empfiehlt sich z B eventuell UR 80 1 fiir Nachrichten zu nutzen die auf einer Spur aufgezeichnet werden sollen oder die fiir die Steuerung eines Softwaresynthesizers eingesetzt werden und UR 80 2 fiir Nachrichten die verwendet werden um Ihren Sequenzer abzuspielen zu stoppen Verwenden Sie UR 80 2 als MIDI Eingabeger t fiir UR 80 Editor Audiogerate Audio Ausgabe
379. n der Controller eine Schaltfl che ist legen Sie den Button Mode Schaltfl chenmodus fest Wenn der Controller ein Schaltknopf ist legen Sie den Knob Mode Schaltknopfmodus fest Wenn der Controller eine Schaltfl che mit LED ist legen Sie den LED Mode LED Modus fest 7 Wenn Sie den LED Mode als Remote festgelegt haben geben Sie die LED Reception Message LED Empfangsnachricht an Das Feld LED Reception Message erm glicht Ihnen die Auswahl von Channel Message oder Free Message Die Parameter entsprechen den Parametern bei einer konventionellen Zuweisung mit folgenden Ausnahmen e Min Value wird zum OFF Value f r die LED Reception Message Die LED wird deaktiviert wenn dieser Wert empfangen wird e Max Value wird zum ON Value f r die LED Reception Message Die LED wird aktiviert wenn dieser Wert empfangen wird Es gibt kein Send LSB Kontrollk stchen f r RPN oder NRPN 8 Falls gew nscht geben Sie in das Kommentarfeld Comment einen Kommentar ein 9 Klicken Sie auf OK 144 UR 80 Editor E Pr fung der zugewiesenen MIDI Nachrichten Sie k nnen die zugewiesenen MIDI Nachrichten mit einer der folgenden Methoden pr fen Methode 1 e W hlen Sie im Men File den Men punkt View assign list Alle Parameter der MIDI Nachrichten die den Controllern zugewiesen sind werden im HTML ri Format angezeigt Diese Methode ist empfehlenswert wenn Sie detaillierte Daten sehen m chten E oder eine endg ltige Priifung erf
380. n ne H D Remote active gt 11 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la bo te de dialogue 21 Remote Key COMMAND H EVENT TYPE EVENT ICON Controller Control 28 Controller Control 29 Controller Control 26 Controller Control 27 None Ctri Right None Off CuteUp None OH cri gt GI D None OH a Nee None OH H Noe o u None uf 171 Contr le de votre logiciel E R glages de Cubase VST utilisateurs de Macintosh 1 2 ae En SZ 9 10 11 172 Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Remote Setup Setup Effectuez les r glages suivants dans la boite de dialogue VST Remote puis cliquez sur OK Remote Generic Remote Input UR 80 2 Output UR 80 1 Dans la fen tre Generic Remote qui s affiche cliquez sur EDIT pour ouvrir la bo te de dialogue Generic Remote Setup Cliquez sur Import S lectionnez EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml que vous avez copi pr c demment et cliquez sur Open Fermez la boite de dialogue Dans le menu Edit s lectionnez Preferences Key Commands Dans le menu contextuel s lectionnez Arrange Editors et effectuez les r glages suivants Command Ev type Event commande Cursor left gauche Controller 28 Cursor right droite Controller 29 Cursor up haut Controller 26 Cursor down bas Controller 27 Cochez la case Remote Active Cochez la case Remote Key puis r glez la sur C 2 O Preferences K
381. nable design The UR 80 is fully assignable You can assign any type of MIDI message control changes RPN NRPN system exclusive to the controllers Using the dedicated UR 80 Editor software you can freely change the MIDI message assignments Customized assignments can be stored in the UR 80 s seven user memory sets USB interface with 24 bit 96 kHz support The audio interface is designed for high audio quality and supports up to 24 bit 96 kHz XLR jacks mic preamps and phantom power are provided allowing you to use condenser mics for serious recording A high impedance switch lets you connect a guitar directly and both optical and coaxial type digital input output jacks are provided Comes with Hyper Canvas software synthesizer The GM2 compatible Hyper Canvas software synthesizer is included providing 256 sounds 9 drum sets You can use it in conjunction with your DXi or VSTi compatible software to start producing music immediately MIDI interface functionality The UR 80 includes a USB MIDI interface with FPT support Even when the UR 80 is not connected to your computer via USB you can use it as a MIDI controller via its MIDI connectors V LINK support 16 The UR 80 supports V LINK and can be used in conjunction with video devices such as the Edirol DV 7PR for video integrated performances Names of Things and What They Do Main panel The UR 80 s main panel is divided into the Track Control section
382. nach innen gedriickt wird Wechselstromadapter Anschluss DC IN Schlie en Sie hier den beiliegenden Wechselstromadapter an Erdungsterminal Abh ngig von der Art und Weise mit der Sie das UR 80 verwenden kann im Audiosignal Rauschen auftreten In solchen F llen k nnen Sie die Situation m glicherweise verbessern indem Sie das Erdungsterminal mit einem externen Erdungsanschluss verbinden Bitte nehmen Sie mit dem Kundendienst von Roland Kontakt auf wenn Sie sich ber die Vorgehensweise im Unklaren sind SchlieBen Sie das Erdungsterminal keinesfalls an folgenden Stellen an 19 20 21 e Wasserleitung kann zu elektrischem Schlag f hren e Gasleitung kann zu Explosion oder Feuer f hren e Telefonleitungserdung bzw Blitzableiterstange kann w hrend elektrischen Gewittern gef hrlich werden MIDI IN OUT Anschl sse Diese Anschl sse werden mit den MIDI Anschl ssen anderer MIDI Ger te verbunden um MIDI Nachrichten zu bertragen und zu empfangen Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter SAMPLE RATE Dieser Schalter w hlt die Sampling Frequenz aus mit der das Audiosignal aufgenommen und wiedergegeben werden wird Wenn Sie die Einstellung dieses Schalters ver ndern m ssen Sie anschlie end alle Anwendungen schlie en und das UR 80 ausschalten und anschlie end erneut einschalten Wenn Sie die 96 kHz Sampling Frequenz nutzen ist die gleichzeitige Aufnahme und Wiedergabe nicht m glich Sie m ssen entweder die Aufna
383. nal eine Schleife zwischen dem UR 80 und dem Ger t wobei elektrische Schwingungen Oszillation verursacht werden Dies kann zu einem unerwartet lauten Sound fithren Achten Sie darauf das zu verhindern da Fehlfunktionen oder Sch den an den Lautsprechern die Folge sein k nnen UR 80 Stereo sets H cassette deck Example of loop connection record player Py INPUT LINE OUT Eenannl OUTPUT LINE IN Digitalaufnahme von einem CD MD DAT Gerat Jo z CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL 5 or COAXIAL IN as appropriate for your device SAMPLE RATE 96 PLAY 48 Ges j Set the sampling frequency Match the sampling frequencies of your recording software and your digital audio playback device m m Set REC SOURCE to DIGITAL lit Anschl sse Verwenden Sie einen geeigneten Kabeltyp um die Anschl sse mit der Digitaleingangsbuchse OPTICAL COAXIAL vorzunehmen Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf die Sampling Frequenz ein die in Ihrer Aufnahmesoftware ausgewahlt wurde Schaltflache REC SOURCE Stellen Sie diese Schaltflache auf DIGITAL beleuchtet ein Weitere Hinweise Verbinden Sie keine Ger te mit Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden Das UR 80 unterst tzt keine professionellen Digitalaudioformate Integrierter Sampling Frequenz Konverter Die
384. nce Hi Z soit basse impedance Lo Z pour l appareil connect a la prise jack 1 Si vous connectez une guitare a la prise jack 1 positionnez la sur haute impedance Hi Z Commutateur d alimentation fantome PHANTOM POWER Ce commutateur deux positions contr le l alimentation fant me fournie aux prises d entr e jack 1 et 2 de type XLR L alimentation fant me doit tre mise hors tension si vous n avez pas connect un micro condensateur n cessitant ce type d alimentation Des dysfonctionnements peuvent se produire dans le cas contraire branchement d un micro dynamique ou d un appareil de lecture audio par exemple Pour plus de d tails sur les caract ristiques de votre micro reportez vous sa documentation propre L alimentation fant me de l UR 80 fournit un maximum de 10 mA 48 V continu Verrou de s curit R http www kensington com Face laterale 28 29 158 28 29 Prises de sortie Master RCA phono Il s agit de sorties jack audio analogiques Vous pouvez les connecter vos enceintes externes Prise jack du casque Vous pouvez brancher un casque sur cette prise La prise jack casque sort le m me signal que les prises de sortie g n rale et les prises de sortie num rique Le son sortira sur les prises de sortie g n rale m me si un casque est branch Utilisez le bouton de volume de sortie de la section Audio Control pour r gler le volume de la prise jack casq
385. nd phone type jacks have different input sensitivity as shown below XLR type 50 10 dBu Phone type 35 4 dBu D If you are connecting a device with a low output level such as a mic we recommend that you use H the XLR type input jack H GND SLEEVE HOT TIP COLD RING The UR 80 provides balanced XLR TRS type input jacks which are wired as shown in the diagram Please K make sure that the device you are connecting is wired appropriately H The phantom power must be turned off unless you have connected a condenser mic that requires phantom power Malfunctions can occur if you supply phantom power to a dynamic mic or audio playback device For details on the specifications of your mic refer to its owner s manual The UR 80 s phantom power supply provides a maximum of 10 mA at DC 48 V Do not connect different types of mic simultaneously for example do not connect a phantom powered condenser mic to input jack 1 and a dynamic mic to input jack 2 Supplying phantom power to a dynamic mic or audio playback device will cause malfunctions _ c i Input impedance select switch INPUT 1 IMP d You can select either high impedance Hi Z or low impedance Lo Z for the device connected to input jack 1 If you connect a guitar to input jack 1 set this to high impedance Hi Z 25 Names of Things and What They Do 26 Phantom power switch PHANTOM POWER This is an on off switch for the phantom power that is s
386. ne dell applicazione o del suono prodotto dagli strumenti o dai dispositivi audio collegati all UR 80 _ Computer AC adaptor Chun USB cable ICH ri H E USB 4 d Monitor speakers u pe _ fo fo 4 bes H eadphones H v S H H a u This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers Uso dell interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento e necessario impostare l interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento dell UR 80 in base a quella utilizzata dall applicazione Se l interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento impostato su 96 kHz REC non si sentir il suono riprodotto dall applicazione Se l interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento impostato su 96 kHz PLAY non sar possibile utilizzare l applicazione per registrare il suono prodotto dagli strumenti o dai dispositivi audio collegati all UR 80 Per applicare l impostazione dell interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento spegnere l UR 80 e riavviarlo i D u 255 Registrazione audio Registrazione della chitarra o del basso Quando si utilizza un software sequencer per registrare la chitarra mentre si ascolta la riproduzione di dati audio gia memorizzati sul computer verr registrata solo la chitarra Guitar Bass 4 Connect to INPUT 1 L en Set the sampling scher Wan frequency
387. nella finestra Message Assign verr salvato nel file SMF 1 Nel menu File selezionare Save as Per salvare e sovrascrivere l ultimo file aperto selezionare Save 2 Immettere il nome file desiderato e fare clic su Save E Aprire un patch di memoria da un file SMF Di seguito viene spiegato come aprire un patch di memoria salvato in precedenza in formato SMF Inoltre in UR 80 Editor e possibile aprire patch di memoria per la serie Edirol PCR che sono stati salvati in formato SMF Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento alla guida in linea di UR 80 Editor Sara possibile accedere al testo digitato nel campo Comment nella finestra Message Assign solo se il file SMF stato salvato a partire da UR 80 Editor 1 Nel menu File selezionare Open 2 Selezionare il file da aprire e fare clic su Open Impostazioni di sistema Di seguito viene spiegato come modificare le impostazioni di sistema dell UR 80 1 Nel menu System selezionare System Settings UR 80 System Setting UR 80 Editor aprira le impostazioni di sistema Default Tempo oes 120 5 dell UR 80 Output Port Se la finestra non viene visualizzata controllare i MIDI Clock 681 02 O1 2 collegamenti e ripetere la procedura a partire dal HQ GM2 Message 61 O2 O1 2 passo 1 V LINK Message 1 02 0142 F Cancel gt Apply 2 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo UR 80 System Settings Indica l intervallo predefinito per trasmettere i messaggi MIDI T
388. nes y configuraci n b sicas Existen programas secuenciadores compatibles con los controladores MIDI que permiten especificar de forma independiente el puerto de entrada MIDI que debe utilizarse para grabar pistas MIDI el puerto MIDI IN y el puerto de entrada MIDI que debe utilizarse para controlar el software el puerto CTRL IN Sequencer software Record on tracks A THRU MIDI OUT port MIDI sound module UR 80 Sequencer software Software synthesizer CTRL IN port Track Record on tracks 00000000 THRU Software synthesizer MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port En condiciones normales debe conectar el teclado MIDI al puerto MIDI IN y utilizarlo para la grabaci n de su interpretaci n en pistas o utilizar la funci n MIDI Thru Retransmisi n MIDI del software para tocar m dulos de sonido o sintetizador software Los mensajes MIDI enviados aqu tienen el significado que se les asigna mediante la especificaci n MIDI En otras palabras al tocar el teclado se transferir n los mensajes de notas y se grabar n en una pista y el m dulo de sonido que reciba estos mensajes emitir sonido Por el contrario los datos recibidos desde el puerto de entrada de control se utilizar n para controlar el software al igual que se hace con el rat n o el teclado del sistema pero estos dato
389. ng on your computing environment Click the Settings tab place a check mark in the check box for the DMA option and click OK to close the dialog box x Depending on your system a DMA Settings dialog box may appear Check the contents and click either OK or Cancel In the System Properties dialog box click OK to close the dialog box Then restart your computer Try installing more memory Installing more memory will increase the performance of your computer For details on how to install more memory refer to the operation manual for your computer 376 Troubleshooting Does your computer satisfy the requirements of the USB standard If you are using a computer such as a computer that you yourself assembled that does not satisfy the electrical requirements of the USB specifications you may experience interruptions in the audio If this occurs you may be able to solve the problem by connecting a USB hub that contains its own power supply On some computers audio playback may be interrupted due to the Power Management settings in the Control Panel only Windows user The Power Supply Properties that you see when you double click Power Management will differ depending on your computer system One example is given below but you should also refer to the operation manual for your computer Some computers may not have all of the following setting items 1 Click the Windows Start button and select Settings Cont
390. ngen in SONAR to 99 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen nena 100 Cubase Mistica liada eu Bine 102 Einstellungen in Cubase SX ss 102 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen iii 103 Cubase VS tRNA dan AN IN ein 105 Einstellungen in Cubase VST Windows Anwender 105 Einstellungen in Cubase VST Macintosh Anwender 106 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen iii 107 OBLE En en ANN NI NE ME RN EE 109 Einstellungen in Logic css its niet ist 109 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen iii 110 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 113 Einstellungen in Pro Tools LE 113 Einstellungen in Digital Performer ss 113 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen iii 114 REASON oi ee an un EIERN 117 Einstellungen f r den MIDI AnSchluss iii 117 Einstellungen f r Reason Transport und MIDI IN Ger t 117 Tempo des Songs sted rn sssss ss 118 Einstellungen f r MIDI Remote Mapping ss 118 Den Controllern zugewiesene Funktionen iii 119 Mit Roland MCR 8 kompatible Anwendungen ane 121 Aufnahme von Audio 123 Grundlegende Verwendung ss 123 Aufnahme von Gitarre oder Bass 124 Aufnahme ber ein Mikrofon ss 125 Aufnahme von einem Keyboard ss 126 Aufnahme von einem Audioger t iii 127 Digitalaufnahme von einem CD MD DAT Ger t
391. ngspegel anzupassen Um die beste Soundqualit t zu erhalten drehen Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf bis der Pegel so H hoch ist wie m glich ohne dass die Input Peakanzeige aufleuchtet r input Monitor Schalter Driicken Sie den Input Monitor Schalter und passen Sie den Input Monitor Level fiir das Signal aus Ihrem Mikrofon an Damit wird die Aufnahmelautstarke nicht verandert Um die Input Monitor Lautstarke zu regeln halten Sie die Schaltfl che SHIFT gedr ckt und i drehen die TIME W hlscheibe Schaltflache REC SOURCE Stellen Sie diese Schaltfl che auf ANALOG ein unbeleuchtet OWeitere Hinweise Schlie en Sie an die Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden keine Ger te an Abh ngig vom 3 relativen Abstand der Mikrofone zu den Lautsprechern kann ein Heulton erzeugt werden Abhilfe erfolgt durch u 1 nderung der Ausrichtung des Mikrofons der Mikrofone 2 Positionierung des Mikrofons der Mikrofone mit gr erem Abstand zu den Lautsprechern 3 Verringerung der Lautst rkepegel 125 Aufnahme von Audio Aufnahme von einem Keyboard Sie k nnen Ihre Keyboard Performance auf dem Computer als Audiodaten aufzeichnen Keyboard digital piano stars Set the sampling PLAYS srece Wa frequency Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT 2 R Adjust the input level ae Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt
392. nitial Message cochez la case INIT MESSAGE dans la fen tre principale Si vous ne souhaitez pas que le Memory Set Initial Message soit transmis lorsque vous s lectionnez le jeu de sons d cochez cette option UR 80 Editor Echange de donn es avec l UR 80 E Transmission vers l UR 80 Voici comment transmettre le jeu de sons actuellement modifi UR 80 lt 1 Dans le menu Communication s lectionnez Transmit 2 La bo te de dialogue Transmit memory set s affiche d Sp cifiez la destination laquelle le jeu de sons doit tre envoy 3 Une boite de dialogue de Confirm s affiche Cliquez sur Continue UT 4 Une bo te de dialogue sur l avancement de la transmission s affiche La boite de dialogue disparait lorsque la transmission est achev e Quand la transmission est termin e VUR 80 commute le jeu de sons que vous avez transmis E E R ception partir de UR 80 Voici comment recevoir un jeu de sons partir de l UR 80 afin de pouvoir le modifier 1 Dans le menu Communication s lectionnez Receive 2 La boite de dialogue Receive memory set s affiche Sp cifiez le jeu de sons que vous voulez recevoir 3 Une boite de dialogue de Confirm s affiche Cliquez sur Continue 4 Une bo te de dialogue sur l avancement de la r ception s affiche La bo te de dialogue disparait lorsque la r ception est achev e Lorsque vous recevez un jeu de sons V UR 80 commute vers le jeu de
393. not require phantom power you must turn the phantom power switch off Failure to do so will cause malfunctions iInput sensitivity knob Use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the input level To obtain the best audio guality adjust the S input sensitivity knob until the level is as high as you can get it without causing the input peak H indicator to light Z Input monitor switch Turn the input monitor switch on and adjust the input monitor level for the signal from your mic This will not change the recording level To adjust the input monitor volume hold down the SHIFT button and turn the TIME dial REC SOURCE button Set this to ANALOG unlit Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using Howling could be produced depending 3 on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by f 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s u 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels 59 Recording a keyboard You can record your keyboard performance onto the computer as audio data Keyboard digital piano stars Set the sampling PLAYS srece Wa frequency Connect to INPUT 1 L and INPUT 2 R Adjust the input level gt el m m m m m ae Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust th
394. ntent that will actually be controlled will depend on the software you are using Synth Edit mode or V LINK mode the UR 80 will operate differently than explained here For details refer to Synth Edit mode p 68 or V LINK mode p 71 TRACK H ICONTROL v CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK 1 Track Control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL venec You can assign MIDI messages to each of these eight knobs Three different messages can be assigned to each knob one for each state of the Assign button PAN SEND 1 SEND 2 This means that you can assign a total of 24 different messages to the Track Control knobs Typically you will use these to control track panning or effect send on your sequencer software 2 Assign button ASSIGN This button switches the messages that are assigned to the track control knobs By pressing the Assign button you can select from these choices PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 18 Names of Things and What They Do TRACK STATUS Ho PART ee mom iza ICP PA 3 Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HO PART You can assign MIDI messages to each of these eight buttons You can also assign MIDI messages to the LED of each button and turn the LEDs on off from your sequencer software lt To each button and LED you can assign four different messages one for each state of the Select button off green red orange This means that you can assign a to
395. nterrupteur Si le contr leur est un bouton avec LED sp cifiez le Mode LED Si vous avez sp cifi le Mode LED comme Remote sp cifiez le message de r ception LED Le champ du message de r ception LED vous permet de s lectionner soit Channel Message soit Free Message Les param tres sont les m mes que pour une affectation traditionnelle avec les exceptions suivantes Valeur Min est la valeur OFF pour le message de r ception LED Le voyant s teint la r ception de cette valeur Valeur Max est la valeur ON pour le message de r ception LED Le voyant s allume a la r ception de cette valeur Il n existe aucune section Send LSB RPN ou NRPN Vous pouvez si vous le d sirez entrer un commentaire dans le champ Comment Cliquez sur OK 210 UR 80 Editor E V rification des messages MIDI affect s Vous pouvez v rifier les messages MIDI affect s en suivant l une de ces proc dures Method 1 e Dans le menu File s lectionnez View assign list Tous les param tres des messages MIDI affect s aux contr leurs sont affich s au format HTML ri Cette m thode est pratique lorsque vous avez besoin de donn es d taill es ou pour une E v rification finale d Si vous s lectionnez la commande File Export assign list la m me liste de param tres sera enregistr e sous forme de fichier HTML Method 2 E e Dans le menu Options s lectionnez Show Messages Un r sum des messages MIDI affect s cha
396. ntry LSB range is fixed at 0 127 NRPN MSB NRPN LSB MSB Min Value MSB Max Value Send LSB System Common Assigns a System Common or System Realtime message Use the Status Realtime field to select the desired message Free Message Assign any desired MIDI message of up to 24 bytes You can MIDI message of assign more than one message up to 24 bytes Data Type Min Value Max Value Tempo Assigns Tempo Control for transmitting MIDI Timing Clock messages Use UR 80 Editor to specify the output destination of the timing clock messages For details refer to System set tings p 82 Min Tempo Max Tempo 77 x G E C Italiana Erannaie Eenannl UR 80 Editor E Assigning a MIDI message Message Assign window Controller name RACK STATUS 1 MUTE 2 EDIROL UR 80 Editor Channel Message Step 2 Type Control Change v MIDI Channel Step 3 Control Number Min Value Max Value Message assignment area 40 ee Eh _ GB Settings Step 4 Output Port Port 2 E Step 5 Button Mode UNLATCH OLATCH Step 6 LED Mode Remote v Message Channel Message O Free Message Type Control Change v MIDIChamel 16 Step 7 LED racoption message Control Number OFF Value ON Value assig e 40 gt 0 127 Comment Step 8 9 Comment input area Step 9 In the Main window click the controller to which you want to
397. o 325 Grabaci n digital desde un CD MD DAT iii 326 Grabaci n de la salida de la unidad UR 80 en un aparato digital 327 Ajuste del tiempo de recuperaci n de datos de audio 328 Utilizaci n de ASIO Direct Monitor 329 Funcionamiento avanzado 11331 Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador 332 Atenuadores de pistas enes iea eiii oide EE Ei iie oris 332 Bot n de asignaci n ASSIGN iii 332 Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL 333 Bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas TRACK GROUP 333 Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HO PART 333 Lista de par metros sun 334 Modo V LINK iii ds 335 Lista de par metros ss 335 Controles utilizados en el modo V LINE ene 336 UR 80 E 337 Ueleg ER ME 337 Configuraci n de puertos MIDI 338 Ventana de UR 80 Edito ale idas 339 Ventana principal en RMAN ua gan 339 Configuraci n de controladores ss 341 Mensajes MIDI que pueden asignarse a controladores 341 Asignaci n de un mensaje MIDI 342 Comprobaci n del mensaje MIDI asignado ii 343 Mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria nee 344 Especificaci n del mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria 344 Habilita
398. o activo no iluminado AUTO ORANGE Naranja Manteniendo este bot n pulsado presione el bot n de modo Automatiza de automatizaci n AUTO MODE para modificar la ci n configuraci n de automatizaci n de la pista Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Mediante estos controles giratorios se controla la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 y el nivel de SEND 2 de la pista Utilice el bot n ASSIGN para seleccionar la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 o el nivel de SEND 2 Su valor aumentar a medida que gire el control giratorio a la derecha y disminuir a medida que lo gire a la izquierda La modificaci n aumento disminuci n cesar si vuelve a disponer el control giratorio en la posici n central modo Shuttle 312 Control del software Bot n de modo de automatizaci n AUTO MODE Con este bot n se selecciona el valor de automatizaci n de las pistas S En modo SELECT manteniendo el bot n de Track Status pulsado presione el bot n Automation Mode para modificar el valor de automatizaci n de la pista correspondiente Estado del bot n AUTO MODE Funci n e READ Lectura Reproducir la automatizaci n WRITE Grabaci n Grabar la automatizaci n Se regrabar toda automatizaci n E TOUCH Contacto Grabar la automatizaci n en modo Touch Sense Sentido de contacto u Los datos s lo se regrabar n mientras utilice los atenuadores de la unidad UR 80 LATCH Bloqu
399. o al sintetizzatore software I messaggi MIDI IN port H MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port MIDI inviati sono interpretati in un modo completamente diverso rispetto a quanto definito nella specifica MIDI Per questo motivo i messaggi che sono inviati dalla porta CTRL IN generalmente non sono rinviati funzione thru al modulo sonoro o al sintetizzatore software k G 6 a u Se ad esempio si suona la tastiera per inviare un messaggio note on il software che lo riceve non produrra una nota bensi potrebbe interpretare guesto messaggio come indicante che stato premuto il tasto PLAY STOP Il risultato effettivo dipendera dal programma utilizzato Sequencer software Dato che uno stesso messaggio MIDI pu essere le sii ii CCS interpretato in modi completamente diversi come m 7 descritto in precedenza il programma offre la possibilit di configurare separatamente le porte MIDI IN e CTRL IN synthesizer Y i in modo da poter differenziare i due tipi T ES EE T La Quando l UR 80 e collegato via USB e possibile selezionare Y una delle due porte MIDI UR 80 1 UR 80 2 come MID sound module destinazione di uscita per i messaggi MIDI provenienti Uno 1 uso da fader manopole e tasti dell UR 80 In pratica definendo UR 80 1 come porta MIDI IN e UR 80 2 come
400. o and from the UR 80 edit the settings and save load memory sets in SMF format It also lets you make system settings for the UR 80 itself You can view the online help from the Help menu of UR 80 Editor The following pages provide a basic explanation of what UR 80 Editor can do For details refer to the on line help for UR 80 Editor a a lt Starting up UR 80 Editor E Before you start up UR 80 Editor use a USB cable to connect the UR 80 to your computer and turn q on the power C Windows users From the Start menu select Programs in Windows XP All Programs and from the menu that SS appears choose UR 80 Editor UR 80 Editor Macintosh users k y Double click the UR 80 Editor icon located in the folder in which the software was installed S D D u c ka 6 E lt D D H u 73 MIDI Port settings In order to transfer memory sets between the UR 80 and UR 80 Editor or to make system settings you must specify the MIDI port that UR 80 Editor is to use Here s how to make settings when you have connected the UR 80 to your computer via USB If you are using the MIDI connectors to make connections specify the input output ports of the connected MIDI device Windows users 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI Devices 2 In the MIDI Devices dialog box that appears make the following settings MIDI Devices Input Pot EDIROL UR 80 2 Input port EDIROL UR 80 2 Outpu
401. o estos botones con el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas puede controlar 32 pistas Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE Apagado OFF No activo Activa y desactiva el apagado mute de la pista Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activa y desactiva el solo de la pista Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado REC Grabaci n RED Rojo Activa y desactiva el estado de grabaci n para la pista Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado AUTO ORANGE Naranja Activa y desactiva la grabaci n autom tica de la pista Automatizaci n Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado Controles giratorios de pistas TRACK HQ CONTROL Mediante estos controles giratorios se controla la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 y el nivel de SEND 2 de la pista Utilice el bot n ASSIGN para seleccionar la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 o el nivel de SEND 2 Utilizando estos controles giratorios con el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas puede controlar 32 pistas Bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas TRACK GROUP Este bot n sirve para seleccionar el grupo de pistas que se quiere controlar Estado del bot n TRACK GROUP Pistas controladas 1 8 Pistas 1 8 9 16 Pistas 9 16 17 24 Pistas 17 24 25 32 Pistas 25 32 298 Control del software Secci n de control m ster
402. oad it Do you want to upload it Cancel i ox 307 Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores Fije las etiquetas de Logic a la hoja de plantilla proporcionada La explicaci n que sigue est basada en la siguiente configuraci n Secci n de control de pistas LOGIC INPUT 122 ASSIGN vi why NE NI NI 4 DN 4 DN Wi DN Wi v Wi y CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE SELECT Atenuadores de pista Ajustan el volumen de cada canal Conmutando los bancos de atenuadores puede ajustar el volumen de todos los canales Utilice los botones de funci n FADER BANK para conmutar los bancos de atenuadores Atenuador master Controla el volumen global del mezclador de audio Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART Mediante estos botones se conmutan los estados de cada canal Conmutando los bancos de atenuadores puede controlar el estado de todos los canales Utilice los botones de funci n FADER BANK para conmutar los bancos de atenuadores Modo Estado del bot n SELECT Funci n MUTE Apagado OFF No activo Activar y desactivar el apagado mute del canal Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado SOLO Solo GREEN Verde Activar y desactivar el solo del canal Activo iluminado No activo no iluminado REC RDY RED Rojo Activa y desactiva el estado de grabaci n del canal
403. of the song Play from the current position in the song Begin recording 46 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 Memory set Use USRA Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press the Track Status button USR4 E Settings in ProTools LE 1 From the Setups menu choose Peripherals 2 Click MIDI Controllers 3 Set MIDI Controllers as follows Widows Macintosh Type Receive From Send To Type Receive From Send To HUI EDIROL UR 801 EDIROL UR 80 HUI UR 801 UR 80 1 a i H Settings in Digital Performer c 1 From the Basics menu choose Control Surface Setup 2 If the screen indicates Press to add a Driver to your Configuration Click the key 3 In Driver Hardware for 3 1 or earlier select HUI 4 In MIDI MIDI Communication for 3 1 or earlier select UR 80 1 ke D u c xd 6 D a 7 u 47 Controlling your software E Functions assigned to the controllers Please affix the HUI labels to the included template sheet The explanation below will follow these settings DP Indicates an operation for Digital Performer Indicates an operation for ProTools LE If neither of these symbols is shown the operation applies to both systems Track Control section Pro TOOLS INPUT 132 PEAK 1 2 i D v CUTOFF RESONA
404. ogramme est comprise entre 1 et 128 Canal MIDI Valeur Min Valeur Max Bank Program Change Affecte un message Bank Select et un message Program Change La valeur du message Bank Select est fixe La valeur du num ro de programme est comprise entre 1 et 128 Canal MIDI Bank MSB Bank LSB Valeur Min Valeur Max RPN Affecte un num ro RPN Registered Parameter Number La plage de LSB d entr e de donn es est fix e a 0 127 Canal MIDI RPN MSB RPN LSB MSB Valeur Min MSB Valeur Max Send LSB NRPN Affecte un num ro NRPN Non Registered Parameter Number La plage de LSB d entr e de donn es est fix e a 0 127 Canal MIDI NRPN MSB NRPN LSB MSB Valeur Min MSB Valeur Max Send LSB System Common Realtime Affecte un message System Common ou System Realtime Utilisez le champ Status pour s lectionner le message souhait Free Message Affectez les messages MIDI de votre choix jusqu a 24 octets Vous pouvez affecter plusieurs messages Message MIDI jusqu a 24 octets Data Type Valeur Min Valeur Max Tempo Affecte Tempo Control pour transmettre des messages MIDI Timing Clock Utilisez UR 80 Editor pour sp cifier la destination de sortie des messages Timing Clock Pour plus de d tails reportez vous a la section Param tres syst me p 214 Tempo Min Tempo Max 209 Enalieh x G E
405. ogue des param tres du pilote Sous Windows 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration et cliquez deux fois sur l ic ne EDIROL UR 80 2 La bo te de dialogue EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings s affiche Sous Windows XP cliquez sur Switch to classic view pour passer en mode Vue classique EDIROL UR 80 ne s affiche pas si la vue classique n est pas activ e Dans Windows Me cliquez sur Afficher toutes les options du Panneau de configuration Sous Macintosh Ouvrez le tableau de bord ASIO depuis la bo te de dialogue Audio Settings de votre application compatible ASIO Le nom de cette bo te de dialogue et la proc dure d ouverture du tableau de bord ASIO d pendent de votre application Pour plus de d tails reportez vous au manuel de l application Italiana Eenannl 197 MEMO Fonctionnement avance Mode Edition Synth Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton HQ GM2 situ dans la zone Master Control la section Track Control fonctionne selon le mode Edition Synth Le mode Edition Synth vous permet de modifier les param tres du synth tiseur logiciel de haute qualit Hyper Canvas inclus Les param tres tant contr l s par la transmission de messages MIDI compatibles GM2 vous pouvez galement utiliser ce mode pour contr ler tout p riph rique MIDI r pondant a des messages MIDI GM2 Pour revenir au r glage de votre logiciel s quenceur appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton HQ GM2 pou
406. ol knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs control channel Pan Send 1 level and Send 2 level Use the Assign button to select Pan Send 1 level or Send 2 level SOLO GREEN READ RED WRITE ORANGE Italiana By using these knobs in conjunction with the bank button you can control 32 channels Bank button BANK This button switches the bank of channels you are controlling BANK button status Channels controlled CH1 8 Channels 1 8 CH9 16 Channels 9 16 CH17 24 Channels 17 24 CH25 32 Channels 25 32 Eenannl Controlling your software Master Control section S Cursor buttons These buttons perform the following functions C gt Button Function a Move up S av Move down WINDOW d Move left MIXER INST Move right EFFECTS INPUT MONITOR LEVEL D ze Kum SHIFT 4 Shrink display vertically SHIFT YY Expand display vertically CENI SEN nO SAVE q Shrink display horizontally EN eM2 SHIFT Expand display horizontally LIL ser P morena REC INPUT SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT m OFF ANALOG ict STEREO 30 DIGITAL 2 MONO Function buttons Button Function MIXER Open close the Mixer window a EFFECTS Open close the VST Send Effect window INST Open close the VST Instruments window IN
407. olgen soll d Wenn Sie den Men befehl File Export assign list w hlen wird dieselbe Parameterliste als HTML Datei ausgegeben Methode 2 e Wahlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt Show Messages Eine Ubersicht zu den MIDI Nachrichten die den einzelnen Controllern zugewiesen sind wird im Hauptfenster wie folgt angezeigt Diese Methode ist praktisch wenn Sie Zuweisungen vornehmen oder die gesamten Zuweisungen pr fen m chten EDIROL UR 80 Editor preset mid TITLE O mactiviry nit MESSAGE EDIT k i u EE S T Haliann Eenannl 145 UR 80 Editor Memory Set Initial Message E Festlegen der Memory Set Initial Message F r jedes der Memory Sets des UR 80 k nnen Sie eine Memory Set Initial Message Anfangsnachricht f r Memory Set festlegen die bertragen wird wenn Sie dieses Memory Set auswahlen Die Memory Set Initial Message ist eine MIDI Nachricht mit bis zu 48 Byte Sonderzeichen wie z B DT verwendet in Free Message k nnen in einer Memory Set Initial Message nicht verwendet werden Dr cken Sie im Hauptfenster die Schaltfl che Edit die sich rechts vom Kontrollk stchen INIT MESSAGE befindet AnschlieBend wird das Dialogfeld Initial Message angezeigt Verwenden Sie den Textbereich um die gew nschte Input Memory Set Initial Message einzugeben Verwenden Sie das Feld Output Port um den Anschluss anzugeben von dem die Memory Set Ini
408. ollo disattivare il controllo nell applicazione o selezionare l impostazione ASIO Direct Monitor Due porte MIDI Alcuni software sequencer che supportano controlli MIDI consentono di impostare in modo separato l ingresso MIDI utilizzato per registrare le tracce MIDI porta MIDI IN rispetto all ingresso MIDI per gestire il software porta CTRL IN Sequencer software In regola generale la tastiera MIDI verra collegata alla porta funzione MIDI Thru del software per riprodurre moduli Ea sonori o sintetizzatore sofware I messaggi MIDI inviati synthesizer y avranno il significato che sar stato loro assegnato dalla MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port specifica MIDI In altre parole quando si suona una tastiera THRU Enalieh Record on MIDI IN per registrare l esecuzione su tracce o tramite la y i messaggi nota verranno trasmessi e registrati sulla traccia eo MIDI sound module mentre il modulo sonoro che li riceve ne riproduce il suono Sequencer software Diversamente i dati che arrivano sulla porta CTRL IN Darntenh Track Record on tracks Ge THRU i vengono utilizzati per far funzionare il programma proprio come quelli immessi nel computer attraverso il mouse o la tastiera non verranno quindi registrati sulle tracce o rinviati synthesizer x al modulo sonoro
409. olo CC 2 02 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 SOLO Channel 4 Solo CC 3 03 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 SOLO Channel 5 Solo CC 4 04 0 00 64 40 6 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 SOLO Channel 6 Solo CC 5 05 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 SOLO Channel 7 Solo CC 6 06 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 SOLO Channel 8 Solo CC 7 07 0 00 64 40 6 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 REC Channel 1 Read CC 40 28 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 REC Channel 2 Read CC 41 29 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC Channel 3 Read CC 42 2A 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC Channel 4 Read CC 43 2B 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC Channel 5 Read CC 44 2C 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE 353 PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC Channel 6 Read CC 45 2D 0 00 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC Channel 7 Read CC 46 2E 0 00 7 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC Channel 8 Read CC 47 2F 0 00 7 64 40 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO Channel 1 Write CC 0 00 0 00 64 40 5 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO Channel 2 Write CC 1 01 0 00 7 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO Channel 3 Write CC 2 02 0 00 64 40 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO Channel 4 Write CC 3 03 0 00
410. omation de l enregistrement en mode Touch Sense Les donn es sont remplac es des que vous utilisez les commandes d att nuation de l UR 80 lt 3 H E q e c H Eenannl 181 Contr le de votre logiciel Section Master Control BANK MB a EDIT MIXER Lara a JOG INPUT MONITOR LEVEL MEM LOC TRANSPORT IN OUT UNDO SAVE PRE POST pO E nm CLK EDIT MODE EDIT TOOL SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OFF ANALOG 0 STEREO ZE DIGITAL 29 MONO SCRUB Composition JOG Boutons curseurs Ces boutons commutent la bangue de pistes contr l e par les r glages de pistes de UR 80 Bouton Fonction a Recule la banque de pistes d 1 piste Vy Avance la banque de pistes d 1 piste d Passe la banque de pistes suivante gt Passe a la banque de pistes pr c dente Boutons de fonction Bouton Fonction EDIT DP Ouvre la fen tre Editor PT Ouvre la fen tre Track MEM LOCT DP Ouvre la fen tre Marker PT Ouvre la fen tre Memory Location MIXER Ouvre la fen tre Mixer TRANSPORT Ouvre la fen tre Transport IN D finit la position actuelle comme le point d entr e d enregistrement automatique PRE DP D finit la position actuelle comme le point d entr e de lecture en boucle PT
411. on du menu pour l activer 8 Cliquez sur le bouton MIDI IN DEVICE module CHANNEL 16 puis s lectionnez la table de mixage r gler 183 Enalieh x 4 E C Italiana Eenannl Contr le de votre logiciel E Contr le du tempo de la chanson L UR 80 vous permet d utiliser la molette de temps et les boutons curseurs pour contr ler le tempo de la chanson Si vous souhaitez contr ler le tempo de la chanson partir de UR 80 vous devez activer MIDI Clock Sync dans Reason Vous devez d abord activer la transmission Timing Clock de VUR 80 Pour cela appuyez sur SHIFT V LINK Activation de MIDI Clock Sync Vous pouvez activer MIDI Clock Sync selon l une des deux mani res suivantes e Dans le menu Options s lectionnez MIDI Clock Sync pour cocher cette option e Appuyez sur le bouton de transport Reason MIDI SYNC ENABLE MIDI SYNC MIDI SYNC ET Bouser Fonctionnement du transport Reason Si MIDI Clock Sync est activ les op rations Play Stop Marche Arr t sont ex cut es comme suit Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les fonctions Rewind Rebobinage ou Forward Avance rapide lorsque MIDI Clock Sync est active Contr leur UR 80 Contr leur UR 80 Transport Reason Arr t SHIFT ED GE March SHIFT a E R glages de MIDI Remote Mapping Les messages de contr le MIDI usage g n ral sont affect s aux boutons de fonction et au bouton TRACK GR
412. on s interrompt par instants r p tez cette proc dure et augmentez petit petit le Buffer size taille des buffers sp cifi l tape 2 jusqu ce que le son ne s interrompe plus x Selon Vapplication gue vous utilisez les reglages de buffer size et latence peuvent tre galement accessibles par les param tres audio de l application Pour plus de d tails reportez vous au manuel de l application 196 Utilisation d ASIO Direct Monitor Si vous utilisez une application compatible ASIO2 0 avec l UR 80 le commutateur INPUT MON de PUR 80 peut tre r gl automatiquement depuis votre application compatible ASIO 2 0 1 Comme expliqu la section Ouverture de la bo te de dialogue des param tres du pilote ouvrez la bo te de dialogue Driver Settings Enalieh 2 Effectuez les r glages suivants Activez l option Use ASIO Direct Monitor 3 Cliquez sur OK dans la bo te de dialogue Selon votre application vous pouvez effectuer ce r glage ASIO Direct Monitor dans les parametres audio de l application elle m me Pour plus de d tails reportez vous au manuel de l application Si vous utilisez ASIO Direct Monitor le contr le d entr e peut s interrompre inopin ment selon les r glages de Vapplication et la procedure d enregistrement Si tel est le cas cliquez d nouveau sur l option de l tape 2 pour d sactiver ASIO Direct Monitor lt D H E H C Ouverture de la bo te de dial
413. ons que vous avez cr NOTE Vous devez entrer des caract res un octet Anglais Les caract res 4 deux octets ne sont pas pris en charge Japonais Le nom que vous entrez ici peut aussi tre refl t dans le fichier HTML qui sort lorsque vous Export assign list du menu File 2 Section H ACTIVITY La section H ACTIVITY de l UR 80 est activ e lorsqu un jeu de sons dont le param tre H ACTIVITY est sur ON est charg dans l UR 80 oz Activez cette section lorsque vous utilisez un logiciel sp cifique comme Pro Tools LE Si la section H ACTIVITY est activ e un message de 90 00 7F est transmis a partir du port UR 80 1 a des intervalles d environ 500 ms c d H Z lt 3 Zone d affectation INIT MESSAGE x Vous pouvez sp cifier ici librement le message MIDI qui est transmis lorsque ce jeu de sons est s lectionn Pour plus de d tails reportez vous la section Memory Set Initial Message p d 212 207 UR 80 Editor 208 4 Contr leurs Cliquez sur le contr leur auquel vous souhaitez affecter un message MIDI Lorsque vous cliquez sur un contr leur la fen tre Fen tre Message Assign p 210 s affiche 5 Bouton d affectation ASSIGN Ce bouton commute les messages MIDI affect s aux boutons de r glage de pistes dans l ordre PAN SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Il commute galement l affichage des Messages MIDI affect s dans le menuOptions 6 Bouton de s lection
414. ontrol PAN R gle le Pan Angle de chaque canal Utilisez les boutons curseurs gauche et droite pour commuter le param tre Pan Angle r gler SEND R gle le niveau d envoi de chaque canal Utilisez les boutons curseurs haut et bas pour basculer entre les emplacements d envoi Utilisez les boutons curseurs gauche droite pour commuter le param tre de niveau d envoi a r gler EQ R gle le gain d galiseur EQ Gain de chaque canal Utilisez les boutons curseurs haut et bas pour basculer entre les bandes d galiseur Utilisez les boutons curseurs gauche droite pour commuter le param tre EQ Gain a r gler TRACK R gle le niveau d envoi de chaque canal Utilisez les boutons curseurs gauche droite pour basculer entre les param tres WINDOW ARRANGE Active d sactive l affichage de la fen tre Arrangement MIXER Active desactive l affichage de la fen tre Track Mixer UNDO Annule la modification pr c dente SAVE Enregistre la chanson actuelle dans un fichier Les noms de bouton mis entre crochets indiquent que vous pressez le bouton tout en maintenant appuy le bouton SHIFT 177 Enalieh x 4 E C Italiana Eenannl Contr le de votre logiciel Composition JOG Tournez la molette pour d placer la ligne de position des chansons SPL Si le mode Scrub lecture vitesse variable est activ vous pouvez utiliser la molette pour la lecture vitesse variable Boutons de trans
415. ontrol e i fader delle tracce Si potranno quindi utilizzare le otto manopole e i fader per controllare i parametri di 32 tracce Il pulsante Track Group non permette di cambiare i messaggi assegnati alle manopole Track Control al pulsante Track Status e ai fader delle tracce Esso permette invece di inviare quattro messaggi MIDI diversi al software sequencer per cambiare il numero di tracce nel software 218 Parti e relative funzioni E Sezione Master Control La sezione Master Control permette di eseguire dei comandi e controllare la comunicazione con il software sequencer Permette inoltre di configurare l interfaccia audio dell UR 80 Il software utilizzato determina su quali parametri si potra intervenire lt f I d 8 Pulsanti Cursor z A ciascuno di guesti guattro pulsanti possibile fr assegnare dei messaggi MIDI Premendo FDIROE UR 80 contemporaneamente il pulsante SHIFT si 24BIT 96 kHz USE RECOPDINCEEE EE possono assegnare altri messaggi per un totale i A di otto messaggi MIDI assegnati a questi quattro pulsanti CURSOR Utilizzare questi pulsanti Cursor per cambiare lt VY la traccia selezionata nel software sequencer E WINDOW o per spostare il focus INST Lund LJ 9 Manopola TIME C PARKER UNDO SAVE AS E possibile assegnare un messaggio MIDI a questa _ manopola mraz Utilizzare la manopola TIME per spostare il punto nel brano nel software seg
416. opole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Utilizzare queste manopole per controllare le funzioni Pan equalizzatore treble EQ TREBLE e equalizzatore basso EQ BASS del canale Utilizzare il pulsante di assegnazione per passare da una funzione all altra pan equalizzatore treble e basso c i 0 D u 251 Utilizzo del software Sezione Master Control TEMPO TEMPO gt F1 F2 INPUT MONITOR LEVEL DO aja gt MIDI en SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT a JJOO O O StToP _ START J MIDI SYNC 252 Pulsanti Cursor Se e stata attivata la funzione MIDI Clock Sync di Reason e si controlla il tempo questi pulsanti permettono di impostarlo Pulsante Tempo BPM a 80 Vy 120 q 145 gt 100 SHIFT 4 20 SHIFT YY 180 250 SHIFT q 60 SHIFT gt Manopola TIME Se stata attivata la funzione MIDI Clock Sync di Reason e si controlla il tempo questa manopola permette di regolare il tempo in modo continuo Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione Attiva disattiva la riproduzione in loop Sposta indietro il cursore Avanza rapidamente il cursore Interrompe la riproduzione registrazione Avvia la riproduzione Avvia la registrazione 2 Interrompe la riproduzione durante EIER CJ la f
417. orando c Stato del pulsante BANK Canali controllati 3 CH1 8 Canali 1 8 s CH9 16 Canali 9 16 LI CH17 24 Canali 17 24 CH25 32 Canali 25 32 235 Utilizzo del software Sezione Master Control ES OS SOURCE MONITOR OF ANALOG 20 STEREO JE DIGITAL 9 MONO Pulsanti Cursor Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione a Sposta su Y Sposta gi Sposta a sinistra Sposta a destra n ES III IU Es pa SHIFT 4 Riduce la schermata verticalmente SHIFT YY Espande la schermata verticalmente GD Ub Ex d Riduce la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT Espande la schermata orizzontalmente SHIFT D MIDI CJ Pulsanti funzione Pulsante Funzione MIXER Apre chiude la finestra Mixer EFFECTS Apre chiude la finestra VST Send Effect INST Apre chiude la finestra VST Instruments INPUTS Apre chiude la finestra VST Input O O LEFT Sposta il cursore nel punto del marker sinistro SET L Imposta la posizione corrente del cursore come marker sinistro RIGHT Sposta il cursore nel punto del marker destro SET R Imposta la posizione corrente del cursore come marker destro COPY Copia l oggetto correntemente selezionato UNDO Annulla l operazione precedente PASTE Incolla l oggetto copiato nel pun
418. ord Arm CC 41 29 0 00 7 127 7F 5 a REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 REC Track 3 Record Arm CC 42 2A 0 00 127 7F 5 S REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 REC Track 4 Record Arm CC 43 2B 000 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 REC Track 5 Record Arm CC 44 2C 0 00 7 127 7F 5 3 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 REC Track 6 Record Arm CC 45 2D 0 00 127 7F 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 REC Track 7 Record Arm CC 46 2E 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 REC Track 8 Record Arm CC 47 2F 0 00 127 7F 5 a REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 1 AUTO Track 1 Write Arm CC 0 00 0 00 127 7F 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 2 AUTO Track 2 Write Arm CC 1 01 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 3 AUTO Track 3 Write Arm CC 2 02 0 00 7 127 7F 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 4 AUTO Track 4 Write Arm CC 3 03 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 5 AUTO Track 5 Write Arm CC 4 04 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 6 AUTO Track 6 Write Arm CC 5 05 0 00 127 7F 5 E REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 7 AUTO Track 7 Write Arm CC 6 06 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRACK STATUS 8 AUTO Track 8 Write Arm CC 707 0 00 127 7F 5 REMOTE LED TRANSPORT PLAY Play CC 2216 0 00 7 127 7F 6 E REMOTE LED TRANSPORT REC Record CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 6 E REMOTE 351 USR1 MEMORY Cubase SX PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE BE 61 7F BE 62 7F
419. oria memoria Contenido Este es el conjunto de memoria b sico de la unidad UR 80 No puede regrabar Utilice este conjunto PRESET de memoria para fijar los mensajes de la unidad UR 80 y efectuar asignaciones en el software Tambi n debe utilizar este conjunto de memoria para SONAR USR 1 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido en Cubase SX USR 2 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido en Cubase VST USR 3 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido en Logic USR 4 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido para Pro Tools LE y Digital Performer 3 USR5 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido en Reason Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido para ser compatible con el MCR 8 USR 6 modo 4 A 1 8 Regrabable En la configuraci n de f brica est establecido para ser compatible con el MCR USR 7 16 modo 4 B 9 16 296 Control del software SONAR Conjunto de memoria Utilice PRESET Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bot n de Track Status PRESET Software Necesitar SONAR 2 0 o posterior y el plug in UR 80 Control Surface Plug in El UR 80 Control Surface Plug in se encuentra en la carpeta SONAR Plugin del CD ROM que se proporciona Haga doble clic en UR80CSP EXE para iniciar el programa de instalaci n Siga las in
420. otenzialit del software necessario che le periferiche di ingresso uscita siano state opp ortunamente configurate Per ulteriori informazioni sulla procedura di configurazione fare riferimento al manuale utente Se l UR 80 non figura tra le periferiche selezionabili per il software utilizzato forse il driver UR 80 non stato installato correttamente Reinstallare il driver Periferiche MIDI Periferica MIDI OUT UR 80 MIDI OUT Mac OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Se stato specificato UR 80 MIDI OUT come uscita nel software sequencer i messaggi verranno trasmessi dal connettore MIDI OUT dell UR 80 UR 80 Mac OS 9 8 UR 80 1 Selezionare questa porta per inviare messaggi dal software sequencer all UR 80 MIDI IN periferica UR 80 MIDI IN Ma c OS 9 UR 80 MIDI IN OUT Se UR 80 MIDI IN e stato specificato come ingresso nel software sequencer i messaggi verranno trasmessi dal connettore MIDI IN dell UR 80 UR 80 1 UR 80 2 Selezionare una di queste porte per recuperare nel software sequencer i messaggi provenienti dai controlli E possibile selezionare la porta che verr utilizzata da ogni controllo Si potrebbe quindi utilizzare la porta UR 80 1 perimessaggi da registrare su una traccia o da utilizzare per controllare un sintetizzatore software e la porta UR 80 2 per i messaggi utilizzati per riprodurre interrompere il sequencer o per il mixaggio Utilizzare l UR 80 2
421. ou press this button one of the TRACK STATUS button LEDs will light to indicate the currently selected memory set HQ GM2 When the HO GM2 button is on the Track Control section will be in Synth Edit mode allowing you to control the parameters of the included software synthesizer Press the button once again to turn it off and return to the previous track control functions For details on Synth Edit mode refer to Synth Edit mode p 68 V LINK When the V LINK button is on the Track Control section will be in V LINK mode allowing you to control V LINK compatible video devices Press the button once again to turn it off and return to the previous track control functions For details on V LINK mode refer to V LINK mode p 71 MIDI CLK SHIFT V LINK This switches MIDI Timing Clock F8 transmission on off When you press the SHIFT button the LED will indicate the F8 on off status not the V LINK on off status REC SOURCE Switches the input signal that is being sent via USB to the computer as the recording source ANALOG LED unlit di ee from the input jacks will be sent to the Only the signal from the digital input jacks coaxial or DIGITAL CED IR optical will be sent to the computer INPUT MONITOR LEVEL SHIFT TIME Selects whether the input signal from the input jacks 1 2 and digital input jack will be sent to the headphone jack and master output jacks Use
422. our contr ler le mixage dans votre logiciel tout en utilisant les boutons pour modifier votre synth tiseur logiciel La destination de sortie des messages MIDI transmis lorsque vous utilisez les commandes d att nuation les molettes et les boutons de l UR 80 peuvent tre sp cifi s s par ment pour chaque contr leur Utilisez l Editeur UR 80 pour affecter le message et la destination de sortie des contr leurs Pour plus de d tails reportez vous la section UR 80 Editor p 205 163 Enalieh x 4 E C Italiana Eenannl Controle de votre logiciel Vous pouvez affecter les messages MIDI souhait s aux molettes commandes d att nuation et boutons de l UR 80 Un ensemble d affectations de messages MIDI porte le nom de jeu de sons La m moire interne de UR 80 contient huit jeux de sons diff rents Dans la configuration d usine les affectations du jeu de sons PRESET sont s lectionn es Commutation des jeux de sons Maintenez le bouton MEMORY enfonc et appuyez sur un bouton TRACK STATUS pour s lectionner un jeu de sons EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Jeux de sons M moire Contenu Il s agit du jeu de sons de base de l UR 80 Il ne peut pas tre r enregistr Utilisez ce jeu de sons PRESET pour maintenir les messages de l UR 80 fix s et ex cuter des affectations sur votre logicie
423. p 8 16 24 32 1 8 BF0000BF2000 Video palettel z 9 16 BF0001BF2000 Video palette2 Track o er BF0002BF2000 Video palette3 H 25 32 BF 00 03 BF2000 Video palette4 r u In V LINK mode you cannot control the track parameters of your sequencer software or the like from the Track Control section If you want to resume controlling your sequencer software press the V LINK button to turn it off 71 V LINK mode E Controllers used in V LINK mode Please affix the V LINK labels to the included template sheet fig VLinkTrackControl 72 V LINK INPUT 132 f PLAYBACK OUTPUT SPEED CR CB BRIGHTNESS FADE PEAK 1 via s s 2 lu ALP atte s x y CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY OJOIOJOJO 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 DISSOLVE ih VFX1 VEX 2 VEX 3 VEX 4 lt LL PALETTE CONE 6 22 7 23 8 24 14 30 15 31 16 32 UR 80 Editor UR 80 Editor lets you use your computer to create memory sets for the UR 80 The UR 80 has a total of 43 controllers By using these in conjunction with the SHIFT button and the LED indicators you can assign 136 different MIDI messages to these controllers Such a collection of 136 MIDI messages is called a memory set The UR 80 itself can store seven memory sets and one preset memory gt Memory sets p 349 UR 80 Editor lets you transfer memory sets t
424. para seleccionar la panor mica PAN el nivel de SEND 1 o el nivel de SEND 2 Utilizando estos controles giratorios junto con el bot n BANK puede controlar 16 canales de audio 8 canales de instrumento VST y 8 canales de grupo Bot n de banco BANK Este bot n sirve para seleccionar el banco de canales que se quiere controlar Estado del bot n BANK Canales controlados CH 1 8 Canales de audio del 1 al 8 CH 9 16 Canales de audio del 9 al 16 INST 1 8 Canales de instrumento VST del 1 al 8 GRP 1 8 Canales de grupo del 1 al 8 305 Control del software Secci n de control m ster Botones de cursor CURSOR CSIL JC 74 TIME Estos botones desempefian las siguientes funciones gd gt Bot n Funci n SEK A Desplazarse hacia arriba Y Desplazarse hacia abajo WINDOW s l A d Desplazarse a la izquierda EFFECTS NEU GER Desplazarse a la derecha LOCATOR COMMAND LEFT RIGHT COPY PASTE CJC Botones de funci n SETI SETA UNDO SAVE MEMORY V LINK s pl Bot n Funci n ANALOG ep DIGITAL MIXER Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Channel Mixer MED SOURCE MONITOR EFFECTS Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Send Effect INST Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Instruments INPUTS Abrir cerrar la ventana VST Inputs
425. perazione valida per entrambi i sistemi Sezione Track Control Pro TOOLS INPUT 122 PEAK 1 aN nN DS aN nN CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED REC RDY ORANGE AUTO Fader delle tracce I fader controllano il volume del mixer E possibile controllare le otto tracce del bank di tracce selezionato Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore per cambiare bank delle tracce Master fader Il master fader non utilizzato Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Questi pulsanti permettono di cambiare lo stato della traccia Modalita Stato del pulsante Funzione SELECT MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva l esclusione audio della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato REC RDY RED Attiva disattiva la registrazione della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato AUTO ORANGE Tenere premuto questo pulsante e utilizzare il pulsante AUTO MODE per cambiare l impostazione automation della traccia Manopole di controllo delle tracce TRACK HQ CONTROL Queste manopole controllano le funzioni Pan Send 1 level e Send 2 level della traccia Utilizzare il pulsante Assign per selezionare Pan Send 1 level o Send 2 level Il valore aumenta quando la manopola di controllo della traccia viene ruotata verso
426. permanent hearing loss make sure to put them in a safe place out of Damage to speakers or other system components children s reach so there is no chance of them may result being swallowed accidentally e Always turn the phantom power off when connecting any device other than condenser microphones that require phantom power You risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply phantom power to dynamic microphones audio playback devices or other devices that don t require such power Be sure to check the specifi cations of any microphone you intend to use by referring to the manual that came with it This instrument s phantom power DC 48 V DC 10 mA Max IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 2 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it f
427. petidas veces uy durante el rebobinado ste ser cada vez m s lento hasta detenerse Avanzar la canci n r pidamente Si presiona repetidas veces este bot n el rebobinado ir cada vez m s r pido Por el contrario si presiona repetidas veces EI durante el avance r pido ste ser cada vez m s lento hasta detenerse Detener todas las funciones de reproducci n Presi nelo otra vez para volver al principio de la canci n Reproducir desde la posici n actual en la canci n Iniciar la grabaci n Control del software Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 Conjunto de memoria Debe utilizar USR4 Manteniendo pulsado el bot n MEMORY de la unidad UR 80 presione el bot n de Track Status USR4 E Configuraci n en ProTools LE 1 En el menu Setups elija Peripherals 2 Haga clic en MIDI Controllers 3 Configure MIDI Controllers de la siguiente manera Windows Macintosh Type Receive From Send To Type Receive From Send To HUI EDIROL UR 80 1 EDIROL UR 80 HUI UR 80 1 UR 80 1 E Configuraci n en Digital Performer 1 En el men Basics seleccione Control Surface Setup Si la pantalla indica Press to add a Driver to your Configuration haga clic en la tecla 2 3 En Driver Hardware en la versi n 3 1 o anterior seleccione HUI 4 En MIDI MIDI Communication en la versi n 3 1 o anterior seleccione UR
428. pin plug Information When you need repair service call your nearest EDIROL Roland Service Center or authorized EDIROL Roland distributor in your country as shown below EDIROL EUROPE EDIROL Europe Ltd Studio 3 4 114 Power Road London W4 5PY U K TEL 44 0 20 8747 5949 FAX 44 0 20 8747 5948 http www edirol com europe Deutschland TEL 0700 33 47 65 20 France TEL 0810 000 371 Italia TEL 02 93778329 U S A CANADA EDIROL Corporation North America 425 Sequoia Drive Suite 114 Bellingham WA 98226 U S A TEL 360 594 4276 FAX 360 594 4271 http www edirol com Roland EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street ARD EI Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chao
429. pling Sample Rate scott Ee 321 Interruptor de selecci n impedancia de entrada 323 Interruttore di alimentazione 222 389 J Jack de auriculares i 290 Jacks de entrada 1 2 289 Jacks de entrada digital ee 289 Jacks de salida digital EEN 289 Jacks de salida master i 290 JOU de SONS ai ia 164 JOG dial cias 46 50 JOG manopolar uan hi 244 248 JOG Drehknopf nn 112 116 K Kontrollk stchen H ACTIVITY in 141 Kopfh rer Buchse ss 92 L Taten iia aaa 196 L tence audio cit ers 196 US ins sin dah Seren tie Bites edits me do 64 EE 130 Latenza 4A un reale ion Ee ee re i 262 Latenza audio ena 262 Lista de par metros 334 335 Liste des param tres 202 203 M Main panties iii 17 MASTER da 20 86 152 218 284 Master Control section 21 35 45 50 Master Control sezione 219 233 243 248 Master EE A 86 Master fade it Ai 20 Master output jacks i 26 Master Ausgangsbuchsen 92 MEMORY sis times 22 88 154 220 286 Memory Set fase lll ale EE 98 memory set Mensaje Bank Select Selecci n de banco 341 Mensaje Channel Pressure Presi n de canal 341 Mensaje Control Change Cambio de control 341 Mensaje Note Nota E 341 Mensaje Pitch Bend Variaci n de tono 341 Mensaje Polyphoni
430. po de recuperaci n de datos de audio 328 Puede modificar la configuraci n del controlador para ajustar el tiempo de recuperaci n de los datos de audio Para ajustar el tiempo de recuperaci n de datos modifique el Buffer Size en el cuadro de di logo Driver Settings El tiempo de recuperaci n de datos es el tiempo que transcurre desde que una aplicaci n reproduce datos de audio hasta que se oye el sonido desde un aparato de audio como la unidad UR 80 1 Tal como se describe en el apartado Apertura del cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del controlador p g 329 abra el cuadro de di logo Configuraci n del controlador 2 Ajuste el tama o del b fer del controlador Con la siguiente configuraci n se conseguir el tiempo de recuperaci n de datos m s corto Windows Establezca el Audio Buffer Size el m ximo posible a la izquierda posible Min Macintosh Establezca el Buffer Size el m ximo posible a la izquierda Min 3 Haga clic en OK para cerrar el cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del controlador 4 Reinicie la aplicaci n que est utilizando la unidad UR 80 Si la aplicaci n que utiliza cuenta con una funci n para comprobar los aparatos de audio ejec tela para que realice las pruebas pertinentes 5 Reproduzca los datos en la aplicaci n Si se producen interrupciones en el sonido repita el procedimiento y aumente gradualmente el tama o del b fer especificado en el paso 2 ha
431. po fono einterruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling Input monitor level gt SHIFT button Disp ngalo en la misma frecuencia de sampling que la seleccionada para el software de grabaci n lnterruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada Disp ngalo en Lo Z Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para ajustar el nivel de entrada utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para conseguir la m xima calidad de sonido utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada para establecer el nivel de entrada en el m ximo valor posible sin que se ilumine el indicador de pico de entrada interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Gire el interruptor de monitoraje de entrada Input Monitor y ajuste el nivel de monitoraje de entrada para la se al del teclado El nivel de grabaci n no se ver afectado Para ajustar el volumen de monitoraje de entrada pulse el bot n SHIFT y manteni ndolo presionado gire el dial TIME Bot n de grabaci n de fuente Disp ngalo en ANALOG posici n no iluminada Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de entrada 324 Grabaci n de audio Grabaci n de un aparato de audio Stereo set cassette deck lt Connect to H INPUT 1 L and INPUT ane Set the sampling 2 R sec 4 frequency u Adjust the EDIROL UR 80 input level 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM H Turn input
432. port Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction Activation d sactivation du mode Scrub Retour en arri re de la chanson Appuyez plusieurs fois sur ce bouton pour acc l rer le rebobinage Inversement appuyez sur Edpour ralentir et arr ter le rebobinage Avance rapide de la chanson Appuyez plusieurs fois sur ce bouton pour acc l rer l avance rapide Inversement appuyez sur or ralentir et arr ter l avance rapide Arr t de toutes les fonctions de transport Appuyez nouveau sur ce bouton pour revenir au d but de la chanson Lecture partir de la position actuelle de la chanson D but de l enregistrement 178 Pro Tools LE Digital Performer 3 Jeu de sons Utilisez USR4 Maintenez enfonc le bouton MEMORY de 1 UR 80 et appuyez sur le bouton Track Status USR4 E e E R glages de ProTools LE u 1 Dans le menu Setups s lectionnez Peripherals 2 Cliquez sur MIDI Controllers 3 R glez les MIDI Controllers comme suit Windows Macintosh Type Receive From Send To Type Receive From Send To z HUI EDIROL UR 801 EDIROL UR 80 HUI UR 801 UR 80 1 rd i ABER H E R glages de Digital Performer 1 Dans le menu Basics selectionnez Control Surface Setup 2 Si l ecran indique Press to add a Driver to your Configuration Appuyez sur pour ajouter un Pilote a
433. porta CTRL IN del software sar SEE possibile utilizzare il fader e i tasti per le operazioni di mixaggio nel software e le manopole per k l editing nel sintetizzatore software A La destinazione di uscita dei messaggi MIDI inviati quando si azionano fader manopole e tasti d dell UR 80 pu essere configurata in modo separato per ogni controllo Utilizzare l UR 80 Editor per attribuire il messaggio e la destinazione di uscita dei controlli Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento alla sezione UR 80 Editor pag 271 229 Utilizzo del software E possibile assegnare i messaggi MIDI alle manopole ai fader e ai pulsanti dell UR 80 L insieme di queste assegnazioni di messaggi MIDI rappresenta un patch di memoria Nella memoria interna dell UR 80 sono memorizzati otto patch di memoria diversi All uscita dalla fabbrica l apparecchio e impostato sul patch di memoria PRESET Cambio di patch di memoria Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY e premere il pulsante TRACK STATUS per selezionare un patch di memoria EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM Patch di memoria Memoria Descrizione Questo patch di memoria e quello di base dell UR 80 Non possibile sovrascriverlo PRESET Utilizzare questo patch di memoria per non cambiare i messaggi dell UR 80 e effettuare le assegnazioni a partire dal software Questo il patch da utilizzare
434. ptions selezionare MIDI Clock Sync per visualizzare un segno di spunta accanto all opzione e Attivare il pulsante MIDI SYNC ENABLE di trasporto Reason MIDI SYNC MIDI SYNC L ENABLE mit Utilizzo del trasporto Reason Se e stato attivato MIDI Clock Sync le operazioni Play Stop si svolgeranno come segue Le operazioni di avvolgimento Rewind o avanzamento Forward non sono accessibili quando attivo MIDI Clock Sync Controllo UR 80 Controllo UR 80 Trasporto Reason ua Stop interrompi SHIFT SHIFT ai Play riproduci E Impostazioni MIDI Remote Mapping I messaggi di controllo MIDI a scopo generale verranno assegnati ai pulsanti funzione e al pulsante TRACK GROUP dell UR 80 possibile assegnare questi controlli ai parametri desiderati del programma Reason Nel menu Options selezionare Edit MIDI Remote Mapping per attivare l opzione Dopo aver selezionato un modulo Reason verr visualizzata una freccia verde per i controlli assegnabili Selezionare un controllo 3 Verr visualizzata la finestra di dialogo MIDI Remote selezionare Learn from MIDI Input Premere il pulsante TRACK GROUP o il pulsante funzione che si desidera associare al controllo selezionato 5 Fare clic sul pulsante OK nella finestra di dialogo MIDI Remote dialog Ripetere i passaggi 2 5 Alla fine delle operazioni di configurazione scegliere Enable MIDI Remote Mapping nel menu Options per dis
435. que contr leur s affiche dans la fen tre principale comme suit Cette m thode est pratique lorsque vous r alisez des affectations ou que vous voulez lt v rifier l ensemble des affectations E E 0 EDIROL UR 80 Editor preset mid k TITLE O mactiviry NIT MESSAGE EDIT d Ci Eenannl 211 UR 80 Editor Memory Set Initial Message E Sp cification du Memory Set Initial Message a oe m Pour chaque jeu de sons de l UR 80 vous pouvez sp cifier un Memory Set Initial Message qui sera transmis lors de la s lection de ce jeu de sons Le Memory Set Initial Message est un message MIDI jusqu a 48 octets Les caract res sp ciaux comme DT utilis dans un Free Message ne peuvent pas tre utilis s dans un Memory Set Initial Message Dans la fen tre Main appuyez sur le bouton Edit situ a droite de la section INIT MESSAGE La boite de dialogue Initial Message s affiche Utilisez la zone de texte pour entrer votre Memory Set Initial Message Utilisez le champ Output Port pour sp cifier le port a partir duquel le Memory Set Initial Message doit tre transmis Une fois les param tres r gl s cliquez sur OK E Activation du Memory Set Initial Message 212 Si le Memory Set Initial Message est activ le message MIDI que vous avez sp cifi comme d crit pr c demment est transmis lorsque vous s lectionnez ce jeu de sons Pour activer le Memory Set I
436. quired by USB device UR 80 Search for a driver on the Internet If this message appears click Cancel You will be able to use only the UR 80 s audio functionality You cannot use UR 80 Editor in Standard Driver Mode 348 Memory sets The parameters assigned to each controller are listed below For details on how to edit these settings refer to Controlling your software p 32 PRESET MEMORY SONAR PARAMETER LIST USR1 MEMORY Cubase SX PARAMETER LIST USR2 MEMORY Cubase VST PARAMETER LIST n p 355 USR3 MEMORY Logic PARAMETER LIST NNN p 358 USR4 MEMORY Pro Tools LE Digital Performer PARAMETER LIST p 361 USR5 MEMORY Reason PARAMETER LIST USR6 MCR 8 Mode4 A 1 8 PARAMETER LIST NNN USR7 MCR 8 Mode4 B 9 16 PARAMETER LIST PRESET MEMORY SONAR PARAMETER LIST INITIAL MESSAGE BE 7F 7F PORT 2 H ACTIVITY OFF PARAMETER OUTPUT RANGE CH PORT MODE MESSAGE TRACK CONTROL 1 PAN Track 1 Pan CC 72 48 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 2 PAN Track 2 Pan CC 73 49 0400 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 3 PAN Track 3 Pan CC 74 4A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 4 PAN Track 4 Pan CC 75 4B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 5 PAN Track 5 Pan CC 76 4C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 6 PAN Track 6 Pan CC 77 4D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 TRACK CONTROL 7 PAN Track 7
437. r Settings Enalieh 2 Impostare i seguenti parametri Selezionare la casella di controllo Use ASIO Direct Monitor 3 Fare clic su OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni del driver A seconda dell applicazione utilizzata tra le impostazioni audio potrebbe essercene una relativa a ASIO Direct Monitor Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento al manuale utente del software Quando si utilizza ASIO Direct Monitor il monitoraggio potrebbe attivarsi o disattivarsi inaspettatamente a seconda delle impostazioni dell applicazione e della procedura di registrazione In questo caso deselezionare la casella di controllo al passo 2 per disattivare ASIO Direct Monitor Darntenh Apertura della finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni del driver Se si utilizza Windows Y 1 Nel Pannello di controllo fare doppio clic su EDIROL UR 80 2 Verr visualizzata la finestra di dialogo EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings In Windows XP fare clic su Passa alla visualizzazione classica per attivare la visualizzazione classica EDIROL UR 80 verra visualizzato solo dopo aver attivato la visualizzazione classica x a i u In Windows Me fare clic su Visualizza tutte le opzioni del Pannello di controllo Se si utilizza Macintosh Aprire il pannello di controllo ASIO nella finestra di dialogo Audio Settings dell applicazione ASIO compatibile Il nome della finestra di dialogo Audio Se
438. r cambiare l EQ Gain da regolare TRACK Regola i parametri della traccia di ogni canale Utilizzare i pulsanti cursore sinistro destro per passare da un parametro all altro WINDOW ARRANGE Attiva disattiva la visualizzazione della finestra Arrangement MIXER Attiva disattiva la visualizzazione della finestra Track Mixer UNDO Annulla l operazione di modifica precedente SAVE Salva il brano corrente in un file I pulsanti tra parentesi quadre dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT 243 Enalieh Naritenh k G 6 a u Eenannl Utilizzo del software Manopola JOG Ruotare la manopola per spostare la linea di posizionamento nel brano SPL Se e attiva la 244 modalita Scrub e possibile usare la manopola per la riproduzione scrub Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni Pulsante Funzione Attiva disattiva la modalita Scrub Riavvolge il brano Premere ripetutamente questo pulsante durante il riavvolgimento per accelerare l operazione Premere invece H urante il riavvolgimento per rallentare e interrompere guesta operazione Avanza rapidamente il brano Premere ripetutamente questo pulsante durante l avanzamento rapido per accelerare l operazione Premere invece Eaurante l avanzamento rapido per rallentare e interrompere questa operazione Interrompe tutte le funzioni di trasporto Premere di nuovo per tornare
439. r le d sactiver Pour que le curseur du volume g n ral puisse toujours r gler le volume g n ral il transmet le message affect par le jeu de sons s lectionn p 349 quel que soit le mode s lectionn M me en mode Edition Synth la commande d att nuation MASTER ne regle pas le volume g n ral du synth tiseur logiciel En mode Edition Synth le port depuis lequel les messages MIDI sont transmis est EDIROL UR 80 1 par d faut Vous pouvez utiliser l Editeur UR 80 pour modifier le port de sortie Pour plus de d tails reportez vous a la section Editeur UR 80 p 205 E Commandes d att nuation Track Ces commandes r glent le volume de chaque canal Vous pouvez r gler les canaux 1 16 en actionnant le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes E Bouton d affectation ASSIGN Ce bouton s lectionne les param tres qui peuvent tre r gl s par les boutons de r glage de pistes Appuyez successivement sur le bouton d affectation pour faire d filer les choix disponibles PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 gt HQ Bouton d affectation Parametre PAN Panoramique SEND1 Transmission de r verb ration SEND2 Transmission de chorus HQ Param tre de canal 200 Mode Edition Synth E Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons reglent les param tres du panoramique de la transmission de r verb ration de la transmission d
440. ra el aparato conectado al jack de entrada 1 Si conecta una guitarra al jack de entrada 1 disponga el interruptor en la impedancia alta Hi Z Interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma PHANTOM POWER Se trata de un interruptor que sirve para conectar o desconectar la alimentaci n fantasma que se suministra a los jacks de entrada 1 y 2 de tipo XLR La alimentaci n fantasma debe estar desactivada a no ser que conecte un micr fono electroest tico que la exija Pueden producirse anomal as en el funcionamiento si suministra alimentaci n fantasma a un micr fono din mico o a un aparato de reproducci n de audio Para obtener informaci n detallada sobre las caracter sticas de su micr fono consulte el manual del usuario del micr fono La alimentaci n fantasma de la unidad UR 80 proporciona un m ximo de 10 mA a 48 V de CC Ranura de seguridad Ri http www kensington com Panel lateral 28 29 Jacks de salida m ster tipo fono RCA Se trata de jacks de salida de audio anal gico Puede conectarlos con el sistema de altavoces externos de monitoraje Jack de auriculares En este jack puede conectar unos auriculares El jack de auriculares emitir la misma se al que los jacks de salida m ster y los jacks de salida digital Los jacks de salida m ster continuar n emitiendo la se al de salida aunque tenga los auriculares conectados Utilice el control giratorio de volumen de salida de la secci n de
441. rada 322 Grabaci n de audio Grabaci n desde un micr fono Connect to INPUT 1 L orf f Seen a Set the sampling INPUT 2 R ssec Wal frequency lt Turn ON if z you have connected a u condenser mic en Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately lt Input monitor level gt SHIFT button E 8 TIME dial Adjust the q volume C Set REC SOURCE to ANALOG unlit OConexiones El sonido de un micr fono conectado al jack de entrada 1 se grabar en el canal izquierdo y el sonido de un micr fono conectado al jack de entrada 2 se grabar en el canal derecho i interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling Ki Disp ngalo en la misma frecuencia de sampling que la seleccionada para el software de grabaci n k lnterruptor de selecci n de impedancia de entrada Disp ngalo en Lo Z u lnterruptor de alimentaci n fantasma Si utiliza un micr fono electrost tico encienda el interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma Phantom Power Si conecta un aparato que no exige alimentaci n fantasma debe desactivar el interruptor de alimentaci n fantasma De no hacerlo se producir n anomal as en el funcionamiento Control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para ajustar el nivel de entrada utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entrada Para conseguir C la m xima calidad de sonido utilice el control giratorio de sensibilidad de entra
442. rd die bertragung von MIDI Timing Clock F8 ein ausgeschaltet Wenn Sie die SHIFT Schaltflache dr cken zeigt die LED den F8 Ein Aus Status nicht den V LINK Ein Aus Status REC SOURCE Schaltet das Eingangssignal um das via USB an den Computer als Aufnahmequelle gesendet wird ANALOG LED Es werden nur die Signale aus den Eingangsbuchsen zum unbeleuchtet Computer gesendet DIGITAL LED beleuchtet nn nn aus den Digitaleingangsbuchsen koaxial ptisch wird zum Computer gesendet werden INPUT MONITOR LEVEL SHIFT TIME W hlt aus ob das Eingangssignal das ber die Eingangsbuchsen 1 2 und Digitaleingangsbuchse eingegeben wird zu der Kopfh rerbuchse und zu den Master Ausgangsbuchsen gesendet werden wird Verwenden Sie SHIFT TIME W hlscheibe um den Monitor Level anzupassen Die Eingabe berwachung kann mit Hilfe von ASIO 2 0 kompatibler Software wie z B Cubase aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden Wenn Sie den Input Monitor Level regeln wird der Aufnahmepegel nicht ver ndert Das Eingangssignal wird nicht ausgegeben werden Verwenden Sie diese Einstellung wenn Sie die Audiodaten innerhalb Ihres Computers durchreichen oder wenn Sie einen Mixer angeschlossen haben und den Mixer einsetzen um das Eingangssignal direkt f r die berwachung zu nutzen OFF LED unbeleuchtet Das Eingangssignal wird stereo ausgegeben werden STEREO LED Verwenden Sie diese Einstellung
443. re EDIROL UR 80 come controllo esterno Control Surfaces m Connected Surfaces Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 Na terh k a u 3 Specificare In Port e Out Port Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 MEMO Per maggiori informazioni su SONAR fare riferimento al manuale del programma Eenannl 231 Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Sezione Track Control Fader delle tracce Controllano il volume delle tracce Questi fader utilizzati insieme al pulsante di selezione Track Group permettono di controllare 32 tracce Master fader Controlla il volume dell uscita virtuale principale possibile scegliere l uscita principale virtuale da controllare nella finestra di dialogo Setting del plug in UR 80 Control Surface Per maggiori informazioni consultare la guida in linea del plug in UR 80 Control Surface Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Cambiano lo stato delle tracce Questi pulsanti utilizzati insieme al pulsante di selezione Track Group permettono di controllare 32 tracce Modalit Stato del pulsante Funzione SELECT MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva l esclusione audio della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattivato non illuminato SOLO GREEN Attiva disattiva la funzione Solo della traccia Attivato illuminato Disattiv
444. re ordinateur E R glages de Cubase SX 1 2 3 4 10 168 Dans le menu Devices s lectionnez Device Setup Cliquez sur l onglet Add Remove Dans la liste des Device Classes s lectionnez Generic Remote et cliquez sur Add Dans le champ Devices s lectionnez Generic Remote que vous avez ajout l tape 3 puis cliquez sur l onglet Setup Cliquez sur Import S lectionnez EDIROL UR 80 pour SX xml que vous avez copi pr c demment puis cliquez sur Open Sp cifiez le MIDI Input et le MIDI Output MIDI Input MIDI Output EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 Dans le champ Devices de la bo te de dialogue Device Setup s lectionnez All MIDI Inputs Dans la zone Devices de l onglet Setup cliquez sur le champ EDIROL UR 80 2 Active et r glez le sur No Sans ce r glage les messages MIDI transmis partir de l UR 80 seront renvoy s vers les pistes MIDI Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la bo te de dialogue Contr le de votre logiciel E Fonctions affect es aux contr leurs Fixez les tiquettes Cubase SX sur la feuille de mod le jointe L explication ci dessous suit ces r glages CUBASE SX INPUT 192 d PEAK 1 SE win m mue WE e mr ur ger Leki O PAN z z Y dij We mE win wae we Cd Y O SENDA AS OSO _0G O SEND2 u e 4 x 4 v 4 MI 4 v 4 v 4 v 4 v 4 x z y CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE Q H
445. registrement de pistes MIDI le port MIDI IN et le port d entr e MIDI utilis pour contr ler le logiciel le port CTRL IN Software synthesizer IIN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port Sequencer software En principe vous connectez votre clavier MIDI au port MIDI Track Record on tracks IN et vous l utilisez pour enregistrer votre partie sur des pistes THRU ou pour utiliser la fonction MIDI Thru de votre logiciel pour jouer des modules de sons ou des synth tiseurs faibles La signification des messages MIDI envoy s ici leur est affect e par la sp cification MIDI En d autres termes lorsque vous jouez sur le clavier les messages de note sont transmis et enregistres sur la piste et le module de sons qui recoit ces messages produit des sons Sequencer software En revanche les donn es recues du port CTRL IN sont utilis es mas SE D aa pour faire fonctionner votre logiciel de la m me mani re que THRU les donn es provenant de la souris ou du clavier de votre ordinateur elles ne sont pas enregistr es sur les pistes ou synthesizer Ni S renvoy es vers votre module de sons ou synth tiseur faible MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port Les messages MIDI envoy s ici sont interpr t s d une mani re completement diff rente de celle d finie dans la sp cification M
446. resonance lt VIB RATE Vibrato rate VIB DEPTH Vibrato depth t VIB DELAY Vibrato delay ATTACK Attack time DECAY Decay time RELEASE Release time Use the track status buttons and the track group select button to select the channel you want to control Y E Track group select button TRACK GROUP 6 This button switches the group of channels 1 8 9 16 whose parameters will be controlled D u E Track status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART When HQ is selected by the assign button these buttons select the channel whose parameters will be controlled by the track control knobs Use these buttons in conjunction with the track group select button C E k D a H u 69 Synth Edit mode E Parameter list Output port EDIROL UR 80 1 default setting Message HEX Range HEX Ch CH 1 9 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F
447. ri MIDI IN OUT Collegare questi connettori ai connettori MIDI di altri dispositivi MIDI per inviare e ricevere messaggi MIDI Interruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento SAMPLE RATE Questo interruttore permette di selezionare la frequenza di campionamento alla quale il segnale audio verr registrato e riprodotto Se i parametri di questo interruttore vengono modificati necessario chiudere tutte le applicazioni spegnere l UR 80 e riaccenderlo Se si utilizza la frequenza di campionamento 96 kHz non possibile registrare e riprodurre contemporaneamente Sar necessario scegliere tra la registrazione 96 REC e la riproduzione 96 PLAY Connettore USB Utilizzare un cavo USB per collegare l apparecchio al computer Parti e relative funzioni 22 Uscite digitali Utilizzare queste prese per trasmettere segnali audio digitali a un dispositivo audio digitale come un CD MD DAT 23 Ingressi digitali Utilizzare queste prese per ricevere i segnali audio digitali provenienti da un dispositivo audio digitale come un CD MD DAT o da un modulo sonoro MIDI provvisto di un uscita digitale Enalieh Se un dispositivo digitale e collegato al connettore ottico OPTICAL questo diventerd prioritario e i segnali provenienti dalle prese coassiali non verranno ricevuti Ricordarsi di utilizzare un cavo adatto alla presa di uscita o d ingresso digitale utilizzata COAXIAL Cavo coassiale OPTICAL Cavo ottico Il forma
448. ricezione di questo valore comporta lo spegnimento del LED Per il LED reception message il valore ON value sar Max Value La ricezione di questo valore comporta l accensione del LED Per RPN o NRPN la casella di controllo Send LSB non visualizzata Digitare un commento se necessario nel campo Comment Fare clic su OK 276 UR 80 Editor E Controllo dei messaggi MIDI assegnati E possibile controllare i messaggi MIDI assegnati in uno dei seguenti modi 1 Metodo e Nel menu File selezionare View assign list Tutti i parametri dei messaggi MIDI assegnati ai controlli verranno visualizzati in formato HTML ri Questo sistema particolarmente indicato per verificare determinati dati o per un controllo finale E Quando si seleziona il comando Export assign list nel menu File l elenco dei parametri verra d esportato salvato in formato HTML 2 Metodo e Nel menu Options selezionare Show Messages Nella finestra principale verr visualizzato un riassunto dei messaggi MIDI assegnati a ogni controllo come illustrato in figura Questo sistema e particolarmente utile per effettuare le assegnazioni o per controllarle lt H H ec EDIROL UR 80 Editor preset mid TITLE l mactivirY V INIT MESSAGE EDIT k d y H u K e 7 u 277 UR 80 Editor Messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria E Indicazione di un messaggio iniziale per patch di memor
449. richten zugewiesen werden eine fiir jeden Status der Schaltfl che Assign PAN SEND 1 SEND 2 Das bedeutet dass Sie den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen insgesamt 24 verschiedene Nachrichten zuweisen k nnen In der Regel werden Sie diese Kn pfe verwenden um Panorama oder Effect Send in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm zu steuern Schaltflache Assign ASSIGN Diese Schaltfl che schaltet die Nachrichten um die den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen zugewiesen sind Wenn Sie die Schaltflache Assign driicken k nnen Sie eine dieser Optionen wahlen PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Bezeichnungen und Funktionen TRACK STATUS EM PART 0000010 P GD ED fuse 2 ED ED ED LH een eeng ES Sen H u 3 Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART me Sie k nnen jeder dieser acht Schaltfl chen MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen Sie k nnen auch der LED jeder Schaltfl che MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen und die LEDs von Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm aus aktivieren deaktivieren Sie k nnen jeder Schaltfl che und jeder LED vier verschiedene Nachrichten zuweisen eine f r jeden Status der Select Schaltfl che Off Aus Green Gr n Red Rot Orange Das bedeutet dass Sie den Track Status Schaltfl chen insgesamt 32 MIDI Nachrichten und den LEDs 32 MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen k nnen Normalerweise verwenden Sie diese Schaltfl chen um den Spurstatus Track Status in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm umzuschalten z B stumm Solo 4 Auswahlschaltflache SELECT
450. rol Panel and double click EDIROL UR 80 2 The EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings dialog box will appear 6 In Windows XP click Switch to classic view to switch the display to the classic view EDIROL UR H 80 will not be displayed unless the classic view is selected f i In Windows Me click View all Control Panel options u If using Macintosh Open the ASIO Control Panel from the Audio Settings dialog box of your ASIO compatible application The name of the Audio Settings dialog box and the procedure for opening the ASIO Control Panel will differ depending on your application For details refer to the operation manual for your application c d Ci lt i H u 65 MEMO Advanced operation 67 Synth Edit mode When you turn on the HQ GM2 button located in the Master Control area the Track Control section will operate in Synth Edit mode Synth Edit mode lets you edit the parameters of the included Hyper Canvas high quality software synthesizer Since the parameters are controlled by transmitting GM2 compatible MIDI messages you can also use this mode to control any MIDI device that responds to GM2 MIDI messages When you want to return to controlling your sequencer software press the HQ GM2 button once again to turn it off So that the master fader will always be able to control the overall volume it will transmit the message assigned by the selected Memory Set p 349 regard
451. rol Panel to open the Control Panel 2 In Control Panel double click System to open the System Properties dialog box In Windows XP click Device Manager in the Hardware tab Click the Device Manager tab Double click System Devices to display the list of devices From the list select Advanced Power Management Support Then click Properties to open the Advanced Power Management Support Properties dialog box 6 Click the Settings tab and in Troubleshooting place a check in the check box for Don t Poll Power Supply Status Then click OK 7 In the System Properties dialog box click OK 8 Restart Windows You can solve this problem in the EDIROL UR 80 Driver Settings dialog box For details refer to the section Something is wrong with playback sound is interrupted or notes are missing within the Readme_e file located in the folder in which you installed the CD ROM Depending on the virtual memory setting or network related settings noise may occur Please make the following settings before use only Macintosh user 1 In Chooser of the Apple menu set AppleTalk to Inactive This setting is not changed as a result of turning off AppleTalk as requested by OMS when sequencer software is started up You must change the setting yourself using the Chooser In the Memory Control Panel set Virtual Memory to Off Depending on the way in which you connect to the Internet use the UR 80 with the
452. rolli che possono essere utilizzati insieme al pulsante SHIFT Quando si passa sui controlli 4 7 il cursore del mouse cambia forma per indicare quelli che possono essere selezionati UR 80 Editor Impostazioni dei controlli E Messaggi MIDI che possono essere assegnati ai controlli Messaggio Spiegazione Parametri assegnabili NO ASSIGN Annullamento dell assegnazione Questo controllo non trasmette messaggi Channel Message Note Assegna un messaggio Note MIDI Channel Note Number Velocity Ch Pressure Assegna un messaggio Channel Pressure MIDI Channel Mix Value Max Value Poly Key Pressure Assegna un messaggio Polyphonic Key Pressure MIDI Channel Note Number Min Value Max Value Control Change Assegna un messaggio Control Change MIDI Channnel Control Number Min Value Max Value Pitch Bend Change Assegna un messaggio Pitch Bend MIDI Channnel Min Value Max Value Program Change Assegna un messaggio Program Change Il valore del numero Program compreso tra 1 e 128 MIDI Channel Mix Value Max Value Bank Program Change Assegna un messaggio Bank Select e un messaggio Program Change Il valore del messaggio Bank Select fisso Il valore del numero Program compreso tra 1 e 128 MIDI Channnel Bank MSB Bank LSB Min Value Max Value RPN Assegna un Registered Parameter Number
453. rt point punch in PRE DP Set the current position as the Loop Play Start point PT Switch pre roll on off OUT Set the current position as the Auto Record End point punch in POST DP Set the current position as the Loop Play End point PT Switch post roll on off UNDO Undo the previously executed operation EDIT DP Open the Nudge window MODE PT Switch the edit mode SAVE Save the current project in a file EDIT TOOL DP Open the Track window PT Switch the Edit tool Button names in square brackets indicate that you press the button while holding down the SHIFT button JOG dial If the Scrub function is on turning the dial will move the cursor Transport buttons These buttons perform the following functions Button Function Turn the Scrub function on off Rewind the cursor Fast forward the cursor Stop playback recording Start playback Start recording 50 Controlling your software Reason Memory set Use USR5 Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press the Track Status button USR5 Software Reason version 2 0 or later is required E MIDI port settings 1 From the Edit menu choose Preferences 2 In Page choose Advanced MIDI 3 Make the following MIDI port settings Any one of Bus A D EDIROL UR 80 1 Remote Control EDIROL UR 80 2 MI
454. s oo ke CG Set the sampling D CD MD DAT player etc 7 Connect to either the OPTICAL or Match the sampling frequencies of your playback COAXIAL OUT as appropriate for software and your digital audio recording device u your device lt c H C OCollegamenti K Collegare alla presa di uscita digitale OPTICAL COAXIAL il cavo adatto k einterruttore di selezione della frequenza di campionamento S Impostare la stessa freguenza di campionamento nel software di riproduzione dei dati audio nell UR 80 e nel dispositivo di registrazione dei dati digitali ad esempio MD o DAT Note Non collegare alcun dispositivo agli ingressi non utilizzati L UR 80 non supporta i formati audio digitali professionali L UR 80 non in grado di inviare direttamente alle uscite digitali il segnale proveniente dai suoi ingressi Le uscite digitali inviano sempre solo il segnale audio trasmesso dal computer i D u 261 Registrazione audio Regolazione della latenza audio E possibile cambiare le impostazioni del driver per regolare la latenza dell audio Per regolare la latenza modificare le Buffer Size nella finestra di dialogo delle impostazioni del driver La latenza l intervallo di tempo che intercorre tra il momento in cui i dati audio vengono riprodotti da un applicazione e quello in cui sono emessi da un dispositivo audio come l UR 80 1 Come descritto nella sezione Apertura della finestra di d
455. s Kanals Verwenden Sie die Schaltflache Assign um den Parameter auszuw hlen Wenn PAN SEND1 oder SEND2 ausgew hlt ist lt Y Die Schaltkn pfe werden fiir jeden Kanal Panorama Reverb Send oder Chorus Send steuern Sie k nnen die Kan le 1 16 steuern indem Sie die Track Group Auswahlschaltflache driicken g u Wenn HQ ausgew hlt ist Die Schaltkn pfe werden die Kanalparameter steuern Sie k nnen die folgenden acht Parameter regeln Track Steuerungsschaltknopf Parameter CUTOFF Flankensteilheit RESONANCE Filter Resonanz VIB RATE Vibrato Rate VIB DEPTH Vibratotiefe VIB DELAY Vibratoverz gerung ATTACK Einschwingzeit DECAY Abklingzeit RELEASE Ausklingzeit Verwenden Sie die Track Status Schaltflachen und die Track Group Auswahlschaltflache um den Kanal auszuw hlen den Sie steuern m chten H 6 m E Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che TRACK GROUP Diese Schaltfl che schaltet die Gruppe der Kan le um 1 8 9 16 deren Parameter gesteuert werden E Track Status Schaltfl chen TRACK STATUS HQ PART Wenn HQ mit der Schaltfl che Assign ausgew hlt wird w hlen diese Schaltfl chen den Kanal dessen Parameter mit den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen gesteuert werden Verwenden Sie diese Schaltfl chen gemeinsam mit der Track Group Auswahlschaltfl che i da 6 x a H u 135 Synth Edit Modus E Parameterliste Ausgabeanschluss EDIROL UR 80 1 Stand
456. s no se guardar n en pistas o se transferir n al m dulo de sonido o sintetizador software Los mensajes MIDI enviados aqu se interpretan de manera totalmente diferente a la definida en la especificaci n MIDI sPor este motivo normalmente los mensajes de entrada del puerto de entrada de control CTRL IN se transfieren al m dulo de sonido o sintetizador software Por ejemplo aunque toque el teclado para enviar un mensaje de nota el software que reciba este mensaje no emitir la nota en lugar de eso puede que interprete el mensaje como que se ha presionado el bot n PLAY STOP El resultado final depender del software que utilice Sequencer software Track Record on tracks 00000000 Track gt Ome THRU Re Software synthesizer Y MIDI IN port MIDI OUT port CTRL IN port A A MIDI sound module UR 80 1 UR 80 2 CA EE Puesto que un mismo mensaje MIDI puede interpretarse de maneras muy distintas tal como se ha explicado antes el software le permite especificar el puerto MIDI IN y el puerto CTRL IN por separado para que se puedan diferenciar ambos tipos de puerto Si conecta la unidad UR 80 a trav s de USB puede seleccionar cualquiera de los dos puertos MIDI UR 80 1 o UR 80 2 como destino de salida para los mensajes MIDI generados por los atenuadores controles giratorios y botones de la unidad UR 80 En otras palabras al
457. se SX Pe N 10 234 Nel menu Devices selezionare Device Setup Fare clic sulla scheda Add Remove Nell elenco Device classes selezionare Generic Remote e fare clic su Add Nel campo Devices selezionare Generic Remote aggiunto al passo 3 e fare clic sulla scheda Setup Fare clic su Import Selezionare EDIROL UR 80 for SX xml copiato al passo precedente e fare clic su Open Specificare MIDI Input e MIDI Output MIDI Input MIDI Output EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 Nel campo Devices della finestra di dialogo Device Setup selezionare All MIDI Inputs Nella sezione Devices della scheda Setup fare clic sul campo EDIROL UR 80 2 Active e impostarlo su No Impostare questo parametro come illustrato per evitare che i messaggi MIDI trasmessi dall UR 80 vengano ritrasmessi alle tracce MIDI Fare clic sul pulsante OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Compilare il foglio template con i parametri Cubase SX Le spiegazioni fornite nelle pagine che seguono illustrano tali impostazioni CUBASE SX EE oi Fe e e e e O PAN gt a Sa lc la el gt A o sae d A d oN a oN a oN a oN a AN a oN a oN a oN a O SEND2 u z y CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE el HO TRACK STATUS EM PART SELECT ar Sei ei A O CL ei ox OFF MUTE GREEN SOLO RED READ ORANGE WRITE 9
458. ses de type XLR et de type jack ont une sensibilit d entr e diff rente comme indiqu ci dessous type XLR 50 10 dBu type jack 35 4 dBu Si vous connectez un appareil a faible niveau de sortie comme un micro nous vous recommandons d utiliser la prise jack de type XLR GND SLEEVE SH HOT TIP k H COLD RING T L UR 80 fournit des prises d entr e jack sym triques XLR TRS qui sont c bl es comme indiqu sur le sch ma Assurez vous que l appareil que vous connectez est correctement cable L alimentation fant me doit tre mise hors tension si vous n avez pas connect un micro condensateur ee n cessitant ce type d alimentation Des dysfonctionnements peuvent se produire dans le cas contraire branchement d un micro dynamique ou d un appareil de lecture audio par exemple Pour plus de d tails sur les caract ristiques de votre micro reportez vous sa documentation propre L alimentation fant me de V UR 80 fournit un maximum de 10 mA 48 V continu X Ne connectez pas simultan ment diff rents types de micros par exemple ne branchez pas un micro condensateur a alimentation fant me avec une prise jack 1 ou un micro dynamique avec une prise jack 2 d L alimentation fant me d un micro dynamique ou d un appareil de lecture audio peut produire des dysfonctionnements 157 25 27 x Commutateur d impedance INPUT 1 IMP Vous pouvez s lectionner soit haute impeda
459. signed MIDI messages Mensajes MIDI asignados del men Options Opciones 7 Bot n SHIFT Puede asignar mensajes MIDI a controladores utilizados en combinaci n con el bot n SHIFT En este caso la ventana s lo mostrar los controladores que pueden utilizarse en combinaci n con el bot n SHIFT En los controladores del 4 al 7 el cursor de rat n cambiar de forma para los que puedan utilizarse con el bot n SHIFT UR 80 Editor Configuraci n de controladores mensajes del Reloj de temporizaci n MIDI Utilice UR 80 Editor para especificar el destino de salida de los mensajes del reloj de temporizaci n Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el apartado Configuraci n del sistema p g 346 Max Tempo Tempo m ximo 341 E Mensajes MIDI que pueden asignarse a controladores Mensaje Explicaci n Par metros asignables lt NO ASSIGN Impide la asignaci n AI utilizar el controlador no se K transmitird ningun mensaje T Channel Message u Note Asigna un mensaje Note Nota MIDI Channel Canal MIDI Note Number N mero de nota Velocity Velocidad Ch Asigna un mensaje Channel Pressure Presi n de MIDI Channel Canal MIDD Pressure canal Min Value Valor m nimo Max Value Valor m ximo Poly Asigna un mensaje Polyphonic Key Pressure Presi n MIDI Channel Canal MIDI Note Key de teclado polif nico Number N
460. signed to the controllers will be displayed in HTML format This method is convenient when you need to see detailed data or for final checking When you choose the File menu command Export assign list the same parameter list will be output as an HTML file Method 2 e From the Options menu choose Show Messsages A summary of the MIDI messages assigned to each controller will be displayed in the main window as follows This method is convenient when you are making assignments or when you want to check the overall assignments JO EDIROL UR 80 Editor preset mid x D H E q C TITLE O mactivirY nit MESSAGE EDIT Erannaie Italiana Eenannl 79 Memory Set Initial Message E Specifying the Memory Set Initial Message For each of the UR 80 s memory sets you can specify a Memory Set Initial Message that will be transmitted when you select that memory set The Memory Set Initial Message is a MIDI message of up to 48 bytes Special characters such as DT used in Free Message cannot be used in a Memory Set Initial Message In the Main window press the Edit button located at the right of the INIT MESSAGE check box The Initial Message dialog box will appear Use the text area to input the desired Memory Set Initial Message R UON sa Use the Output Port field to specify the port from which the Memory Set Initial Message is to be transmitted m When you have finished mak
461. sition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law e When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument this unit can perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System SCMS This is Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks because the unit is intended solely for musical production of Microsoft Corporation and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works such as your own compositions that do not infringe on the copyrights of others SCMS is a feature that prohibits second generation and later copying through a digital connection It is built into MD recorders Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation and other consumer digital audio equipment as a Windows is known officially as Microsoft copyright protection feature Windows operating system e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party We assume no responsi Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of Apple Computer Inc third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
462. ssoci s et constituer les l ments expressifs d une performance Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton V LINK situ dans la section Master Control la section Track Control est en mode V LINK Lorsque l UR 80 entre en mode V LINK il transmet un message V LINK ON un message Sender Model Name nom du mod le de l exp diteur et un message V LINK Initialization initialisation V LINK Si vous appuyez nouveau sur le bouton V LINK l UR 80 transmet un message V LINK OFF et quitte le mode V LINK Le message d initialization de V LINK est un message MIDI jusqu a 255 octets Avec les r glages d usine le contenu de la Liste de param tres ci dessous est transmis en tant que message d initialisation de V LINK Vous pouvez utiliser UR 80 Editor pour modifier ce message Pour plus de d tails sur les r glages reportez vous l aide en ligne de UR 80 Editor E Liste des param tres En mode V LINK les messages suivants sont affect s Vous pouvez d finir le port de sortie dans UR 80 Editor Port de sortie EDIROL UR 80 1 r glage par d faut Message Plage HEX Canal Affectation par d faut 1 0 00 127 7F 16 Playback Speed Ctrl 2 CC 17 11 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cr Ctrl 3 CC 18 12 0 00 127 7F 16 Color Cb Ctrl Boutons de r glage 4 CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 16 Brightness Ctrl d
463. sta que no se produzcan m s interrupciones En funci n de la aplicaci n que utilice es posible que en la configuraci n del audio de la aplicaci n haya una funci n de ajuste del tama o del b fero del tiempo de recuperaci n de datos Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el manual de la aplicaci n Utilizaci n de ASIO Direct Monitor Si utiliza la unidad UR 80 desde una aplicaci n compatible con ASIO 2 0 el interruptor de selecci n de monitoraje de entrada Input Monitor de la unidad UR 80 se puede controlar desde la aplicaci n compatible con ASIO 2 0 1 Tal como se describe en el apartado Apertura del cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del controlador abra el cuadro de di logo Driver Settings Configuraci n del controlador Config relo de la siguiente manera Compruebe la casilla de verificaci n Use ASIO Direct Monitor Utilizaci n de ASIO Direct Monitor Haga clic en OK Aceptar para cerrar el cuadro de di logo de configuraci n del controlador En funci n de la aplicaci n es posible que en la configuraci n del audio de la aplicaci n haya una opci n de configuraci n de ASIO Direct Monitor Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el manual de la aplicaci n Si utiliza ASIO Direct Monitor es posible que el monitoraje se active desactive inesperadamente en funci n de la configuraci n de la aplicaci n y del procedimiento de grabaci n Si esto ocurre desmarque la casil
464. stellte Memory Set eingeben Sie miissen Single Byte Zeichen Englisch eingeben Die Eingabe von Doppel Byte Zeichen Japanisch wird nicht unterst tzt Der Namen den Sie hier eingeben wird auch in der HTML Datei angegeben die erstellt wird H wenn Sie einen Export assign list im Men File ausf hren e we 2 Kontrollk stchen H ACTIVITY H ACTIVITY wird fiir das UR 80 aktiviert wenn ein Memory Set dessen Kontrollk stchen H ACTIVITY mit H kchen versehen ist in das UR 80 geladen wird Aktivieren Sie diese Option wenn Sie spezifische Software einsetzen wie z B Pro Tools LE Wenn H ACTIVITY aktiviert ist wird vom Anschluss des UR 80 1 in Abst nden von ca 500 ms die Nachricht 90 00 7F tibertragen 3 Zuweisungsbereich INIT MESSAGE E 1 Hier k nnen Sie frei w hlen welche MIDI Nachricht bertragen wird wenn dieses Memory Set ausgew hlt wird N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie unter Memory Set Initial Message f m u S 146 141 UR 80 Editor 4 Controller Klicken Sie auf den Controller dem Sie eine MIDI Nachricht zuweisen m chten Wenn Sie auf einen Controller klicken ffnet sich das Fenster Message Assign S 144 5 Schaltflache Assign Hiermit werden die MIDI Nachrichten umgeschaltet die den Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfen zugewiesen sind Die Reihenfolge lautet PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Damit werden auch die Assigned MIDI Messages Zugewiesenen MIDI Nachrichten umgeschalte
465. stereo MONO LED lampeggiante SHIFT Questo pulsante va utilizzato insieme agli altri pulsanti della sezione Master Control Ipulsanti tra parentesi quadre ad esempio MIDI CLK dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT 220 Parti e relative funzioni E Sezione Audio Control INPUT 192 kA E E lt I u 13 Manopola di sensibilita dell input Questa manopola doppia permette di regolare il livello dell input degliingressi 1 e 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R L UR 80 dotato di ingressi di tipo XLR e mini jack per consentire il collegamento di vari tipi di apparecchi Si ricorda tuttavia che la sensibilit d ingresso di queste prese diversa La manopola interna regola il livello d ingresso della presa INPUT 1 L mentre quella esterna regola il livello INPUT 2 R ri Livelli d ingresso t XLR 50 10 dBu k Mini jack 35 4 dBu Se il dispositivo collegato un apparecchio con un output di livello basso ad esempio un microfono si consiglia di utilizzare l ingresso XLR er 14 Indicatori di picco PEAK Questi indicatori mostrano l eventuale distorsione del segnale trasmesso dagli ingressi 1 e 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R Regolare la manopola di sensibilit dell input in modo da evitare che LH gli indicatori si illuminino Gli indicatori di picco passano al rosso a 6 dB sotto la distorsione H clipping 6 u VOLUME 15 MY 15 Manopola del volume VOLUME
466. strucciones de la pantalla para instalar el software E Configuraci n en SONAR 1 2 3 En el men Options seleccione External Controllers En el cuadro de di logo External Controllers haga clic en el bot n Al y seleccione EDIROL UR 80 como controlador externo Control Surfaces m x Connected Surfaces Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 Especifique el In Port y el Out Port Control Surface In Port Out Port EDIROL UR 80 EDIROL UR 80 2 EDIROL UR 80 MEMO Para obtener m s informaci n sobre el funcionamiento de SONAR consulte el manual del usuario de SONAR Enalieh Naritenh Erannaie c s D 297 Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores Secci n de control de pistas Atenuadores de pista Controlan los vol menes de las pistas Utilizando estos atenuadores con el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas puede controlar 32 pistas Atenuador de volumen global Controla el volumen de canal virtual Puede elegir cu l es el canal virtual que desea controlar en el cuadro de di logo de configuraci n correspondiente al plug in de la superficie de control de la unidad UR 80 Para obtener informaci n detallada consulte la ayuda en l nea del plug in de la superficie de control de la unidad UR 80 Botones de estado de pista TRACK STATUS HQ PART Conmutan los estados de las pistas Utilizand
467. t die im Men Options angezeigt werden 6 Auswahlschaltfl che Hiermit wird die Zuweisung der Track Status Schaltfl chen in Reihenfolge von MUTE gt SOLO gt REC gt AUTO umgeschaltet Hiermit werden auch die Assigned MIDI messages zugewiesenen MIDI Nachrichten im Menii Options umgeschaltet 7 SHIFT Schaltfl che Sie k nnen Controllern Reglern die in Verbindung mit der SHIFT Schaltflache eingestellt werden MIDI Nachrichten zuweisen In diesem Fall werden im Fenster nur die Controller angezeigt die in Verbindung mit der SHIFT Schaltfl che eingestellt werden k nnen Bei den Controllern 4 7 ver ndert sich die Form des Cursors wenn er auf Controllern positioniert ist auf die geklickt werden kann 142 UR 80 Editor Controller Einstellungen E MIDI Nachrichten die Sie Controllern zuweisen k nnen Nachricht Erkl rung Zuweisbare Parameter NO ASSIGN Uberschreibt die Zuweisung Wenn Sie diesen Controller verstellen werden keine Nachrichten bertragen Channel Message Note Weist eine Notennachricht zu MIDI Channel Note Number Velocity Ch Pressure Weist eine Channel Pressure Nachricht zu MIDI Channel Mix Value Max Value Poly Weist eine Polyphonic Key Pressure Nachricht zu MIDI Channel Note Key Pressure Number Min Value Max Value Control Weist eine Control Change Nachricht zu MIDI Channel Control Change Number Min Value Max Value
468. t n de Track Status USR3 Software Es necesario Logic 5 versi n 5 5 o superior Enalieh Cada vez que inicie Logic debe seleccionar el conjunto de memoria para Logic en la propia unidad UR 80 E Configuraci n en Logic 1 Inicie Logic 2 Una vez se haya iniciado Logic seleccione el conjunto de memoria para Logic en la unidad UR 80 x Incluso si el conjunto de memoria para Logic ya est seleccionado en la unidad UR 80 debe seleccionar Darntenh el conjunto de memoria de Logic cada vez que inicie Logic 3 Si aparece la ventana Setup haga clic en el icono Logic Control que hay en la parte derecha de la ventana Si la ventana Setup no aparece prosiga por el paso 7 Erannaie 4 Enel area Logic Control a la izquierda de la ventana Setup configure Out Port de la siguiente manera Incluso aunque la pantalla ya indique los valores que se muestran a continuaci n vuelva a establecerlos Out Port EDIROL UR 80 para Windows o Mac OS X Out Port UR 80 1 para Mac OS 9 5 Cierre el cuadro de di logo Setup Seleccione otra vez el conjunto de memoria de Logic USR3 en la unidad UR 80 d 4 7 Si aparece un cuadro de di logo como el siguiente haga clic en Cancel Windows Macintosh Logic Platinum A newer firmware is available k 7 A for one or more Logic Control A newer firmware is available for one XT unit A or more Logic Control XT units units d Do you want to upl
469. t auszuw hlen EDIROL UR 80 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM um Memory Sets Speicher Inhalt Dies ist das Basis Memory Set des UR 80 Es kann nicht berschrieben werden Verwenden Sie PRESET dieses Memory Set wenn Sie die Nachrichten des UR 80 unver ndert lassen und Zuweisungen in Ihrer Software vornehmen Sie werden dieses Memory Set auch f r SONAR verwenden USR1 berschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig f r Cubase SX eingestellt USR 2 berschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig f r Cubase VST eingestellt USR 3 berschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig f r Logic eingestellt USR 4 berschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig auf Pro Tools LE und Digital Performer 3 eingestellt USR 5 berschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig f r Reason eingestellt USR 6 Uberschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig so eingestellt dass die Kompatibilit t mit MCR 8 Modus4 A 1 8 gew hrleistet ist USR 7 Uberschreibbar Dies ist werkseitig so eingestellt dass die Kompatibilit t mit MCR 8 Modus4 B 9 16 gew hrleistet ist 98 SONAR Memory Set Verwenden Sie PRESET Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY des UR 80 gedr ckt und dr cken Sie die Track Status Schaltflache PRESET Software Sie ben tigen SONAR 2 0 oder sp ter sowie das UR 80 Control Surface Plugin Das UR 80 Control Surface Plugin befindet sich im Ordner SONAR Plugin auf der beiliegenden CD ROM Doppelklicken
470. t button you can control 32 tracks Track Group select button TRACK GROUP This button switches the track group you are controlling TRACK GROUP button status Tracks controlled 1 8 Tracks 1 8 9 16 Tracks 9 16 17 24 Tracks 17 24 25 32 Tracks 25 32 34 Controlling your software Master Control section Cursor buttons These buttons perform the following functions Button Function a Move up SY Move down 4 Move left Move right SHIFT 4h Shrink display vertically SHIFT YY Expand display vertically Shrink display horizontally SHIFT lt q a Expand display horizontally 7 SHIFT gt t Function buttons C Button Function MIXER Open the Console window NEXT Move to the next window INST Open the Synth Rack window CLOSE Close the window PREV Move to the previous marker k SET Insert a marker i NEXT Move to the next marker H LIST Open the Marker window UNDO Revert the most recent edit operation to its prior state REDO Re execute the most recent edit operation SAVE AS Perform the Save As operation SAVE Save Button names in square brackets indicate that you press the button while holding down the SHIFT button TIME dial Turning the dial will move the cursor k Transport buttons s These perform the follow
471. t of Hyper Canvas or your MIDI sound module in Synth Edit mode ss 373 Operating system becomes unstable ui 373 Can t hear sound from the computer ss 373 Can t record play MIDI i 374 Sound from devices connected to the input jack is not heard in the A ciale erteilte 374 Volume from a device connected to the input jacks is too Jon 374 The sound of a device connected to the input jack is distorted 374 Noise is heard during audio playback nee 375 Sound is interrupted during audio playback 376 Digitally recorded sound is distorted is at the wrong pitch or contains noise iu ads EE 378 Playback or recording halts midway through and then becomes impossible AN ER ONE RETTEN O RUS ia 378 Recording produces a silent blank file 378 A loud buzz is present in the guitar signal 378 MIDI implementation 379 Specifications lilla 386 UR 80 USB Recording Systems asie 386 gt e A E 387 15 Main Features of the UR 80 The UR 80 combines two major types of functionality a Controller that uses MIDI messages to control your sequencer software or synthesizer and a USB Audio Interface that lets you record and play back audio on your computer Itis the ideal partner for your DAW Digital Audio Workstation software and will let you perform music production operations such as recording playback and mixing faster and more efficiently Fully assig
472. t port EDIROL UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 v 3 Click OK to close the dialog box Macintosh users Before you continue make OMS or FreeMIDI settings as appropriate for your MIDI system For details on making these settings refer to Readme E HTM located in the driver folder of the included CD ROM From the Options menu choose MIDI Devices In the MIDI Devices dialog box that appears make the following settings Mac OS 9 E M Devices E _ Select MIDI System OMS 14 MIDI System Make the appropriate selection for your system input Port UR 60 2777 7 Input port UR 80 2 ouput Port EST EJ Ouiput porte Car OMS Studio Setup Mac OS X MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 EZ Input port UR 80 2 Output port UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 mw Cancel OK Y 3 Click OK to close the dialog box 74 UR 80 Editor window E Main window EDIROL UR 80 Editor Untitled mid A Gees ECH H H E q C e D H E D u 1 TITLE Here you can input a name for the memory set you created NOTE You must input single byte English characters Double byte Japanese character input is not supported The name you input here will also be reflected in the HTML file that is output when you Export K assign list from the File menu q 2 H ACTIVITY check box The UR 80 s H ACTIVITY will
473. t vorzunehmen Sie k nnen die Online Hilfe im Hilfemen des UR 80 Editors anzeigen Auf den folgenden Seiten erhalten Sie eine grundlegende Erkl rung der M glichkeiten die das UR 80 bietet N here Informationen hierzu erhalten Sie in der Online Hilfe des UR 80 Editor Starten des UR 80 Editor Bevor Sie den UR 80 Editor starten verwenden Sie ein USB Kabel um das UR 80 mit Ihrem Computer zu verbinden und schalten den Netzstrom ein Windows Anwender W hlen Sie im Men Start den Men punkt Programme unter Windows XP Alle Programme und w hlen Sie in dem anschlie end angezeigten Men UR 80 Editor gt UR 80 Editor lt C i Macintosh Anwender g Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol UR 80 Editor das sich in dem Ordner befindet in dem die u Software installiert wurde d c 6 D D H u 139 Einstellungen fur den MIDI Anschluss Um Memory Sets zwischen dem UR 80 und dem UR 80 Editor zu bertragen oder um System einstellungen vorzunehmen m ssen Sie den MIDI Anschluss angeben den der UR 80 Editor verwenden soll Es folgt eine Beschreibung der Einstellungen die Sie vornehmen m ssen wenn Sie das UR 80 mit Ihrem Computer via USB verbunden haben Wenn Sie die MIDI Anschl sse verwenden um Verbindungen herzustellen geben Sie die Eingabe Ausgabeanschl sse des angeschlossenen MIDI Ger ts an Windows Anwender 1 W hlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt MIDI Devices 2 Neh
474. tal audio playback device Connect to either the OPTICAL or COAXIAL IN as appropriate for your device m m a Set REC SOURCE to DIGITAL lit OConnections Use the appropriate type of cable to make connections to the digital input jack OPTICAL COAXIAL Sampling frequency select switch Set this to the same sampling frequency as selected in your recording software REC SOURCE button Set this to DIGITAL lit Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using The UR 80 does not support professional digital audio formats Built in sample rate converter The sampling frequency of the signal being input from the digital input jack can be converted in real time by the UR 80 lt Examples gt 48 kHz gt 44 1 kHz 32 kHz gt 48 kHz The digital signal will be converted into the frequency specified by the sampling frequency select switch before it is recorded 62 Recording audio Recording the output of the UR 80 on a digital device SAMPLE RATE raras Set the sampling 96 REC CR 441 Match the sampling frequencies of your playback software and your digital audio recording device 0 m DET DoD op CD MD DAT player etc Connect to either the OPTICAL or COAXIAL OUT as appropriate for your device lt H H q C Connections D Use the appropriate
475. tal of 32 MIDI messages to the t Track Status buttons and 32 MIDI messages to the LEDs k Typically you will use these buttons to switch the track status e g mute solo on your seguencer software 4 Select button SELECT a This button switches the MIDI messages that are assigned to the Track Status buttons and their LEDs By pressing the Select button you can cycle through these choices off gt green red gt orange e H E H u E H lt e H u 19 Names of Things and What They Do ORANGE AUTO 2 18 5 21 7 23 8 24 5 WE vcnencscndsnnncsnanatonnsaveasnentanenaensssnanasceiadannthnatinentsennsansicenpastnnasarhaneinisnasinenasan You can assign MIDI messages to each of these eight faders Typically you will use the track faders to control the track volume on your seguencer software 6 Master fader MASTER cc rca You can assign a MIDI message to this fader The master fader controls the master volume on your seguencer software The final volume of the UR 80 itself is adjusted by its output volume knob 7 Track Group select button TRACK GROUP TRACK GROUP You can assign four MIDI messages to the Track Group select button Each time you press the button one of the four messages will be transmitted The Track Group select button switches the group of tracks on your sequencer software whose parameters will be controlled by
476. tch you must then close all applications and turn the power of the UR 80 off then on again Tf you are using the 96 kHz sample rate you cannot record and play back simultaneously You must select either recording 96 REC or playback 96 PLAY 21 USB connector Use a USB cable to connect this to your computer 24 22 23 24 25 x Names of Things and What They Do Digital output jacks Use these jacks to output digital audio to a digital audio device such as a CD MD DAT Digital input jacks Use these jacks to input digital audio from a digital audio device such as a CD MD DAT or from a MIDI sound module that has a digital output jack If you have connected a digital device to the optical OPTICAL connector the optical connector will take priority the signals from the coaxial jacks will not be input You must use the appropriate type of cable for the digital output jack or digital input jack you are using COAXIAL Coaxial cable OPTICAL Optical cable lt The UR 80 s digital input output format complies with the S P DIF standard we Input jacks 1 2 INPUT 1 L 2 R k These are analog audio input jacks You can connect either XLR type or phone type plugs Balanced and unbalanced connections are supported for either type 48 V phantom power can be supplied to XLR type connections allowing you to use phantom powered condenser mics In this case turn the phantom power switch ON The XLR type a
477. te Down CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR LEFT Navigate Left CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH CURSOR RIGHT Navigate Right CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 1 MIXER Mixer CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 2 INST VST Instruments CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 3 PREV To Left Locator CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 4 NEXT To Right Locator CC 13 0D 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 5 UNDO Copy CC 14 0E 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS Paste CC 15 0F 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT RTZ Return To Zero CC 9 09 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REW Rewind CC 19 13 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT FWD Forward CC 20 14 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT STOP Stop CC 21 15 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT PLAY Start CC 22 16 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH TRANSPORT REC Record CC 23 17 0 00 127 7F 6 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR UP Zoom Out Vertical CC 26 1A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR DOWN Zoom In Vertical CC 27 1B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR LEFT Zoom Out CC 28 1C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT CURSOR RIGHT Zoom In CC 29 1D 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER VST Send Effect CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST VST Inputs CC 11 0B 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV Set Left Locator CC 12 0C 0 00 127 7F 5 2 UNLATCH SHI
478. te manera No puede utilizar los botones de rebobinado o avanzado con MIDI Clock Sync inhabilitado Controlador de la unidad UR 80 Controlador de Opciones de reproducci n de Reason la unidad UR 80 SS Stop Detener SHIFT SHIFT re Play Reproducir E Configuraci n de MIDI Remote Mapping Los mensajes de control MIDI de fines generales se asignar n a los botones de funci n de la unidad UR 80 y el bot n TRACK GROUP Puede asignar estos controladores a los par metros de Reason que quiera En el men Options seleccione Edit MIDI Remote Mapping para habilitarlo Al seleccionar un m dulo de Reason se mostrar una flecha verde para los controladores asignables Seleccione un controlador Aparecer el cuadro de di logo MIDI Remote seleccione Learn from MIDI Input Presione el bot n TRACK GROUP o el bot n de funci n que desee asignar al controlador seleccionado 5 Haga clic en OK en el cuadro de di logo MIDI Remote Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 7 Cuando haya acabado la configuraci n seleccione Edit MIDI Remote Mapping en el men Options para inhabilitarlo 8 En el men Options aseg rese de que Enable MIDI Remote Mapping est seleccionado Si no est seleccionado seleccione la opci n de men pertinente para habilitarla 316 Control del software E Funciones asignadas a los controladores Fije
479. tem Setting Settings Configuraci n del sistema Default Tempo 112 G UR 80 Editor cargar la configuraci n del sistema desde Output Port la unidad UR 80 MIDI Clock O 02 0142 Si la carga no finaliza correctamente compruebe las HQ GM2 Message 61 02 0142 conexiones y vu lvalo a intentar desde el paso 1 V LINK Message 61 02 01 2 Cancel Apply A 2 Aparecer el cuadro de di logo UR 80 System Settings Configuraci n del sistema de la unidad UR 80 Especifica el tempo predeterminado para la transmisi n de mensajes del Reloj de temporizaci n MIDI Al encender la unidad el tempo del reloj de temporizaci n incial ser el especificado aqu Default Tempo Tempo predeterminado MIDI Clock Reloj MIDI Especifique el puerto de salida para los mensajes del Reloj de temporizaci n MIDI HQ GM2 messages Especifica el puerto de salida para los mensajes en modo Editar sintetizador Mensajes HQ GM2 V LINK messages Especifica el puerto de salida para los mensajes en modo V LINK Mensajes V LINK 3 Para aplicar la configuraci n haga clic en Apply Aplicar 346 Appendices System related settings Restoring the factory settings Factory Reset 1 While holding down the STOP button and MEMORY button turn on the power The REC button LED will blink 2 Press the REC button to initialize the settings Ifyou perform any operation other than pressing the REC but
480. tes Activ allum D sactiv teint REC RED Active d sactive l enregistrement des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint AUTO ORANGE Active d sactive l enregistrement automatique des pistes Activ allum D sactiv teint Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Ces boutons r glent le Pan le niveau Send 1 et le niveau Send 2 des pistes Utilisez le bouton d affectation pour s lectionner Pan niveau Send 1 ou niveau Send 2 Si vous utilisez ces boutons avec le bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes vous pouvez r gler 32 pistes Bouton de s lection du groupe de pistes TRACK GROUP Ce bouton commute le groupe de pistes que vous r glez Etat du bouton TRACK GROUP Pistes r gl es 1 8 Pistes 1 8 9 16 Pistes 9 16 17 24 Pistes 17 24 25 32 Pistes 25 32 166 Contr le de votre logiciel Section Master Control Les noms de bouton mis entre crochets indiquent que vous pressez le bouton tout en maintenant appuy le bouton SHIFT 167 Boutons curseurs Ces boutons ex cutent les fonctions suivantes Bouton Fonction a a D place vers le haut G v D place vers le bas 7 q D place vers la gauche u D Deplace vers la droite SHIFT 4 R duit l affichage verticalement I SHIFT
481. tet READ RED Schaltet die Wiedergabeautomatik fiir den Kanal ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet WRITE ORANGE Schaltet die Aufnahmeautomatik fiir den Kanal ein aus Ein beleuchtet Aus unbeleuchtet Track Steuerungsschaltkn pfe TRACK HQ CONTROL Diese Schaltkn pfe steuern Panorama Send 1 und Send 2 fiir den Kanal Verwenden Sie die k G A u Italiana Schaltflache Assign um Panorama Send 1 oder Send 2 auszuw hlen Wenn Sie diese Schaltkn pfe gemeinsam mit der Bank Schaltflache verwenden k nnen Sie x 32 Kan le steuern Bank Schaltflache BANK Diese Schaltfl che schaltet die Bank der Kan le um die gesteuert werden Status der Gesteuerte Kan le Schaltfl che BANK CH1 8 Kan le 1 8 CH9 16 Kan le 9 16 CH17 24 Kan le 17 24 CH25 32 Kan le 25 32 Eenannl 103 Steuerung Ihrer Software Abschnitt Master Control EN Cursor Schaltfl chen Diese Schaltfl chen f hren die folgenden Funktionen aus Schaltfl che Funktion a Nach oben S y Nach unten WINDOW d Nach links MIXER INST Nach rechts EFFECTS INPUT MONITOR LEVEL gt LOCATOR COMMAND SHIFT 4 Anzeige vertikal verkleinern LEFT RIGHT COPY PASTE 7 7 SHIFT YY Anzeige vertikal erweitern m nm
482. tfl che REC SOURCE Stellen Sie diese Schaltfl che auf ANALOG ein unbeleuchtet OWeitere Hinweise Verbinden Sie mit den Eingangsbuchsen die Sie nicht verwenden keine Ger te 124 Aufnahme von Audio Aufnahme uber ein Mikrofon en INPUT 1 iv orl ssn ae Set the sampling EE INPUT ap ref pa frequency lt Turn ON if A you have 5 connected a T condenser mic u Adjust the input level Turn input monitor on and adjust the input volume appropriately Input monitor level gt SHIFT button TIME dial Adjust the 4 volume Anschl sse Der Sound aus dem Mikrofon das mit der Eingangsbuchse 1 verbunden ist wird auf dem linken Kanal aufgenommen und der Sound aus dem Mikrofon das mit der Eingangsbuchse 2 verbunden ist wird auf dem rechten Kanal aufgenommen Sampling Frequenz Auswahlschalter Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf die Sampling Frequenz ein die in Ihrer Aufnahmesoftware a ausgewahlt wurde H E c Eingangsimpedanz Auswahlschalter S Stellen Sie diesen Schalter auf Lo Z u Phantomstrom Schalter Wenn Sie ein Kondensatormikrofon verwenden schalten Sie den Phantomstrom Schalter ein Wenn Sie ein Ger t anschlie en das keinen Phantomstrom ben tigt m ssen Sie den Phantomstrom Schalter ee ausschalten Anderenfalls sind Fehlfunktionen zu erwarten lnpui Sensitivity Schaltknopf Verwenden Sie den Input Sensitivity Schaltknopf um den Einga
483. the preceding operation PASTE Paste the copied object into the specified location SAVE Save the current project to a file Button names in square brackets indicate that you press the button while holding down the SHIFT button Turning the dial will move the cursor Transport buttons These perform the following functions Function Move the cursor to the beginning of the song Rewind the cursor Fast forward the cursor Stop playback recording Start playback Ww E o 5 Start recording SHIFT 53 Switch auto punch in on off SHIFT B Switch auto punch out on off SHIFT Switch the metronome on off SHIFT gaj Switch cycle on off 42 Logic Memory set Use URS3 Hold down the UR 80 s MEMORY button and press the track status button USR3 Software Logic 5 version 5 5 or later is required Each time you start up Logic you must select the memory set for Logic on the UR 80 itself E Settings in Logic 1 Start up Logic 2 When Logic has started up select the memory set for Logic on the UR 80 Even if the memory set for Logic is already selected on the UR 80 itself you must select the Logic memory H we set each time you start up Logic C 3 If the Setup window appears click the Logic Control icon located in the right of the window Ifthe Setup window does not appear proceed to step 7 K
484. the track control knobs and track faders This means that you can use the eight knobs and faders to control the parameters of 32 tracks Operating the Track Group select button does not switch the messages assigned to the Track NOTE Control knobs Track Status button and Track Faders The Track Group select button transmits four different MIDI messages to your sequencer software to change the base track number on 8 y q 8 your software 20 Names of Things and What They Do E Master Control section The Master Control section is where you can execute commands and control the transport on your sequencer software Here you can also make settings for the UR 80 s audio interface The content that is controlled will depend on the software you are using 8 Cursor buttons Assignable w You can assign MIDI messages to these four buttons Since you can also assign messages for FD ROE UR 80 when the SHIFT button is being held down a 24BIT 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM total of eight MIDI messages can be assigned to a these four buttons Use the cursor buttons to switch the track that is de selected in your sequencer software or to move e xy the focus point CA i Assignabl MUNDO W 9 TIME dial i LJ You can assign one MIDI message to this dial C MARKER _COMMAND_ Use the TIME dial to move the song location PREV NEXT UNDO SAVEAS A z keng Lu luni within your segu
485. tial Message Ubertragen werden soll Nachdem Sie die Einstellungen vorgenommen haben klicken Sie auf OK E Aktivierung der Memory Set Initial Message 146 Wenn die Memory Set Initial Message aktiviert ist wird die MIDI Nachricht die Sie wie oben beschrieben angegeben haben tibertragen wenn Sie dieses Memory Set ausw hlen Um die Memory Set Initial Message zu aktivieren aktivieren Sie das Kontrollk stchen INIT MESSAGE im Hauptfenster Wenn Sie nicht m chten dass die Memory Set Initial Message bertragen wird wenn Sie das Memory Set auswiihlen deaktivieren Sie diesen Punkt Austausch von Daten mit dem UR 80 E bertragung an das UR 80 Nachfolgend wird erkl rt wie Sie das Memory Set das aktuell bearbeitet wird an das UR 80 lt bertragen k nnen k T 1 W hlen Sie im Men Communication den Men punkt Transmit d 2 Das Dialogfeld Transmit Memory Set wird angezeigt Legen Sie das Ziel f r das Schreiben des Memory Sets fest 3 Es wird ein Dialogfeld f r die Confirm angezeigt Klicken Sie auf Continue 4 Es wird ein Dialogfeld transmission progress Fortschrittsanzeige f r die bertragung angezeigt Wenn das Dialogfeld ausgeblendet wird wurde die Ubertragung abgeschlossen Wenn die bertragung abgeschlossen ist wechselt das UR 80 zu dem Memory Set den Sie bertragen haben E Empfang vom UR 80 Es folgt eine Erkl rung wie Sie ein Memory Set vom UR 80 empfangen k nnen um es
486. tion a Cursor buttons JOG These buttons perform the following functions CURSOR q gt Button Function a When the Track Mixer is displayed these buttons select parameters or switch the send y slot or equalizer band according to the func FADER BANK lt q tion assigned to the track control knobs 4 BANK gt CHANNEL INPUT MONITOR LEVEL gt ASSIGNMENT WINDOW S 5 5 PAN SEND ARRANGE MIXER SHIFT 4 Vertically shrink display nm 3 3 ui SHIFT YY Vertically expand display ea IRAK UNDO SAVE Horizontally shrink display Poj a SHIFT q H Horizontally expand display MIDI CLK SHIFT gt SOURCE MONITOR SHIFT OF ANALOG ot STEREO ep DIGITAL 2 MONO SCRUB ui x 4 E C d a O O N u Function buttons Button Function FADER BANK BANK lt Scroll the operated channel in steps of 8 channels BANK gt CHANNEL lt Scroll the operated channel in steps of 1 channel CHANNEL gt k ASSIGNMENT Switch the parameters controlled by the Track Control knobs z PAN Adjust the Pan Angle of each channel Use the left right cursor buttons to switch the Pan Angle parameter to be adjusted SEND Adjust the Send Level of each channel Use the up down cursor buttons to switch
487. tion for testing audio devices get it to perform its tests 5 Play back audio data on your application If interruptions occur in the sound repeat this procedure and gradually increase the buffer size specified in step 2 until interruptions no longer occur x Depending on the application you are using there may be a buffer size or latency adjustment function among the audio settings of the application as well For details refer to the operation manual for your application Using ASIO Direct Monitor If you are using the UR 80 from an ASIO 2 0 compatible application the UR 80 s Input Monitor select switch can be controlled from your ASIO 2 0 compatible application 1 As described in Opening the driver settings dialog box open the Driver Settings dialog box 2 Make the following settings Check the Use ASIO Direct Monitor check box 3 Click OK to close the driver settings dialog box Depending on your application there may also be an ASIO Direct Monitor setting among the audio settings of your application For details refer to the operation manual for your application When using ASIO Direct Monitor monitoring may switch on off at unexpected times depending on the lt application settings and on the recording procedure If this occurs uncheck the check box in step 2 i to disable ASIO Direct Monitor z C Opening the driver settings dialog box If using Windows o 1 Open the Cont
488. to d uscita ingresso digitale dell UR 80 conforme allo standard S P DIF Narnitenh 24 Ingressi 1 2 INPUT 1 L 2 R Sono ingressi audio analogici Vi si possono collegare sia prese XLR che mini jack Entrambi supportano i collegamenti bilanciati e sbilanciati I connettori di tipo XLR possono ricevere alimentazione phantom 48V permettendo l uso di microfoni condenser che utilizzano questo tipo di alimentazione In questo caso attivare l interruttore dell alimentazione phantom Le prese XLR e mini jack hanno una sensibilit d ingresso diversa come sotto indicato XLR 50 10 dBu Mini jack 35 4 dBu Se il dispositivo collegato un apparecchio con un output di livello basso ad esempio un microfono si consiglia di utilizzare l ingresso XLR k c a u GND SLEEVE HOT TIP COLD RING L UR 80 dotato di prese d ingresso XLR TRS bilanciate cablate come indicato in figura Accertarsi che il dispositivo collegato rispetti questi cablaggi L alimentazione phantom dovrd essere disattivata a meno che non si utilizzi un microfono condenser che richiede questo tipo di alimentazione Si potrebbero verificare dei malfunzionamenti se un microfono dinamico o un dispositivo di riproduzione audio ricevono un alimentazione phantom Per informazioni sulle specifiche tecniche del microfono consultare il relativo manuale utente Il valore massimo dell alimentazione phantom dell UR
489. to indicato SAVE Salva il progetto corrente in un file Manopola TIME I pulsanti tra parentesi quadre dovranno essere utilizzati tenendo premuto il tasto SHIFT Ruotare la manopola per spostare il cursore Pulsanti per il trasporto Questi pulsanti hanno le seguenti funzioni 236 Pulsante Funzione Sposta il cursore all inizio del brano Sposta indietro il cursore Avanza rapidamente il cursore Interrompe la riproduzione registrazione Avvia la riproduzione Avvia la registrazione SHIFT Sposta il cursore alla fine del brano SHIFT A Attiva disattiva Tauto punch in SHIFT E Attiva disattiva l auto punch out SHIFT RS Attiva o disattiva il metronomo SHIFT 9 Attiva disattiva il cycle SHIFT Ka Attiva disattiva Start Record at Left Locator Cubase VST Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria USR2 Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY dell UR 80 e premere il pulsante USR2 della sezione Track Status H Software H Cubase VST 5 1 o versioni successive Sono necessari i file Cubase VST e EDIROL UR 80 for u VST xml EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml si trova nella cartella VST all interno della cartella Cubase Remote sul CD ROM in dotazione Prima di continuare copiare il file EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml sul computer SR lt E Impostazioni in Cubase VST utenti W
490. ton the UR 80 will return to normal operation without being initialized Initialized setting Initial value User memory sets V LINK initialization message MIDI Timing Clock on off switch OFF Default Tempo 120 MIDI Timing Clock output port 1 HQ GM2 output port 1 V LINK message output port 1 Driver mode Original driver mode REC SOURCE ANALOG INOPUT MONITOR OFF Switching the Driver Mode You can switch the mode type of driver used for USB connection With the factory settings Original Driver Mode is selected Normally you should use Original Driver Mode Original Driver Mode Turn on the power of the UR 80 while holding down the HQ GM2 button Standard Driver Mode Turn on the power of the UR 80 while holding down the V LINK button If the UR 80 s sampling frequency is set to 96 kHz REC or 96 kHz PLAY it cannot be started up in Standard Driver Mode Checking the Driver Mode If Original Driver Mode is selected the HO GM2 button LED will light for approximately two seconds when you turn on the power If Standard Driver Mode is selected the V LINK button LED will light for approximately two seconds when you turn on the power Mac OS 9 series users If you are using a Sound Manager compatible application use the UR 80 in Standard Driver Mode If you start up in Standard Driver Mode a message like the following will appear Cannot use the driver re
491. tosh 3 338 Antes de proseguir configure los valores de OMS o FreeMIDI adecuados para el sistema MIDI Para obtener informaci n detallada sobre estas configuraciones consulte el archivo Readme E HTM ubicado en la carpeta de controladores del CD ROM suministrado En el men Options seleccione MIDI Devices En el cuadro de di logo MIDI Devices que aparece efect e las siguientes configuraciones Mac OS 9 MIDI Devices _ Select MIDI System OMS T MIDI System Efect e la selecci n adecuada para el sistema Input Port UR 80 2 1 Input port UR 80 2 ouput Port EST EJ BE UR 501 OMS Studio Setup Mac OS X _ MIDI Devices Input Port EDIROL UR 80 2 EZ Input port UR 80 2 Output port UR 80 Output Port EDIROL UR 80 mw Cancel OK Haga clic en OK para cerrar el cuadro de di logo Ventana de UR 80 Editor E Ventana principal lt EDIROL UR 80 Editor Untitled mid d e T ITLE O acrivirv ACO mur message EDIT H 1 Quer E lt H H E g C k 0 H H u 1 TITLE Titulo Aqui puede especificar un nombre para el conjunto de memoria que ha creado NOTE Debe especificar caracteres de un solo byte como los ingleses por ejemplo No se da soporte a las entradas con caracteres de doble byte como los japoneses por ejemplo k El nombre que especifique aqu tambi n aparecer en el archivo HTML q
492. trada digital lt Ejemplos gt 48 KHz 44 1 KHz 32 KHz 48 KHz La se al digital se convertir a la frecuencia especificada en el interruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling antes de grabarse 326 Grabaci n de audio Grabaci n de la salida de la unidad UR 80 en un aparato digital SH le 4 GG Sua ee et the sampling H CD MD DAT player etc 7 Connect to either the OPTICAL or Match the sampling frequencies of your playback COAXIAL OUT as appropriate for software and your digital audio recording device u your device lt H H q C Conexiones K Utilice el tipo de cable pertinente para establecer las conexiones con el jack de salida digital i OPTICAL COAXIAL einterruptor de selecci n de frecuencia de sampling Seleccione la misma frecuencia de sampling para el software de reproducci n de datos de audio la unidad UR 80 y el aparato de grabaci n de audio digital por ejemplo MD o DAT Otros aspectos de inter s No conecte nada que no utilice en los jacks de entrada La unidad UR 80 no es compatible con los formatos de audio digitales profesionales La unidad UR 80 no puede emitir la se al de entrada directamente de los jacks de entrada a los jacks k de salida digital Los jacks de salida digital s lo emiten la se al de audio enviada desde el sistema H we 327 Grabaci n de audio Ajuste del tiem
493. trolar n mediante los controles de pista Utilice estos botones junto con el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas gt E o 333 Modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador E Lista de par metros Puerto de salida EDIROL UR 80 1 configuraci n por defecto Mensaje HEX Rango HEX Canal CH 1 9 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 6 14 CH 7 15 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 7 15 CH 8 16 PAN CC 10 0A 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 4 12 CH 5 13 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 5 13 CH 6 14 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 6 14 k CH 7 15 REVERB SEND CC 91 5B 0 00 127 7F 7 15 Control de pista CH 8 16 REVERB SEND CC91 B 0 00 127 7F 8 16 CH 1 9 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 1 9 CH 2 10 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 2 10 CH 3 11 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00 127 7F 3 11 CH 4 12 CHORUS SEND CC 93 5D 0 00
494. troller Ctrl 29 Controller Ctrl 26 Controller Ctrl 27 Cursor right Cursor up Cursor down Nudge Event Left Nudge Event Right Nudge Event Up Nudge Event Down Fare clic sul pulsante OK per chiudere la finestra di dialogo Utilizzo del software E Funzioni assegnate ai controlli Compilare il foglio template con i parametri Cubase VST Le spiegazioni fornite nelle pagine che seguono illustrano tali impostazioni Sezione Track Control H CUBASE VST E INPUT 122 ASSIGN u O PAN JE JE JE JE JE JE JE HO lt cUTOR RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK DECAY RELEASE TRACK STATUS IMI PART GREEN SOLO GRANGE SELECT lt 179 7 22 1107 23 11 4 12 25 13 6 14 27 15 8 16 MASTER lt rl fi C Fader delle tracce I fader controllano il volume del mixer dei canali VST Se utilizzati insieme al pulsante Bank questi controlli permettono di controllare 16 canali audio 8 canali strumentali VST e 8 canali di gruppo Master fader Controlla il guadagno master del mixer VST 7 Pulsanti dello stato delle tracce TRACK STATUS HQ PART Questi pulsanti permettono di cambiare lo stato di ogni canale Se utilizzati insieme al pulsante Bank questi pulsanti permettono di controllare 16 canali audio 8 canali strumentali VST e 8 canali di gruppo Modalit Stato del pulsante SELECT Funzione MUTE OFF Attiva disattiva
495. trollers Please affix the Cubase VST labels to the included template sheet The explanation below will follow these settings Track Control section CUBASE VST INPUT 122 Dur dut th KA CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY GREEN SOLO RED SELECT ORANGE 1 9 7 22 1107 23 11 4 12 25 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 MASTER x 4 E C Track faders The faders control the volume of the VST channel mixer By using the faders in conjunction with the bank button you can control 16 audio channels 8 VST instrument channels and 8 group channels Master fader Control the master gain of VST Mixer Track Status buttons TRACK STATUS HQ PART These buttons switch the status of each channel Erannaie By using the buttons in conjunction with the bank button you can control 16 audio channels 8 VST instrument channels and 8 group channels Mode SELECT button status Function MUTE OFF Switch channel mute on off On lit Off unlit SOLO GREEN Switch channel solo on off On lit Off unlit SELECT RED Select the channel Selected lit Not selected unlit ORANGE Not used Track Control knobs TRACK HQ CONTROL These knobs control channel Pan Send 1 level and Send 2 level Use the Assign button to select Italiana Pan Send 1 level or Send 2 level By using these knobs in conjunction with the bank button you can control 16 audio channels 8 VST
496. tros se controlan transmitiendo mensajes MIDI compatibles con GM2 tambi n puede utilizar este modo para controlar cualquier aparato MIDI que responda a los mensajes MIDI GM2 Si desea volver a controlar el software secuenciador presione el bot n HQ GM2 de nuevo para desactivarlo Para que el atenuador m ster pueda siempre controlar el volumen general transmitir el mensaje asignado por el Conjunto de memoria seleccionado p g 349 independientemente del modo seleccionado Incluso en modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador el atenuador MASTER no controlar el volumen m ster del sintetizador software En el modo Synth Edit Editar sintetizador los mensajes MIDI se transfieren por defecto desde el puerto EDIROL UR 80 1 Puede modificar el puerto de salida con UR 80 Editor Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el apartado UR 80 Editor p g 337 E Atenuadores de pistas Ajustan el volumen de cada canal Puede controlar los canales del 1 al 16 mediante el bot n de selecci n de grupo de pistas E Bot n de asignaci n ASSIGN Con este bot n se seleccionan los par metros que se controlar n mediante loscontroles giratorios de pistas Presione el bot n de asignaci n varias veces para desplazarse entre las opciones disponibles PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 gt HO Bot n Assign Par metro PAN Panor mica SEND1 Env o de reverb SEND2 Env o de chorus HQ Par metro de canal
497. ts e Before using this unit make sure to read the N instructions below and the Owner s Manual e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its QD AC adaptor e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page e Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct Y sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating SA KI duct on top of heat generating equipment or Lal are e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is Q level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design cont
498. ttings e la procedura per aprire il Pannello di controllo ASIO potrebbero differire a seconda dell applicazione utilizzata Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento al manuale utente del software Eenannl 263 MEMO Operazioni avanzate na Modalita Synth Edit Dopo aver premuto il pulsante HQ GM2 nella sezione Master Control la sezione Track Control funzionera in modalita Synth Edit Questa modalita permette di modificare i parametri del sintetizzatore software high quality Hyper Canvas fornito con l apparecchio Poich i parametri vengono modificati attraverso l invio di messaggi MIDI GM2 compatibili possibile utilizzare questa modalit per controllare qualsiasi dispositivo MIDI che risponda a messaggi MIDI GM2 Per tornare ad utilizzare il software sequencer premere di nuovo il pulsante HQ GM2 per disattivare la modalit Per garantire che il volume generale venga sempre controllato dal fader Master questo controllo trasmetter il messaggio assegnato dal patch di memoria patch di memoria pag 349 selezionato a prescindere dalla modalit attiva Anche se attiva la modalit Synth Edit il fader MASTER non permetter di regolare il volume generale del sintetizzatore software Nella modalit Synth Edit la porta a partire dalla quale verranno inviati i messaggi MIDI EDIROL UR 80 1 per impostazione predefinita Mediante l applicativo UR 80 Editor possibile cambiare l uscita Per maggiori infor
499. type of cable to make connections to the digital output jack OPTICAL COAXIAL i Sampling frequency select switch H Select the same sampling frequency for your audio data playback software the UR 80 and your digital audio recording device e g MD or DAT Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using The UR 80 does not support professional digital audio formats The UR 80 is not able to output the input signal from its input jacks directly to its digital output jacks The digital output jacks always output only the audio signal that is being sent from your computer K y H lt e H u 63 Adjusting the audio latency You can change the driver settings to adjust the latency of the audio To adjust the latency change the Buffer Size in the driver settings dialog box Latency is the time delay from when an application plays back audio data until the sound is actually heard from an audio device such as the UR 80 1 As described in Opening the driver settings dialog box p 65 open the Driver Settings dialog box 2 Adjust the driver buffer size The following setting will produce the shortest latency Windows Set Audio Buffer Size to the far left Min Macintosh Set Buffer Size to the far left Min 3 Click OK to close the driver settings dialog box 4 Restart the application that is using the UR 80 If you are using an application that has a func
500. ue vous pouvez aussi r gler des param tres comme Track Status et le niveau d envoi des effets Si vous commutez les groupes de pistes vous pouvez r gler les param tres d un maximum de 32 pistes Le contenu r ellement r gl d pend du logiciel utilis gle dep ES En mode Edition Synth ou en mode V LINK l UR 80 fonctionne d une mani re diff rente de celle NOTE expliqu e ici Pour plus de d tails reportez vous la section Mode Edition Synth p 200 ou a la section Mode V LINK p 203 TRACK BTICONTROL CUTOFF RESONANCE VIB RATE VIB DEPTH VIB DELAY ATTACK 1 Boutons de r glage de pistes TRACK HQ CONTROL Vous pouvez affecter des messages MIDI chacun de ces huit boutons Trois messages diff rents peuvent tre affect s chaque bouton un pour chaque tat du bouton d affectation PAN SEND 1 SEND 2 En d autres termes vous pouvez affecter un total de 24 messages diff rents aux boutons de r glage de pistes Habituellement ces boutons servent r gler le panoramique de pistes et l envoi d effets sur votre logiciel s quenceur 2 Bouton d affectation ASSIGN Ce bouton commute les messages affect s aux boutons de r glage de pistes Si vous appuyez sur le bouton d affectation vous pouvez s lectionner ces choix PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 150 TRACK STATUS EN PART 0000010 s gt cp usr 2 ED ED ED mon iza DATA men H u 3 Boutons Track Status TRACK
501. ue et des prises de sortie g n rale Il n est pas possible de r gler le volume sortant des les prises jack de sortie num rique Fonctionnement de base Connexions et r glages de base Cette section d crit les connexions de base et les routes de donn es de l UR 80 Avant d effectuer des connexions avec d autres appareils nous vous conseillons de baisser le volume de tous les l ments afin d viter des dysfonctionnements et d endommager les haut parleurs Comme indiqu sur le sch ma si vous branchez un casque ou des haut parleurs vous pouvez contr ler la lecture de votre logiciel ou le son des instruments appareils audio connect s UR 80 Connexions de base Utilisez simplement un c ble USB pour connecter l UR 80 votre ordinateur La connexion du c ble USB permet de transf rer la fois des donn es MIDI et des donn es audio Computer AC adaptor da USB cable OO 248 T 96kHz USB RECORDING SYSTEM EDIROL UR 80 This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the Monitor speakers E Flux MIDI Si UR 80 et votre ordinateur sont connect s via un c ble USB Le flux de donn es MIDI sera comme celui indiqu ci dessous PC port name UR 80 MIDI OUT device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI OUT MIDI OUT EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN device EDIROL UR 80 MIDI IN E
502. ue se emite al Export H assign list del men File S 2 Casilla de verificaci n H ACTIVITY La casilla de verificaci n H ACTIVITY de UR 80 se activar cuando el conjunto de memoria cuyo par metro H ACTIVITY se haya activado se cargue en UR 80 Act vela si utiliza software espec fico comoo Pro Tools LE Si activa la casilla H ACTIVITY se tranmitir un mensaje de 90 00 7F desde el puerto UR 80 1 a intervalos de unos 500 ms 3 rea de asignaci n NIT MESSAGE Aqu puede especificar el mensaje MIDI que se transmitir al seleccionar dicho conjunto de memoria Para obtener m s informaci n consulte el apartado Mensaje inicial de un conjunto de memoria p g 344 339 UR 80 Editor 340 4 Controladores Haga clic en el controlador al que desee asignar un mensaje MIDI Al hacer clic en un controlador se abrir la Ventana Message Assign Asignar mensaje p g 342 5 Bot n de asignaci n ASSIGN Con este bot n se conmutan los mensajes MIDI asignados a los controles giratorios de pistas en el siguiente orden PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Tambi n conmutar la visualizaci n de Assigned MIDI messages Mensajes MIDI asignados del men Options Opciones 6 Bot n de selecci n Con este bot n se conmuta la asignaci n de los botones de estado de pistas Track Status en el siguiente orden MUTE gt SOLO gt REC AUTO Tambi n conmutar la visualizaci n de As
503. uencer REC INP SOURCE MONITOR RE H ZE MEMO 3 H Tenere premuto il pulsante SHIFT e ruotare S contemporaneamente la manopola TIME per regolare il livello di controllo dell input Per maggiori informazioni sul controllo dell input fare riferimento a pag 220 10 Pulsanti funzione rien ere eine eee eine ci er Assignable A ciascuno di questi sei pulsanti possibile assegnare dei messaggi MIDI Premendo contemporaneamente il pulsante SHIFT si possono assegnare altri messaggi per un totale di dodici messaggi MIDI assegnati a questi pulsanti Generalmente questi pulsanti funzione vengono utilizzati per eseguire vari comandi nel software sequencer 11 Pulsanti per il trasporto annees A ciascuno di questi sei pulsanti possibile assegnare dei messaggi MIDI Premendo lt contemporaneamente il pulsante SHIFT si possono assegnare altri messaggi per un totale di dodici 3 message MIDI assegnati a questi pulsanti inoltre possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI per controllare i due LED che si trovano tra i pulsanti u bai El Ouesti pulsanti vengono generalmente utilizzati per controllare le funzioni di trasporto del me software seguencer 219 Parti e relative funzioni 12 Pulsanti System Setting Mode Select Utilizzare questi pulsanti per cambiare le impostazioni e le modalit dell UR 80 Non possibile assegnare messaggi MIDI ai pulsanti System Setting Mode Select P
504. ufnahme beginnen SHIFT ER Verschiebt den Cursor an das Ende des Songs SHIFT KO Schalter automatisches Einsteigen ein aus SHIFT AE Schalter automatisches Aussteigen ein aus SHIFT Schaltet das Metronom ein aus SHIFT Schaltet Schleife ein aus SHIFT me Schaltet Start Record at Left Locator ein aus 104 Steuerung Ihrer Software Cubase VST Memory Set Verwenden Sie USR2 Halten Sie die Schaltfl che MEMORY des UR 80 gedr ckt und dr cken Sie dieTrack Statusschaltfl che USR2 Software Cubase VST 5 1 oder sp ter ist erforderlich Sie ben tigen Cubase VST und EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml befindet sich im Ordner VST innerhalb des Ordners Cubase Remote auf der beiliegenden CD ROM Bevor Sie Ihre Arbeit fortsetzen kopieren Sie EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml auf Ihren Computer E Einstellungen in Cubase VST Windows Anwender 1 _ W hlen Sie im Men Options den Men punkt Remote Setup Setup 2 Nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen im Dialogfeld VST Remote vor und klicken Sie auf OK Remote Generic Remote Input EDIROL UR 80 2 Output EDIROL UR 80 3 Klicken Sie im daraufhin angezeigten Fenster Generic Remote auf EDIT um das Dialogfeld Generic Remote Setup zu ffnen 4 Klicken Sie auf Import 5 Wahlen Sie EDIROL UR 80 for VST xml das Sie zuvor kopiert haben und klicken Sie auf
505. uftreten Abh ngig von der von Ihnen verwendeten Anwendung ist es m glich dass die Audioeinstellungen der Anwendung ebenfalls ber eine Funktion f r die Regelung der Puffergr e oder Latenz besitzen N here Informationen erhalten Sie im Handbuch f r Ihre Anwendung 130 Verwendung des ASIO Direct Monitor Wenn Sie das UR 80 tiber eine mit ASIO 2 0 kompatible Anwendung nutzen kann der Input Monitor Auswahlschalterdes UR 80 tiber Ihre mit ASIO 2 0 kompatible Anwendung gesteuert werden lt 1 Wie in ffnen des Dialogfelds f r die Einstellungen des Treibers beschrieben ffnen Sie lt das Dialogfeld Driver Settings S u 2 Nehmen Sie die folgenden Einstellungen vor Aktivieren Sie das Kontrollk stchen Use ASIO Direct Monitor 3 Klicken Sie auf OK um das Dialogfeld f r die Treibereinstellungen zu schlie en Abh ngig von Ihrer Anwendung k nnen auch die Audioeinstellungen Ihrer Anwendung eine Option f r die Einstellung des ASIO Direct Monitors enthalten N here Informationen erhalten Sie im Handbuch fiir Ihre Anwendung Bei der Verwendung des ASIO Direct Monitor kann Monitoring unerwartet eingeschaltet ausgeschaltet werden abh ngig von den Anwendungseinstellungen und dem Aufnahmeverfahren Wenn dies geschieht deaktivieren Sie das Kontrollk stchen in Schritt 2 um ASIO Direct Monitor auszuschalten ffnen des Dialogfelds f r die Einstellungen des Treibers Bei Verwendung von Windows
506. ui parametro H ACTIVITY attivo Selezionare questa casella quando si utilizzano determinati programmi come ad esempio Pro Tools LE Se H ACTIVITY selezionata verr trasmesso un messaggio 90 00 7F dalla porta UR 80 1 circa ogni 500 ms 3 Sezione INIT MESSAGE lt Questa sezione permette di specificare i messaggi MIDI che verranno inviati quando viene E selezionato il patch di memoria in questione Per maggiori informazioni fare riferimento alla f sezione Messaggio iniziale per patch di memoria pag 278 u 273 UR 80 Editor 274 4 Controlli Fare clic sul controllo cui si desidera assegnare un messaggio MIDI Dopo aver fatto clic sul controllo verr visualizzata la finestra Finestra Message Assign pag 276 5 Pulsante Assign Questo pulsante permette di assegnare i messaggi MIDI alle manopole di controllo delle tracce secondo la sequenza PAN gt SEND 1 gt SEND 2 Anche i messaggi visualizzati in Assigned MIDI messages nel menu Options cambieranno in conseguenza 6 Pulsante Select Questo pulsante permette di assegnare i messaggi MIDI ai pulsanti Track Status secondo la sequenza MUTE SOLO REC AUTO Anche i messaggi visualizzati in Assigned MIDI messages nel menu Options cambieranno in conseguenza 7 Pulsante SHIFT Questo pulsante permette di assegnare dei messaggi MIDI a determinati controlli In questo caso nella finestra verranno visualizzati solo i cont
507. ulsante Funzione MEMORY Tenere premuto il pulsante MEMORY e premere contemporaneamente TRACK STATUS per selezionare uno degli otto patch di memoria memorizzati nell UR 80 Dopo aver premuto questo pulsante uno dei LED dei pulsanti TRACK STATUS si illuminer per indicare il patch correntemente selezionato HQ GM2 Premere il pulsante HO GM2 per attivare la modalit Synth Edit nella sezione Track Control e controllare i parametri del sintetizzatore software Premere di nuovo il pulsante per disattivare la modalita e tornare alle funzioni precedenti di controllo delle tracce Per maggiori informazioni sulla modalit Synth Edit fare riferimento alla sezione Modalita Synth Edit pag 266 V LINK Premere il pulsante V LINK per attivare la modalita V LINK nella sezione Track Control e controllare i dispositivi video che supportano la funzionalita V LINK Premere di nuovo il pulsante per disattivare la modalita e tornare alle funzioni precedenti di controllo delle tracce Per maggiori informazioni sulla modalita V LINK fare riferimento alla sezione Modalita V LINK pag 269 MIDI CLK SHIFT V LINK Attiva e disattiva la trasmissione MIDI Timing Clock F8 Premendo il pulsante SHIFT il LED indichera lo stato attivato disattivato del parametro F8 e non l attivazione o la disattivazione della modalita V LINK REC SOURCE Cambia il segnale in entrata inviato via la porta USB al computer per la reg
508. unzione MIDI Clock Sync SHIFT BB Awvia la riproduzione durante la funzione MIDI Clock Sync Utilizzo del software Applicazioni Roland MCR 8 compatibili possibile utilizzare l UR 80 con altri programmi che sono compatibili con Roland MCR 8 modo 4 Il canale MIDI dei messaggi trasmessi fissato su 16 Patch di memoria Utilizzare il patch di memoria USR6 o USR7 USR6 corrisponde a MCR 8 modo 4 A USR7 corrisponde al modo 4 B Configurazione del programma Selezionare MCR 8 come controllo esterno del programma Specificare UR 80 2 come porta MIDI utilizzata dal controllo esterno Per ulteriori informazioni sulla procedura di configurazione fare riferimento al manuale utente del programma Assegnazioni di controllo MCR 8 modo 4 A e UR 80 USR6 MCR 8 UR 80 CIT8 TRACK CONTROL 1 8 PAN 5118 TRACK STATUS 1 8 MUTE S218 TRACK STATUS 1 8 SOLO C218 TRACK FADER 18 CI MASTER SI MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 5 UNDO S2 MASTER SHIFT FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS C2 MASTER MASTER FADER VALUE TIME DIAL si SHIFT E DEC SHIFT FUNCTION 3 PREV SHIFT FUNCTION 4 PREV a VW q D FUNCTION 1 MIXER FUNCTION 2 INST FUNCTION 3 PREV FUNCTION 4 NEXT FUNCTION 5 UNDO FUNCTION 6 SAVE AS SHIFT FUNCTION 1 MIXER SHIFT FUNCTION 2 INST lana SHIFT Cu SHIFT Gj yraazlor 15 w
509. upplied to the XLR type input jacks 1 and 2 The phantom power must be turned off unless you have connected a condenser mic that requires phantom power Malfunctions can occur if you supply phantom power to a dynamic mic or audio playback device For details on the specifications of your mic refer to its owner s manual The UR 80 s phantom power supply provides a maximum of 10 mA at DC 48 V 27 Security slot Ri http www kensington com Side panel u 28 29 28 Master output jacks RCA phono type These are analog audio output jacks You can connect them to your external monitor speaker system 29 Headphone jack You can connect a set of headphones to this jack The headphone jack will output the same signal as the master output jacks and digital output jacks Sound will be output from the master output jacks even if headphones are connected x Use the output volume knob of the Audio Control section to adjust the volume of the headphone jack and master output jacks It is not possible to adjust the volume that is output from the digital output jacks 26 Basic operation Basic connections and settings This section explains basic connections and data routes for the UR 80 Before you make connections with other devices you must turn down the volume of all devices to prevent malfunctions or speaker damage If you connect your headphones or monitor speakers as shown in the diagram you will be ab
510. us the nibble expressed value is 00 04 0E OAH Example of an actual MIDI message lt Example1 gt CE 04 CnH is the Program Change status n is the MIDI channel number EH 14 and 04H 04 Thus this is a program change message on MIDI channel 15 for program number 05 Checksum calculation In order to verify that the message was received correctly Roland exclusive messages RQ1 DT1 add a checksum following the end of the data before the F7 The checksum value is determined by the address and data or size of the exclusive message that is transmitted OCalculating the checksum H has been added following hexadecimal values The checksum is a value that results in a lower 7 bits of 0 when the address size and checksum itself are added together Specifically the calculation will be as follows when the exclusive message you want to transmit has an address of aa bb ccH and data or size of dd ee ffH aa bb cc dd ee ff total total 128 quotient remainder 128 remainder checksum However as an exception the checksum for a remainder of 0 is not 80H but rather 00H 384 USB RECORDING SYSTEM Model UR 80 Function Default Changed Basic Channel Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number True Voice Note On Velocity Note Off After Touch Key s Channel s Pitch Bend O Control Change Program Change True Number MIDI implementation Date May 1
511. ut jacks 1 and 2 Sampling frequency select switch Set this to the same sampling frequency as selected in your recording software Input impedance select switch Set this to Lo Z iInput sensitivity knob Use the input sensitivity knob to adjust the input level To obtain the best audio quality adjust the input sensitivity knob until the level is as high as you can get it without causing the input peak indicator to light Input monitor switch Turn the input monitor switch on and adjust the input monitor level for the signal from your keyboard This will not change the recording level REC SOURCE button Set this to ANALOG unlit Other notes Don t connect anything to input jacks you are not using Be aware of looped connections If you connect the UR 80 to a device that passes through the input audio to its output the audio signal will loop between the UR 80 and the device causing oscillation This may produce an unexpectedly loud sound Be careful to avoid this wees v since it may cause malfunctions or may damage 298 output your speakers Stereo sets cassette deck record player Example of loop connection LINE OUT D D LINE IN 61 x D H E q C Italiana Erannaie Eenannl Digitally recording from a CD MD DAT SAMPLE RATE sr Set the sampling frequency src ei Match the sampling frequencies of your recording software and your digi
512. witch to turn the power on off The power is on when the switch is pressed inward 17 AC adaptor connector DC IN Connect the included AC adaptor here 18 Grounding terminal Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup you may experience a discomforting sensation or perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device microphones connected to it or the metal portions of other objects such as guitars This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Do not connect the grounding terminal to the following locations e Water pipe this can cause electric shock e Gas pipe this can cause explosion or fire Telephone ground or lightning rod hazardous during electrical storms 19 MIDI IN OUT connectors Connect these connectors to the MIDI connectors of other MIDI devices to transmit and receive MIDI messages 20 Sampling frequency select switch SAMPLE RATE This switch selects the sampling frequency at which the audio signal will be recorded and played back Tf you change the setting of this swi
513. with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that
514. yang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Bik 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN ROC TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Sh
515. you can use either type as appropriate for the eguipment you want to connect However please be aware that the input sensitivity of these jacks will differ The inner knob adjusts the INPUT 1 L input level and the outer ring knob adjusts the INPUT 2 R level Input levels XLR type 50 10 dBu Phone type 35 4 dBu If you are connecting a low output level device such as a mic we recommend that you use the XLR x D H E q C type input jack 14 Peak indicators PEAK These indicators show whether the sound being input to input jacks 1 and 2 INPUT 1 L INPUT 2 R is distorting Adjust the input sensitivity knob so that the peak indicators do not light The peak indicators will light red at a level 6 dB below clipping Erannaie VOLUME Gi 15 Output volume VOLUME knob This adjusts the volume that is output from the headphone jack and the master output jacks Italiana This does not affect the volume that is output from the digital output jacks Eenannl 23 Names of Things and What They Do Rear panel POWER DC IN SAMPLE RATE INPUT 2 R INPUT 1 L HR odu eco 96 PLAY 748 Mic Pre AMP 96 REC 28 29 PENO fi Ac a THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT 35 4dBu 3 ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED USE UNDESIRED OPERATION S ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN IGULATIONS Hi Z Lo Z ON OFF im e B RESPECTE TOUTES LES EXIGENCES DA 19 16 Power switch POWER Press this s
516. zar Record Grabar Loop ON Off Activar desactivar loop En el menu Options seleccione Edit MIDI Remote Mapping para inhabilitarlo O EEE HHHDHHD 7 En el menu Options asegurese de que Enable MIDI Remote Mapping est seleccionado Si no est seleccionado seleccione la opci n de men pertinente para habilitarla 8 Haga clic en el bot n CHANNEL 16 del m dulo MIDI IN DEVICE y seleccione el aparato Mixer que quiere controlar 315 c s H Control del software E Control del tempo de la canci n La unidad UR 80 permite utilizar el dial temporizador y los botones de cursor para controlar el tempo de la canci n Para controlar el tempo de la canci n de la unidad UR 80 deber habilitar MIDI Clock Sync en Reason Primero debe activar la transmisi n del reloj de temporizaci n de la unidad UR 80 Para activar o desactivar la transmisi n del reloj de temporizaci n presione SHIFT V LINK Habilitaci n de MIDI Clock Sync Puede habilitar MIDI Clock Sync de una de las siguientes maneras e En el men Options seleccione MIDI Clock Sync para a adir una marca de verificaci n al mismo e Active el bot n MIDI SYNC ENABLE de las opciones de reproducci n de Reason MIDI SYNC MIDI SYNC divi W erase Funcionamiento de las opciones de reproducci n de Reason Si MIDI Clock Sync est habilitado los botones de reproducci n y detenci n actuar n de la siguien
517. zionare Transmit 2 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Transmit memory set d Specificare la destinazione verso cui inviare il patch di memoria 3 Appare una finestra di dialogo di Confirm Fare clic su Continue a 4 Appare una finestra di dialogo indicante la progressione dell invio Alla fine dell operazione di invio la finestra di dialogo si chiude Alla fine dell invio il patch di memoria cos trasmesso diventer quello corrente sull UR 80 E E Ricezione di dati dall UR 80 Di seguito viene spiegato come ricevere un patch di memoria dall UR 80 per poterlo modificare 1 Nel menu Communication selezionare Receive 2 Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Receive memory set Specificare il patch di memoria da ricevere D 3 Appare una finestra di dialogo di Confirm Fare clic su Continue S 4 Appare una finestra di dialogo indicante la progressione della ricezione Alla fine dell operazione di ricezione la finestra di dialogo si chiude Alla fine della ricezione il patch di memoria ricevuto diventer quello corrente sull UR 80 H a D u 279 UR 80 Editor Salvare o aprire in formato SMF Un patch di memoria modificato nell UR 80 Editor pu essere salvato o aperto come file in formato SMF E Salvare un patch di memoria in formato SMF Di seguito viene spiegato come salvare il patch di memoria correntemente selezionato in formato SMF Anche il contenuto del campo Comment

UR-80 Editor

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents